Furuno Ecdis Manual User

March 27, 2018 | Author: Mas Seno | Category: Backup, Computer File, Battery (Electricity), Technology, Computing
Share
Report this link


Comments



Description

OPERATOR'S MANUALElectronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) MODEL FEA-2107 FEA-2107-BB FEA-2807 www.furuno.co.jp The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free. ・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111 Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200 All rights reserved. Printed in Japan B : JUL . 2005 G : AUG . 20, 2009 Pub. No. OME-41220-G (DAMI ) FEA-2107/BB/2807 *00014977416* *00014977416* * 0 0 0 1 4 9 7 7 4 1 6 * Important Notices General x The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury. x Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO. x If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement. x The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice. x The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings. x Save this manual for future reference. x Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the warranty. x All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders. How to discard this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal. How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used. In the European Union The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd In the USA The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and leadacid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws. In the other countries Ni-Cd Pb There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future. i Safety Instructions SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING CAUTION Warning, Caution Indicates a condition that can cause death or serious injury if not avoided. Indicates a condition that can cause minor or moderate injury if not avoided. Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action WARNING Do not open the equipment. This equipment uses high voltage that can cause electrical shock. Only qualified persons can work inside the equipment. Turn off power at switchboard if the something is dropped inside the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if the power remains on. Turn off power at switchboard if the equipment is emitting smoke or fire. Fire or electrical shock can result if the power remains on. Do not place liquid filled containers on the top of the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid spills into the equipment. CAUTION Do not dissassemble or modify the equipment. Fire, electrical shock or bodily injury can result. Do not operate the equipment with wet hands. Fire or electrical shock can result. Keep the equipment away from rain, water and water splash. Fire or electrical shock can result if water gets into the equipment. Use the correct fuse. Use of a wrong fuse can cause bodily injury or fire. The BACKPLANE board (PCI-SS-RSR40) in the processor unit has a lithium battery. The battery should only be replaced by a qualified technician. The battery may burst if it is the wrong type. WARNING LABEL A warning label is attached to the processor unit. Do not remove the label. If the label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement. WARNING To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside. Name: Warning Label (1) Type: 86-003-1011-0 Code No.: 100-236-230 ii Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................xv 1. Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Manual Contents................................................................................................................................... 1-1 System Configuration........................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.1 Single workstation .................................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2.2 Multiple workstation configuration ........................................................................................ 1-3 1.3 The Processor Unit ............................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.4 Turning the Power On/Off.................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.5 How to Find Version Number of ECDIS Software .............................................................................. 1-4 1.6 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 1.2 2. Navigation Tasks................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 2-1 Voyage Planning ................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2.1 Route planning ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Route calculation .................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.3 Chart planning......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.4 User chart planning ................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.3 Positioning ............................................................................................................................................ 2-3 2.3.1 Direct positioning sensors....................................................................................................... 2-3 2.3.2 Dead reckoning equipment ..................................................................................................... 2-3 2.3.3 Manual correction ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.4 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4.1 Display of electronic sea chart................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4.2 Alerts....................................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.3 Man overboard ........................................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4.4 Data logging............................................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4.5 Data distribution...................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1 2.2 3. ECDIS Display ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 3-1 Electronic Chart Area ........................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Electronic charts in ECDIS..................................................................................................... 3-2 3.3 User Interface ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.1 Color palettes for the user interface........................................................................................ 3-4 3.3.2 Sidebar on user interface......................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Activating dialog boxes on the display................................................................................. 3-10 3.4 Controlling Planning and Monitoring Modes on the ECDIS Display ............................................... 3-12 3.1 3.2 4. Control Units......................................................................................................................................... 4-1 How the ECDIS is Controlled .............................................................................................................. 4-1 Control Unit RCU-018 ......................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Keys in control unit RCU-018 ................................................................................................ 4-2 4.3 Control Unit RCU-015 ......................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.1 Configuring hot keys F1-F4.................................................................................................... 4-5 4.4 Mouse Operations on RCU-015, RCU-016, RCU-018........................................................................ 4-6 4.4.1 Parts of the mouse................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.2 How to enter alphanumeric data ............................................................................................. 4-7 4.4.3 Using the scrollwheel.............................................................................................................. 4-8 4.4.4 Calling menus and functions by the mouse buttons ............................................................. 4-10 4.1 4.2 5.1 5. 6. Standby Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1 Switching Standby Mode ON and OFF................................................................................................ 5-1 Set up Before Departure ...................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Update Chart Material .......................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Display and Approve Dates for S57 Charts and Manual Updates ....................................................... 6-1 6.3 Creating or Updating User Chart.......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.4 Creating or Updating Notes.................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.5 Setting Chart Alert Calculation ............................................................................................................ 6-2 6.6 Creating or Updating a Route............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.6.1 Checking your route against chart alerts ................................................................................ 6-2 iii a e of ontents 6.6.2 Recalculating timetable and ETA values ................................................................................6-3 Checking and Preparing Route to Monitor ...........................................................................................6-4 6.7.1 Choosing TO waypoint............................................................................................................6-5 6.7.2 Choosing final waypoint..........................................................................................................6-5 6.7.3 Confirming checked conditions of the route plan ...................................................................6-5 6.7.4 Using planned user chart .........................................................................................................6-6 6.7.5 Using planned Notes................................................................................................................6-6 Verifying Configuration of Navigation Sensors....................................................................................6-7 6.8.1 Verifying source of navigation sensors ...................................................................................6-7 Resetting Distance and Trip Counters...................................................................................................6-9 Verifying Datum....................................................................................................................................6-9 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 7. 7.1 7.2 Conditions Required to Replace Paper Charts .................................................................................7-1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................7-1 Detecting ENC Coverage in S57 Chart Display ...................................................................................7-4 8. Vector Chart Material ..........................................................................................................................8-1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................8-1 S57 Charts .............................................................................................................................................8-1 8.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................8-1 8.2.2 Chart legend of S57 chart ........................................................................................................8-3 8.2.3 Permanent warnings of S57 charts ..........................................................................................8-4 8.3 Loading S57 Charts...............................................................................................................................8-5 8.3.1 Flow chart for loading S57 charts into ECDIS........................................................................8-5 8.3.2 Loading S57 charts from a CD ROM, floppy disk or LAN ....................................................8-7 8.3.3 Loading S57 charts which are not fully compliant with the IMO standards........................8-17 8.4 S57 SENC Conversion Details............................................................................................................8-18 8.4.1 Choosing automatic SENC conversion and display until date..............................................8-19 8.4.2 Viewing progress of SENC conversion.................................................................................8-20 8.4.3 Using the Failed SENC conversion window .........................................................................8-21 8.4.4 Using SENC conversion history log......................................................................................8-22 8.4.5 Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion .................................................8-24 8.5 Features of the Chart Menu.................................................................................................................8-25 8.5.1 Overview of the chart menu ..................................................................................................8-25 8.5.2 Catalogue of S57 cells ...........................................................................................................8-27 8.5.3 Grouping S57 chart cells .......................................................................................................8-29 8.5.4 Viewing status and setting viewing dates of S57 chart cells and their updates ....................8-37 8.5.5 Removing an S57 chart cell from the system........................................................................8-38 8.6 S57 Chart Service from an RENC ......................................................................................................8-39 8.6.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................8-39 8.6.2 Permits ...................................................................................................................................8-39 8.6.3 Product list.............................................................................................................................8-40 8.6.4 Authentication .......................................................................................................................8-40 8.6.5 Available service types..........................................................................................................8-40 8.6.6 Subscription types..................................................................................................................8-40 8.7 Services Provided by an RENC ..........................................................................................................8-42 8.7.1 Viewing the coverage of an RENC service...........................................................................8-42 8.7.2 Knowing up-to-date status of a chart from an RENC ...........................................................8-43 8.7.3 Knowing up-to-date status of an RENC Product List ...........................................................8-45 8.7.4 Managing permits from an RENC.........................................................................................8-46 8.7.5 Managing public key from an RENC, JHA...........................................................................8-47 8.8 CD ROM Service From an RENC ......................................................................................................8-49 8.8.1 Getting started with S57 charts using an RENC ...................................................................8-49 8.8.2 Keeping S57 charts up to date using an RENC.....................................................................8-50 8.8.3 Enlarging chart coverage using an RENC.............................................................................8-51 8.8.4 Base CD ROM from an RENC .............................................................................................8-52 8.8.5 Update CD ROM from an RENC..........................................................................................8-56 8.8.6 Viewing coverage of a Base or Update CD ROM from an RENC .......................................8-60 8.8.7 Loading an RENC-generated permit CD ROM or floppy disk.............................................8-61 8.9 RENC Security System .......................................................................................................................8-63 8.9.1 Standard messages in S57 chart load.....................................................................................8-63 8.9.2 Additional messages in S57 chart load..................................................................................8-63 8.9.3 Standard messages in S57 SENC conversion........................................................................8-65 8.9.4 Additional messages in S57 SENC conversion.....................................................................8-66 8.9.5 Changing service provider.....................................................................................................8-66 8.1 8.2 i a e of 8.10 ontents 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 8.15 Vector Chart Display .......................................................................................................................... 8-67 8.10.1 Choosing vector chart material to use .................................................................................. 8-67 8.10.2 Choosing charts for viewing ................................................................................................. 8-67 8.10.3 Choosing a chart by its name on the display ........................................................................ 8-68 8.10.4 Controlling visible chart features (Chart Display)................................................................ 8-69 8.10.5 Display base .......................................................................................................................... 8-72 8.10.6 Controlling visible navigation features (Symbol display) .................................................... 8-73 8.10.7 Storing and recalling chart display setting for visible chart and navigational features....... 8-78 8.10.8 Control of predefined IMO Chart Display Settings.............................................................. 8-79 Sailing Directions, Tidal Tables, etc., Features of Vector Charts (S57) ............................................. 8-80 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart ...................................................... 8-81 8.12.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................... 8-81 8.12.2 Approving and highlighting vector chart updates ................................................................ 8-81 8.12.3 Setting “display until” date ................................................................................................... 8-82 8.12.4 Setting “approve until” date.................................................................................................. 8-82 8.12.5 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard........................................................ 8-83 Symbology Used in Vector Charts ..................................................................................................... 8-88 8.13.1 How to change presentation library used for vector chart features ...................................... 8-89 Requesting Information About Vector Chart Objects......................................................................... 8-90 8.14.1 Setting visible vector chart features...................................................................................... 8-90 8.14.2 Choosing desired object from the list of found objects ........................................................ 8-90 8.14.3 Viewing properties of a vector chart object.......................................................................... 8-91 8.14.4 About vector chart coding..................................................................................................... 8-92 Other Features of Vector Charts ......................................................................................................... 8-99 8.15.1 Cell status.............................................................................................................................. 8-99 8.15.2 S57 cell details .................................................................................................................... 8-100 8.15.3 Using cell status window to initiate SENC conversion ...................................................... 8-101 9. Raster Chart Material.......................................................................................................................... 9-1 ARCS Charts ........................................................................................................................................ 9-1 9.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart ................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.2 T&P notices, details and warnings of ARCS.......................................................................... 9-2 9.2 Datum and ARCS Charts...................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Difference between ARCS chart local datum and positions in WGS-84 datum .................... 9-5 9.2.2 Permanent messages of ARCS ............................................................................................. 9-10 9.3 Chart Menu ..........................................................................................................................................9-11 9.4 ARCS Subscriptions........................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.1 ARCS Navigator ................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.2 ARCS Skipper....................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.3 ARCS license information .................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.4 Getting started with ARCS charts......................................................................................... 9-13 9.4.5 Loading chart permits for ARCS Navigator license............................................................. 9-14 9.4.6 Loading chart permits for ARCS Skipper license ................................................................ 9-15 9.4.7 Removing chart permits........................................................................................................ 9-16 9.4.8 Loading a new ARCS chart into the system......................................................................... 9-17 9.4.9 Updating ARCS charts.......................................................................................................... 9-20 9.4.10 Viewing chart load and update history of ARCS ................................................................. 9-23 9.4.11 Viewing update status of your ARCS charts ........................................................................ 9-24 9.4.12 ARCS catalogue.................................................................................................................... 9-25 9.4.13 Grouping ARCS charts ......................................................................................................... 9-27 9.4.14 Removing ARCS charts from the system............................................................................. 9-30 9.5 ARCS Chart Display .......................................................................................................................... 9-32 9.5.1 Displaying ARCS chart material .......................................................................................... 9-32 9.5.2 Choosing ARCS chart datum................................................................................................ 9-32 9.5.3 Viewing different ARCS charts............................................................................................ 9-33 9.5.4 Choosing an ARCS chart by its number on display ............................................................. 9-35 9.5.5 Controlling ARCS chart features.......................................................................................... 9-37 9.5.6 Display base .......................................................................................................................... 9-39 9.5.7 Controlling navigation features ............................................................................................ 9-42 9.5.8 Storing and recalling chart display settings for visible chart and navigational features ...... 9-47 9.1 10.1 10.2 10.3 10. Manual Updates.................................................................................................................................. 10-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 10-1 Symbols to Use with Manual Updates ............................................................................................... 10-2 Displaying Manual Updates ............................................................................................................... 10-2 a e of ontents 10.3.1 Controlling visibility of orange symbols from manual updates............................................10-2 10.3.2 Controlling visibility of true symbols from manual updates.................................................10-3 Controlling Chart Viewing Dates of Manual Updates ........................................................................10-3 10.4.1 Setting current date for viewing ............................................................................................10-3 Using Manual Update Editor w/Orange Symbols...............................................................................10-4 10.5.1 Manual update planning ........................................................................................................10-4 10.5.2 Inserting new orange symbols ...............................................................................................10-5 10.5.3 Deleting orange symbols .......................................................................................................10-8 10.5.4 Editing position of orange symbols.......................................................................................10-9 Using Manual Update Editor with True Symbols.............................................................................10-12 10.6.1 Manual update planning ......................................................................................................10-12 10.6.2 Deleting chart objects ..........................................................................................................10-13 10.6.3 Modifying chart objects.......................................................................................................10-14 10.6.4 Inserting new chart objects ..................................................................................................10-15 10.6.5 Editing properties of manually updated chart objects .........................................................10-21 Checking Creation and Usage History of Manual Updates ..............................................................10-24 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 11. Chart Alerts ......................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 11-1 11.2 Chart Alert ........................................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.2.1 Choosing safety contour ........................................................................................................11-2 11.2.2 Choosing objects used in chart alerts ....................................................................................11-3 11.2.3 Highlighting chart alert areas ................................................................................................11-5 11.3 Inserting User Chart Symbols, Lines and Areas in Chart Alert .......................................................... 11-6 11.4 Activating Own Ship Check................................................................................................................ 11-8 11.5 Route Planning .................................................................................................................................. 11-10 11.5.1 Finding chart alerts leg by leg .............................................................................................11-11 11.5.2 Finding chart alerts by category ..........................................................................................11-12 11.6 Route Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 11-13 11.7 Chart Alert Using ARCS Charts........................................................................................................ 11-14 Navigation Tools..................................................................................................................................12-1 Display Mode and Chart Orientation ..................................................................................................12-1 12.1.1 Choosing desired display mode and chart orientation...........................................................12-1 12.2 Navigation Marks................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2.1 Shifting the EBL....................................................................................................................12-2 12.2.2 Shifting the VRM ..................................................................................................................12-3 12.2.3 Shifting the reference point ...................................................................................................12-3 12.2.4 Adjusting the parallel index lines ..........................................................................................12-5 12.1 12. 13. Route Planning....................................................................................................................................13-1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................13-1 Main Menu for Route Planning...........................................................................................................13-2 Choosing Datum..................................................................................................................................13-4 Creating a New Route .........................................................................................................................13-5 13.4.1 Processing waypoints ............................................................................................................13-6 13.4.2 Using the Alerts page ............................................................................................................13-7 13.4.3 Using the check page.............................................................................................................13-8 13.4.4 Using the parameters page.....................................................................................................13-9 13.4.5 Using the prepare page ........................................................................................................13-10 13.5 Modifying an Existing Route ............................................................................................................ 13-11 13.5.1 Parameters ...........................................................................................................................13-11 13.5.2 Changing waypoint position................................................................................................13-11 13.5.3 Changing other waypoint data.............................................................................................13-13 13.5.4 Adding a new waypoint at the end of a route......................................................................13-14 13.5.5 Inserting a waypoint ............................................................................................................13-14 13.5.6 Deleting a waypoint.............................................................................................................13-15 13.5.7 Importing waypoints from other routes...............................................................................13-15 13.5.8 Importing waypoints from external device (GP-80 or GP-90) ...........................................13-16 13.5.9 Reversing sailing order of a route .......................................................................................13-17 13.5.10 Geometry check of route .....................................................................................................13-17 13.6 Route Optimization ...........................................................................................................................13-17 13.6.1 Available route optimization strategies ...............................................................................13-17 13.6.2 Optimizing a route ...............................................................................................................13-18 13.6.3 Planning a speed profile ......................................................................................................13-18 13.7 WPT Report.......................................................................................................................................13-19 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 i a e of 13.8 13.9 ontents Full WPT Report............................................................................................................................... 13-21 Passage Plan Report ......................................................................................................................... 13-22 14. Route Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 14-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 14-1 Choosing Route to Monitor ................................................................................................................ 14-1 Choosing TO Waypoint ...................................................................................................................... 14-2 Choosing Final Waypoint ................................................................................................................... 14-3 Viewing Waypoint Information .......................................................................................................... 14-3 Displaying a Route on the Electronic Chart Screen .......................................................................... 14-4 Sending A Route on the Radar Screen................................................................................................ 14-4 Route Assistant ................................................................................................................................... 14-5 Monitoring a Route............................................................................................................................. 14-7 14.9.1 Information about steering mode on permanent route monitor windows ............................ 14-8 14.10 ETA (Estimated Time Of Arrival) ...................................................................................................... 14-9 14.11 Route Monitoring Alerts................................................................................................................... 14-12 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 15. User Chart Control............................................................................................................................. 15-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.1.1 Objects of user charts............................................................................................................ 15-1 15.1.2 Modes of user charts ............................................................................................................. 15-2 15.2 What is a User Chart Point and How is it Used?................................................................................ 15-4 15.3 Choosing Datum ................................................................................................................................. 15-6 15.4 Choosing User Chart to use in Monitoring Mode .............................................................................. 15-6 15.5 Sending a User Chart on the Radar Screen ........................................................................................ 15-6 15.6 Choosing User Chart to use in Planning Mode .................................................................................. 15-7 15.7 Creating a User Chart ......................................................................................................................... 15-8 15.7.1 Point page.............................................................................................................................. 15-9 15.7.2 Symbol page........................................................................................................................ 15-10 15.7.3 Line page............................................................................................................................. 15-11 15.7.4 Tidal page............................................................................................................................ 15-12 15.7.5 Area page ............................................................................................................................ 15-13 15.7.6 Adding a new point, symbol, line or tidal to a user chart................................................... 15-15 15.7.7 Changing other data of point, symbol, line or tidal ............................................................ 15-16 15.7.8 Deleting a point, symbol, line or tidal ................................................................................ 15-16 15.7.9 Importing points, symbols, lines or tidals from other user chart........................................ 15-17 15.8 Joining Two or More User Charts .................................................................................................... 15-17 15.9 Displaying User Charts on ECDIS display ...................................................................................... 15-18 15.10 Backing up User Charts to a Floppy Disk........................................................................................ 15-20 15.11 Restoring User Charts from a Floppy Disk ...................................................................................... 15-20 15.12 Reports.............................................................................................................................................. 15-20 15.1 16. Notes .................................................................................................................................................... 16-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 16-1 16.1.1 Notes modes.......................................................................................................................... 16-2 16.2 Using Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 16-3 16.3 Selecting Notes to use in Monitoring Mode....................................................................................... 16-4 16.4 Sending Notes on the Radar Screen ................................................................................................... 16-4 16.4.1 Monitor Notes dialog box description .................................................................................. 16-5 16.5 Selecting Notes to use in Planning Mode........................................................................................... 16-6 16.5.1 Plan Notes dialog box description ........................................................................................ 16-7 16.6 Creating New Notes ........................................................................................................................... 16-8 16.6.1 Adding new Notes record ..................................................................................................... 16-8 16.6.2 Choosing Notes record to modify......................................................................................... 16-9 16.6.3 Changing Notes record position ........................................................................................... 16-9 16.6.4 Changing other data of Notes record .................................................................................. 16-10 16.1 ii a e of ontents 16.6.5 Deleting a Notes record .......................................................................................................16-10 16.6.6 Importing Notes from other routes ......................................................................................16-10 17. Backup Operations .............................................................................................................................17-1 17.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................17-1 17.2 Choosing Appropriate File Category ..................................................................................................17-2 17.3 Copying a File .....................................................................................................................................17-2 17.4 Renaming a File ..................................................................................................................................17-2 17.5 Backing up a File to a Floppy Disk.....................................................................................................17-3 17.6 Restoring a File from a Floppy Disk...................................................................................................17-3 17.7 Deleting a File .....................................................................................................................................17-3 17.8 Moving a File to Planning or Navigation Station ...............................................................................17-4 17.9 Reading a File from Planning or Navigation Station ..........................................................................17-5 17.10 Loading User Chart and Route Files of Former Vector System Format.............................................17-5 17.11 Saving User Chart and Route Files in Former Vector System Format ...............................................17-5 17.12 Saving a Route as an ASCII Text File.................................................................................................17-6 17.13 Restoring a Route from an ASCII Text File........................................................................................17-6 17.14 Backing up Chart Material ..................................................................................................................17-7 17.15 Restoring Chart Material.....................................................................................................................17-8 Common Reference System (Multi-workstation mode) ..................................................................18-1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................18-1 Controlling Common Reference System ............................................................................................18-2 18.2.1 Shared alert management ......................................................................................................18-3 18.2.2 Harmonized databases on workstations.................................................................................18-3 18.2.3 Shared operator selections .....................................................................................................18-5 18.3 Usage Rights .......................................................................................................................................18-5 18.3.1 Setting usage rights as "master" ............................................................................................18-5 18.3.2 Setting usage rights as "multi" or "slave"..............................................................................18-6 18.3.3 Setting usage rights as "plan" ................................................................................................18-7 18.4 Sensor Source for the System .............................................................................................................18-8 18.5 Mode of Workstations .........................................................................................................................18-9 18.5.1 Changing mode to single or multi workstation .....................................................................18-9 18.6 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................18-10 18.6.1 What to do if pending access server window remains on screen ........................................18-10 18.6.2 Access server log .................................................................................................................18-11 18.6.3 Human interface log ............................................................................................................18-12 18.1 18.2 18. 19. Navigation Sensors..............................................................................................................................19-1 Common Reference.............................................................................................................................19-1 Choosing Navigation Sensors .............................................................................................................19-2 19.2.1 Sensors dialog box description..............................................................................................19-2 19.3 Source of Position ...............................................................................................................................19-5 19.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship ..................................................................................19-6 19.5 Position Discrepancy Alert..................................................................................................................19-7 19.6 Source of SOG, COG, Speed, Heading, ROT, Drift and Docking Speed Components ......................19-7 19.7 Dual Gyro Interface for DNV NAUT-AW........................................................................................19-12 19.7.1 Indication of gyro source.....................................................................................................19-13 19.7.2 Gyro-associated alerts..........................................................................................................19-14 19.8 Filter Operation .................................................................................................................................19-15 19.8.1 Filter and automatic route steering ......................................................................................19-16 19.9 Position Alignment............................................................................................................................19-17 19.9.1 Position alignment by means of the ECDIS ........................................................................19-17 19.9.2 Resetting position alignment ...............................................................................................19-19 19.10 Gyro Error Correction .......................................................................................................................19-20 19.10.1 Enabling gyro error correction ............................................................................................19-21 19.11 Wind Sensor ......................................................................................................................................19-22 19.11.1 Installation parameter for wind sensor ................................................................................19-23 19.12 Depth Sensor .....................................................................................................................................19-25 19.13 Sensor-related Alerts .........................................................................................................................19-26 19.1 19.2 20.1 20. Target Tracking (TT) Functions ........................................................................................................20-1 Tracked Targets ...................................................................................................................................20-1 20.1.1 Dangerous tracked targets .....................................................................................................20-2 20.1.2 Setting CPA and TCPA limits...............................................................................................20-2 20.1.3 Enabling, disabling danger alarm for dangerous tracked targets ..........................................20-2 iii Table of Contents 20.1.4 Lost tracked targets ............................................................................................................... 20-3 20.1.5 Displaying true or relative speed vectors.............................................................................. 20-4 Displaying Tracked Target Data ......................................................................................................... 20-5 20.2.1 Viewing tracked target data .................................................................................................. 20-5 Source of Tracked Targets .................................................................................................................. 20-6 20.3.1 Tracked target interface-related alerts .................................................................................. 20-6 Displaying Past Positions of Tracked Targets .................................................................................... 20-7 Tracked Target Recording Functions.................................................................................................. 20-8 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 21. AIS Target Functions ......................................................................................................................... 21-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 21-1 AIS Symbols on ECDIS ..................................................................................................................... 21-3 Displaying AIS Targets....................................................................................................................... 21-4 21.3.1 Filtering AIS targets.............................................................................................................. 21-4 21.4 Setting CPA and TCPA Limits............................................................................................................ 21-7 21.4.1 Setting CPA and TCPA limits .............................................................................................. 21-7 21.4.2 Enabling, disabling danger alarm for dangerous AIS targets ............................................... 21-7 21.4.3 CPA auto activation setting .................................................................................................. 21-8 21.5 Lost AIS Targets ................................................................................................................................. 21-9 21.6 Displaying True or Relative Speed Vectors...................................................................................... 21-10 21.7 Source of AIS Target Related Alerts................................................................................................. 21-10 21.8 Displaying AIS Target Data...............................................................................................................21-11 21.9 Displaying AIS Target Past Positions............................................................................................... 21-13 21.10 Displaying Name or Call Sign of AIS Target ................................................................................... 21-14 21.10.1 Priority selection between TT and AIS .............................................................................. 21-14 21.11 Displaying AIS Interface Status ....................................................................................................... 21-15 21.12 AIS Safety Message ......................................................................................................................... 21-16 21.12.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 21-16 21.12.2 Creating a new safety message ........................................................................................... 21-17 21.12.3 Reading a received safety message..................................................................................... 21-19 21.12.4 Replying to a safety message.............................................................................................. 21-20 21.13 AIS Own Ship Info ........................................................................................................................... 21-21 21.1 21.2 21.3 22.1 22.2 22. NAVTEX Messages............................................................................................................................. 22-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 22-1 Receiving NAVTEX message ............................................................................................................ 22-1 23. Radar Overlay .................................................................................................................................... 23-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 23-1 Activating Radar Overlay on the ECDIS ........................................................................................... 23-2 Choosing Source of Radar Overlay.................................................................................................... 23-3 23.3.1 Radar overlay through LAN from FAR-2x07 radars ........................................................... 23-3 23.3.2 Radar overlay through radar overlay card inside ECDIS ..................................................... 23-3 23.3.3 22.3.3 Radar overlay display modes..................................................................................... 23-4 23.4 Adjusting Radar Overlay (Radar Overlay dialog box)....................................................................... 23-5 23.4.1 Radar overlay source ............................................................................................................ 23-5 23.4.2 Gain....................................................................................................................................... 23-5 23.4.3 Sea clutter.............................................................................................................................. 23-5 23.4.4 Rain clutter............................................................................................................................ 23-6 23.4.5 Controlling video processing ................................................................................................ 23-6 23.4.6 Echo overload condition ....................................................................................................... 23-7 23.4.7 Transparency......................................................................................................................... 23-8 23.5 Operational Differences Between ECDIS only Mode and Modes with Radar Overlay .................... 23-8 23.6 Adjusting Radar Overlay to Match Positions of Chart Features........................................................ 23-9 23.6.1 Error sources of radar echo image and chart display mismatch ........................................... 23-9 23.6.2 Error sources for radar echo image and TT mismatch ......................................................... 23-9 23.6.3 Compensating for bearing error.......................................................................................... 23-10 23.6.4 Compensating for position error ......................................................................................... 23-10 23.7 Radar Overlay Related Alerts............................................................................................................23-11 23.1 23.2 23.3 24.1 24.2 24.3 24. Recording Functions .......................................................................................................................... 24-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 24-1 Events and Man Overboard Functions ............................................................................................... 24-1 Voyage Records .................................................................................................................................. 24-2 24.3.1 Details log ............................................................................................................................. 24-2 24.3.2 Voyage log ............................................................................................................................ 24-3 24.3.3 Danger targets log ................................................................................................................. 24-7 ix Table of Contents 24.3.4 Chart usage log ......................................................................................................................24-9 24.3.5 Printing details, voyage or danger targets log .......................................................................24-9 24.3.6 Making backup copy from details, voyage or danger targets log ......................................24-11 24.3.7 Resetting (emptying) voyage and danger targets logs.........................................................24-12 24.3.8 Making a user chart from a log (past track) ........................................................................24-12 24.3.9 Alert log ...............................................................................................................................24-14 Distance and Trip Counters...............................................................................................................24-15 24.4.1 Resetting distance and trip counters ....................................................................................24-16 24.4 25. 25.1 25.2 25.3 Anchor Watch......................................................................................................................................25-1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................25-1 Activating Anchor Watch ....................................................................................................................25-1 Deactivating Anchor Watch.................................................................................................................25-2 Datum...................................................................................................................................................26-1 General ................................................................................................................................................26-1 Paper Charts ........................................................................................................................................26-1 Electronic Sea Charts ..........................................................................................................................26-1 Positioning Devices and Datum ..........................................................................................................26-1 ECDIS and Datum...............................................................................................................................26-2 ECDIS and User Selectable Local Datum ..........................................................................................26-2 26. 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 27. 27.1 Parameters Set up ...............................................................................................................................27-1 Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................27-1 27.1.1 Parameter-related menus .......................................................................................................27-2 27.1.2 Accessing installation parameters .........................................................................................27-3 27.1.3 Choosing datum.....................................................................................................................27-3 27.1.4 Navigation parameters setting ...............................................................................................27-4 27.1.5 Optimization parameters setting............................................................................................27-7 Color Calibration ................................................................................................................................28-1 Color Calibration Settings...................................................................................................................28-1 28.1.1 Color test for ARCS charts....................................................................................................28-1 28.1.2 Color differentiation test for S57 charts ................................................................................28-2 28.1.3 Gray scale test........................................................................................................................28-3 28. 28.1 29. Conning Display..................................................................................................................................29-1 System Configuration..........................................................................................................................29-1 Display Interpretation..........................................................................................................................29-2 29.2.1 ROT window .........................................................................................................................29-3 29.2.2 Heading window....................................................................................................................29-3 29.2.3 Speed window........................................................................................................................29-3 29.2.4 Rudder window......................................................................................................................29-4 29.2.5 Position window ....................................................................................................................29-4 29.2.6 Drift and radius window ........................................................................................................29-4 29.2.7 Autopilot FAP-2000 window ................................................................................................29-5 29.2.8 Route window........................................................................................................................29-6 29.2.9 Weather and wind window ....................................................................................................29-7 29.2.10 Depth window........................................................................................................................29-7 29.2.11 Combined wind, depth and destination window (for DNV specification)............................29-7 29.2.12 Fuel consumption window ....................................................................................................29-8 29.2.13 Thruster window....................................................................................................................29-8 29.2.14 Propellers window .................................................................................................................29-8 29.2.15 Azimuth propulsion window ...............................................................................................29-10 29.2.16 Speedpilot window ..............................................................................................................29-11 29.2.17 Message window .................................................................................................................29-11 29.2.18 Main engine start air pressure window................................................................................29-12 29.2.19 Alert messages window .......................................................................................................29-12 29.2.20 Propulsion and thruster window (for DNV specification) ..................................................29-12 29.3 Modes for Conning Display ..............................................................................................................29-13 29.3.1 Choosing mode for conning display....................................................................................29-13 29.3.2 Choosing background color of conning display..................................................................29-13 29.3.3 Changing color palette of conning display..........................................................................29-13 29.4 Use of ECDIS display for Conning Display .....................................................................................29-14 29.4.1 How to activate conning display .........................................................................................29-14 29.1 29.2 x a e of ontents 30. Steering with FURUNO Autopilot FAP-2000................................................................................... 30-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 30-1 Steering Modes ................................................................................................................................... 30-1 Autopilot FAP-2000 Control Panel .................................................................................................... 30-3 Manual Control................................................................................................................................... 30-5 30.4.1 Heading control..................................................................................................................... 30-5 30.4.2 Radius control ....................................................................................................................... 30-5 30.4.3 Program heading change....................................................................................................... 30-5 30.4.4 Program track........................................................................................................................ 30-6 30.4.5 Summary of manual steering modes..................................................................................... 30-7 30.5 Automatic Route Steering .................................................................................................................. 30-8 30.5.1 "Goto waypoint" mode ......................................................................................................... 30-9 30.5.2 "Goto track" mode .............................................................................................................. 30-10 30.5.3 Summary of automatic route steering modes ..................................................................... 30-10 30.5.4 Preconditions for automatic route steering ......................................................................... 30-11 30.5.5 How to activate automatic route steering ........................................................................... 30-12 30.5.6 Arriving to a waypoint ........................................................................................................ 30-14 30.5.7 Automatic route steering alerts ........................................................................................... 30-16 30.5.8 Collision avoidance maneuver during automatic route steering ........................................ 30-18 30.5.9 Stopping or modifying pre-enabled route turn ................................................................... 30-18 30.5.10 Accuracy of automatic route steering ................................................................................. 30-19 30.6 Additional Information About Steering Modes................................................................................ 30-20 30.7 Important Information About Steering Mode Changes.................................................................... 30-22 30.8 Autopilot Dialog Box in Sidebar...................................................................................................... 30-23 30.9 Expected Steering Performance Under Various Conditions............................................................. 30-24 30.9.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead ................................................................ 30-24 30.9.2 Expected steering performance for turns ............................................................................ 30-27 30.10 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical Failure ................................................................... 30-29 30.10.1 Lost heading from Autopilot FAP-2000 (ECDIS may also have lost heading) ................. 30-29 30.10.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Autopilot FAP-2000 still has heading) .................................. 30-29 30.10.3 Lost speed ........................................................................................................................... 30-30 30.10.4 Low speed ........................................................................................................................... 30-31 30.10.5 Lost SOG/COG reference................................................................................................... 30-32 30.10.6 Total lost position ............................................................................................................... 30-33 30.10.7 Lost differential position..................................................................................................... 30-34 30.10.8 Lost differential position and position discrepancy............................................................ 30-35 30.10.9 Lost communication between ECDIS and Autopilot FAP-2000........................................ 30-35 30.10.10 Lost communication between FAP-2000 and ECDIS ....................................................... 30-36 30.11 Other Operations with FAP-2000..................................................................................................... 30-36 30.11.1 Speed used by Autopilot FAP-2000 ................................................................................... 30-36 30.11.2 Control strategy used by Autopilot FAP-2000 ................................................................... 30-36 30.11.3 Load conditions used by Autopilot FAP-2000 ................................................................... 30-36 30.12 Description of Alerts Generated by Autopilot FAP-2000 ................................................................ 30-37 30.12.1 Alerts................................................................................................................................... 30-37 30.12.2 Errors................................................................................................................................... 30-39 30.13 Using the Curved EBL ..................................................................................................................... 30-40 30.13.1 Structure of the curved EBL ............................................................................................... 30-42 30.13.2 Use of curved EBL to design a new turn while ship is turning .......................................... 30-42 30.14 Using the Predictor ........................................................................................................................... 30-43 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 31. Steering with YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A .............................................................................. 31-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 31-1 Steering Control Unit.......................................................................................................................... 31-1 Steering Modes of the System ............................................................................................................ 31-2 Automatic Route Steering .................................................................................................................. 31-2 31.4.1 Characteristics of automatic route steering........................................................................... 31-4 31.4.2 Summary of route steering.................................................................................................... 31-4 31.4.3 Preconditions for route steering............................................................................................ 31-4 31.4.4 Activating route steering....................................................................................................... 31-5 31.4.5 Arrival to a waypoint ............................................................................................................ 31-6 31.4.6 Route steering alerts.............................................................................................................. 31-8 31.4.7 Collision avoidance manoeuvre during automatic route steering ...................................... 31-10 31.4.8 How to stop or modify already enabled route turn ............................................................. 31-11 31.4.9 Notes ................................................................................................................................... 31-11 i a e of 31.5 ontents Other Operations with Autopilot PT-500A .......................................................................................31-12 31.5.1 Speed used by autopilot.......................................................................................................31-12 31.5.2 Control strategy used by autopilot.......................................................................................31-12 31.5.3 Load conditions used by autopilot.......................................................................................31-12 31.6 Description of Alerts with Autopilot PT-500A .................................................................................31-13 31.6.1 Errors ...................................................................................................................................31-13 31.7 Autopilot Dialog Box in Sidebar.......................................................................................................31-14 31.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Various Conditions .............................................................31-15 31.8.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead .................................................................31-15 31.8.2 Expected steering performance for turns.............................................................................31-16 31.9 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical Failure....................................................................31-17 31.9.1 Lost heading from Autopilot (ECDIS may also have lost heading) ...................................31-17 31.9.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Autopilot still has heading).....................................................31-18 31.9.3 Lost speed ............................................................................................................................31-19 31.9.4 Low speed............................................................................................................................31-20 31.9.5 Total lost position ................................................................................................................31-21 31.9.6 Position discrepancy ............................................................................................................31-23 31.9.7 ECDIS lost messages from Autopilot..................................................................................31-24 31.9.8 Autopilot lost messages form ECDIS..................................................................................31-25 31.10 How to Use the Curved EBL with YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A.............................................31-26 31.11 Using the Predictor............................................................................................................................31-27 32. Steering with TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot PR-6000...........................................................................32-1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................32-1 Steering Control Unit ..........................................................................................................................32-1 Steering Modes of the System.............................................................................................................32-2 32.3.1 Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND).................................................................................32-2 32.3.2 Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO) ..........................................................................32-3 32.3.3 Non-Follow Up steering (Mode selector: NFU) ...................................................................32-3 32.3.4 Track mode automatic route steering, RC/NAV (Mode selector: RC) .................................32-4 32.3.5 Remote hand steering (Mode selector: RC), (option) ...........................................................32-4 32.3.6 Override steering method (option) ........................................................................................32-5 32.4 Automatic Route Steering, RC/Nav (Mode: RC) ...............................................................................32-7 32.4.1 "Goto OS" mode ....................................................................................................................32-7 32.4.2 "Goto AW" mode ..................................................................................................................32-7 32.4.3 Summary of automatic route steering modes ........................................................................32-7 32.4.4 Activation of route steering ...................................................................................................32-8 32.4.5 Missing preconditions for route steering.............................................................................32-10 32.4.6 Arrival to a waypoint...........................................................................................................32-13 32.4.7 Route steering alerts ............................................................................................................32-14 32.4.8 Collision avoidance maneuver during automatic route steering ........................................32-16 32.4.9 How to stop or modify already enabled route turn..............................................................32-17 32.4.10 How to change mode of route steering................................................................................32-18 32.4.11 Notes on steering .................................................................................................................32-19 32.5 Other Operations with TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 .............................................................................32-20 32.5.1 Adjusting method for Auto steering (Auto mode) ..............................................................32-20 32.5.2 Rate of Turn (RATE)...........................................................................................................32-20 32.5.3 Rudder angle ratio (RUDDER) ...........................................................................................32-20 32.5.4 Weather adjustment (WEATHER)......................................................................................32-20 32.5.5 Course keeping mode selection (CNF-OPN) ......................................................................32-20 32.5.6 Pilot watch (PILOT WATCH) ............................................................................................32-20 32.5.7 Rudder angle limit (RUDDER LIMIT)...............................................................................32-20 32.6 Description of Alerts with TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 .......................................................................32-21 32.6.1 Alerts ...................................................................................................................................32-21 32.6.2 Errors ...................................................................................................................................32-22 32.7 Autopilot Dialog Box for Tokyo Keiki PR-6000..............................................................................32-22 32.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Various Conditions .............................................................32-24 32.8.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead .................................................................32-24 32.8.2 Expected steering performance for turns.............................................................................32-26 32.9 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical Failure....................................................................32-28 32.9.1 Lost heading from Autopilot (ECDIS may also have lost heading) ..................................32-28 32.9.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Autopilot still has heading).....................................................32-28 32.9.3 Lost speed ............................................................................................................................32-29 32.9.4 Low speed............................................................................................................................32-30 32.1 32.2 32.3 ii a e of ontents 32.9.5 Lost SOG/COG reference................................................................................................... 32-30 32.9.6 Total lost position ............................................................................................................... 32-31 32.9.7 Lost differential position..................................................................................................... 32-32 32.9.8 Lost differential position and position discrepancy............................................................ 32-33 32.9.9 Lost communication between ECDIS and Autopilot ......................................................... 32-34 32.9.10 Lost communication between Autopilot and ECDIS ......................................................... 32-34 32.10 How to use the Curved EBL with TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot.......................................................... 32-35 32.11 Using the Predictor ........................................................................................................................... 32-36 33. 33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 33.5 33.6 33.7 33.8 33.9 33.10 33.11 33.12 Alerts.................................................................................................................................................... 33-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 33-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 33-1 Alerts Generated by Navigation Calculation...................................................................................... 33-2 Alerts Generated by Chart Calculation .............................................................................................. 33-2 Alerts Generated by Steering Calculation .......................................................................................... 33-2 Alerts Generated by Radar Overlay ................................................................................................... 33-2 Alert Priority System.......................................................................................................................... 33-3 Indications for Doubtful Integrity ...................................................................................................... 33-4 Alert Reporting to Central Alert Management ................................................................................... 33-4 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors .......................................................................................... 33-4 Backup Navigator Alert...................................................................................................................... 33-5 List of Alerts ....................................................................................................................................... 33-6 33.12.1 List of navigation alerts ........................................................................................................ 33-6 33.12.2 List of chart alerts ............................................................................................................... 33-23 33.12.3 List of steering alerts with FURUNO Autopilot FAP-2000............................................... 33-24 33.12.4 List of steering alerts with YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A ......................................... 33-29 33.12.5 List of steering alerts with TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot PR-6000........................................ 33-32 33.12.6 List of Radar overlay related alerts..................................................................................... 33-36 33.12.7 List of External sensor related alerts................................................................................... 33-40 34. 34.1 34.2 34.3 34.4 34.5 34.6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 34-1 Maintenance........................................................................................................................................ 34-1 Replacing the Fuse ............................................................................................................................. 34-2 Replacing the Battery ......................................................................................................................... 34-2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 34-3 Keyboard Test..................................................................................................................................... 34-5 Consumable Parts ............................................................................................................................... 34-6 Appendix 1: Symbols and Abbreviations ................................................................................................... AP-1 A1.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................. AP-1 A1.2 Abbreviations................................................................................................................................... AP-10 Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1............................................................................................................. AP-13 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts ....................................................................................................... AP-21 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts ...................................................................................................... AP-33 A4.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service.......................................................................................................... AP-33 A4.1.1 Registration of the system at C-MAP Norway .................................................................. AP-33 A4.1.2 Ordering charts................................................................................................................... AP-33 A4.1.3 Applying licenses............................................................................................................... AP-33 A4.1.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. AP-33 A4.2 Chart Subscription Service .............................................................................................................. AP-34 A4.2.1 C-MAP service................................................................................................................... AP-34 A4.2.2 What is SENC delivery? .................................................................................................... AP-34 A4.2.2 CM-ENC service (SENC delivery).................................................................................... AP-35 A4.2.4 RENC service..................................................................................................................... AP-36 A4.2.5 CM-93/3 Prof, CM-93/3 Prof+ and CM-93/2 services...................................................... AP-37 A4.3 CM93/3 Chart Display .................................................................................................................... AP-38 A4.3.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................ AP-38 A4.3.2 Choosing CM93/3 chart material to use ............................................................................ AP-39 A4.3.3 Choosing charts for viewing .............................................................................................. AP-39 A4.3.4 Chart catalogue of C-MAP charts...................................................................................... AP-43 A4.4 S57 Managing C-MAP charts.......................................................................................................... AP-44 A4.4.1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP............................................................................... AP-44 A4.4.2 Introduction........................................................................................................................ AP-44 A4.4.3 System ID for C-MAP ....................................................................................................... AP-44 iii .........................................................................8 Automatic display until setting................................................2...........................AP-84 A5................................................................6 How to check database signature .............................................................................................6.....................................................................................................AP-52 A4.............AP-47 A4.............AP-118 A9.......................1.................................................1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP ...................1..........................2.................................................................................................3 Data reception ..............................................................................................................AP-59 A4.........2.......................................................................................AP-93 Appendix 8: Digital Interface ....2.2...............1 Parts List..........................................AP-48 A4.....1 Introduction ..............................7...............1..........AP-50 A4........................................................AP-87 A6...............................................................................2 Getting started with C-MAP charts .........................................................AP-95 A8...............6...............1........................................AP-84 A5..................................................3 Review of chart updates .............................................................5 Loading C-MAP charts from a CD ROM into the system .........................................................................2 Add license from file ..................................AP-58 A4....................................................................2....................6..................................6..........................AP-61 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts ........................................................................2 Use of multiple databases ......................AP-85 Appendix 6: Route Backup .................................................................AP-91 A6................1..3 Add license manually ....................................................AP-96 A8.....................................................5................6 Serial interface: input/output ports.......................................................AP-52 A4..............3 Keeping C-MAP charts up to date........................AP-95 A8..8 Removing CM93/3 Charts .............AP-51 A4.........................................................................AP-64 A5........................1 Data Sentences .................4 Sentence structure ...................................7................................AP-117 Appendix 9: Parts List and Parts Location ............2 Parts Location.................. SP-1 Index ...10 Viewing status and date dependency of S57 chart cells and their updates ......................................................a e of ontents A4...........................................................................................................AP-89 A6..............1.............................................................................1.................7 Grouping S57 chart cells ...................................................................2 Managing C-MAP charts.....................5 Serial interface: input ports .....................................................................................................AP-116 A8.....AP-91 A6.....................5...........7.....................4 Renewal of license........................................................................................2...................AP-56 A4............2 Route Backup & Restore in Orion Pro Weather Routing Format.................AP-54 A4.........................................................1 Route Backup & Restore in ASCII Format.........1 Exporting Route from ECDIS to Orion Pro ................................7...........................................................AP-63 A5.................................................................................................................2 Importing Route from Orion Pro............................................ IN-1 Declaration of conformity i ...................................................................2...................1..................................1 Input sentences ...........................................................................................1 Creating update order file ............................................................................2.......................................1 C-MAP Charts ..............................................................................1....................AP-88 A6.......AP-45 A4...........2 Output sentences .....2 Loading chart updates from the file........................4 Defining subscription of C-MAP charts.....................AP-45 A4.................................5 CM93/3 Database....2..............AP-63 A5...........................AP-64 A5....AP-92 Appendix 7: Menu Tree.......6 License of CM93/3...AP-64 A5..................................................................................................6 Catalogue of S57 cells with C-MAP charts............1 Load of CM93/3 database to ECDIS.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................AP-95 A8.......AP-118 A9.........................................................................................................2......................................................................................AP-63 A5.............................................................................................................................AP-87 A6.............7.AP-64 A5.........................................................AP-63 A5...4 How to view update status of CM93/3 charts ...............AP-77 A5...AP-95 A8............5 How to view update history of CM93/3 charts ........AP-75 A5..7 How to Keep Charts up to Date ..................................1 Exporting ECDIS route data into an Excel file ...................................2 S57 chart legend with C-MAP charts.......AP-60 A4......................9 Removing C-MAP charts from the system ...........................AP-65 A5............................................2.........................1...................................AP-47 A4............AP-119 Specifications..............................2 Importing route data from Excel file into ECDIS .......................................................................................AP-70 A5.............................................................................................1 Create license order to file...........................AP-46 A4..................AP-95 A8............................7.................... (AIS transponder and TT) i 06.1-inch (FEA-2107) or 23. It complies with IMO Resolution A.1-inch display (FEA-2807). However. operated and maintained properly. permitting use of the commercial monitor of your choice. The FEA-2x07 series ECDIS is the product of FURUNO’s extensive experience in computer technology and marine electronics. IEC 61174 and other related standards. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance. AIS targets and other navigation data on a high-resolution 20. The ECDIS displays electronic charts. We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability. The main features of the ECDIS are x Continuous monitoring of ship’s position through multi-sensor Kalman filter processing using GPS. For more than 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment.xx_06. DPGS. SDME x Route planning and route monitoring facilities x Wide variety of warning facilities contribute to safer and more efficient navigation x Radar image may be superimposed on electronic charts (option) x Grounding warnings. safe depth contours x Chart database loaded and updated using CD ROMs x Target data from TT/radar and AIS transponder to aid in collision avoidance.Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO ECDIS FEA-2107/FEA-2107-BB/FEA-2807. This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers. TT data.xx . no machine can perform its intended function unless installed. nav lines. The FEA-2107-BB is supplied without a monitor.817(19). ore or i ro uct Soft are estin ersion stan ar I e S S S S S S S ectronic a i ationa art ition aster a i a tiona art S ition i IS resentation i rary S res i ition ata rotection S e ition I e ition ition an aintenance ocu ent S u u ati e u er ition ition an aintenance ocu ent u u ati e u er S ition S su res i ort for S ition S e ition I e ition S res i ition S e ition You can find the latest ECDIS software maintenance on the internet. at the following address: http://www.furunodeepsea.html i .com/products/contents/ecdis/software/index. Notes and navigation tools x Backup operations x Common reference system x Use of navigation sensors x Use of Tracked Targets (TT) x Use of AIS targets x Radar overlay x Various recording functions x Essential information of the datum used by the charts and the ECDIS x Steering related operations x List of alerts .i This manual provides the following information: x System configuration x Screen interpretation and use of the control unit x Set up before departure x Rules to replace paper charts with electronic ones x Chart material management x Manual updates. which are used to manually enter Notices to Mariners and Navtex warnings x Chart alert calculation x Route planning and monitoring x Various operator tools such as user charts. For more information. METER AMWSS (Alarm Monitoring Watch Safety System) GYROCOMPASS (SYNCHRO. only one workstation is used in the system. i ECDIS Monitor MU-201CE (FEA-2107) or MU-231CE (FEA-2807) i Conning Monitor MU-201CE or MU-231CE 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 ARPA RADARS NAVTEX TRACKPIL OT LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG AIS GYROCOMPASS NAVTEX ENGINE CONTROL ECHOSOUNDER WIND SENSOR WATER TEMP. If required. HL. there can be additional identical ECDIS EC1000C Workstation(s) connected to the same LAN to share the tasks of the ECDIS. The ECDIS processor can be used for both route planning and route monitoring. comprised of the components shown in the illustration below. HL. AZ) PRINTER (USB) OPTION Remote Control Unit RCU-016 Category of Units: All units protected from weather EXTERNAL DEVICE Single workstation with connection to navigation sensors . The ECDIS processor is connected to various sensors. AZ) Selector RADAR 2 (VIDEO. Mode as Multiple. displays electronic sea charts and operates as the user interface for the system. the system keeps data on the workstations harmonised and also tracks selections and settings made on any workstation. and performs navigation calculations and route monitoring. one or more workstation(s) can be used as an user interface (with "full" usage rights) and one or more workstation(s) may be used as planning stations (usage rights as "planning"). Typically there can be the following kinds of configurations of workstations: x x Mode as Single. see Chapter 18 "Common Reference System". If the system incorporates more than one ECDIS EC1000C Workstation. STEPPER) LOG (200P/NM) ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS) ALARM OUTPUT CALCOMP DRAWINGBOARD III DIGITIZER (WORKSTATION) 24 VDC HUB100 LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 ECDIS PROCESSOR EC1000C RADAR OVERLAY PCB 100-230 VAC FAR-2xx7 series radar 100-230 VAC 24 VDC B-ADAPTER EC-1020 24 VDC Control Unit RCU-018 or Control Unit RCU-015 RADAR 1 (VIDEO. If the system has two workstations connected together as multiple workstations. two workstations are used in the system where usage rights and sensor source of workstations can be changed by the operator.Intro uction i i The ECDIS EC1000C Workstation. Connections to interfaces are typically made with a LAN (Local Area Network) Adapter. In this configuration. HL. HL. the sensor source may be changed and still receive and transmit information from/to the system and to/from navigation sensors. AZ) Selector RADAR 2 (VIDEO. STEPPER) LOG (200P/NM) ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS) ANALOG OUTPUT 24 VDC CALCOMP DRAWINGBOARD III DIGITIZER HUB100 LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 ECDIS PROCESSOR EC1000C RADAR OVERLAY PCB 100-230 VAC FAR-2xx7 series radar 100-230 VAC 24 VDC B-ADAPTER EC-1020 24 VDC Control Unit RCU-018 or Control Unit RCU-015 RADAR 1 (VIDEO. HL. ECDIS Monitor MU-201CE (FEA-2107) or MU-231CE (FEA-2807) Conning Monitor MU-201CE or MU-231CE 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 ARPA RADARS NAVTEX TRACK PILOT LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG AIS GYRO COMPASS NAVTEX ENGINE CONTROL ECHOSOUNDER WIND SENSOR WATER TEMP. AZ) 24 VDC HUB100 100-230 VAC ECDIS PROCESSOR EC1000C RADAR OVERLAY PCB LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 100-230 VAC 24 VDC FAR-2xx7 series radar Control Unit RCU-018 or Control Unit RCU-015 B-ADAPTER EC-1020 24 VDC Selector Remote Control Unit RCU-016 RADAR 2 (VIDEO. there can be two workstations connected together by a Local Area Network (LAN). where navigation sensors are connected to two workstations. METER AMWSS GYROCOMPASS (SYNCHRO. AZ) PRINTER (USB) OPTION Category of Units: All units protected from weather EXTERNAL DEVICE Multiple workstation with connection to navigation sensors .Intro uction i i i i In the multiple workstation configuration. METER AMWSS GYRO COMPASS (SYNCHRO. HL. receiving and transmitting data from/to workstation via the LAN. AZ) PRINTER (USB) Remote Control Unit RCU-016 100-230 VAC ECDIS Monitor MU-201CE (FEA-2107) or MU-231CE (FEA-2807) LAN-ADAPTER EC-1010 ARPA RADARS NAVTEX TRACKPILOT LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG AIS GYROCOMPASS NAVTEX ENGINE CONTROL ECHOSOUNDER WIND SENSOR WATER TEMP. STEPPER) LOG (200P/NM) ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS) ANALOG OUTPUT RADAR 1 (VIDEO. In the multiple workstation configuration (two fully redundant navigation workstations). one workstation is used as the "sensor source" for navigation sensors and the other workstation is used as the sensor source workstation to communicate with sensors. For further details about diagnostic tests. sometimes slowing down operation." At this time the equipment releases a beep. Note: The amount of resources used increases over time. for example.Intro uction i The processor unit is the heart of the system. . responsible for the loading. next to the system configuration indication. To turn off the system. with the DVD-ROM drive or floppy disk drive. The DVD-ROM and floppy disk drives are behind the lid on the front panel. This manual provides only the instructions for testing the keyboard. see the service manual. when in port. i i The ECDIS software version number is displayed in the information area. reverse this sequence. DVD-ROM drive Floppy dIsk drive i The system may be turned on by turning on the power switch at the rear of the processor unit then pressing the POWER switch on the Control Unit. updating and processing of electronic sea charts. until you feel a "click.XX XX. re-set the power. when use of the equipment is not required. One type (several tests) checks the functionality of the equipment and the other type calibrates the monitor. storing. If operation seems to be slow. XX.XX i i The ECDIS has two types of diagnostic tests. Required sea charts are also prepared in voyage planning. Preparation includes route definition. oute annin art annin oya e annin oute a cu ation ser art annin . route calculation and route optimization.i i i Navigation tasks can be divided into four basic tasks: oya e annin ositionin a i ation tas s onitorin Steerin Navigation tasks i Voyage planning is the preparation phase for a coming voyage. either by updating existing charts or creating new ones. Automatic and/or manual notebook function to tell operator position-based information. In case of Great Circle sailing between two waypoints. Timetable. 2. Create operator navigation charts. i User chart planning consists of the following steps: 1. i Route calculation for voyage planning includes the following: Route profile calculation: x x x Distance between consecutive waypoints Course between waypoints Calculation of wheel over point x x Total distance Estimated time for voyage Route check: x Grounding alert based on available depth information in digital chart database. Lowest Cost and Best Profit. Voyage optimization parameters: See "voyage optimization" below. Update existing S57 and ARCS charts. the ECDIS calculates minimum and maximum latitudes. A route consists of the following: x x x Position of each waypoint Turning instructions for each waypoint Safety limits between waypoints (channel limits) x x x Safe water calculation based on safety limits Required steering accuracy for individual legs Speed restrictions for legs Information notebook: x x Information pages to alert the operator to a given waypoint or a selected area. ETA and fuel consumption. and if needed adds an extra waypoint(s) so as not to exceed minimum and maximum latitudes.a i ation as s i A route can be created two ways: Modify an existing route to create a new route or create a new route from scratch. Manage chart permits. i Chart planning consists of the following steps: 1. Speed. Process chart alerts based on symbols. Load new S57 and ARCS charts. There are four calculation strategies: Max. . 2. Manually update charts. based on the defined data. lines and areas of user chart. 3. Voyage optimization: x x Timetable optimization Optimization based on economical factors x The ECDIS processor calculates optimum speed and course between each waypoint. 4. irect ositionin sensors ea rec e ui ent ositionin anua correction i x Decca navigator x Loran-C navigator x SYLEDIS navigator ii i Satellitenavigation systems: x GPS navigator x GPS navigator with a differential correction. The system integrates valid information from different sensors and uses the Kalman filter technology for final position calculation. DGPS x Local position-fixing systems Radio navigation equipment: i Ship’s heading measurement devices: x Gyrocompass x Magnetic compass x GPS gyrocompass i Speed measuring devices: x Single-axis speed logs x Dual-axis speed logs x Radionavigation equipment x Satellitenavigation equipment i User-executed position correction where radar echoes and information from synthetic charts are combined and verified by the operator.a i ation as s ii i Positioning means using all available methods available to calculate and keep ship’s position up-to-date during a voyage. . and adjusted if necessary. The calculation of ship’s position is based on available navigation sensors. ) The following alerts are incorporated: x Route monitoring alerts x Position calculation alerts x Position monitoring alerts x Waypoint approach alerts x Alerts for sensor failure x Alerts for system failure x Alerts for incorrect operator action x Alert based on chart database Built-in man over board function records position at the time of man overboard. Part of the monitoring is also the display of electronic sea charts and conning information.14.a i ation as s i i Monitoring is a continuous check of navigation data.11. . operator actions and performance of the system.11. i The following information may be logged: x Past track history x Events x Dangerous targets x Voyage recording i i i Data is distributed via the ECDIS’s computer system. 31. Electronic sea chart Data distribution Alarms Monitoring Data logging Man overboard i x Own ship position x Planned track x Planned safety lines i x Chart alerts x Tracked Targets x Chart information x AIS targets The following information is available on the electronic sea chart: x Ship’s predictor (See section 30. 32. ) The bottom block in the information area is the Mouse functions area. They are permanently displayed and show information such as your ship's position. 7/8 of the ECDIS display is taken up by the Electronic chart area. The Status bar. PartStd: When some of options (not all) are checked on Standard page Std: When all options are checked on Standard page and no options are checked on Other1/Other2 pages. PartStd. in that order from left to right. Other: When all options are checked on Standard page and some options (not all) are checked on Other1/Other2 pages. which is always shown at the top of the screen. right button) Parts of the ECDIS display .i i The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into several areas. (See section 3. and it shows the current left mouse button. mainly displays equipment status. AllOther: When all options are checked on Standard page and all options are checked on Other1/Other2 pages.) Information area Electronic chart area * Base: When no options are checked on Standard page. scrollwheel. alerts generated by the system. scrollwheel and right mouse button functions. The operator may display the data of his or her choice in one of the information areas called a Sidebar.3. workstation mode and cursor position. Std. (1) Presentation mode (2) ECDIS mode (3) Display scale (4) Chart only switch (5) Name of display settings (Base. Mouse function area. The boxes at the right side of the screen comprise the Information areas. All Other)* (6) Radar selection (TT/radar video source) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) System Status (Sector rotates if system is normal.2 "Sidebar on user interface". (Current function of left button. which is used for actual operations of the ECDIS. .. The difference between S57ed3 ENC charts and CM-93 charts is that the CM-93 charts are from a private source and they cannot be used as a substitute for paper charts under any condition.1:50.000 . CM-93 Compatibility with CM-93 format depends on commercial agreements. it is displayed with the default scale. ECDIS is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. = SENC. To emphasize this point these charts are called "Non-ENC" charts in this manual.g. There are two kinds of electronic navigational charts available for use in the ECDIS: S57ed3 ENC or CM-93 vector format ARCS raster format Official paper charts may be replaced with S57ed3 ENC and ARCS charts. the ECDIS generates the "system ENC".000. From CM-93 format the ECDIS generates SENC which is used for actual operations of the ECDIS. From this format. When you open a chart.IS is ay i The ECDIS can use the following types of charts: x x x x x x S-57 (IHO) S-63 (IHO) ARCS (UK-HO) CM-ENC (C-MAP) CM-93/2 (C-MAP) CM-93/3 (C-MAP) The following information can also be displayed: x x x x x x Cursor (moved by trackball) Planned route EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM Own ship symbol with speed vector TT-acquired target AIS target i x x i The electronic navigational charts are displayed in the electronic chart area. The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart area and these can be modified.000. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e. The compatibility is controlled by the security device called a dongle. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT functions. The ECDIS combines chart and navigational information. Some versions of this ECDIS are compatible and others are not. differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic navigational chart was derived. The operator should check the current situation in his or her flag country administration and if in doubt use the paper charts as the primary source of navigational information. and the scale range is 1:1. called the compilation scale. Therefore. ARCS raster format chart . ENC data facilitates unique functionality that improves the safety of navigation at sea.IS is ay CM-ENC C-MAP produced official ENC chart which complies with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Organisation's) S57 Edition 3 product specification. and can give a false impression of the distance from danger. . S57 vector chart ARCS charts are digital reproductions of British Admiralty (BA) paper charts. They retain the same standards of accuracy. Zooming into the ARCS chart can be useful for magnifying a complex detail. it is possible to zoom 2x the original paper chart's scale or ½ the original paper chart's scale. reliability and clarity as paper charts. however this decreases the density of the data displayed. When used in an ECDIS. If the "Chart page" is not selected. the Windows stardard color palette is restored. For example. then push the scrollwheel. text is shown in different colors to help you distinguish between them. i There are several color palettes available for choosing colors for the chart background and information areas. Click the X at the top right corner of the dialog box to close the box. Push the left mouse button to open the Chart Display dialog box. 4. Spin the scrollwheel until Chart Display/Info/Standard Display is shown in the mouse functions area. open the Chart Display menu and follow the procedure on this page. The user interface contains information about settings. Place the cursor on Palette.). click an arrow tab in the dialog box to display it. referring to the table above. 7.) is shown in yellow color. 6. Note: The display colors may change to the Windows standard color palette whenever a USB memory device is inserted or removed. To select a color palette. time. etc. 2. etc. dynamic data like your ship's position.) or dynamic (such as position of your ship. fields in chart legend. parameters and selections used by the ECDIS.IS is ay The user interface is defined as the areas that are not displaying the electronic chart. do the following: 1. units. etc. predictor time. The nature of the information displayed can be either static (such as name of a certain window. Set the cursor in the electronic chart area. operator selections. (When Windows initiates USB recognition procedures.) To restore the ECDIS color palette. 3. . Spin the scrollwheel to select desired palette. time or direct control of parameters (scale. either raster chart or vector chart. 5. Setting Day Bright Day Blue Dusk Dusk Blue Night Background color of chart Light-blue Light-blue Blue Blue Black Background color of information area White Dark-blue Black Dark-blue Black With any palette selection except Day Bright. LORAN. COG (Course over ground) and its source SOG (Speed over ground) Latitude and longitude position of own ship Datum in use (WGS 72. DGPS. etc. positive value to Starboard. which is shown above positioning source. x Latitude and longitude position of cursor displayed in selected datum. etc. GPS. WGS 84. Transversal speed. x Positioning source: Dead Reckoning. x Range and bearing from your ship's position to cursor Note: The order of items in the position and cursor windows can change with the sidebar used. SPD water speed SB.IS is ay i The information area displays details about your ship's position. European 1950.). See the next page. course and speed and the cursor's location on the chart Information from the positioning sensors: x x x x x x x HDG heading and its source if it is not true gyro. FILTER. . You can display one of them together with the conning display. with autopilot and conning display windows . When two sidebars are active. docking display or chart legend. the width of the information area is doubled. as shown below. The route display or autopilot display is always displayed. x x x x x Route display Autopilot display Conning display Docking display Chart legend i i i i Sidebar. The options shown below are available and the content of the sidebar windows change with the devices and sensors connected to the system.IS is ay i i You may select what kind of information to display in the sidebar (right side) of the ECDIS. Place the cursor on the area shown. Click the right mouse button to show the sidebar menu on the display. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired sidebar from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 4. See figure at right. 1. 1. OFF T VECT(G) 5 min Predictor OFF PASTPOSN T 2min CPA 10. 3.xx 2. .xx xx.0NM 30min CPA AUTO act FILT Lost TGT alarm FILT SINGLE xx. "Select Sidebar" appears in the mouse functions area. 3. deselect it following this procedure. Two sidebars may be displayed.IS is ay i i i Sidebar(s) may be opened as shown below. To remove an item from the sidebar. 2. For more information. "Ass. "Track Great circle" and "Track Appr. x "Goto OS". Off track: Perpendicular distance the ship is from the intended track. regardless of the steering mode used: x "Outside channel" is indicated by displaying the indication "Off track" in red and its value in orange. see Chapter 30. "Ass. drift and gyro error compensation. see Chapter 32. x "Goto WPT". For the YOKOGAWA autopilot. "Ass. including off track.IS is ay i i i The following information is shown in the route sidebar: Information from route monitoring: Route: Name of monitored route x x x Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach "To WPT". Turn enabled" and "Assisted turn" in Goto OS mode x "Goto AW". To WPT: The waypoint which the ship is approaching. Enabled. " GoAW Great circle". Ch LIM: Planned width of channel to approach "To WPT". Next WPT: The WPT following the "To WPT". For steering with FURUNO Autopilot FAP-2000. Enabled". "Goto OS Great circle". "Autopilot Conflict" is only available with the YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A. Turn enabled" and "Assisted turn" in Goto Waypoint mode "Goto Track". Enabled". "GoAW Turn Enabled" and"Goto AW Turn" in Go Track mode The following information is calculated from data of positioning sensors and from route monitoring data: x x x x x Route Off track Dist WOP Time Next Permanent alerts are available in the following cases. Time: Time to go to WOP (dd:hh:mm:ss). Next: Planned course between "To WPT" and "Next WPT". "Track Turn Enabled" and Track Turn" in Go Track mode x x x x x x x x x x For the TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot PR-6000. "Goto WPT Great circle". the following steering modes are available. Plan: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT". Dist WOP (Wheel Over Point): Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at "To WPT" will be given. Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route. Appr enabled" and "Ass. "GoAWAppr. Turn RAD: Planned turning radius at "To WPT". x x . It indicates that if the ship continues using the current course the ship will be outside of the channel at wheel over point. Additional textual information is available if any of the following steering modes are in use. "Out of gate" is colored orange. Turn rate: Calculated rate of turn which is based on current speed and planned turning radius. Appr. Set CRS: Actual set course Set HDG: Actual set heading Radius: Actual set radius ROT: Value for ROT x Cond: Setting for loading condition x Perf: Setting for steering accuracy x Off track: Distance from center line of planned route x x x x i x x x i i i i The following information is shown in the conning display sidebar: ROT indicator Heading indicator Speed indicators x x x Longitudinal speed and source of speed Transversal speed kn Rudder angle indicator Transversal speed (frwd) Longitudinal speed Transversal speed (aft) kn kn i x x x i i i The following information is shown in the docking sidebar: ROT indicator Heading indicator Speed indicators x x x x Longitudinal speed and source of speed Transversal speed Transversal speed (frwd) Longitudinal speed Transversal speed (aft) kn Depth Depth (at bow) Rudder angle indicator Depth below transducer x x On bow On stern kn kn Depth (at stern) i i i For detailed information see the chapters on vector charts (S57) and raster charts (ARCS). planned course is shown.IS is ay i x x i i i The following information is shown in the autopilot sidebar. which shows settings and readings from an autopilot. Steering mode (below "Autopilot") Prog CRS: If you use program track or program heading change steering modes. . To activate dialog box to open new position.) . proceed as follows: 1.) SENSORS Alerts WPT Alerts WPT Display ‰ Ref Pt Alerts LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH LIM/m MIN/kn MAX/kn ‰ VRM ‰ EBL ‰ Range: ‰ Info 2NM WPT WPT WPT count 19 Adjust after Delete WPT Display All PLAN ROUTE LAT LON REF point ‰ centered NM WPT NAV MARKS SPD NM ALERT QUEUE Trial SPD SPD profile MON ROUTE It is possible to open dialog box next to left of sidebar in case that dialog box overlaps route monitoring information or other information on sidebar. (Select Left of sidebar for TCS without conning display. To close a dialog box. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X Open Initial Setting menu Select Operation in the menu Select Dialog Position in Operation menu 2. X X X X 4. click the X at the top right corner of the dialog box.IS is ay i i i i There are several dialog boxes which can be activated by mouse-clicking over certain areas on the ECDIS display. X 3. Select Left of sidebar to activate dialog boxes open left of sidebar or Top of side bar if you want to get sidebar open on sidebar. Place the cursor over the appropriate area then click the right or left mouse button to display the corresponding dialog box on the ECDIS display. Note that only one dialog box may be shown at a time. See the figure below to find the places and mouse button to click to get desired dialog boxes on the display. SPD/CRS POSN SET TIME Radar (CALC. Note: A menu will also appear if you try to activate a dialog box without choosing an option from the menu. See the figure at right. see section 3. user chart or Notes. (For route.4 "Controlling Planning and Monitoring Modes on the ECDIS Display".) NM Suggested SPD Trial SPD SPD profile kn kn .IS is ay ii i i i Dialog boxes which have a triangle at their upper left-hand corner contain a menu which provides additional functions. Place the cursor on the triangle to show a menu from which to select additional functions. A drop-down dialog box appears. (Displayed selected may be activated with a radio button. only the planning mode or the monitoring mode can be displayed in the status bar. User Chart or Notes in the information area. in either the planning mode or the monitoring mode. To select desired mode. a user chart or Notes can be selected from the information area. where you can select either Monitor or Plan by clicking the appropriate button with the left mouse button. put the cursor on the text Route.) Select Route Monitor A Plan B X Select Notes Monitor Notes1 Plan Notes2 X DISP DISP User Chart Monitor A1 Plan B1 X DISP DISP . See the figure below. With user chart or Notes.IS is ay i i i i i A route. The RCU-018 is additionally equipped with a keyboard. All functions of the ECDIS can be accessed using the trackball. To operate from a menu with the mouse. The trackball functions like a mouse. scrollwheel and mouse buttons. A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN OFF EBL ON 1 MARK 4/GHI OFF CNT OFF 2/ABC P BRILL ON VRM 3/DEF MODE 6/MNO RECORD F1 ALARM ACK SYSTEM FAILURE F2 5/JKL SCROLL MENU MOB STD DSP RADAR 7/PQRS PLAN CANCEL SENSOR 8/TUV MONITOR 9/WXYZ NEXT SHIFT HELP + RANGE EVENT TARGET DATA 0/|_| CU/TM R - Layout of the control unit RCU-018 . operate the mouse buttons or scrollwheel (depending on item) to select option then push the scrollwheel to confirm your selection. right and left mouse buttons and a scrollwheel. Either unit is equipped with a trackball. the trackball. mouse buttons and scrollwheel alone. the operator rolls the trackball and operates the left and right mouse buttons to access functions.i i The operator controls the ECDIS with the Control Unit RCU-018 or the Control Unit RCU-015. roll the trackball to select desired item. i The Control Unit RCU-018 consists of a keyboard. Press again to return your ship's position to screen center. The red lamp behind the key lights and the buzzer sounds when system failure is found. Inactivates and erases VRM 2 if VRM1 is active. closes open dialog box or window. Adjusts control unit dimmer. which provides functions for adjustment of the radar picture. Displays the Nav. Opens Voyage Record sub menu. Returns your ship marker to screen center in TM and CU modes. Opens Plan Route dialog box. (This control does not switch the display on/off. Inactivates and erases VRM 1 if both VRMs are displayed. Opens Sensors dialog box. System failure: control unit cannot communicate with EC-1000C. Course-up RM. The key remains lit until the reason for the problem is removed. Activates operator-defined function or menu. Marks dialog box.) Adjusts active VRM. Activates and displays VRM 1 if none is displayed or VRM2 is active.ontro nits i Key Power VRM rotary encoder VRM ON VRM OFF EBL rotary encoder EBL ON EBL OFF F1 F2 ALARM ACK SYSTEM FAILURE i Description Turns the system on/off. which mainly provides for activation/deactivation of various markers. North-up RM. Adjusts active EBL. Activates standard display presentation on the ECDIS. Restore monitor brilliance to calibrated state. Activates and displays VRM 2 if VRM1 is active. Opens "Next" page in multi-page dialog box. Activates operator-defined function or menu. inserts a space. Route-up RM. Opens Monitor Route dialog box. Inactivates and erases EBL 2 if EBL1 is active. Offcenters your ship's position to cursor location on the ECDIS display. with the trackball active. (EC-1000C is inoperative. Enables scrolling on ARCS charts. navigation or steering calculation.) Displays Radar Overlay dialog box. Course-up TM. Hit the ALERT ACK key to silence the buzzer. Activates and displays EBL 2 if EBL1 is active. Activates and displays EBL1 if none is displayed or EBL 2 is active. (Continued on the next page) RADAR STD DSP 1/MARK 2/ABC/P BRILL 3/DEF/MODE 4/GHI/OFF CNT 5/JKL/SCROLL 6/MNO/RECORD 7/PRQS/PLAN 8/TUV/MONITOR 9/WXYZ/NEXT CANCEL/SENSOR 0/space CU/TM R . Selects presentation mode: North-up TM. Alert acknowledgement for alerts generated by chart. Inactivates and erases EBL1 if both EBLs are displayed. Adjusts radar gain on the radar overlay. Shows target data for selected Tracked Target. Adjusts charts scale. Adjust backlight brilliance of ECDIS display(s). HELP: Activates info/help. Reduces rain clutter on the radar overlay. Records textual information fixed to your ship's position. Reduces sea clutter on the radar overlay.) Displays the Main menu. . (Mouse must not be over input field. Inscribes MOB mark on the screen. provides data for selected chart area.ontro (Continued from previous page) Key SHIFT/HELP MENU + RANGE – MOB EVENT TARGET DATA GAIN A/C RAIN A/C SEA A/C RAIN A/C SEA nits GAIN Description SHIFT: Shifts between lower case and upper case alphabets. Color calibrated backlight brilliance can be set using "Standard Display" button or selecting desired "Palette" in the Chart page of the Display window. Press more than two seconds to restore monitor brilliance to calibrated state. .) Executes function assigned. (This control does not switch the display on/off.ontro nits i The control unit RCU-015 provides minimum configuration with controls that function as shown in the table below. Same function as F1. F1 F2 F3 F4 Key Power F1 F2 F3 F4 Description Turns the system on/off. Same function as F1. Same function as F1. restores monitor brilliance to calibrated state. F2. CHART DISPLAY: Opens Chart Display dialog box. Place the cursor on the box for F1. 4. The choices are CHART MENU: Opens chart menu. 5. . Click the X mark at the top right corner to close the dialog box. The dialog box shown right appears. Spin the scrollwheel until Menu/Info/Chart Menu appears in the mouse functions area. RADAR: Displays Radar Overlay dialog box. SENSORS: Opens Sensors dialog box. F3: Opens Chart menu. RANGE+: Raises chart scale. 7. SET CHART CENTER: Sets chart center as selected with the cursor. STANDARD DISPLAY: Calls up standard display. Check Enable changes.ontro nits i i Hot keys (F1-F4 on the Control Unit RCU-015 and F1 and F2 on the Control Unit RCU-018) are provided to call a desired function/menu when pressed. F3 or F4 as appropriate then spin the scrollwheel to select desired function or menu. F4: Acknowledges alerts generated by ECDIS. Spin the scrollwheel to select Function keys. SET SHIPOFFCENTER: Offcenters ship position to cursor location. do the following: 1. To select desired function/menu for each key. Enable changes i i i Press the hot key corresponding to the menu or function you wish to activate. RANGE-: Lowers chart scale. F2: Sets Standard Display settings on display. ALERT ACK: Acknowledge ECDIS-generated alert. i You may select desired function/menu from a predefined list. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu. 3. 8. 2. Click the left mouse button. INITIAL SETTINGS: Display Initial Settings dialog box. In the example at right the function of each key is as below: F1: Opens Chart Display dialog box. SET SHIP CENTERED: Centers your ship's position. MENU: Opens Main menu. Spin the scrollwheel to select Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel. TM RESET: Resets your ship's position in true motion. then push the scrollwheel. SCROLL: Scrolls display. 6. left mouse button and right mouse button. scrollwheel. Left Button Right Button F1 F2 F3 Scrollwheel Trackball F4 .ontro nits i The mouse consists of the trackball. . 3.) To change a specific digit or alphabet. 2. Click the right mouse button to show the following window. Place the cursor to the right of the digit you want to delete then push the right mouse button. (N and S shown for latitude. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate polarity then push the scrollwheel. i i i i By clicking co-ordinate polarity 1. The coordinate is changed and the window is closed. W) then push the left mouse button. (Alphanumeric data may also be entered directly from the keyboard-equipped control unit. . roll the trackball to put the cursor to the left of the digit or character that you want to change then spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate alphanumeric character. i A character can be deleted from text/numeric input field as follows: 1. Select Characters and push the left mouse button. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired polarity then push the scrollwheel. You select the input value by spinning the scrollwheel then push the scrollwheel to accept the value.ontro nits i i With trackball Alphanumeric input fields are activated for input by pointing with the mouse cursor and clicking the left mouse button. E. Place the cursor inside the input window. Delete is selected – push the scrollwheel to delete the alphanumeric selected. This action also displays minimum and maximum values beside the input field. By choosing polarity from drop-down menu 1. 2. Your window should now look something like the one below. Place the cursor before the co-ordinate (N.) 4. The character is deleted and the window is closed. S. Datum for output coordinates 5. Vector length. From top: TT/AIS On/Off. 4. CPA time setting." in the figure above. Push the scrollwheel to confirm your selection. When you put the cursor over text or numeric. purple or blue (depending on Palette in use) to indicate that the scrollwheel can be used to scroll options available or change value of number. it turns green. the color of the text changes to purple or blue depending on the Palette in use. Use the scrollwheel to scroll options until Course Up RM appears. 3. User Chart and Notes operations 7. Operating mode 3. Selection is confirmed by pushing the scrollwheel. and the color of the text changes from current color to gray. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The procedure below shows you how to change the presentation mode from North Up TM to Course Up RM. 2. The following selections can be adjusted directly on the screen. CPA auto activate setting. Chart scale 4. 1. As you scroll. Lost target alert setting. . and the color of the text becomes its original color. 1. When you move the cursor away from the text. Past position setting. the color of the text returns to its original color. Chart orientation 2. See also the figure below. Route operations 6. Place the cursor on the text at the location shown by "1. Workstation mode (in case of multiple workstations).ontro nits i i Selections can be made on the screen by pointing on the screen with the cursor then scrolling various options with the scrollwheel. 3.ontro nits i i i i i The scrollwheel incrementing direction can be selected to forward or backward as desired. . Select Operation from the menu. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select Wheel Drive then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to select Normal or Reverse as appropriate then push the scrollwheel. 1. Open the Initial settings menu. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X X X X X X 2. see section 3. Spin the scrollwheel to select menu or function desired. (For more information. as shown in the figure below.) Left Button Right Button F1 F2 F3 F4 Scrollwheel Mouse functions area LEFT MOUSE BUTTON Menu RangeTM Reset Event Set Chart Center Show Value Symbol Display Chart Display SCROLLWHEEL Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON Chart Menu Range+ ShipOffcenter MOB Activate Scroll Nav Marks Standard Display Using the functions shown in the figure above as an example. At the lower right corner of the display the mouse functions area displays available function or menu name.3 "User Interface".ontro nits i i The mouse buttons can be used to call menus or functions on the display. then push the left mouse button. scrollwheel or right mouse button as appropriate to access the menu or function desired. Available menus and functions depend on cursor location. the available functions with the mouse are as follows: x x x "Menu" by pushing left mouse button "Info" by pushing scrollwheel "Chart Menu" by pushing right mouse button . Human Interface. select "BACK TO NORMAL MODE" with the cursor then push the left mouse button. ARCS and S57 drawing processes are automatically restarted. When you switch Standby mode ON. Select Standby then push the scrollwheel. that is. Use it while in harbour or other similar situation where use of the ECDIS is not required. and the menu shown left appears. return to normal operation. . X X X X 5. X 3. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Spin the scrollwheel to select Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel.i i The standby mode deactivates the audio alarms from the ECDIS. The following window appears at the top of the ECDIS display to indicate that audio alarms are switched off. do as shown in the procedure below. 4. . 2. Place the cursor on the triangle inside the Initial Settings dialog box. To switch Standby mode OFF. To switch the Standby mode ON. 1. Stan y o e This page intentionally left blank. . see Chapter 15 "User Chart Control". For more information about Notes. For information about updating S57 charts. i i If necessary. see section 8. create a new Notes or modify an existing one. For how to set Display and Approve dates.i Update your ARCS and S57 chart material before embarking on a new voyage. see section 8. i Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approve dates for S57 charts as the current date There may be features which require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in S57 charts.2 "S57 Vector Charts". Accordingly. if you have not set Display and Approve dates as the current date there is a possibility that you may get a wrong presentation or some feature may be absent. To get more information about updating ARCS charts.12 "Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart". create a new user chart or modify an existing one. see Chapter 9 "Raster Chart Material". For more information about user charts. i i If necessary. . see Chapter 16 "Notes". i i i Create a new route or modify an existing one. For further information about creating or updating a route.Setu efore e arture i Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage. . WPT Alerts Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: WPT Alerts by leg Alerts: Planned Notes This route is unchecked. You can check chart alerts from the Check page on the Plan Route dialog box. see Chapter 11 "Chart Alerts". This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart viewing dates information. which includes safety contour and other chart alerts. i i Before you sail your route. For more information. clicking the Plan button to show the Plan Route dialog box then clicking the Check tab. Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route. The following information is stored with the route during route plan: x x x Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring. you should always check your route against chart alerts. Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route. see Chapter 13 "Route Planning". You can access this dialog box by placing the cursor on Route in the status bar. the name of the user chart and the name of Notes. click the Start button.Setu efore e arture WPT Alerts Legs: 2 Alerts by leg Alerts: Alerts: 2 Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes To store selections on the Alerts page. cancel selection of the planned route in order to enable the selection of it as the route to be monitored. . using "Unselect" in the Plan Route menu. and perform desired optimization. Also. i i Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box. which were selected as planning mode. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time. are stored in this route. After checking the chart alerts and setting the ETD. or use "Exchange with Monitored" on the same sub menu to select it directly as monitored route. 4 "Using planned user chart". For more information about route selection. . see section 14.7.3 "Using checked conditions of the route plan" and section 6. see section 6.7.2 "Choosing Route to Monitor".Setu efore e arture i i i Select a route for the next voyage: Select Route on the status bar then click the Monitor button. For further details on how to use checked conditions. If the text "Checked conditions differ" appears in the dialog box. this means that conditions selected during route planning were different than those selected for use during route monitoring. Safety contours may be changed with the "Safety contour" field in the Display Settings. Use the Monitor Route dialog box to select a waypoint. . Differences between used and planned conditions are displayed with asterisks (*). i You can check on the Alerts page if checked conditions in the Alerts page are used with the route in route monitoring. Check that it is the correct one. Note that waypoint number 1 is not accepted. i i i This selection is used ONLY when the last waypoint should be different than the one defined last in your route. Select used condition during monitoring the same as planned. If needed use the Monitor Route dialog box to select it. use Initial Settings>Chart alert parameters to make "Chart alerts" selections. i ii If the text "Current selection is different" is displayed.Setu efore e arture i i The system selects a TO waypoint automatically. open the Selections page in the Monitor Route dialog box to check that you have correct Notes in the monitoring mode. The text "This has been changed after Route Planning Check" reminds you that Notes has been modified after route planning check. re-check your route against chart alerts. . click the Use button to select Notes as monitoring mode.Setu efore e arture i To check if planned user chart is selected. If the text "Current selection is different" is displayed. i To check if planned Notes is selected. open the Selections page in the Monitor Route dialog box to check that you have the correct user chart in the monitoring mode. If the text "This has been changed after Route Planning Check" is displayed. If the text "Current selection is different" is displayed. click the Use button to select user chart as monitoring mode. when no other heading source is available. Note that in the typical installation Gyro1 is connected to a traditional gyrocompass.Setu efore e arture i i Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If neither Log nor Dual log is available. when no other speed reference is available. Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency. A rate gyro is always automatically selected. . i i i i The operator can select navigation sensors for use in navigation and view their current values. on the Speed/Course page. put the cursor on the position indication in the information area then push the right mouse button. while Gyro2 receives gyro value from either a Autopilot or a DGPS sensor. it indicates that the sensor is not valid.0 /min i i i i In a multiple workstation environment.) 0. Note that the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship. This can be done on the Sensors dialog box. There are "pages" for speed and course and position. Manual heading should only be used in an emergency. or select one of them. If there is no value shown for a sensor. i i i Select both Log and Dual log. SPD/CRS POSN kn kn kn kn kn Radar kn Gyro 1 Gyro 2 Rate gyro (calc. The figure below shows the Speed/Course page. i i i Select Gyro1 or Gyro2 on the Speed/Course page. To display the Sensors dialog box. if they are available. you can use a radar as the source for speed and course. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed sources. verify that the sensor sources indicated are the intended ones. speed and course are also shown. Primary-SecondaryOFF indicates sensor status and priority. For more information about the Kalman Filter. its status is changed to Secondary state. Set all other navigation sensors as "Secondary". the data field of a position sensor contains a label(s) (in the figure at right it is DGPS. Normally turn this feature off in the start-up procedure. i i i The Kalman filter is an automatic process that will calculate the most probable position based on all position sensors. Position sensors have priority. After a sensor is turned off. The filter uses in its process all sensors that are not selected to OFF. Position in local datum. Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off position. GPS+ZDA) which indicates the type of the sensor. A DGPS position sensor also shows the text "Diff" if the differential signal is in use. the sensor formerly primary becomes secondary.9 "Position Alignment".Setu efore e arture i i ii On the POSN page of the Sensors dialog box. and it is used to move the ship to the "correct" position.8 "Filter Operation". . see section 19. which is indicated by Primary and Secondary. When a position sensor state is changed to primary and another sensor was primary. see section 19. i i i The alignment is a correction given by the chart align function. For more information about position alignment. Select the "Primary" navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Select Record then push the scrollwheel. . Note: ARCS raster charts contain some rasterized position information. 2. then push the scrollwheel. Distance counter: Reset both Distance and Trip counters. Once you have selected a datum. 2. To change the datum: 1. the one that matches your paper charts. i i Datum is used to select between different models of the earth. 3. like scale bars on PA paper charts. it is recommended that you use the same datum as your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic chart system and points taken or plotted on your current paper chart. Click the OK button to reset. It is essential that you use datum in a consistent way. Trip counter: Reset Trip counter. Select Distance Counter or Trip Counter as appropriate then push the scrollwheel. Select the datum indication in the top box in the information area. all numerical latitude-longitude position values are presented in your selected datum. Select Reset then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. 5. If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material. which is true only if you have selected native datum of that ARCS chart. 4. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate datum. An appropriate prompts asks you if you are sure to reset selected counter.Setu efore e arture i i i Reset menu Record menu To reset the distance and trip counters to zero. do the following: 1. The prompt window disappears. Setu efore e arture This page intentionally left blank. . 817(19). In areas where ENCs are not available. which you should always read when loading new material into the ECDIS. IMO has specified how those requirements can be fulfilled with a device called ECDIS. One example is a second ECDIS. then your system fulfils IMO A. You have a backup system that fulfils IMO A. Appropriate folio of up-to-date paper chart is carried onboard and available. Your selected display area is covered with up-to-date ARCS charts. .817 requirements. If you use the type-approved version of this ECDIS (BSH type approval certificate number 6579 / 080 138 / 99) you may replace paper charts with electronic ones. Appendix 7 (RCDS 1998). The traditional alternative way to fulfil requirements of the SOLAS Chapter V/20 has been the use of paper charts. In resolution A.ii i i Carriage requirements for adequate and up-to-date charts for a voyage can be found in SOLAS Chapter V/20 of 1974. x x x Own ship area is covered with updated ENC charts. Note that ENC producers provide their conditions of use in the Publisher Notes. floppy disk or LAN". provided the following additional conditions are met: x x x Own ship area is covered with updated ARCS charts.817(19). if required by your flag country administration. raster chart material called ARCS (from UK HO) can be used in the ARCS mode of this ECDIS.817(19).2 "Loading S57 charts from a CD ROM. If the following conditions are met. Your selected display area is covered with updated ENC charts. see section 8. For further details. IMO has specified how requirements of the V/20 of 1974 can be fulfilled when an ECDIS uses the RCDS (Raster Chart Display System) mode. In resolution A.3. No No Have you included the latest updates into your ECDIS? Yes Your system fulfills IMO resolution A.e.817(19) and thus fulfills SOLAS regulation V/20 to carry adequate and up-to-date charts for the intended voyage. you have not signed any limitation paper) Yes No No You should use paper charts Go to flow chart RCDS. on the next page.e. Data flow chart for replacing paper chart with ENC chart material .on itions e uire to e ace a er arts Can your ECDIS replace paper charts No Is ECDIS typeapproved according IEC 61174? Yes Do you have type approved electronic back-up arrangement? (i. second ECDIS) Yes Are official ENCs available for intended voyage? Yes Have responsible Hydrographic Offices published official ENCs without any limitation for use? (i. on itions e uire to e ace a er arts RCDS (Raster Chart Display system) No Is ECDIS type approved according IEC 61174 including RCDS mode (Appendix 7)? Yes No You should use paper charts Are Raster charts available for intended voyage? Yes No Have you included the latest updates into your ECDIS? Yes Have you a minimum set of up-to-date paper charts for RCDS mode as specified by your flag country Administration? Yes No Your system fulfills IMO MSC Meeting 11 Dec 1998 requirements and thus fulfills SOLAS regulation V/20 to carry adequate and up-to-date charts for the intended voyage. Data flow chart for replacing paper chart with Raster chart material . the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position. .on itions e uire to e ace a er arts i i i The electronic chart system can display more than one S57 chart cell at a time. . When automatic TM reset is active. If TM reset is OFF. "Non ENC available" is shown in red text at the upper right-hand corner. This feature is called multi-cell display. If one S57 chart cell does not cover the whole display. the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. the system will open more S57 chart cells for display. In this case you need to have to have an updated paper chart for navigation. This means that raster chart material is displayed on the electronic chart display area. The possible indications are as follows: "RCDS mode" is shown in red text at the upper right-hand corner. The status bar shows information about S57 chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. "No indication" is shown at the upper right-hand corner: This means the S57 chart shown is official ENC material. if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. This means that the S57 chart shown is not official ENC material. International Hydrographic Organisation (IHO) and International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) regulations and rules (S52ed3. electronically from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived from RENCs. i The electronic chart system is compatible with official IHO S57 release 3 chart material produced by Hydrographic Offices (HO). Such material can contain only basic cells. i. then it is called “ENC”. is called ENC (electronic navigational chart). You control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display Until and Approve Until dates. the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts. floppies and LAN. you control all date-dependent objects with Display Until and Approve Until dates. see Appendix 4. etc. then it is called “NON ENC”. manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales from the same area. All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. Before any ENC can be used in the ECDIS. .. and it is employed by the private firm C-MAP. In the paper chart world. Manual updates are valid for both S57 and ARCS charts so you need to define them only once. One technique is called S57ed3 and it has been selected by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic charts. it is an ECDIS as defined by IMO. CD ROMs or floppies. Use. Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your S57 charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a governmentauthorised Hydrographic Office.i i Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as raster or vector chart. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a private firm. presentation and display of S57 charts are based on International Maritime Organisation (IMO). This material. loaded from a floppy disk or loaded through telecommunications from an RENC. which are small additions to original Base cells. For further details. For further details about C-MAP charts. Chart material will be stored in media such as CD ROMs and floppies. This is called “manual updates”. when issued by a government-authorised Hydrographic Office. The electronic chart system contains as standard the software required to access CD ROMs. An ENC could be encrypted to prevent unauthorised use so the user needs a permit to view the ENC. All CM-93/2 charts are NON ENC. You can read more about ENC and related legal issues in Chapter 7.e. Hereafter. An important part of ENCs are the updates. see Chapter 10 “Manual Updates”. they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited period. When this ECS (Electronic Charts system) uses an ENC (S57 release 3 chart produced by a government-authorised Hydrographic Office). This permit could be entered manually from the control head or control unit. Using Display Until and Approve Until dates. x Reissues and new editions. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds of updates: x Incremental updates.1). you can view your charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future. which are complete replacements of previous Base cells and their updates. Another vector coding technique is known as CM-93/2. cells and updates or only updates. all references to vector chart material are referred to as “S57 charts” regardless of their source. In the electronic chart system. Some parts of the charts may be date dependent. IHO and IEC. Also. Vector-coded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. it is loaded into your hard disk and converted into the system’s own internal format (SENC). .ector art ateria Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures. It is this database that is actually accessed by the ECDIS for display and other navigational functions. For how to interpret the S57 ENC chart display. is issued for use with ECDIS without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office. The SENC may also contain information from other sources. The difference of S57 chart and ENC is that non-ENC charts require complete up-to-date paper charts to be used as the primary aid to navigation. Norway. A database. updates to the ENC by appropriate means. besides the chart itself. structure and format. standardized as to content. This ECDIS copies these textual descriptions and pictures into its hard disk so the user may cursor-pick them for viewing purposes. Each cell has a separate unique name. i ii Cell S57 chart A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data.g. ENC SENC RENC . structure and format. tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart (e. A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for appropriate use. A service provider offering ENC delivery and update service as defined in IHO standard S52e3. A database. sailing directions) that may be considered necessary for safe navigation. Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish. Often an RENC provides both CD ROM and telecommunications-based service to ECDIS users. and other data added by the mariner. The name of the coding standard for ENC is S57ed3. operating under the marketing name PRIMAR. One example of an RENC is an RENC in Stavanger. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important sailing directions. standardized as to content. and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. is issued for use with ECDIS on the authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. see Appendix 2. The information is displayed with reference to own ship position if automatic TM reset is active. Harbour and Berthing. Quality of data: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features. clearance height). the system will open more S57 chart cells for display. which is visible on the chart screen. if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display. Navigational purpose: S57 charts are compiled for a variety of navigational purposes. Cell name: Name of chart. Coastal. choosing Chart Legend from the menu and then pushing the scrollwheel. Last displayed update: Number of last update. Approach. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. which is visible on the chart screen Last update appl. Projection: Projection of the chart. Depth: Unit of measurement for depth. By definition this must be WGS 84. or with reference to the current position of the cursor if automatic TM Reset is OFF. Alternatives are: Overview. is effective. Horizontal datum: Horizontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. General. . A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. Issue date: Issue date of the Base cell of the chart. The projection is always Mercator. Update issue date: Issue date of last update. Edition number: Edition number of the chart. given by the chart producer.: Amount of magnetic variation. date: Date to which the last update. which is visible on the chart screen. Vertical datum: Vertical datum of the chart. This feature is called the multi-chart display. can be toggled on and off by placing the cursor in the sidebar. Magnetic var. which provides various data about the chart currently displayed. clicking the right mouse button. The navigational purpose. Sounding datum: Datum used for soundings. for which an individual S57 chart has been compiled by a Hydrographic Office. This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. Height: Unit of measurement for height above sea level (for example.ector art ateria The chart legend. is indicated in this field. 6 “Removing an S57 chart cell from the system”. Only up-to-date S57 charts can be legal replacement for paper charts. the system is unable to know the exact up-to-date situation. Consider removing the chart.7. but these updates are not included in the SENC. see paragraph 8. . see paragraph 8.4. and you have selected not to remove the cancelled chart. For further details. This permanent indication reminds you about your intended use of a cancelled chart.ector art ateria i Permanent warnings help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at the top left corner on the screen. You have expired permit for the chart in Chart permit dialog.3 “Knowing up-to-date status of an RENC Product List”. For further details see paragraph 8. For SENC conversion. Chart permit has been removed after chart was converted to SENC.5. The name of the chart appears in orange in the chart catalogue. Remove permit or renew subscription for permit. see paragraph 8. You have loaded an update which contained cancel information for a chart.12 “Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart”.6 “Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion”. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause the use of charts which are not up-to-date.. For information on how to remove S57 charts. Perform SENC conversion for these charts. For charts which have been loaded from sources other than an RENC. You have loaded updates into your hard disk. Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. ector art ateria i i i i i oa en in o a it u n ti a c o n e r s io n a re c o e te If a n y o f c o n e rs io n fa i s a i i in o a e a rs S c a rts fro es o you re s u t o f S a n t to s e e c o n e r s io n o o y o u a n t to s e e e ta i s o f fa i e c o n e rs io n s es i t a in t in a is t re s s u tto n en i e s ir e o o n tin u e fr o I Data flow chart. How to load S57 charts into ECDIS . ector art ateria urin S con ersion t e syste sets i i ate for t e current syste ate a e a isua ins ection for c an es in s e o ects are ar e it oran e circ e sy os e ete o ects are ar e it oran e s as sy os o ifie o ects are ar e it ot oran e circ e an s as sy os es o you ant to see c an es efore a ro in t e o ro e oa e settin current ate en Se ect Set ate c an es i to y i current oa e s are rea y for use How to load S57 charts into ECDIS (continued) . If your system already has newer text or pictures in use. Click the Browse button to select a new Load Dir. publisher notes and Product List from the CD ROM and then opens the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box. floppy disk or CD ROM. The default load source is from CD ROM. If ECDIS finds a CD-ROM containing chart data then CD-Catalogue will be automatically loaded otherwise window shown below appears. their position. from your LAN (Local Area Network) connection. 4. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. and edition number. 2. which stores certain information into your hard disk such as cell IDs. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. you have to change Load Dir. you can view the contents of it using the Chart Catalogue command in the Chart menu. you will get the notice below. the system asks which charts you want to load from the selected media. If you want to load from another ECDIS using LAN. . Select Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD ROM” from the sub menu (see bottom figure at left).ector art ateria i i When you load S57 charts by CD ROM catalogue. then click the Load button to load from a CD ROM. After building the CD ROM catalogue. 3. The system keeps only the latest version of these. you have to define correct directory. To load by CD ROM catalogue. do the following: 1. The ECDIS loads content summary. Then. the system first loads a CD ROM catalogue. Charts are loaded into ECDIS and then automatically converted to SENC format. Then.ector art ateria 5. Note. click the Load button to load charts into the ECDIS. . you select the charts to load into the ECDIS. Before ECDIS starts loading charts (and then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for this operation. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM window (see page 8-10). See also “Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box” on page 8-10. Check "Permit". that chart and/or its update(s) in conversion list are taken in use after conversion of all charts/updates are completed. Name of CD-ROM appears here. 8. The SENC Convert window appears. 7. IMPORTANT! Check "Permit" 6. 12. the following window appears. When conversion is completed.ector 9. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC. the following window appears. 15.. 13. Repeat the procedure for remaining CD-ROM (floppy). Remove CD-ROM (floppy) and insert next CD-ROM (floppy) . Do step 2 to 10 for the Update CD (floppy). Do step 2 to 10. After you have loaded all charts. art ateria 10. 14. . To find the reason click the Details button. insert "Update CD (floppy)". 11. For more information. “View CD ROM Publisher Notes” button is used to view important notices published by chart producer. x Group: If you have predefined a group of charts. “Load” button is used to start loading. History” button check what is loaded and converted from the CD ROM. A list of charts stored in the CD ROM.ector art ateria i i 1. 6. . The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here. “View CD ROM content Summary” button is used to list charts available on CD ROM and “Load History and Conv. x Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list. In the Load Selector field. see chapter Grouping S57 chart cells. loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not already loaded into the ECDIS 4. you can select how to pick desired charts from the list: x Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected. x Missing only. 5. The “Remove” button is used to remove the CD ROM catalogue permanently from the ECDIS. x Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD ROM and for which you have permits. “Edit Group” button is used to create and modify group. x RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and normally on CD-ROM. edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the chart. 3. ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group which are available in the CD ROM. 2. 9. 10. hit the Print Text button. If you want to make a hard copy of Publisher Notes. hit the Print Text button. To close this window. Click the View CD ROM content Summary button in the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box (see previous page). 8. For how to do this. Each row contains: x x x x x Cell ID: Edition: Base: Name of the chart Edition number of the chart Included update number and issue date of Base cell of the chart First Update: Update number and issue date of the first update included Last Update: Update number and issue date of the last update included 12. click the X in the upper right corner of the window. click the X at the upper right corner of the window. 4. This is the recommended way.2 “Choosing automatic SENC conversion and displaying until date”. Note 2: You should read the text file associated with each catalogue. 7. Click the View CD ROM Publisher Notes button in the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box (see previous page). The text file typically contains very important notices for the usage of the charts from the producing Hydrographic Office.ector art ateria Note 1: The system can make conversion into the SENC and set the “Display Until” date automatically. 11.4. Note 3: You can view the summary of the contents of the CD ROM. A viewer shows information about the selected “CD ROM”. see paragraph 8. To close this window. . It contains information about charts you are going to load. If you want to make a hard copy of the Publisher Notes. History button. 3.ector art ateria i i i You can view what is loaded from a CD ROM using Load History. You can verify which charts are already loaded from the CD ROM. 4. 5. (See page 8-10. which is in the Load or update Charts from CD ROM dialog box. You can verify which charts are already converted from the CD ROM. A window which looks something like the one below appears. Click the Conv. . 2. i i i i Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. 1. (See page 8-10. Click the Load History button. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. A window which looks something like the one below appears.) Select desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROMs.) Select desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROMs. i If you try to load charts with the same edition already loaded into your hard disk or if you try to load the same update already loaded into your hard disk.) Select desired CD ROM. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. you can remove them as follows: 1. you get the following messages after clicking the Load button. If you want to avoid the very time consuming task of reloading charts which you already have. However if you want to reload charts. Use the Remove button to permanently remove selected CD ROM catalogue from ECDIS. . 2.ector art ateria i If you have unnecessary CD ROM catalogues on your CD ROM list. then you should select “No for all” option in above window. (See page 8-10. then select “Yes for all” option in above window. This indicates that you are using the updates mentioned in the box. This indicates that you are using a newer reissue of the chart mentioned in the box. . see paragraph 8. . you will get one of the following messages: This indicates that you are using a newer edition of the chart mentioned in the box. Note: You cannot replace chart data which is already in use unless you only replace the latest Base cell or update.ector art ateria i i i If you tried to load chart data which is older than you already have in your hard disk.5.6 “Removing an S57 chart cell from the system”. If you want to reload older data again. For further details. . you must first remove the chart from your hard disk. which includes this update. This indicates that you are using a newer reissue of the chart mentioned in the box. ENC to SENC conversion fails or detects errors If the SENC conversions detect anything abnormal. you will get following message: The message above clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements.ector art ateria i i i All messages in this chapter change the legal status of the charts in your system. . Study these messages very carefully because you may need to use paper charts to fulfil SOLAS requirements.4 “S57 SENC Conversion Details”. see paragraph 8. Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately. A new edition of the chart has been published and you missed it If you tried to load updates for a chart for which you do not have new enough Base cell or reissue in your hard disk. Test before ENC to SENC conversion fails CRC checksum is tested before the SENC conversion and if it fails you get this message. you get following message window: For further details. ector art ateria You do not have all the published updates If you tried to load updates and you missed one or more updates between updates already loaded into your hard disk and the updates that you are loading. Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately to replace the unsafe cancelled chart. then you get following message: The message above indicates that you tried to load update numbers 3. The reason might be that you do not have anything better available. Check the content of your CD ROMs to find the missing update/updates or contact your chart supplier. The message above clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. you should accept the cancellation by clicking the Yes button. you get following message: Normally. In this case. because the publisher has told so in his special cancellation update. Note that the cancellation message above clearly indicates that the publisher says that this chart is unsafe for navigation and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. 4 and 5 when at least update 2 and possibly update 1 were not available in your hard disk. Then the system automatically removes the ENC status from the chart. You may elect to keep the chart although the publisher of it has told you that the content of the chart is so unsafe that they have cancelled it. Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately. Then the system automatically removes the chart from the hard disk and from your chart screen. click the No button. . Unsafe chart has been cancelled by the publisher If you load an update which contains instructions from the publisher to cancel the chart. which includes a Base cell.000 file. x XXXXXXXX. The system may also make conversion into the SENC and setting of Display Until date automatically if you have set up for them. in which NNN is a number from 001 to 999. you can select desired drive and charts. 2. When you are ready to load charts. . To load charts without building a named “CD ROM catalogue” do the following: 1. Minimum requirements for loading manually is legally coded: x XXXXXXXX.NNN file. This can take a few minutes. Select Load and Update Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu. click the Load Chart button. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button.ector art ateria i i i i The ECDIS could in some cases load S57 charts which do not have full compliance with S57 standard coding for transfer media. Then. and which includes an update. a) Roll the scrollwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. Paragraph 8. An ENC has to be converted into SENC format before it can be used in the ECDIS. In this window you can select any of the charts to see the reason for failure in conversion. If the conversion is successful. c) Click the right arrow tab to display the Other page. The system can conduct SENC conversion in the background during any other system operations.000. d) Uncheck Radar. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Active Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. . Paragraph 8.ector art ateria i i S57 charts from Hydrographic Offices are called ENCs. Select control of visible navigation features as “Off” for radar overlay. Set the scale to 1:1. 3. Select display mode (upper left corner on the status bar) as True Motion. The ECDIS can convert ENC into SENC format automatically. Normally the conversion is initiated automatically when a chart is loaded. the Failed SENC conversion window appears with a list of failed ENCs. b) Select “ECDIS only” and then push the scrollwheel. e) Click the X at the top right corner of the window to close the window. 5. 4. a) Click Radar on the status bar with the left mouse button to show the Radar Overlay window. You can also initiate conversion from The SENC Convert window or from a cell status window.2 describes how to select automatic conversion.000 by displaying Range+/ /Range.in the mouse functions area and pushing the appropriate mouse button to display 1:1. Set chart center so ship is off the screen or TM reset is OFF. the Failed SENC conversion window does not appear. Speeding up SENC conversion The SENC conversion speed depends about how many other tasks the system is occupied with.4. but you can greatly lessen the time for SENC conversion by doing the following: Disable radar overlay by choosing radar overlay mode as “ECDIS only”.3 “Loading S57 Charts” describes the loading process. If the system fails to convert ENC into SENC or if the system detects a coding error in an ENC. display dates can be set as issue dates automatically. 2. Do the following to set these options: 1. . Check Automatic SENC conversion and Automatic Display Until. A SENC Convert Settings dialog box appears: 4. Select System in the menu and then SENC Convert Settings from the menu and then push the scrollwheel. Click the X at the top of the dialog box to close the box. 3.ector art ateria i i i i i When you are loading new S57 charts Base cells and/or their updates into your hard disk. 5. they can be automatically converted to SENC format. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse function area and then push the right mouse button. Further. ector art ateria i i i 1. Note: You can remove charts from the conversion list at any time. If you want to view the progress of SENC conversion. History button. display the SENC Convert window as follows: The example above shows a queue of unfinished SENC conversions. You can view the results of loaded charts from a CD ROM by clicking the Load History button. you can see CD ROM history by clicking the CD History button. Then. or you can view the results of the finished SENC conversions by clicking Conv. 2. The SENC Convert window appears. click the Cancel Conv. Select SENC Convert from the menu and then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. . Use the cursor to highlight desired amount of chart names in the Conversion List. button to remove those charts from the SENC conversion queue. Then. The example above shows that all SENC conversions have been finished. 3. Note: chart and/or its update(s) in conversion list are taken in use after conversion of all charts/updates are completed. History button is used to display the conversion log. Note that the status of errors together with NON ENC in Conv History clearly indicate that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get the latest edition of this chart from the publisher immediately. Then you can click the Conv Log button to view a detailed description of errors and failures detected during SENC conversion (see example below). Status of Errors means that the system detected minor or major errors in the conversion of the ENC into the SENC. The conversion log shows the status of converted ENCs. Get the latest edition of this chart from the publisher immediately. “Failed” means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be used. For further details about the results of conversions. The Failed SENC conversion window contains two buttons. Conv. Failure clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. History opens the conversion history log and Cell Status opens the window of selected item in the list of Failed SENC conversions window. and a Cell Status window appears. the Failed SENC conversion window appears with a list of failed ENCs. see paragraph 8. . Check the content of Conv. History. Status of Failure means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be used.4. The Conv. History and cell status to see if the error was minor or major. Click the Cell Status button. Major errors are indicated as NON ENC in Conv.5 “Using SENC conversion history log”.ector art ateria i i i i If the system is unable to convert ENC into SENC without any error or failure. edt: . History button. upd: 0 / 1999 4 3 i i i i A private chart cannot fulfil SOLAS requirements and you must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. Select SENC Convert from the menu and then push the scrollwheel. 2. conv: ENC: AS31MATT. 4. upd: 0 / 1998 6 12 Use cell status to check details of errors.ector art ateria i i i The system automatically records the results of all conversions into the conversion history log.000. Successful auto. conv: ENC: GB203000. History from the “Failed SENC conversions” window. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. Below are examples of all possible results of conversion: Successful auto. 3. Click the X at top right corner to close the window. The SENC Convert window appears. 5. A list of converted charts appears: You can view the status of converted charts on the list. Successful auto. You can view the content of this log at any time by doing the following: 1. Note: You can also activate the Conv. edt: 1.000. click the Conv. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. upd: 0 / 1999 4 8 NON ENC i i 3. conv with errors: ENCD ROME416050. After conversion (Conversion list is empty). edt: 1. and also source if it is available.000. Note that the chart is still ENC. edt: 1. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. edt: new edition of Base cell 2.ector art ateria i i Use cell status to check details of errors. Try to reload the failed previous update from the original media (in this example the failed previous update is GB5X01SW. And if that doesn't work. Note that the chart is still ENC. upd: 0 / 1999 2 17 i i Chart is partly usable. And if that doesn't work. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation.000. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW. Failed automatic conversion: ENCD ROMK3EI0XE. edt: 1. but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. but it is not up-to-date. upd: 2 / 2005 1 1 CHECKSUM ERROR i i i i i i i The system cannot accept additional updates unless all previous updates have been successfully converted into the SENC. upd: 1 / 1998 9 8 PREVIOUS Base CELL ays stu y ot t e ai e S con ersion ia o an on ersion istory o ery carefu y ecause t ey contain i ortant infor ation a out t e e a status of t e c arts S ecia y note t at a c art ay ose its e a status to fu fi S S re uire ents an you ay nee to refer to a a er c art as e a ri ary ai of na i ation . when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.002. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.000. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: SG5CONTL. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW. but it is not up-to-date and you need the latest edition of the chart from its publisher. Try to reload the Base cell or update from the original media. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. edt: 1. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. conv: ENC: GB500005.000). upd: 0 / 1996 2 25 CHECKSUM ERROR i i i Chart is partly usable. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. upd: 3 / 2005 9 8 PREVIOUS Update i i i i i i The system cannot accept updates unless the Base cell has been successfully converted into the SENC. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. Note that the chart is still ENC.002). upd: 0 / 1999 1 4 NON ENC i i Chart is not usable and you cannot view the chart.001. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the Base cell from the original media (in this example the failed Base cell is GB5X01SW. Note that the chart is no longer ENC if it was produced by a Hydrographic Office. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. edt: 1. Chart is not usable and you cannot view it.000. Note that the chart is still ENC. Chart is partly usable. edt: OR Update MISSING 1. when you navigate in the area covered by this chart. Try to reload the update from the original media. upd: 1 / 1997 9 26 Updating impossible before i i i Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation. edt: MISSING 1. Failed auto. order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. conv with errors: ENC: n1302322.001. Successful auto.003. order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. If. Another case in which you need to manually initiate SENC conversion is if you upgraded or reloaded the ECDIS software from the ECDIS software CD ROM. Note 2: You can view the results of the finished SENC conversions at any time. click the Cancel Conv. 3.ector art ateria i i i ii i Normally automatic SENC conversion is selected and there is no need to initiate SENC conversions from the SENC convert window. 2. Use the Cells button to select an individual chart or use the Groups button to select a group of charts. refer to paragraph 8. you need to force SENC conversion of an already converted chart. History button to view the conversion log. they are added to the Conversion list (see the example below). you need to manually initiate SENC conversion. Then click the Convert button to initiate the SENC conversion of the charts. If you do not use the automatic SENC conversion. Note that Convert only converts those charts which are not currently converted into the SENC format. the Conversion list remains empty. Note 1: You may remove charts from the conversion list at any time. do the following: 1. for some reason. Select SENC Convert from the menu and push the scrollwheel. Use the cursor to highlight the charts to remove and then click the Select button. The SENC Convert window appears: 4. To initiate SENC conversions manually. If your selected chart or all members of your selected group are already in the SENC format.15 “Other Features of Vector Charts”. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. Finally. If all or some charts are not yet in the SENC format. . Click the Conv. button to remove selected charts from the SENC conversion queue. floppies or LAN (Local Area Network).” SENC Convert: You can convert ENCs (Base cells and/or updates) into the SENC format by individual cell or by groups of cells. see paragraph 8. Activate ARCS chart: This function activates ARCS chart onto the screen.6 “Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion”. Chart permits:You can load permits for encrypted charts to enable their use in your ECDIS. You can compare that you have the latest cell with latest update in use.13 “Symbology Used in Vector Charts”. Open Chart by Cell name: You can open a S57 chart by its number. see Chapter 10 “Manual Updates”. This function helps you familiarize yourself with the various chart symbologies used with the ECDIS. “Ignore scale” opens an ARCS chart with the chart scale used the last time you opened an ARCS chart.5. . number of updates of the cell) stored in your hard disk. For more information. CD ROMs or RENC. “Sync scale” opens an ARCS chart with a scale which is as close as possible to the scale which was used with S57 charts. Chart Catalogue: You can manage S57 charts. number of updates available.5. For the procedure. For further details see the paragraph 8. For further details.12 “Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart”. see paragraph 8.6 “Removing S57 charts from the system”. Currently PRIMAR and CMAP use encryption. update approve dates of the cells) in the SENC format. see paragraph 8.3 “Loading S57 Charts.ector art ateria i The Chart menu provides various features for processing charts. Manual Updates: You can update your charts manually.10. To display the menu. See paragraph 8.15 “Other Features of Vector Charts”. Set Chart viewing dates: You can view date dependency of the cells (RENC status query date. spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then click the right mouse button. See paragraph 8.2 “Choosing charts for viewing”. For detailed information. Chart Cell Status: You can view status of the cells (edition number and date. update display dates. ECDIS Chart 1: This is used to open the chart set “IHO ECDIS Chart 1”. using CD ROMs. see paragraph 8. For further details. Remove Charts: You can remove cells from your hard disk.4. Load and Update Charts: You can load ENCs into your hard disk. See paragraph 8.2 “Catalogue of S57 cells”. You have two options for how to open the chart on the display. which is used as your identifier in security systems such as PRIMAR and CMAP. If you accidentally select this option. Refresh charts after backup This is used to refresh available charts and updates after someone backs up all charts and updates from another ECDIS to this ECDIS. if you are not able to move chart or zoom in/out. Restart drawing process This is used to restart chart drawing. Use restart drawing process. User permit You can check your user permit. you get the display shown left. S52 presentation library You can confirm the S52 presentation library revision number for S57 charts. Click the OK button to escape. The current official Presentation library is shown in this example.ector System: art ateria System contains a set of additional selections. This feature demonstrates chart uploading and downloading. and they are described below: Log file The log file contains various system events which might be useful when your system supplier tries to find the reason for unexpected behavior of the system reported by you. Reset files For factory-use only. See the example at left. . You can cursorpick any chart by going over its limit and then you can view the information for it. Spin the scrollwheel to select Chart Catalogue and then push the scrollwheel. 5. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 1. 4. Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts. do the following: 1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. 8-27 . Note that sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it. 3. available in a named “CD ROM” or available from an RENC. Vector Chart Material 8. 2. 2.2 Catalogue of S57 cells An S57 catalogue is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your hard disk.5.8. To display the catalogue. x Navigation purpose: Display charts for selected navigation purpose overview. The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows: Green The chart is available for use in SENC format.5. 2. berthing . If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC. x RENC: Display charts available from an RENC. x RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts which are cancelled in an RENC. 5. but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display. The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been cancelled. Group: or further details. harbour. You have a permit to use the chart. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is also up-to-date. Source of Chart Catalogue x CD: Display charts available in a named “CD ROM”. approach. x C-Map: Display charts available from C-Map. C-Map does not appear. the SENC is missing the latest updates or the chart has been cancelled. 3. The chart re uires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the chart currently. If the chart is permit free. “ rouping S57 chart cells”. Orange Red Blue Magenta 8-28 . Selected Chart x x x Cell: Name of the chart Cell Status: Opens Cell Status window. If C-Map charts are not installed.8. The chart is available either in ENC format. see paragraph . Vector Chart Material 1. then all loaded updates are included into the SENC. or e ample. 4. you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. x Group: Display charts which are member of selected group. View Filters x Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display. coastal. x Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit. general. Either the SENC is from a former edition. in SENC format for another software version or in SENC format for another ECDIS. x SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format. the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you loaded a chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format. Select Load or Update charts>From CD ROM in Chart menu. Click the Edit Group button. for example. To do this. all cells which cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office. i i When you load or update S57 charts from CD ROM. . proceed as follows: 1. This means you can collect related charts.ector art ateria i You can define groups of S57 charts. A "Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM" window appears kn kn kn 2. You can make a group and define charts included to group using either "Chart Catalogue" or "Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM" window. you are able to define a group in "Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM" window. Enter name for group then click the Add Frame button. art ateria Click the New Group button. kn kn kn 4.ector 3. kn kn kn . 7. kn kn kn 6. When you have completed . When frame is completed. kn kn kn . Define a frame.ector art ateria 5. then click the Done button. click the Close Edit button. Now you can load charts member of group Japan by clicking the Load button. kn kn kn 9. i i Chart Catalogue can be used to define a group as follows: 1. Click the Edit Group button followed by the New button. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 2.ector 8. art ateria Select Group as a qualifier for loading. Select "Chart Catalogue" from Chart menu window. . Define frame using the left mouse button in "Select" mode. Click the Add Frame button. kn kn kn  CD  RENC RENC   SENC SENC   C-Map C-Map art ateria 4. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 5. Enter name for Group.ector 3. Click the Done button. . ector 6. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map . art ateria Select Group to view content of group in Chart Catalogue window. 3. ">>" appears between Inside and Outside at the right side of the screen. Select desired group. Click the Edit Group button. Use the Remove frame button to define area for charts or pick charts individually from the list. . 4. Click the icon. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map Select “Group” to activate a Group selection. Click “Edit Group”. When you select a cell. 2. Select desired group.ector art ateria i You can remove chart cells from a defined group as follows: 1. if you like to use Graphical catalogue or pick individual cell using left mouse button “Select” and then click “>>“ button. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map Use “Remove Frame” button. ector art ateria i You can delete a defined group as follows: kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map Use Remove a group button to delete i i i i To view active group do the following: kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map Select Group to activate a Group selecion. Select desired group. Check "Group" selection and select desired group from list box. . You can enter desired date by using the Display Until field. Select Set Chart viewing dates from the Chart menu. the system sets Display Until of S57 chart cell(s) as current date of the system. then the date of the Product List is displayed as “—NVLD—”. Recommended settings in Chart viewing date are: x Sync Manual Update Dates: ON position x All SENCs: ON position RENC edt / upd: The column “RENC” contains edition/update status from Product List. do the following: 1.) Cancelled charts are indicated as “cancelled” instead of “edtn/updn”. Updates approv. (You may need to load newer RENC Product List. The “<<<” mark is used to indicate that SENC contains newer information than the information in an RENC Product List. until: View the Date Until updates is approved.e. Updates displ. The issue date of the Product List used is displayed as “Latest RENC Product List”. . 2. If the ECDIS does not contain any Product List. SENC edt / upd: The column “SENC” contain edition/update status from “SENC”. You can enter desired date by using the Approve Until field (number of approved updates / number of updates in SENC format). then the indication “>>>” is replaced with “XXX”.. i. You can view status and set viewing dates of S57 chart cells and their updates. The Chart Viewing date dialog box appears. Select item and then push left mouse button to execute. An RENC Product List contains information about the charts stored in RENC and the date when the Product List was issued. you must open the Set Chart viewing dates dialog box and perform Approve Until. The “>>>” mark is used to indicate that a chart is not up-to-date. Note: You can perform various scrolling functions by placing the cursor on the scroll bar and pushing the right mouse button to show the sub menu below. loaded and converted in the ECDIS. To set Approve Until as current date of the system. The number after the date shows the number of updates for the displayed cell (number of displayed updates / number of updates in SENC format). To view status and date dependency. until: “date until updates” is displayed.ector art ateria i i i i i i When you load S57 chart cell(s) and/or their updates. If an SENC contains a cancelled chart. Select Remove Charts from the Chart menu. You can remove Base cell (000). Select chart cells to remove from the system.ector art ateria i To remove an S57 format vector chart cell from the system. 3. Press Remove Chart button. 2. . updates (001…) and SENC format (snc). do the following: 1. Confirm removal by pressing OK button The system will remove file(s) from the hard disk. A permit in RENC security is connected to an edition. It is assumed that a typical user is a non-SOLAS class ship. It is assumed that a typical user is a SOLAS class ship. Then. Select Remove Charts from the Chart menu. Each permit also includes the expiry date. which are background charts of system and AA<DIR> which are ECDIS 1 charts. which is not required to use up-to-date charts. Select all directories in Contents list. which is required to use up-to-date charts. These include updates for subsequent 12 months. An RENC can issue permits in two formats: . These include only updates up to the issue date of the permit. except 7C<DIR>. you have to be authorized as a customer of an RENC. 2. Confirm removal by pressing OK button The system will remove file(s) from the hard disk.ector art ateria 1. If the issue date of a chart or update is older or equal to the permit expiry date. Press Remove Chart button. There are no viewing time limits as used in some other security systems such as ARCS. i i Before you can use an RENC service. then the system can convert an ENC into the SENC. x One-Off permit. The expiry date of a permit controls the ENC to SENC conversion. The user has a right to view a chart forever and more over he has a right to convert a chart from its ENC format into the SENC forever. Permits are issued as two different types: x Subscription permit. To be authorized you have to contact an official distributor (chart agent) of RENC. the following services are available: i Permits are used to control the permission to use a chart. 3. i i Normally the authentication process is invisible to the user.pmt” format creates confusion because it cannot support the user when chart edition changes. This list contains an up-to-date list of available charts and their edition/update status in an RENC. but cannot apply any new information User will receive the following during the service period: x All updates issued to the ENC x Any re-issues for the ENC . x PERMIT. but the older “*.TXT format. then it is copied into the ECDIS. RENC may publish a new public key. the ECDIS checks the issue date of the Product List.ector art ateria x “*. Examples are “will expire” warning 30 days before the expiry date and “have expired” after the expiry date. If the CRC checksum test or authentication fails. A public key is stored in the ECDIS and it is truly public. If you want to enlarge your chart coverage. and as a text file. x Update CD ROM contains all updates to the Base CD ROM. You can retrieve the Product List from an RENC via telecommunications or you can load it from the CD ROM of an RENC. This format does not include the applicable chart edition nor does it include applicable permit type. The system display warnings associated with expiry date. x x x x User subscribes to an updating service Updating service has a renewable expiration date ENC is still available after expiration. From a user point of view. Both permit formats are fully operational. but it will also contain any new Base cells and new edition and re-issues received from the contributing Hydrographic Offices. A digital signature associated with each chart contains a private key. by front page of a newspaper.TXT format supports the system to suppress irrelevant warnings associated with expiry date. Update CD ROM will be issued once a week. i A Product List is maintained by an RENC. Authentication uses a private key and a public key. This format includes the applicable chart edition as well as applicable permit type. for example. i i Subscription period is 12 months and it starts when you order first permit(s) from an RENC. If the issue date indicates a newer Product List. There are two different kinds of permits: subscription and one-off. you receive the following from an RENC: x Base CD ROM contains all Base cells that are available in an RENC CD ROM database when the CD ROM was released. PRIMAR. etc. i i i If you are using a CD ROM service. Only the new PERMIT. This public key will be available as text by fax. then ECDIS shows a notice to the user that newer Product List is already loaded. When you load a CD ROM or use telecommunications to receive a Product List from an RENC.PUB. These warnings are relevant only for Subscription permits. i i Charts and their updates stored in RENC are decrypted and you have to get a key (permit) to load charts into the ECDIS. then the chart is unusable. Only if the authentication fails. the authentication is similar to the CRC checksum test. you have to contact your distributor to order more permits for new charts. by post.pmt” format. If the issue date indicates an older Product List. then the user gets an appropriate notice. . In the one-off permit. One-Off Latest Edition: Permit for a chart which is the latest available based on the Product List of an RENC.e. chart is up-to-date when you ordered it). One-Off Current Edition: Permit for a chart which is based on data on the hard disk of the ECDIS.ector x Any new edition of the ENC art ateria If you enlarge your chart coverage during your subscription period as shown above. No more information can be retrieved for this chart.. you order permit for chart and updates which are valid until date you order permit (i. the date of subscription expiration for all charts will be the same date. which is published after order date. the latest SENC update was missed or the chart has been cancelled. Select RENC  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 2. you cannot use the chart currently.ector art ateria i i i i i To view the Product List in graphical presentation. use the catalogue. If the chart requires a permit and you do not have the permit for the chart. Thus the ECDIS does not load the Product List if it is older than the one already loaded into the ECDIS. Either the SENC is from a previous edition. The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been cancelled. The chart is available either in ENC format. you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC then all loaded updates are included into the SENC. in SENC format for another software version or in SENC format for another ECDIS. If the source of the chart is an RENC. which you may display by opening the Chart menu and choosing Chart Catalogue. For example the chart is blue during SENC conversion and if you loaded a chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format. then the chart is also up-to-date. kn kn kn 1. but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. Orange Red Blue Magenta . Select desired Filters The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows: Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. You have a permit to use the chart. The catalogue of S57 charts shows the situation when you last ordered the Product List from an RENC or loaded the latest Base or Update CD ROM into the ECDIS. If the chart is permit free. Note: The ECDIS automatically keeps the latest available Product List. See the Permanent Warning below.1 “Viewing the coverage of an RENC service”. this means that the charts used were checked against the Product List and at least one of the charts used is not up-todate. .ector art ateria i To keep charts up-to-date. You can also use the Chart viewing dates window in the Chart menu when you have doubt that some charts are not up-to-date or the Permanent Warning shown above is displayed.7. you should check for updates with an RENC weekly. The ECDIS compares charts used to Product List of an RENC. The names of charts which are not up-to-date appear in orange. If a Permanent Warning appears on the chart display of ECDIS (at the upper left corner). The easiest method to check if charts are up-to-date is to view the catalogue and check that the names of all required charts appear in green. The information of available charts and their up-to-date status is available both in the catalogue and in the Chart viewing dates window. For further details see paragraph 8. The information is based on the lastordered Product List. 4. 3. If a chart in the ECDIS is newer than the associated chart in an RENC. 6. 5. 2. RENC edt / upd: The chart's edition and its update in an RENC appear here. the RENC edt/upd field shows “1/ 21” and the SENC edt/ upd field shows “1/ 0”. . for example. for example. the Chart viewing date window the RENC edt/upd field shows “2/ 8” and the SENC edt/ upd field shows “2/ 9”.ector art ateria i i i i 1. SENC edt / upd: The chart's edition and its update in the ECDIS appear here. If a chart is not available in an RENC but it is in the ECDIS the RENC edt/upd shows “ -/ -”. If a chart in the ECDIS is older than the associated chart an RENC. Chart Displayed and Approved Until are set based on Updates number (Updates Displayed and Approved until as NVLD (Not Valid) indication). The date the Product List was last ordered is shown at the lower left corner of the Chart viewing dates window.ector art ateria i i The ECDIS periodically checks for the last time you ordered the Product List from an RENC. If the Product List is more than 30 days old. proceed as follows: Select Chart viewing dates from the menu. . the ECDIS displays the S57 Message shown below: To check the date when you have last time ordered Product List of RENC. i i i i 1. 3. All subscription-type permits will expire on the same date. The user has a right to view a chart forever. 2.ector art ateria i i Permits are used to control the right to use a chart in the ECDIS. 3. 4. Public Key lets you view a public key or load a new one. The Expires field shows the expiration date of permits. Subscription or O. The Type field shows type of permit held for a chart: S. x One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the permit. but it will not complete the requirements for having up-to-date charts. Note that when a new edition of a chart is issued a new permit is required. If a permit has expired. Permits are issued in different types: x Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 12 months. 6. To view the Chart Permits window. It is possible to have permits for different editions of the same chart. 2. it is impossible to load a chart or its update which was issued after the expiration date of the permit. 5. The Edt (Edition) field displays edition number of a chart to which the permit is valid. 5. Load File enables downloading from an RENC when you receive permits from that RENC. The ECDIS will warn you when you are loading charts or updates which are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. The expiry date of a permit controls the loading of Base charts and their updates to the ECDIS. 4. One-off. 6. A permit in an RENC ENC service is connected to an edition of a chart. open the Chart menu and select Chart Permits. Backup makes a back-up copy of permits. Source filter Select All Unselect All ALL 1. . PUB) x JHA (file name: SAT. Source filter Select All Unselect All ALL . i i The procedure below shows how to manage a public key. TXT) You must load a public key when you load a chart. the system will automatically warn you about the expiration date of your subscription licence. 1. AVCS (file name: PRIMAR. There are two types of public keys: x RENC: Primar. Warning about soon-to-be-expired subscription is activated every 12 hours when it is less than 30 days from the expiration date. Warning about expired subscription is activated every 12 hours after the subscription has expired. Select Chart Permits from the Chart menu. Note: The top half of this message display provides a warning that the Product List is not up-to-date.ector art ateria i i i If you have at least one subscription-type permit. pub" (or SAT. AVCS 96EF 14E3 2BA5 3729 800E 054E 67B8 2BB9 28F2 4F15 B073 0C49 031B 28E5 C764 1002 564D B959 95B1 5CF8 5978 1582 69ED 79F0 C4F4 926B 1776 1CCB 9EB7 7C98 7EFB SSE 26: Current Public Key is not issued by IHO. Insert the floppy disk/CD-ROM that contains the public key then click the Load New button to load a new public key.TXT for JHA Load 4. Click the Public Key button. (Click the X button if you don't accept. Permit Load Drive A A: Go Up PRIMAR. The Public Key Dialog box appears. showing the conents loaded to the ECDIS. SSE 26: Current Public Key is not issued by IHO.ector art ateria 2. Public key dialog box for PRIMAR.) . The "Permit load" dialog box appears.TXT) from the Contents window then click the Load button. Public key dialog box for JHA 3. SSE 26: Current Public Key is not issued by IHO. Select "PRIMAR. click the Accept New button to accept the new public key. If you accept the contents. 6.PUB SAT. The Public Key Dialog box appears. ector art ateria i i i i i i a e a Su scri tion n ser ree ent it your c art istri utor Sen a ist of arts to your istri utor e e er Su scri tion ty e ou recei e er its etc oa i into IS oa into IS oa into IS . ector art ateria i i i i Su scri tion ty e i i ou recei e a ont y ac et ee y or Su scri tion ty e If you recei e ne oa t e into i IS ou o not recei e auto atica y anyt in If you recei e ne oa it into IS an er its S an s at re u ar inter a s ou recei e ne er its etc r er ne atest oa ates fro t e atest oa i into IS fter ont s fro Su scri tion a ree ent or er ne er its oa into IS oa t e atest into IS . ector art ateria i i i i se ata o ue of S to se ect a itiona arts arts Sen a ist of arts to your istri utor e e er Su scri tion ty e ou recei e oa i into IS ne er its etc oa into IS oa t e atest into IS . Click the Browse button to select a new Load Dir. 4. load charts into the ECDIS as follows: 1. you have to define correct directory. 5. 2. The ECDIS loads content summary. If ECDIS finds a CD-ROM containing chart data then CD-Catalogue will be automatically loaded otherwise window shown below appears.7. then click the Load button to load from a CD ROM. For details. you have to change Load Dir. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button.5 “Managing public key from an RENC”. This is very important if you receive CD ROMs for multiple RENC. If your system already has newer text or pictures in use. The system keeps only the latest version of these. . publisher notes and Product List from the CD ROM and then opens the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box. you will get the notice below. see paragraph 8. Check that you have already loaded correct Public key. Select Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD ROM” from the sub menu (see bottom figure at left).ector art ateria A Base CD ROM from an RENC contains all the charts stored in an RENC when the CD ROM was issued. The default load source is from CD ROM. If you want to load from another ECDIS using LAN. When you load charts (using the CD ROM catalogue) the following information is also loaded into the ECDIS hard disk: x The Content Summary of the Base CD ROM x Publisher Notes x Product List When you receive a new Base CD ROM from an RENC. 3. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue. ector art ateria 6. you select the charts to load into the ECDIS. See also “Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box” on page 8-10. kn kn kn Then. Before ECDIS starts loading charts (and then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for this operation. click the Load button to load charts into the ECDIS. . 7. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM window (see page 8-10). Charts are loaded into ECDIS and then automatically converted to SENC format. 9. The SENC Convert window appears. see chapter “Viewing load history of CD ROM” on page 8-12. To find the reason click the Details button. . For more information. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC. When conversion is completed. 10. the following window appears. the following window appears.ector art ateria 8. 5. loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not already loaded into the ECDIS 4. “Edit Group” button is used to create and modify group. 6. 7. edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the chart. “View CD ROM content Summary” button is used to list charts available on CD ROM and “Load History and Conv. see chapter Grouping S57 chart cells “Load” button is used to start loading. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here. For more information.ector art ateria i i kn kn kn 1. In the Load Selector field. 4. x Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD ROM and for which you have permits. 3. 1. 6. History” button check what is loaded and converted from the CD ROM. 2. you can select how to pick desired charts from the list: x Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected. “View CD ROM Publisher Notes” button is used to view important notices published by chart producer. 3. x Missing only. ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group which are available in the CD ROM. x Group: If you have predefined a group of charts. . 5. 2. A list of charts stored in the CD ROM. The “Remove” button is used to remove the CD ROM catalogue permanently from the ECDIS. x RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and normally on CD-ROM. x Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list. 7. 2. then click the Load button to load from a CD ROM. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue. If ECDIS finds a CD-ROM containing chart data then CD-Catalogue will be automatically loaded otherwise window shown below appears. If your system already has newer text or pictures in use. The default load source is from CD ROM. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. For details. see paragraph 8. 5. publisher notes and Product List from the CD ROM and then opens the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box. The ECDIS loads content summary. Click the Browse button to select a new Load Dir. load charts into the ECDIS as follows: 1. you have to change Load Dir.5 “Managing public key from an RENC”. When you load charts by a CD ROM catalogue the following information is also loaded into the ECDIS hard disk: x The Content Summary of the Update CD ROM x Publisher Notes x The Product List When you receive a new Update CD ROM from an RENC. Check that you have already loaded correct Public key. 3.ector art ateria An Update CD ROM from an RENC contains all the updates included for charts stored in an RENC when the latest Base CD ROM was issued. 4. The system keeps only the latest version of these. Select Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD ROM” from the sub menu (see bottom figure at left). you will get the notice below. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. If you want to load from another ECDIS using LAN. you have to define correct directory. . This is very important if you receive CD ROMs for multiple RENC. you select the charts to load into the ECDIS. Before ECDIS starts loading charts (and then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for this operation. See also “Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box” on page 8-10.ector art ateria 6. . click the Load button to load charts into the ECDIS. 7. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM window (see page 8-10). kn kn kn Then. Charts are loaded into ECDIS and then automatically converted to SENC format. For more information. When conversion is completed. The SENC Convert window appears. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC. . To find the reason click the Details button. 9.ector art ateria 8. 10. the following window appears. the following window appears. see chapter “Viewing load history of CD ROM” on page 8-12. x Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list. x Missing only. you can select how to pick desired charts from the list: x Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected. 3. ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group which are available in the CD ROM. 2. x Group: If you have predefined a group of charts. “View CD ROM Publisher Notes” button is used to view important notices published by chart producer. 6. see chapter Grouping S57 chart cells “Load” button is used to start loading. A list of charts stored in the CD ROM. loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not already loaded into the ECDIS 4. For more information. “Edit Group” button is used to create and modify group. edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the chart. In the Load Selector field. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here. 5. “View CD ROM content Summary” button is used to list charts available on CD ROM and “Load History and Conv. . x Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD ROM and for which you have permits. History” button check what is loaded and converted from the CD ROM.ector art ateria i i 1. The “Remove” button is used to remove the CD ROM catalogue permanently from the ECDIS. x RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and normally on CD-ROM. To show all cells. During loading. when you load a chart. uncheck "Permit". Then. check "Missing only". Then. kn kn kn Sample coverage area when a CD ROM catalogue is from a Base CD ROM from an RENC Note 1: Remove selection “Missing only” to see total content of CD-ROM. After SENC conversion. the cells become green. Note 2: Check "Permit" to show only the cells which have a permit. cells are colored orange. The. the ECDIS loads only those cells that it does not already have. Select from Chart menu Load or Update Charts and next menu select from CD-ROM. only the cells which have a permit are loaded. We recommend that you check "Permit" before loading a chart. cells with permits are green and those without permits are blue. cells with permits are magenta and those without permits are red. These cells are colored magenta. After SENC conversion. . these cells are colored blue. the color of the cells becomes green.ector art ateria i i Insert desired CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive. Note 3: When you update a chart. This decreases loading time and you can soon know what cells can be used. After the chart is SENC-converted. During the updating. the color of all cells is blue. When you load all cells. 3. x x Click the Load File button. Note that the *. received from an RENC.TXT which contain permits and their editions and subscription types. Permits are available in two formats. When you receive new permits from an RENC. *. do the following: 1. The Chart Permits window displays permits which are loaded into the ECDIS. Check that all permit cells are shown in the List box. To load permits. Please contact RENC service to get new permit file. This is the preferred format. As a backup it contain also subscription type and edition. x 4.PMT format is used by the system for backup of permits. PERMIT. you get the following message.PMT. contain permits. but no edition or subscription information. A permit is a key which is used to decrypt the chart you want to use in the ECDIS. Select CD-ROM from the Look-in box. i i . i If you try to load a permit file which does not have any permit. 2.ector art ateria i i i An RENC can deliver permits in a CD ROM or a floppy disk. Select Chart Permits from the Chart menu. Select suitable permit file and click the Load button to load permits. you have to load them into the ECDIS. you get the following message. . Early warning of permits expiration. If you load permits from a different ECDIS. If you try to load expired permits. Check that you are loading permits to correct ECDIS. you get following message.ector art ateria If one or more permit(s) has format error. following message appears. Please contact RENC service to get new permit file. ector art ateria i i When loading S57 charts into the ECDIS. . messages appear to alert you to permits and authentication. you get the following messages for a wrong CD ROM. If you later use a CD ROM catalogue created during loading of S57 charts. ii i CD ROMs from an RENC contain issue control. These are described below and on the next several pages. You can check edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window in the Chart menu and the edition of the chart by using the Cell Status window. Typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as new edition instead of an update. You do not have a valid permit A chart was not converted into SENC because the permit for it has expired. Ask for new permits from your chart agent. Study these messages carefully because you may need to use paper charts to fulfil SOLAS requirements. .ector art ateria i i i If you tried to load charts for which you do not have permit. you will get one of the following messages: i i i All messages in this chapter change the legal status of the charts in your system. A chart was not converted into SENC because a permit is for a different edition. art ateria The chart was not loaded because of invalid Signature. For details see paragraph 8. Coding error in Signature. i i When converting S57 charts for use in the ECDIS.ector Authentication of chart failed The chart was not loaded because of invalid Public key.4. .5 “Using SENC conversion history log”. messages appears to alert you during the conversion. both in the Chart menu. but it is valid for another edition of the cell or for another RENC service. For more information to remove charts. see chapter "8. You can check edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window and the edition of a chart using the Cell Status window. it is recommended that you remove all the charts from ECDIS before loading new charts of new service provider.5 How to remove all the charts from the system" .ector art ateria ii i You do not have a permit. i i i If you change service provider for some reason.5. i i i i i i i Permit for a chart has expired. You have a permit. The dialog box shown below appears. The basic tools for browsing charts are Range -. Select Ignore Scale (show S57 chart in scale used previously to open an S57 chart) or Sync Scale (show S57 chart in same scale as ARCS chart). Click the Open button i You may view S57 charts using different positions and different scales. Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a place other than own ship’s current position. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying and clicking TM Reset (in the mouse functions area). When true motion reset is off. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area. the indication “TM Reset off” or “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area. Activate Scroll allows you to look ahead from a place other than own ship’s current position. From the Chart Catalogue dialog box.5. If true motion reset is active. If true motion reset is on. Release right button to get chart redrawn.and Range+ change the chart scale. ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position of the own ship with respect to the display. the indication “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area. To restore own ship’s position to the screen center. . Set Chart Center. For further details. When true motion reset is off. The system automatically selects next larger or smaller scale. 3. You can repeat this until you have desired area on screen. use the cursor to select desired chart.2 “Catalogue of S57 cells”. i To activate S57 chart material onto the display. do the following: i i i i To select a chart for viewing from a catalogue. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. Range+. display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display. ShipOffcenter and TM Reset.ector art ateria i i 1. Move cursor to desired place on chart and then push the right mouse button. see paragraph 8. Keep button pressed down while moving cursor over desired place. the message “Larger Scale Data Exists” appears. 2. Use the scrollwheel to set the latitude and longitude position for chart center and then click the Set Center button. 2. Range . If a chart with larger compilation scale available at your current viewing position. Open the Chart menu then select Activate S57 chart. Select Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu. do the following: 1. i i i To activate a specific S57 chart cell onto the display. If.ector art ateria i i You can use either true motion or relative motion. If it does. If. you reset own position with TM Reset. Select Open Chart by Cell name from the menu and then push the scrollwheel. 4. select it and push the scrollwheel. your ship will immediately jump to the true motion reset position and use that position as fixed position to stay on screen. in the true motion mode. go to step 5. Select desired chart from chart list dialog and then click the Open Chart button. your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true motion movement from that position. When it reaches the true motion reset borderline. 5. If you use relative motion. own ship will immediately jump to the true motion reset position. use Open Chart by Cell name menu in the Chart menu as follows: 1. 2. own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline. in the relative motion mode. you can select a new fixed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter. where it jumps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship’s course. In the relative motion mode. you reset own position with TM Reset. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. x The selected chart is automatically displayed in the electronic chart area. From the menu check that “Activate ARCS chart” is shown on the first line. Use Range . own ship stays in a fixed position.and Range+ to select desired chart scale. you use ShipOffcenter. If the text Activate S57 chart appears. 3. . in the true motion mode. while the chart moves on screen. If. it will automatically jump to the true motion reset position. In the true motion mode. This can be done on Chart page of Chart Display. Selection of Multi and Two color presentation can be done by selecting from list box of “Depths” on Chart page of Chart Display. system selects next deeper depth contour (10 m) as Safety contour. To display this dialog box. . If input Safety contour does not exist in electronic chart. system selects next deeper depth contour (10 m) as Safety contour. but there is no 8 m depth contour in electronic chart. Depth contour value of 10 m is presented as Safety Contour in this electronic chart. For more information about color change. Unsafe water area is all shallower than "safety contour". system selects automatically next deeper available depth contour as Safety contour. spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. Set value of Shallow Contour less than value of Safety contour. Colours used for depth presentation is controlled by setting values for Shallow Contour. but there is no 8 m depth contour in electronic chart. See below pictures for Multi colour presentation and Two color presentation. Safety Contour and Deep Contour. For example input value is 8 m. MULTI COLOUR presentation: Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In the multicolour presentation four colours are used for depths. system selects automatically next deeper available depth contour as Safety contour. Shallow contour is for possible visual color change inside the unsafe water area. For example input value is 8 m. Depth contour value of 10 m is presented as Safety Contour in this electronic chart. TWO COLOR presentation: Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In two colour presentation unsafe water is shown as blue colour and safe water shown as white colour.ector art ateria i i i i The Chart Display dialog box contains several pages of chart features which you may adjust as appropriate. see below selection of “Depths”. If input Safety contour does not exist in electronic chart. Safety Contour and Deep Contour. i You can set values for Shallow Contour. Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts. Safety contour and Deep contour”. Safety contour and Deep contour”. Spot soundings below the safety depth are highlighted. see “Setting values for Shallow contour. see Setting values for Shallow contour. Vector Chart Material C a t age Blac and gre color s mbol: This symbol is used to verify that you can distinguish black frame of symbol and grey inner part of symbol colors with current contrast and brilliance settings. M reset: In the true motion mode. Set the limit for TM reset in percentage . Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color. The options are: 1. Te t CA I indicates that dimming of display is set within calibration values. Note: se of the brightness control may inhibit visibility of information at night. Deep contour: Set deep water contour. 2. Chart alert highlight: Enable or disable highlight of chart alerts. Dsp Dimmer: se this control to ad ust dimming of display. own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline set here . and then it umps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course.8. Safety contour and Deep contour . isible safety contour is e ual to set value or if the contour of set value is not available then the visible safety contour is ne t deeper contour than safety contour. S mbols: Select how to display chart symbols. Note: The system uses safety contour also for chart alerts. Shallow contour: Set value of shallow water contour. or more information. Safet depth: Set value of safety depth. Palette: Select appropriate palette for the display depending on the brightness of the bridge. or more information. Safet contour: Set value of safety contour. 8-7 . see “Setting values for Shallow contour. or more information. The options are ƒ Detailed: The system tries to highlight updates so that only those ob ects which have visible changes are highlighted. The options are: x imited: The length of a light sector is fi ed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale. the chart display uses four different colors for contours: x Deeper than user-selected deep contour x x x etween deep contour and user-selected safety contour etween safety contour and user-selected shallow contour etween shallow contour and coastline. Safety contour and Deep contour”. 8-7 . pdate ighlight: Set how the updates are highlighted on the screen before they are approved by the user. ƒ ll effects: The system highlights updates so that all the ob ects pertaining to updates are highlighted although some of them have not been changed. the chart display uses only two colors: x Deeper than safety contour x Shallower than safety contour Boundaries: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. x Full: The length of a light sector represent its nominal range as defined by the chart producer. ight sector: Set how to display light sectors.8. Shallow pattern: Set how to display shallow water area. or M TICO O R. or T O CO O R. Vector Chart Material Depths: Set how to display different depth ones on the chart display. x S mboli ed: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line. se this option to see the practical change of an update. see “Setting values for Shallow contour. or more information. The options are: x Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines. The options are: ƒ None ƒ Diamond: rovided to distinguish shallow water at night. You can recall the standard display at any time using a single action. range. i A subset of chart features is called the Display Base. Note 2: To navigate between the pages in the Chart Display dialog box. which provides information for cursor-selected chart feature.ector art ateria The Standard page contains chart features defined by IMO which comprise a standard display. and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation. click the appropriate arrow tab with the left mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the Control Head RCU-018. Note 1: To use the Info request feature. The Other 1 and Other 2 pages contain chart features for which you can control visibility and which are not part of IMO-defined standard display. overhead wires. etc. the associated chart feature must be turned on from the Standard page. which is selected by the user Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour Indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges. these features cannot be made invisible. As required by IMO. Traffic routine systems Scale. orientation and display mode Units of depth and height . by pressing the STD DSP key on the control head RCU-018 or displaying Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse function area and pushing the right mouse button.. The Display Base consist of the following chart features: x x x x x x x Coastline (high water) Own ship's safety contour. ector art ateria i i i i i i Visibility control of the navigation features is divided into five pages in the Symbol Display dialog box. Note: WP mark on both monitor and planned routes is set permanently to Std position. The “General” page controls own ship and target related things. The "Targets" page controls TT and AIS targets. . The "Mariner" page controls Notes and user charts. The "Tracking" page controls past tracks and some other features. This page contains selection of route related navigation features Monitored route: Select which part of monitored route to display. Planned route: Select which part of planned route to display. Open Main menu and select Symbol display from the menu. The user can define settings for chart details which are displayed over the chart area. The "Route" page controls planned and monitored route. Note 2: You can select period of time to display event marks in the list box “Show”.2 “Voyage log”. Labels: select label interval. Style: Select style of presentation of target's past position. Note 1: MOB event is always visible. x x . Target past positions x x Density: Select density of past position of points.ector art ateria i Past tracks x x x Ship System: plot own ship’s tracks using system-fed position. For more information. Ship Secondary: plot own ship’s past track with position fed from a secondary sensor. Length: select length of past track. Positions display the latitude and longitude of an event. where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set (Type: Ship and Alarm). x User Event: display event symbols on ECDIS. Auto Event: display automatically entered event symbols. x x x Style: select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point). where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set (Type: User and Auto). Ship Primary: plot own ship’s past track with position fed from the primary sensor. Events: These marks are based on voyage log records.3. see paragraph 23. ector art ateria Color: Select color of target from the list box TT: Std or small for Tracked Targets. AIS: x ROT (º/min). limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector. . Note: Source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel. Lines: Select to show lines on user charts.ector art ateria i Notes: x x x Position: select to show positions of Notes records with symbols on the chart. User chart: x x x x Points: Select to show user points on user charts. Symbols. If No color fill is selected. Display only radar of Lines. Symbols and Areas are displayed which have user selection “on radar” activated for them in the user chart. only the boundaries of the areas are visible. Range: select to circumscribe pilot data records with circles on the display. Color fill for the areas can be selected as transparent from 25 to 75% and as No color fill. x Manual Updates: Select to show manual updates with orange symbols. if selected. Areas: Select to show areas on the display. only those Lines. Note: Visibility of manual updates made as true symbols are controlled through Standard and Other pages of the Chart Display menu. This is used to view only that part of the user chart which will be sent to the radar connected to the system. The size of a circle depends on the value set in Notes. . Tidals: Select to show symbols and tidals on user charts. Text: select to show text of Notes records on the chart. Symbols and Areas. Radar Antenna: x Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with symbol x. . you can set whether width or length is used to set limit for displaying true symbol. Velocity Vectors: Style x x Conventional: (simplified symbol) Std ECDIS (minimized symbol) Time Increments x Select OFF or ON to hide or show ticks of velocity vector. until spacing between ticks will be enough to distinguish them separately. they will be automatically removed from display. Note. If ticks will be too tightly spaced. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel/target.ector art ateria Ship Outlines: True outline shown if x (Beam width>6mm / Length>6mm). that this controls both own ship and targets ticks. Note. . Select Select from the menu and push the scrollwheel.ector art ateria i i i i i i i i Chart display settings and Symbol display settings are using common settings. Select desired chart display settings from the list box. i i i To create new settings for chart display. Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. do the following: 1. Select Save from the menu to save current chart display settings. i 1. Move the cursor over the small triangle on the Chart Display or symbol dialog box. which means that when you select settings display settings the same file is selected for symbol settings. 3. i 1. 5. Make your changes to both Chart Display and Symbol display settings. i i Open the Chart Display or symbol Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle. 4. Chart Display) are saved under the name selected here. all titles previously saved (Symbol Display. Enter desired name for Chart Display Settings and press OK in dialog box. that you have to select “Save” from the menu before closing dialog box. 3. 2. You can define chart display and symbol display settings which are displayed over S57 charts cells. Select “Save as” from the Chart Display or Symbol Display menu and then push the scrollwheel. You can save these chart display settings to your hard disk and recall them whenever you need them. 2. 2. When you save new chart display settings. i i Open the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle. For more information. IMO-Base IMO-Standard IMO-All Other You can find display setting in use on upper status bar. To select desired IMO Chart Display Settings. proceed as follows: 1. 3. press left mouse button.ector art ateria i i i There are three sets of predefined Chart Display Settings which can be used to display Charts with certain chart features. 2.1 ECDIS Overview”. see chapter “3. Select Set IMO Base. . The predefined Chart Display Settings are called as: 1. Open CHART DISPLAY window and move cursor over black triangle on Chart Display window. 2. Set Imo Standard or Set IMO All Other from the menu. Below are examples of these symbols. This information forms an integral part of the legal ENC chart which can fulfil SOLAS requirements and thus replace a paper chart. Because these features are not permanently visible on the chart as they used to be in case of a paper chart. For further details. Note: The visibility of the magenta symbol is controlled by the item “Additional information available” in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box. A magenta colored symbol is used to show that additional textual or picture information such as sailing directions are available from Info request by cursor pick. see paragraph 8. .ector art ateria ii i i i Vector charts (S57) contain sailing directions. magnetics. A grey box is used to show that Tidal information is available for Info request by cursor pick. currents” in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box.14 “Requesting Information About Vector Chart Objects”. Note: The visibility of the grey box symbol is controlled by the item “Depth contours. tidal tables and other textual and picture information which is not immediately visible on the chart. the ECDIS has special symbols to highlight the locations from which you can use the Info request to know additional information about the above-mentioned features. As a navigator you should check them as well as you check the visible chart when you do your planning and when you perform navigation. ector art ateria i i i Vector charts (S57) contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues, new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency. These features include “Date Start”, “Date End”, “Seasonal date start” and “Seasonal date end”. Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. The ARCS equivalent is called T&P Notices. “Seasonal date start” and “Seasonal date end” are used for seasonal chart features such as summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc. For further details see paragraph 8.12.5 “About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard”. You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency to use the valid data for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example, you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart up-to-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display Until and Approve Until once per week to keep your chart up-to-date. Note: When you load charts and their updates into your system, the Display Until date is set as current date of the system. You must set the Approve Until date yourself. Make sure that you have set Display Until and Approve Until dates to the current date or to your planning date, whichever is applicable to your current usage of charts. For details on how to set Display/Approve date, see the paragraph 8.12.2 “Approving and highlighting vector chart updates”. If the charts you are currently using have Display Until and/or Approved Until set more than 1 week from current system date, you will you get the Permanent Warning on your chart display. i i i i Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates which are included into S57 charts. Normally you have selected “Automatic Display Until” after the SENC conversion. In this case, after all the SENC conversions have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. For further details, see paragraph 8.12.4 “Setting approve until date”. If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following: 1. Use Approve Until to set the begin date for the update highlight. See paragraph 8.12.4 “Setting “approve until date”. Use Display Until to set the end date for the update highlight. See paragraph 8.12.3 “Setting display until date”. Review the changes. Added features are highlighted with orange circles. Removed features are highlighted with orange slashes. Changed features are highlighted with both orange circles and slashes. See the picture at right. For highlighted updates, see “An example of changes known to happen in the future” on page 8-73. After reviewing, set Approve Until and Display Until back to the current system date. 2. 3. 4. ector art ateria i 5. 6. 7. Open the Chart menu. i i Select Set Chart viewing dates from the menu. Set the cursor in the Display Until field, use the scrollwheel to set desired date, and confirm by pushing the scrollwheel. x x x i 1. 2. 3. Open the Chart menu. Select Set Chart viewing dates from the menu. Set the cursor in the Approve Until field, use the scrollwheel to set desired date, and confirm by pushing the scrollwheel. i ector art ateria i i i i i ii Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date. The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approve date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 areas follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as current date of the system. Approve date has to be set to current date. The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1. The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2. The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3. Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan. i i i i i In some cases the producer of a chart (Hydrographic Office) is aware of changes which will happen in the future. A Hydrographic Office is able to include this kind of update into the chart for later use. In the paper chart world, these changes are published in Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners. In ARCS these are known as T&P Notices. ector art ateria An example of changes known to happen in the future ector art ateria i Some chart producers may define a chart feature to use seasonal date start and end as shown below. x YYMMDD (Full date for date start and date end) x --MMDD (The same date every year) x --MM (The same month every year) The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the full date for starting date (YYYYMMDD). The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the full date for ending date (YYYYMMDD). ector art ateria The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month and day in every year (--MMDD). The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month in every year (--MM). ector An example of a seasonal chart feature The next two figures show a caution area which is valid from April 1 to November 15. art ateria The figure below shows the attributes of the caution area in the example above, in the Info request window. ector art ateria i You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1, which is included in this ECDIS. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See paragraph 8.10.4 “Controlling visible chart features”. 1. 2. 3. Open the Chart menu. Select ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu and then push the scrollwheel. Select desired chart symbols from the submenu to show on the ECDIS. Appendix 2 contains examples of plots with symbols. The Return dialog window appears when you select something from the submenu of ECDIS Chart 1. When you close the Return dialog window, by clicking the X at the upper right corner, ECDIS Chart 1 will be closed and normal chart presentation is displayed. An example of Overview chart ector art ateria i i The ECDIS uses the official IHO presentation library to draw vector charts (S57). The presentation library is replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personnel and type approval authorities. When this manual was published the official presentation library was “AML003_4.dai”, based on “Official IHO presentation library for ECDIS S-57 ed. 3.1.1 and S-52 ed.3.4”. ector art ateria i i The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an important function of the ECDIS. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and barely intelligible attribute information. i i i The request information about S57 chart objects is given only to objects which are selected for display by the user. For how select chart details to display, see paragraph 8.10.4 “Controlling visible chart features”. i 1. 2. 3. i i To specify desired SENC and object for information request, do the following: Place the cursor on object desired. Push the scrollwheel. Two windows appear: Objects by Cell and Object. Use the Objects by Cell window to select desired chart cell and desired object from which you need information. If there are different navigation purpose S57 charts over the area where you are making an information request, you can select desired S57 chart cell from the Cell window. A list of S57 chart cells is displayed in the Cell list box. Select desired S57 chart cell from the list. Select desired object from the Objects in display priority order list box. 4. Selected object on the chart is shown with mark showing information in the Object window. ector 5. Detailed information for the selected object appears in the Object window. art ateria 6. To close the windows, click the CANCEL key on the Control Head RCU-018, or click the X on the window you wish to close. i i i After you have selected a vector chart object, you can view detailed information about it in the Object window: ector art ateria i i i i i i ector art ateria i i i i i i i i i i ector art ateria i Often a group of chart objects are linked together. The most common example of this practice is a beacon or buoy, in which the body and the top mark are defined separately. Another example is lights and recommended track. Still another example is measurement mile. There are also other similar cases. Body and top hat of a beacon or buoy ector Recommended track defined by two beacons art ateria ector art ateria Recommended track defined by a building and a beacon . ector art ateria . ector art ateria Measurement mile . The ENC used here is S57ed3 delivery formatted chart. in a CD ROM or in an RENC. if you have optional telecommunication installed in your system and you are a licensed user of an RENC.ector art ateria There are some functions or features which are not used on a daily or weekly basis. Before it can be displayed as a chart it has to be converted into the system’s internal display format SENC. Status of RENC: This information is based on information in an RENC. You get the status of cells in an RENC via telecommunications. Use the Chart Cell Status function in the Chart Menu to find out the status of individual cells in your system. . Use the Conv Log button to view a detailed conversion log of S57 chart cell. Status of CD ROM: This information is based on information in the CD ROM catalogue you have loaded and selected here from the CD ROM list box. but sometimes there is a need to use them. A SENC is the system’s internal display format. One example of an RENC is PRIMAR. Status of SENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. Status of ENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. . where you can view updates by their numbers.ector art ateria i You may need to check when an update has been added into your ECDIS. To view updates by their numbers. To check any situation in the past. You will get a Chart Cell Details window. open the Chart menu. There are also many other cases where you need to find what was known by your ECDIS. Also you may need to check what was shown in your chart display three weeks ago. you can use the Displayed Update and Approved Update fields to specify update number. select Chart Cell Status to display the Chart Cell Status window and then click the Details button. Now click the Add Update button to add an update in the SENC. etc. . Note that the last update number for the SENC row is now 1 to indicate that the first update has been added into the SENC. After the SENC conversion is completed. Click the OK button to overwrite the existing SENC. Note that the SENC row is now empty. for example. but it could be useful if. the contents of the Cell Status window change as in this example at right. In this example you need to repeat it four times to get updates 2. After the SENC conversion for the added update is completed. Normally you do not need this feature. the contents of the Cell Status window change as in this example at right. If the Base cell has already been converted to the SENC format. the contents of the Cell Status window change as in the example at right. Then. Open the Chart menu. you need to analyze why an update cannot be converted. the permit for the chart is for another edition. Note that the last update number for the SENC row is now 0 to indicate that only the Base cell is included into the SENC. If the S57 Error window shown right appears. select Cell Status and then click the Create SENC button to initiate SENC conversion of the Base cell. 4 and 5. 3. Now click the Add Update button again to add the rest of the updates in the SENC. then the system asks you if it is OK to write over existing SENC.ector art ateria i i i ii i The Cell Status window in the Chart menu can be used to force a new SENC conversion for any chart cell which is already in the SENC format. ector art ateria This page intentionally left blank. . it is necessary to issue new charts in advance of their intended date of validity. ARCS charts are facsimile copies of BA paper charts. Publication Date: Issue date of Update CD ROM used to update the system. To toggle the legend ON/OFF. In this system this is called Manual Updates. for example a change in regulations commencing on a future date. operator defined (=Undefined) or shift is known only some parts of chart (=Partially defined). Chart Number: Number of current chart is shown in this field. clearance height). Occasionally. Regionally based chart CD ROMs RC1 to RC10 contain standard BA navigation charts. The system will allow access to both charts for the period of overlap by issue of new chart permits. The chart legend provides information about edition date and updates of the displayed chart. put the cursor in the sidebar area. Latest NM: Date of the latest Notice to Mariners included in the chart. . while RC11 contains ocean charts at scales of 1:3. WGS shift status: Datum shift between local datum and WGS-84 datum is known (=Defined). In such cases the current chart will co-exist with the new chart until the date of implementation. Edition Date: Date when the chart was issued.700 ARCS charts are available on 11 chart CD ROMs.500. and as such share a common numbering system. Further. unknown. Country Of Origin: The country that produced the original chart. For further details see Chapter 10 "Manual Updates". Depth: Unit of depth measurement. covering the world's major trading routes and ports. confirm that "Select Sidebar" appears in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Then.000 and smaller. the earlier chart being indicated with the suffix "X" after the chart number. Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your ARCS charts. select Chart Legend from the menu and push the scrollwheel to open or close the ARCS chart legend. Manual updates are valid for both ARCS and S57 charts so that you need to define them only once.i Approximately 2. New editions and new charts for ARCS and BA paper charts are issued simultaneously. They are supplied on each Weekly Update CD ROM until incorporated into the chart CD ROMs at the next issue. manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales from the same area. Height: Unit used for indication of height above sea level (for example. At the lower part of the legend there are three buttons to activate a corresponding window.aster art ateria i i i Access to view T&P Notices. Click the Projection button to find information about latitude of true scale and rotation angle. Orig. which are details or warnings of ARCS. Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. Depth Unit: Unit of depth used with current chart. Height Datum: Vertical datum for objects located above sea . Click the T&P Notices button to open a text window. Depth Datum: Vertical datum of depth used with current chart. These are as follows: i T&P Notices are also known as Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners. . which shows detailed information about current chart. This window provides chart information that does not warrant permanent chart correction. is contained in the ARCS chart legend mentioned on the previous page. Nro: 4882-08 i Click the Details button on the ARCS Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box. Height Unit: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. Hor Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart. Projection: Projection of current chart. Select Chart Legend from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Select desired inset from the Panels combo box. . This function also works in conjunction with Locate. British Admiralty may release textual warnings for any chart and they are available here. Click the Details button on the Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box. confirm that "Select Sidebar" appears in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button.aster Panels: art ateria Selects desired inset (Panel) from the combo box. i There could be warnings not included in Notices to Mariners. 4. i i If there are the different insets with the same position. the operator can select preferred inset. Chart with three insets 1. Place the cursor in the sidebar area. Check Preference as shown below. which displays your ship's position. Preference and Notes. 2. Locate: This function displays the inset selected in the Panels combo box. 3. click the X at the right corner of the display.aster art ateria i i The operator can select a desired item from the combo box in the ARCS Details dialog box in order to view notes for that item. . If plot positions on SDD are not active. giving details of source dates and scales. it is possible to click by the cursor ARCS chart to plot origin on SDD. The layout of the graphic corresponds to the layout of the chart. keyed to a graphic. i i A Source Data Diagram (SDD) consists of two parts: a graphic showing the areas covered by each type of source material from which the chart was compiled. After choosing the item from the Notes combo box. If this option is selected. To close the window. and a text window appears. there is no SDD on the chart. and the borders of the diagram equate to the limits of the chart panels. on the ARCS Details dialog box. click the Notes… button. and a tabulation. i i i i No warning appears in the cursor window. put the cursor in the Sidebar. For most of the ARCS charts this is known and the system can do the conversion automatically. For further details. i i The ARCS chart legend contains a WGS shift status field. However.) The warning WGS undefi. The system still operates in the operator-selected working datum. The cursor position is shown in the operator-selected working datum. The system still operates in the operator-selected working datum.) . For some ARCS chart. appears (in red) in the Cursor window. confirm that the mouse functions area shows Select Sidebar. see "Use with GPS" in the ARCS Navigator User Guide. (To display the ARCS chart legend. the system uses the operator-defined WGS shift to perform the transformation between local paper chart datum and the operator selected working datum. (See section 13. select Chart Legend then push the scrollwheel. push the right mouse button. see "Specifying operator WGS-84 shift" on page 9-9.aster art ateria i ii i The difference between ARCS chart local datum and WGS-84 datum is known as WGS-84 Shift. The warning WGS operator appears (in red) in the Cursor window.3 "Choosing Datum". the system is unable to correctly do the transformation between local paper chart datum and the operator-selected working datum. this is unknown and the operator must define the shift. However. For some ARCS charts this is partially known and the operator is responsible for defining the shift for the unknown areas of partially known ARCS charts. however. Further. Latitude and longitude positions of the cursor. may not be correctly displayed on current ARCS chart.aster art ateria WGS shift is defined for this chart. routes. user charts. WGS shift is partially defined for this chart. Latitude and longitude positions of the cursor. user charts. etc. You can use WGS shift to define correct transformation from WGS-84 co-ordinates to local datum of the ARCS chart for the parts or panels of this chart that do not have defined WGS shift. etc. routes. Notes. may not be correctly displayed on the current ARCS chart. Some parts or panels of this chart do not have defined WGS shift. etc. routes. . All latitude and longitude positions of the cursor. Notes. Notes. WGS shift is not defined for this chart. You can use WGS shift to define correct transformation from WGS-84 coordinates to local datum of the current ARCS chart. user charts. are correctly displayed on this ARCS chart. always shows cursor position in operator-selected working datum. In this example WGS-84 shift is defined for the current ARCS chart. Note: The Cursor window. shows the warning "WGS undefi" to indicate that the system is unable to do a correct transformation from local ARCS chart datum to the operator-selected working datum. . The Cursor Position window shows cursor position in local ARCS chart datum (indicated as Local Datum) and in WGS-84 datum as defined in the used ARCS chart (indicated as WGS84 Chart). The Cursor Position window shows cursor position only in local ARCS chart datum (indicated as Local Datum). Note: The Cursor window. below the ARCS Details dialog box. below the ARCS Details dialog box. You can access ARCS details with the Details button in the chart legend of ARCS.aster art ateria i i ii i On demand you can view the cursor position in local datum of an ARCS chart. This is useful when you need to refer to the corresponding paper chart. In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined for the current ARCS chart. Undefined Undefined 00. . Chart Shift: Undefined indicates that this ARCS chart does not have defined WGS-84 shift. In this example the WGS-84 shift is defined for current ARCS chart. The Cursor Position panel shows cursor position in local ARCS chart datum (indicated as Local Datum) and in WGS-84 datum as defined by the operator WGS shift (indicated as WGS-84 User).aster art ateria In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined for the current ARCS chart. In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined in the current ARCS chart. Accuracy: This field contains accuracy as defined by the chart producer. Note: The Cursor window. then click the WGS84 Shift… button.000'E . To do this. i i i You can view the value of WGS-84 shift of the current ARCS chart. shows the warning "WGS undefi" to indicate that the system uses operator-defined transformation from local ARCS chart datum to the operator selected working datum. Chart Shift: The latitude and longitude shifts between WGS-84 datum and the local datum. Accuracy: This field contains accuracy as defined by the chart producer.000'N 00. below the ARCS Details dialog box. click the Details button on the ARCS Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box. Check Enable changes.000'N 00. Check Active and Enable changes. 00.176'N 00. uncheck to deactivate. art ateria Undefined Undefined 00. 00. Use the Reset button to reset the values of the operator defined WGS-84 shift to zero. Active Indicates that the operator-defined WGS-84 shift is in use.176'N 01.000'N 00.aster In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined in the current ARCS chart Chart Shift: Undefined indicates that current ARCS chart does not have defined WGS-84 shift. To define operator WGS-84 shift do the following: 1. You cannot redefine WGS-84 shift for any ARCS chart for which it is defined by the chart producer. Click the WGS84 Shift…button.290'E i i i You can define WGS-84 shift for those ARCS charts that do not have defined WGS-84 shift.000'E 00. Use Active to control use of operator defined WGS-84 shift.290'E . Accuracy: This field contains accuracy as defined by the chart producer. User WGS shift The shifts between WGS-84 datum and the local datum as defined by the operator. Click the Details button on the ARCS Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box. Check to activate operatordefined WGS-84 shift. Locate the cursor where desired.000'E 2. Chart is not updated using an ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM from which ARCS system files are loaded. Load chart from the latest RCxx CD ROM and update chart using latest Update CD ROM. but not updated using ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM. Perform update for the chart. either by permits or by active group. Updates for the chart are not for the same edition as chart. ARCS permanent messages are displayed to help you keep your ARCS charts up-to-date. Producers of ARCS charts store up-to-date status on an ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM (system Files).aster art ateria The system can help you to keep your ARCS charts up-to-date for the charts that you have received from ARCS. Based on this information. . Use the correct ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM to load updates for chart. ARCS license has expired. Contact chart agent to renew your license. Chart is loaded from RCxx CD ROM. Chart is cancelled and no longer kept up-to-date by its producer. This information is loaded into the ECDIS when you update. Menu description Activate S57 chart: The function activates an S57 chart onto the display. "Sync scale" opens a S57 chart with the scale that was used with ARCS charts. Remove Charts: User can remove charts from the hard disk. Verify system files: Compare loaded system files with files on Update CD ROM. Load and Update History: You can view history of load and update actions for ARCS charts. Manual Updates: User can see manual updates made. System: x x x x x x x ARCS Update Status: Display information about ARCS Update CD ROM that is loaded in the system. Select Next Chart: Select next chart in currently selected group. S52 Presentation Library: View information of presentation library used with manual updates. Open Chart: User can open appropriate ARCS chart on the display. Refresh Charts after backup: Refresh charts after backup from another ECDIS.aster art ateria The Chart menu is used for managing chart database. Chart Permits: Load permit from floppy disk. Load Charts: User can load ARCS chart from a CD ROM to the hard disk. .4.12 "ARCS Catalogue". Close: Close menu. You have two options to select how to open a chart on the display. Log File: User can view log file including ARCS depending functions Colors: Display color sample. License: View license information of the current ARCS chart. Restart drawing process: Redraw chart. See section 9. Update Charts: User can update ARCS charts stored in the hard disk. Updates are delivered weekly by British Admiralty. Chart Catalogue: For managing ARCS charts. "Ignore scale" opens S57 chart cell with the scale that was used the last time you used an S57 chart. in a CD ROM. i ARCS Navigator operators receive a comprehensive weekly updating service on CD ROM that mirrors the Admiralty Notices to Mariners (NMs) used to correct Admiralty paper charts. weekly updates will be delivered on Weekly Update CD ROMs. ARCS Navigator or ARCS Skipper. is as shown below. the charts you have a license for were fully up-to-date at the day of sale. . Content of ARCS Navigator pack: x x x One (1) or more Chart CD ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts One (1) Update CD ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections One (1) floppy disk storing ARCS chart permits i For the ARCS Skipper operator.aster art ateria i i ARCS customers can subscribe to one of two service levels. The update information is cumulative. They can be updated for NMs whenever you like by buying a new ARCS Skipper license. ensuring that only the most recent Update CD ROM is necessary. only one pack can be loaded into the ECDIS at a time. ARCS Navigator license is valid for 12 months. Content of ARCS Skipper pack: x x x One (1) or more Chart CD ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts One (1) Update CD ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections One (1) floppy disk storing ARCS chart permits Note: If you are holding more than one ARCS Skipper packs onboard. ARCS Navigator is intended for SOLAS class operators who require that their charts are up-to-date. which is transferred between participants. During this period. i i i License information. which is again fully up-to-date for the day of sale. 5 "Loading chart permits for ARCS Navigator license". If you order more charts. see section 9. with "Licence". continue from step 1. you can select ARCS License from the Chart menu.4. For further details. Open desired chart from the Chart menu by using the Open Chart or Chart Catalogue command. see section 9. Load chart from ARCS CD ROMs. License information is shown in the window. Load update from a Weekly CD ROM.8 "Loading a new ARCS chart into the system". 3. see section 9. operator permit and type of license.9 "Updating ARCS chart". If new Update CD ROM arrives.4. This window contains information about owner of license. License information window i 1.4. For how to update chart. continue from step 3. 4. For how to load chart. i In order to get charts in the system and display them you have to do the following: Load permit from the floppy disk by using Chart Permits in the Chart menu.aster art ateria If ARCS format is active. . 2. 2. . Check in the Permit Management window that permits are displayed here with correct information. 3. Open the Chart menu then select Chart Permits from the menu. Select Navigator license as the type of license. Enter Manual button This function enables manual entry of a permit string that is delivered. by telex. Insert a permit floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.ncp then click the Open button. Select Gb. for example. After typing the string.aster art ateria i i i i Permits are usually delivered in a floppy disk. You may load permits as follows: Select Next Chart 1. 4. the operator can accept it by clicking the Add button or reject it by clicking the X at the upper right side of the window. Close the window by pressing the CANCEL key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or clicking the X at the upper right side of the window. Click the Load File button. Backup button: This button opens the "Save As" window. where the operator may make a backup copy from a chart permit file. . Check in the Permit Management window that permits are displayed there with correct information. 2. you must load charts and weekly updates from CD ROMs delivered with and listed in your License Agreement (also known as "Schedule A"). Open the Chart menu. Note: If you are holding more than one ARCS Skipper packs onboard. Select Skipper license as the type of license. only one pack can be loaded into the ECDIS at a time. To load chart permit into the system.scp then click the Open button. If you load a new ARCS Skipper permit floppy disk into the ECDIS. Close the window by pressing the CANCEL key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or clicking the X on the window. 4. Select Gb. then select Chart Permits from the menu. 3. Click the Load File button. Insert a permit floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. do the following: 1.aster art ateria i i i i Permits are usually delivered in a floppy disk. To remove all permits. do the following: 1. However. Close the window by clicking the X on the window. Check that selected permits have been removed. it may be necessary to remove chart permits from the system. Permits may be removed individually or collectively. To remove an individual permit.aster art ateria i i Normally you do not need to remove permits during normal operation. . click the Select All button then click the Remove button. To remove chart permits. use the cursor to select the permit then click the Remove button. 2. 3. Open the Chart menu then select Chart Permits from the menu. The system will load them automatically. Go Back By Permits By Group Manual Insert desired CD ROM into the CD ROM drive then click the Load button. . i Select Load Charts from the Chart menu and By Permits from the sub menu. Reset Set [Update Charts] 2. i 1. You can manually load charts into the system. It will be useful to define groups to make it easier to maintain your chart database. 3. After you have loaded all CD ROMs. Load manually. by the following methods. click the X on the ARCS Load window to close the window. Load by permit. Load by active group. You can load all the charts that are covered in your license.aster art ateria i x x x i You may load a new ARCS chart into the system for which you have a permit. The progress indicator shows the number of charts loaded and the number of charts to be loaded. You can define a group of charts to be loaded into the system. Repeat step 2 until you have loaded all the CD ROMs covered in your license. 4. see "Choosing active group" on page 9-29. 6.4. [Update Charts] Go Back By Permits By Group Manual 5. if one does not exist. For further details. 3. To set a group as an active group. Repeat step 5 until you have loaded all the CD ROMs pertaining to the active group. Insert desired CD ROM in the CD ROM drive then click the Load button. see section 9.aster art ateria i i "Loading by active group" is used when you want to load only ARCS charts that are in a group that you have defined. An ARCS Load window appears that shows active group and desired ARCS CD ROMs. click the X on the ARCS Load window to close the window. Define a group. After you have loaded all CD ROMs. To load by active group. This is very useful if your license includes many charts from around the world and you are going to use only a part of those charts for which you have a permit.13 "Grouping ARCS charts". Select Load Charts from the Chart menu and By Group from the sub menu. . do the following: 1. Set group as an active group. Simply define a group of charts you need for voyage then load them into the system. 2. select desired drive from the Drive field. D: Local CD ROM drive F: Other CD ROM drive (from other ECDIS. click the Load Chart button. 2. Insert desired ARCS CD ROM into the CD ROM drive.aster art ateria i You can also load ARCS charts manually into the system as follows. select desired chart from the list box. 1. A Chart Operations window appears. [Update Charts] To load a chart into the system. 3. Select Load Charts from the Chart menu and Manual from the sub menu. Go Back By Permits By Group Manual Note: To use another CD ROM drive connected in your network. connected via LAN) . . A loading progress indicator appears.aster art ateria i The updates are delivered separately in an Update CD ROM. You can define a group of charts to be updated. The system will automatically update charts for which you have a permit. Reset [Update Charts] Set Go Back By Permits By Group Manual 3. It is useful to define groups to make it easier to maintain your database. You can update all the charts that are applicable to your license. To update ARCS format raster chart into the system. Select Update Charts from the menu and By Permits from the sub menu. Insert Update CD ROM to drive then click the Load button. The system will update them automatically. you can use one of following procedures: x x x Update by permit. 2. Update by active group. Loading updates manual. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. You can manually select the charts that will be updated into the system. i i 1. Define a group. Set group as an Active group.13 "Grouping ARCS charts". select Update Charts from the menu and By Group from the sub menu.aster art ateria i i Loading updates by active group is used when you want to update only ARCS charts that you have designed to include in a defined group. 4. see section 9. An ARCS Update window appears and it shows active group. To set group as Active group. 3. Go Back By Permits By Group Manual .4. To update by active group. if one does not exist. For more information. [Update Charts] 5. Open the Chart menu. see "Choosing active group" on page 9-30. 2. proceed as follows: 1. This is very useful if your license includes a lot of charts from around the world and you are going to use only a part of charts for which you have a permit. Define a group from charts you need for voyage and update them into the system. Insert Update CD ROM in the CD ROM drive then click the Load button. [Update Charts] Go Back By Permits By Active Group Manual To load updates into the system. 3. Note: To use a different CD ROM drive connected in your network. use the Drive field to select appropriate CD ROM drive. D: Local CD ROM drive F: External CD ROM drive . select Update Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu. To close this window. Insert Update ARCS CD ROM into CD ROM drive. The Chart Operations window appears. click the OK button.aster art ateria i You can also load updates for ARCS charts manually as follows: 1. select desired chart from list box. Open the Chart menu. click the Load Chart button. 2. . x Log file of loaded ARCS Update appears. Open the Chart menu and select Load and Update History. You can view all Notices to Mariners loaded to the ECDIS.aster art ateria i i i You may view a history of all chart load and updates (Notices to Mariners) of ARCS. 1. This information is stored in the ECDIS. An ARCS Message window appears. do the following: 1.aster art ateria i i You can easily check which is the latest Update CD ROM introduced to your system. To view update status of ARCS charts. This dialog shows information about the Latest Update CD ROM loaded into the system. . 2. select System from the menu. Open the Chart menu. then select ARCS Update Status from the submenu. aster art ateria The Chart Catalogue command in the Chart menu helps you manage ARCS charts. This may occur when a new edition of a chart has been issued. The chart is not seen on the ECDIS. You can select a chart by clicking the limit of the chart in the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. Possible reasons are: x Chart permit is for different edition of the chart. but either only new permit or only new chart has been loaded onto the hard disk. Magenta A permit for the chart has been loaded. x Content of the chart is corrupted. "Name" displays ID number of charts. Load the chart and updates. but it is not up-to-date. The ARCS catalogue displays chart limits in different colors. chart and updates. this information is loaded into the ECDIS. Contact your chart agent to renew the permit for the chart. The categories are: x Planning x Ocean x Coastal x Approach x Harbour "Inset" displays insets contained in charts. The chart limit boxes are color coded as follows: Color of chart limit Green Orange Red Blue Meaning The chart is available for use and it is also up-to-date. "Group" displays limits for operator defined group charts. Neither permit nor chart has been loaded onto the hard disk. "Permit" displays limits only for charts that the system has a permit to use. Chart cannot be seen on the ECDIS unless the chart is loaded into the ECDIS. Update chart using the same weekly updates as displayed in the ARCS Catalogue information. View filters window: You may filter ARCS chart limits with "Scale" in the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. When loading updates using by permits or by active group. This information is used to display limits of charts on the ARCS catalogue. but the chart is not loaded on the hard disk. the ARCS Catalogue window opens in the electronic chart area and the ARCS Catalogue dialog box appears in the information area. There are different categories for the ARCS charts depending on their scale. . The information about the selected chart is displayed in the Selected Char field. Each ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM contains information for each chart available in UKHO with up-to-date information at the date of issue. Load permit. x Chart permit has expired. The chart has a valid permit and it is loaded on the hard disk. When you select this command. 13 "Grouping ARCS charts". if it has been loaded and the system has a permit for selected chart. Loaded: If selected chart is loaded into the ECDIS. see section 9.. The Open button opens selected chart. Orig. Chart CD ROM: The number of the CD ROM in which selected chart is stored. Scale: Scale of original paper chart. . The Edit Group button is used to define a group of charts. Permit: If selected there is permit in the ECDIS.aster art ateria After you have clicked the limit of chart you get information of the chart in Selected Chart window as follows: x x x x x x Number: Chart number as stated on the corresponding paper chart. The Check button checks if the edition and updates of the selected chart are valid. Chart usability and Update Status The Selected Chart window also contains several buttons for handling charts. For further details.4. Click the Groups button to show the Group dialog box. Select Chart Catalogue from the menu to show the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. then click the OK button. Click the New button. 3. do the following: 1. use the scrollwheel to create a name for the new group. See the figure below. 4. following the procedure on the next page. Now you can define chart cells to include in this group. Entered group name (in the example above it is ENG-CHA) appears in the Edit Group field. Open the Chart menu.aster art ateria i i To create a ARCS chart group. . 2. Note: Check the Permit box to have the system display only the chart cells for which you have permits. Select the area to group by moving the cursor to the desired location and clicking the left mouse button. select the chart ID from the Outside list box then click the << button. Below is a sample group. click the Add Frame button in the Group field. To add a chart. click the Done button in the Group field. When your frame is ready. click the Save button to save the selected charts as a group. Charts that are inside the frame or intersect a frame limit are added to the group. You can also add charts to your group by using the << (add) button. After you have selected some charts to group. Chart cells that are selected into defined group are displayed in the Inside list box in the Group window. .aster art ateria i After you have entered a name for the group. Click the Groups button in the Group window to show the Group window. button. 5. Click the >> button. if you want to have a list of chart cells in text format. 4. Select Chart Catalogue from the menu.. Select desired group from the Edit Group list box. To do this. Open the Chart menu. You can use the Windows NotePad application to view and print a list of charts in a group.aster art ateria You can also save your chart cells as a text file. click the Save As Text.. The Save As window appears as below. 3. Selected chart is removed to the Outside list box and it is no longer a member of the group. 2. Select directory and drive where you want save your text file. Select desired chart(s) from the Inside list box. . i You can remove charts from a group as follows: 1. by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. the Chart Operations window appears. Click the Remove Chart button to remove selected charts from the hard disk. Open the Chart menu. Click the Ok button to confirm. i You can remove ARCS charts from the system. Click Groups in the View Filters window.aster art ateria i i You can make a group an active group as follows: 1. [Remove Charts] 3. i You can remove a group from the hard disk as follows: 1. 3. manually or by active group. Select Chart Catalogue from the menu. 4. Open the Chart menu. Then. 3. i 1. Select desired group from the Edit Group list box. Open the Chart menu. Select Remove Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu. 2. 2. Select desired charts to remove them from the system. Select desired group from the Edit Group list box. 2. Click the Edit Group button followed by clicking the Remove button. Select Chart Catalogue from the menu. Go Back By Group Manual . Click the OK button. . [Remove Charts] Go Back By Group Manual 3. 2. Select group from Group List then select the chart you want to remove.aster art ateria i 1. 4. Click the Remove charts by group button. Select Remove Charts from the menu and By Group from the sub menu to show the ARCS Remove window. Open the Chart menu. The system removes the ARCS charts from the hard disk that pertain to the active group. 5. like scales in the edges of ARCS charts. all numerical latitude and longitude position values are presented in your selected datum. spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/ /Select Sidebar in the mouse functions area. Note: If you use ARCS raster chart material. It is essential that you use datum in a consistent way. i Datum is used to select between different models of the earth. Normally this is the natural situation. then push the left mouse button to show ARCS charts on the display. 2. If you use paper charts together with electronic charts. 2. These positions. Spin the scrollwheel to show "Activate ARCS Chart" in the mouse functions area. it is recommended that you use the same datum as your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic system and points taken or plotted on your current paper chart.aster art ateria i i 1. To find out native datum of ARCS chart. Click the sidebar area in the information area. push the right mouse button. 3. because you use ARCS together with corresponding official paper chart and because you have selected the datum that is equal to the official paper chart. Move the cursor over Datum on the upper right corner of the ECDIS and select desired datum by spinning the scrollwheel and pushing it to confirm selection. Click the Details… button in the Chart Legend window to show ARCS Details. are true only if you have selected native datum of that ARCS chart. Selected datum is shown on the status bar (at the top of the screen). In the Hor Datum field the native datum of the displayed ARCS chart is shown. select Chart Legend from the menu then push the scrollwheel. i i To display ARCS format raster chart material on the display. do the following: 1. Once you have selected a datum. . do the following: Place the cursor just above the area where the ECDIS shows chart scale. the rasterized charts contain some rasterized position information. 12 "ARCS catalogue". Eq ENC: Same ENC compilation scale is available. Range . x x x x x Larger RNC: Larger ARCS scale is available. activate desired chart. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying and clicking TM Reset (in the mouse functions area). Click the Open button. see section 9. The indication is based on information available from position of your ship if automatic TM reset is active. 3. This is important because under the current IMO rules only ENC charts can fully replace the traditional paper charts. Larger ENC: Larger ENC compilation scale is available. ShipOffcenter and TM Reset. Use the scrollwheel to set the latitude and longitude position for chart center then click the Set Center button. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. From the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. When true motion reset is off. ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. Note: When using ARCS. If true motion reset is active. For more information. or from current position of cursor if automatic TM reset is off. Equal RNC: Same scale ARCS scale is available. 2.and Range+ change the chart scale. i i i ii i i The system has several indications to alert you to availability of charts.4. To restore own ship’s position to the screen center. 4. i You may view S57 charts using different positions and different scales. If true motion reset is on. Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a place other than your ship’s current position. ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display. Set Chart Center. Range+. Select Chart Catalogue from the menu. the indication “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area. The dialog box shown below appears. Smaller ENC: Smaller ENC compilation scale is available.aster art ateria i i i i You may use the ARCS Catalogue to display an ARCS format chart. The basic tools for browsing charts are Range -. 1. Open the Chart menu. display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. . the system also recognises if ENCs are available over the specified area and indicates it with the texts shown above. where it jumps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship’s course. it will automatically jump to the true motion reset position. you reset own position with TM Reset. you use ShipOffcenter. In the relative motion mode. .aster art ateria The system automatically selects next larger or smaller scale. If. In the true motion mode. the message "Larger Scale Data Exists" appears. If the indication "Equal RNC" appears. while the chart moves on screen. If. If. your ship stays in a fixed position. your ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline. in the relative motion mode. this means you can switch to another chart with the same scale to the display by displaying Edit Insert/Info/Select Next in the mouse functions area and pushing the right mouse button. you reset own position with TM Reset. this means that you have a chart with the same scale and overlapping with the displayed ARCS chart. your ship will immediately jump to the true motion reset position and use that position as fixed position to stay on screen. If you use relative motion. When it reaches the true motion reset borderline. in the true motion mode. When you reach an edge of a chart and the indication "Equal RNC" appears. Use Range . you can select a new fixed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter. i i You can use either true motion or relative motion.¨and Range+ to select desired chart scale. An overlapping chart with the same scale will be opened. in the true motion mode. your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true motion movement from that position. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing position. your ship will immediately jump to the true motion reset position. push the scrollwheel. then go to step 4. 4. Select Open Chart from the menu and Manual from sub menu. The selected chart is automatically displayed in the electronic chart area. . Do the following: 1. 3. 2. 5. Check if the text Activate S57 chart appears on the first line of the menu. Select desired chart from the chart list dialog then click the Open Chart button. If the text Activate ARCS Chart is shown. If it is displayed. Open the Chart menu.aster art ateria i i i i To select a specific ARCS format raster chart onto the display use Open menu command. Select Open Chart from the menu and By Position from sub menu. . 3. do the following: 1. use the item "Open by position". if your display is in TM RESET OFF status. The ARCS Open window appears. 2. then go to step 4. Select desired chart from the list box then click the Open Chart button. If it is displayed. 4. Then you get a list of charts that cover current position. Check if the text Activate S57 chart appears on the first line of the menu.aster art ateria i ii To open an ARCS chart by position of your ship or by chart center. Open the Chart menu. push the scrollwheel. 5. To open chart by position. If the text Activate ARCS chart is shown. Safety contour: Set value of safety contour. Monitor brilliance is restored to calibrated state by doing the following: 1) Place the cursor on the calibration bar and spin the scrollwheel to show "CALIB". your ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline. The options are: ƒ Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color ƒ Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts. then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. Black and grey color symbol: This symbol is used to verify that you can distinguish black (frame of symbol) and grey (inner part of symbol) colors with current contrast and brilliance settings. Spot soundings below the safety depth are highlighted. Dsp Dimmer: Use this control to adjust dimming of the display. Visible safety contour is equal to set value or if the contour of set value is not available then the visible safety contour is next deeper contour than safety contour.aster art ateria i The Display dialog box contains several pages to control visible chart features. The text "CALIB" indicates that dimming of display is set within calibration values. Deep contour: Set deep-water contour. Note: The system uses safety contour also for chart alerts. Palette:Select appropriate palette for the display depending on the brightness of the bridge. S c arts are otoco ies of ori ina a er c arts ne cannot c an e i a es of t ese otoco ies Se ections of s a o contour safety e t safety contour ee contour sy o s e t s oun aries i t sectors s a o attern an ate i i t in art a e contro on y isi i ity of a on ayer s on to of t e S c art i a e anua u ates are suc an a on ayer or ore infor ation a out anua u ates see t e c a ter on anua u ates Chart Alert highlight: x Select ON/OFF to show/hide highlight of chart alerts. Shallow contour: Set value of shallow water contour. 3) Press and hold down any one of the F1-F4 keys more than two seconds on the Control Unit RCU-015. Symbols: Select how to display chart symbols. . Safety depth: Set value of safety depth. 2) Select "Set Std Display" from the menu. TM reset: In the true motion mode. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). the chart display uses only two colors: x Deeper than safety contour x Shallower than safety contour Boundaries: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are: x Limited: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale. The options are x Detailed: The system tries to highlight updates so that only those objects that have visible changes are highlighted. x Symbolized: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line. Update Highlight: Set how the updates are highlighted on the screen before you approve them. x Full: The length of a light sector represent its nominal range as defined by the chart producer.aster art ateria Depth: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. . Use this option to see the practical change of an update. the chart display uses four different colors for contours: x Deeper than operator-selected deep contour x Between deep contour and operator-selected safety contour x Between safety contour and operator-selected shallow water contour x Between shallow water contour and coastline. Shallow pattern: Set how to display shallow water area. The options are: x None x Diamond: Provided to distinguish shallow water at night. x All effects: The system highlights updates so that all the objects pertaining to updates are highlighted although some of them have not been changed. For TWO COLOR. Light sector: Set how to display light sectors. For MULTICOLOR. The options are: x Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines. . these features cannot be made invisible.aster art ateria The Standard page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard display. Note 2: To navigate between the menus in the Chart Display dialog box. As required by IMO. You can recall the standard display at any time using a single action. the associated chart feature must be turned on from the Standard page. and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation Traffic routine systems Scale. range. Note 1: To use the Info request feature. which provides information for cursor-selected chart feature. by pressing the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or displaying Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse function area and pushing the right mouse button. i A subset of chart features is called the Display Base. orientation and display mode Units of depth and height . overhead wires. etc. which is selected by the operator Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges. The Other 1 and Other 2 pages contain chart features for which you can control visibility and that are not part of IMO-defined standard display. The Display Base consists of the following chart features: x x x x x x x Coastline (high water) Own ship's safety contour. click the appropriate arrow tab with the left mouse button. clicking the arrow tabs in the dialog box. You can change pages by clicking the right mouse button (Select Next). spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. The figures below show how to find places on the chart that have been updated. To open this box. . Mark updates: Check to show updated parts of chart with red rectangles.aster art ateria i The ARCS details page provides details about current ARCS chart. The ARCS chart that is displayed for "normal" use. View original: Check to show current chart without displaying updated parts. art ateria .aster The ARCS chart that is displayed as original edition and places that show updates are marked with a red rectangle. The "Route" page controls planned and monitored route. The "Mariner" page controls Notes and user charts. Planned route: Select which part of planned route to display. The “General” page controls own ship and target related things. The operator can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area This page contains selection of route related navigation features Monitored route: Select which part of monitored route to display. Note: WPT mark on both monitor and planned routes is permanently set to Std position. The "Tracking" page controls past tracks and some other features.aster art ateria i i i Visibility control of the navigation features is divided into five pages in the Symbol Display dialog box. The "Targets" page controls TT and AIS targets. . select length of past track Labels. where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set (Type: User and Auto). x x . see paragraph 23. Events: These marks are based on voyage log records. select label interval Target past positions x x Density: Select density of past position of points. where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set (Type: Ship and Alarm). x User Event: display event symbols on ECDIS.aster i Past tracks x x x art ateria Ship system: plot own ship’s tracks using system-fed position. For more information. Auto Event: display automatically entered event symbols. Style: Select style of presentation of target's past position. Ship Primary plot own ship’s past track with position fed from the primary sensor.3. Note 2: You can select period of time to display event marks in the list box “Show”. Ship Secondary: plot own ship’s past track with position fed from a secondary sensor. Positions display the latitude and longitude of an event. select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point) Length. x x x style. Note 1: MOB event is always visible.2 “Voyage log”. source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel. AIS: x ROT (º/min). Note. limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector.aster art ateria Color: Select color of target from the list box TT: Std or small for Tracked Targets. . if selected. Tidals: Select to show symbols and tidals on user charts. . only those Lines. Symbols. Color fill for the areas can be selected as transparent from 25 to 75% and as No color fill. only the boundaries of the areas are visible. Display only radar of Lines. Symbols and Areas are displayed which have user selection “on radar” activated for them in the user chart. Text: select to show text of Notes records on the chart. Range: select to circumscribe pilot data records with circles on the display. x Manual Updates: Select to show manual updates with orange symbols. The size of a circle depends on the value set in Notes. Lines: Select to show lines on user charts. This is used to view only that part of the user chart which will be sent to the radar connected to the system. If No color fill is selected. Symbols and Areas. Areas: Select to show areas on the display. User chart: x x x x Points: Select to show user points on user charts. Note: Visibility of manual updates made as true symbols are controlled through Standard and Other pages of the Chart Display menu.aster art ateria i Notes: x x x Position: select to show positions of Notes records with symbols on the chart. Radar Antenna: Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with symbol x. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel/target. Time Increments: x Select OFF or ON to hide or show ticks of velocity vector. If ticks will be too tightly spaced. that this controls both own ship and targets ticks. they will be automatically removed from display. Note.aster art ateria Ship Outlines: True outline shown if x x (Beam width>6mm / Length>6mm). (Simplified Symbol/ Minimised Symbol): Select between simplified or minimised symbol. you can set whether width or length is used to set limit for displaying true symbol. until spacing between ticks will be enough to distinguish them separately. . Velocity Vector Style x x Conventional Std ECDIS (Simplified Symbol/ Minimised Symbol): Select between simplified or minimised symbol. Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. 7. i i Open the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle. 9. Make your changes both Chart Display and Symbol display settings. which means that when you select settings display settings the same file is selected for symbol settings.aster art ateria i i i i i i i i Chart display settings and Symbol display settings are using common settings. Select “Save as” from the Chart Display or Symbol Display menu and then push the scrollwheel. Note. Enter desired name for Chart Display Settings and press OK in dialog box. Select "Select" from the menu and push the scrollwheel. Select Save from the menu to save current chart display settings. Select desired chart display settings from the list box. . You can save these chart display settings to your hard disk and recall them whenever you need them. 6. 4. 10. You can define chart display and symbol display settings which are displayed over S57 charts cells. 8. i 3. Move the cursor over the small triangle on the Chart Display or symbol dialog box. i i Open the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle. i i i To create new settings for chart display. that you have to select “Save” from the menu before closing dialog box i 4. do the following: 6. 5. aster art ateria This page intentionally left blank. . etc. If a manual update itself became obsolete. modifying a position or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. If a mariner needs to make obsolete any of the official objects he deletes them. Regardless of the chart material used. which is used for both S57 and ARCS charts. for example. two weeks ago. mariner must know which of these chart corrections are applied into their ECDIS charts and which of them needs to be added as manual updates. If the mariner wishes to see what kind of manual updates he had in the past. but they are displayed a certain way to indicate a deleted object. Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display.12 "Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of Vector Chart". This ECDIS records complete usage of manual updates. manual updates are stored in a common database. a mariner can remove objects that he has inserted himself. he uses Update History to specify the relevant date range. modifications and insertions are recorded and time stamped. Manual update may include deleting an already existing object. Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update received later for S57 or ARCS charts. in practice. In this ECDIS. by email. the deleted features are still visible.) Navtex warnings Mariners should also keep the electronic charts in their ECDIS up-to-date. because the official chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update. Mariners receive chart corrections and other essential information for the area of their intended voyage as x x Notices to Mariners (by post. However.i SOLAS requires that mariners keep their charts up-to-date for an intended voyage. All deletions. Then. For information on how to set Display and Approve dates. by fax. the mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question. see section 8. . Another benefit of the orange symbols is that they are very easy to insert. Orange symbols are recommended because then you. For chart alerts calculation. We refer to these symbols as "True symbols". Experienced operators can use true symbols to create their own cartography. i i i i i ii Visibility of the orange symbols from manual updates is controlled on the Mariner pages of the Symbol Display dialog box. the following orange symbols can be detected and highlighted during route planning and route monitoring. On the Mariner page the item Manual Updates is selected to "Std Orange". x Add additional mariner information using conspicuous orange symbols reserved for this purpose. orange symbols do not cover all possibilities. We refer to these symbols as "Orange symbols". Category type: x Symbol: Mariner Danger Highlight x Symbol: Mariner Foul Ground x Symbol: Mariner Isolated Danger x Symbol: Mariner Obstruction x Symbol: Mariner Underwater Rock x Symbol: Mariner Wreck x Line: Mariner Danger Highlight Line x Area: Mariner Danger Highlight Area . The associated alert is "860 Safety contour". However. your mates and pilots can easily find these symbols.anua ates i Manual updates can be used for the following purposes: x Keep charts up-to-date using similar symbols as the real chart uses. x Keep charts up-to-date using conspicuous orange symbols reserved for this purpose. until are set as the system current date. see section "8. Their visibility follows common rules. When you accept manual updates as permanent.10. i i i i i i Manual updates operate like any other S57 chart that contains updates and other set chart viewing dates features. . see section 8.anua ates i i i ii Chart features added by manual updates behave exactly as any other chart feature.4 "Controlling visible chart features". the system sets Display Until of manual updates as current date of the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system.12 "Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of Vector charts (S57)". Recommended settings in the Chart viewing dates window are: x Sync Manual Update Dates as ON position x All SENCs ON position See the example below where Displ. For more information. For how to set current date. until and Approv. you must open the Set chart viewing dates window (in the Chart menu) and perform Approve Until. x Undo Last: Remove last accepted manual update planning session. By repeating Undo Last you can remove any amount of old manual update planning session. .anua ates i i The manual update editor has the choices shown below and you can select one by choosing Manual Updates from the Chart menu. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) that chart object in the List then clicking the Remove from List button. Delete removes an existing object. i The manual update editor operates in sessions. Note that with S57 charts "Set chart viewing dates" is in the Chart menu. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all modifications made during the current session. Modify. modify. Edit Properties: You can edit properties of a selected (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button. x Clear: Remove all manual updates in a single operation. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode. Copy. New creates an object from scratch. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning dialog box. x Planning: Operate with new manual updates. Then. x With an ARCS chart. x Backup and Restore: Make a backup or recall already recorded backup. New. click X in upper right corner. you also have "Set chart viewing dates" to set viewing date of manual updates. You can freely delete. Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake. you terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button then the ECDIS stores your manual updates permanently. Modify changes an existing object. Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in the Manual Update Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. displayed by choosing Manual Update from the Chart menu followed by Planning from the sub menu. you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as permanent. copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session. Set the positions with cursor and push left mouse button. Click Accept button. 6. 4. A New Object window appears. i i When you want to create a new object from scratch. Use the default Category Standard Orange to insert a new orange symbol. 7. 11. With New he creates a new feature from scratch.anua ates i The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 14. 10. The detailed procedure is as follows: 5. With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the newly inserted feature. 8. 13. . 12. you start creating by clicking the New button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Click the Accept button. click the Accept List and Values button. Click the Edit Properties button. Highlight Information in the right side box then click the << button to move it to the left hand box then highlight it. 10. Select desired Symbol from the Symbol list box. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 5. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area. . push the scrollwheel. Push the right mouse button. you can add textual information in the Property Value field. 13. 2. 11. 4. Otherwise go to step 14. Now you have two alternatives: If you want to add a text. After entering all characters desired. click inside the box. select Planning then push the scrollwheel. click the Edit Properties and values button. 14. 9. Line or Area). 3.anua ates 1. 12. Click the Accept New Object button. 6. then continue from step 10. Select Manual Updates. If you would like to include textual information related to an orange symbol. Click the New button in a Manual Update Planning dialog box. Select desired Drawing Type (Point. and select Category as Standard Orange. Use the cursor and the left mouse button to define position of symbol then click the Accept button. Click the Edit Position button. To enter text or numeric value. Then. spin the scrollwheel to select character desired then push the scrollwheel. 7. 8. . Click desired object with cursor and push left mouse button. Then click the Edit Properties button. Click the Accept button. New orange symbols are displayed in the list in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 3. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 5.anua ates i i You can make new orange symbols by copying existing orange symbols. 7. Set the positions with cursor and push left mouse button. 4. There can be more than one object in the area. 6. Push the left mouse button then click the Accept button. 4. 7. Click the Edit Position button. Place cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display. Select object from the Objects by Cell window. 8. 9. 8. 2. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 9. After copying you can modify position suitable for your purposes. 3. 5. 1. Place cursor on the desired object then press left mouse button. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Then you pick up an orange symbol and make a copy of it. 2. Then click Accept. 6. You can also view data of each object before making your selection. In practice the deleted chart object is still visible. 2. Select the object from the Objects by Cell window that you wish to delete. 5. 4. 5. Click the Accept button. . Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object. If you delete a manual update chart object. To delete a chart object. Place cursor on desired object and push left mouse button.anua ates i The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 3. do the following: 2. 6. 4. it is removed from the chart display based on date of deletion. but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. 6. If the mariner needs to remove any of the official chart objects. 1. he is allowed to mark them as deleted. Place the cursor on the desired chart object and push the left mouse button. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion. 3. a deletion mark is added over the original chart object that is still visible. line or area. . Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 6. Click the Edit Position button. x Point has only one point in its presentation. 6. x Line can consist of one or more chains. A chain consists of two or more points. 2. Set the positions with cursor and push left mouse button. then click the Accept button. 5. click the object on the chart that you want to edit. 1. See the next two pages for how to modify a chart object. 4. 3. Click the Edit Properties button. Click Accept button. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Edit the position of the selected chart feature then click the Accept button. 3. Click the Modify button. 4. 5. x Area consists of a line that is closed. The Object window appears.anua ates ii ii An object can be type of point. 2) Insert a point with left mouse button pushed. 1) Activate Position Edit. . Choose digit with cursor and push thumbwheel and then spin it change digit. 3) Keep left mouse button pushed down to modify a point.anua ates The example below shows how to modify a line. This method is also applicable to insert or append new WPT points for existing chart features. The example below shows how to set position for a point. 3) Change lat and lon if necessary. 2) Place cursor on point to edit. 1) Activate Position Edit. . 3) Place cursor on requred point and push left mouse button. 1) Activate Position Edit.anua ates The example below how to define an area for an existing chart feature. 2) Choose "Set Center". modify. . copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session. you also have "Set chart viewing dates" to set viewing date of manual updates. New. Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode. i The manual update editor operates in sessions. Delete removes an existing object. Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in a Manual Update Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. [Chart Menu] i i The manual update editor has the following features: x Planning: Operate with new manual updates. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all modifications made during the current session. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) chart object in the List then clicking the Remove from List button. you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as permanent. Modify. x Undo Last: Remove last accepted manual update planning session. x With an ARCS chart. New creates an object from scratch. Modify changes an existing object. Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake. You can freely delete. This is done with "Set Chart viewing dates" in the Chart menu. you terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button and the ECDIS stores your manual updates permanently. By repeating Undo Last you can remove any amount of old manual update planning session. x Clear: Remove all manual update in a single operation. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning dialog box.anua ates i . x Backup and Restore: Make a backup or to recall already recorded backup. click X in upper right corner. Then. Copy. Edit Properties: You can edit properties of selected (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button. anua ates i The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. In practice the deleted chart object is still visible. 5. 1. Click the Accept button. If mariner needs to remove any of the official chart objects he is allowed to mark them as deleted. 4. but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. a deletion mark is added over the original chart object that is still visible. 4. Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object. 3. Select the object from the Objects by Cell window. If you delete a manual update chart object. To delete a chart object. 2. . then it is removed from the chart display based on date of deletion. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 3. 6. Place cursor on desired chart object and push the left mouse button. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion. Confirm data for selected object. Place cursor on desired object and push left mouse button. 5. Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. do the following: 2. 6. 3. You can also add new WPT properties or remove old. 2. 13. 4. 6. click the Edit Position button. 7. Select the object from the Objects by Cell window.anua ates i i The mariner cannot permanently remove from the chart display any of the official chart objects. . 4. Click Accept Manual Updates as Permanent. 5. Click the Accept button. Place the cursor on the desired object then push the left mouse button. If you want to modify also properties continue from step 10. Click the Accept button. 1. Confirm data for selected object. Otherwise continue from step 9. also click Accept. 6. 10. 5. the ECDIS will mark original chart object as deleted and a copy of original chart object as inserted. Pick from the list properties you want to modify and give them new values. 11. If you want to modify properties. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Click the Modify button. If you want to modify the position of the object. 8. Place cursor on desired object and press left mouse button. Click Accept List and values to continue from step 5 or 11 again. Click the Edit Properties button. If you want to modify the properties of the object click Edit Properties and values button. Otherwise continue from step 9. 12. Place the cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display. 9. Otherwise continue from step 13. When the mariner modifies a chart object. 2. but he can modify position and/or properties of chart objects. 3. All self-understandable chart objects that can be created based on a single selected chart object. 11. i The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy. Line or Area) and type of object: Object type (category) x Standard orange. x Easy Other Sea Mark. x Easy Lateral Sea Mark. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any simple lights. 12. With New he creates a new feature from scratch. you start creating by clicking the New button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.anua ates 7. because they consist of several objects put together with master and slave relationships. etc. x Easy Obstruction. i i When you want to create a new object from a scratch. A S57 Object window appears. x Single. Examples are different kind of restricted and warning areas. In this window you can select geometric type of object (Point. Guided method to create obstructions. With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the new inserted feature. x Easy Light. x Nav Aid. light ships. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any cardinal sea marks. This category is reserved for simple orange symbols. anchorage symbols. Click Accept button. . x Easy Cardinal Sea Mark. 10. Set positions with cursor and push left mouse button. 9. 13. 8. Nav Aid is a guided method to create navigational aids such as lights and buoys. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any other sea marks. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any lateral sea marks. 9. 9. Repeat this until you have defined all points. Set cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display then push the left mouse button. 5.anua ates Example of how to insert a "restricted area" 1. 4. 7. Select Area from the Drawing Type list box then select Single from the Category list box. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to finish. New object is displayed in the List. 6. 5. 2. Then. 3. 8. 8. Click the Accept New Object button. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. . Set position with cursor and push left mouse button. Select desired icon from the list of available chart objects. click the Edit Properties button. 2. 6. 3. 4. Click the Edit Position button. 7. Click the New button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Click Accept button. 5. New object is displayed in the List. Click the New button. 9. easy other sea marks. 6. 3. Shape. Click Accept button. Click the Accept New Object button. Click the Accept button. 8. 4. On the desired location on the ECDIS display push left mouse button. Select Easy Lateral Sea Mark from the Category list box. 6. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 8.anua Example of how to insert easy lateral sea mark The method is similar also for easy cardinal sea marks. 7. Click the Edit Position button. Select appropriate items from Type. . 4. 9. Easy lights and easy obstructions. Then click the Edit Properties button. 2. 7. Set position with cursor and push left button. 5. ates 3. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. Region and Side. 1. . When you have set a master object. click the Accept New Object button. 5. Click the Accept button. and the object appears on the display at the position selected. Then use the cursor to select desired icon from the master object. 1. Body and top mark of a buoy are separated to enable a vast number of possible combinations. When you are ready with master and its slave objects. Click the Set as Master button. 8. 4. If you need more than one slave object continue from step 5. Click the Edit Position button. 10. 6. Click the Edit Properties button.anua ates Example of how to insert a nav aid A light is only a light . you can define nav aid slaves for it. 7. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button (11b in the example). or click the Accept button (11a in the illustration on the next page). 11. Use the cursor to select desired icon (for example. Place the cursor on desired location on the ECDIS display and the push the left mouse button. The new object w/slave (two lights) is shown in the list box. 12. Click the New button. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 3. etc. 9.it also requires a support that could be a pile or buoy. 2. select Nav Aid as Category. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Then. 13. Light) of a slave object. Click the Set as Nav Aid Slave button. Select Point as Drawing Type. set the position of your master and slave objects. 7. Set position and then click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 11a. 5. . 13. 11b. 12. 9. 10. Press Accept button. 4. 8. 6. Set postion with cursor and push left mouse button.anua ates 3. ) . Click the Accept button. object with cursor and push left mouse button. 7. Place the cursor on desired location on the ECDIS display. Place the cursor on a desired object and click the left mouse button. New object is displayed in "List of". Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. Then you pick up an object and make a copy of it with all related properties. 9. click the Edit Properties button. 2. After copying. Click the Edit Position button. 2. Then. 6. 4. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. move the window. Click desired 4.anua ates i i You can make a new object by copying an existing one. 5. Select object from the Object by Cell window. Set position with cursor and push left mouse button. 1. (If button is hidden by window. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. 9. 8. 3. 8. you can modify position and properties of copied object suitable for your purposes. 3. Click the left mouse button. 5. 6. Click Accept button. 7. After you have edited all the values of the linked objects. 3. highlight desired value in the Properties List. In Manual Update Planning dialog box. If the Object has a linked object. An Object window appears. if you want continue from step 2 with the object. Make desired modifications in the Master/Slave relationship edit window. . 6. 6. 4. Otherwise continue from step 4. 3.anua ates ii ii i i 2. you can also edit those values. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Click Edit Master/Slaves relationship button to edit them. Add or remove features from/to the Properties List using >> and << buttons. Click the Edit Properties and values button. 1. A Properties List and Values Edit window appears. 5. then you can edit in the Property Value field using Alternatives field or enter Numeric or Textual value. 4. click the Edit Properties button. 2. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. 5. click the Accept button. To edit property value. After you have edited all the values of the object you click the Accept List and Values button. anua ates ii ii An object can be type of point. With the Position Edit window open. x A Line can consist of one or more chains. 2. 2. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Set cursor on position and push left mouse button. Click the Edit Position button. Press the Modify button. select object on chart then click the Edit Properties button. 1. Object window appears. see the next several pages. 5. An Object window appears. line or area. x An Area consists of a line that is closed. 4. 1) Activate Position Edit. 5. 3. Example of how to modify a line 3. x A Point has only one point in its presentation. 3) Keep left mouse button pushed down when you modify position of a point. you can edit the position of the selected chart feature. A chain consists of two or more points. 4. Click Accept button. For further details. 2) Place cursor on point desired. . push thumbwheel and then roll thumbwheel. 2) Select "Set Center". Place cursor on digit. .anua ates Example of how to set next WPT position for a point The method is also applicable to insert or append new WPT points for existing chart features. 2) Insert point with left mouse button. 1) Activate Position Edit. 3) If necessary change lat and lon position. Example of how to define a new center point for an existing chart feature 1) Activate Position Edit. 3) Place cursor on new required center point and push left mouse button. See below. click the Manual Update Dates button. To open the Manual Update Chart viewing dates window. Also you may need to check what was shown in your chart display three weeks ago. Alternatively. There are also many other cases when you need to know what was known by your ECDIS. you can use either Display Until and Approve Until to specify exact date of interest. select Set Chart viewing dates. In the Chart Viewing Dates window. .anua ates i i i You may need to check when a manual update has been added into your ECDIS. you can specify directly the number of the manual update planning session. To check any situation in the past. open the Chart menu. restricted areas). A window lists the various areas that activate danger warnings. there is a safety contour alert acknowledged but condition still exists. the ECDIS utilises the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the hard disk in SENC format. The ECDIS can check the following for you: x x Predicted movement area of your ship Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas The ECDIS will highlight the following for you: x x x Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of your ship Dangerous areas inside your monitored route Dangerous areas inside your planned route Note. You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. For this function. If you plan a route or if prediction of your ship movement goes across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists. Note that the ECDIS calculates dangerous areas using the largest scale chart available. a new cross of safety contour will not cause new visual or audio alert.The ECDIS can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect an area where a specified condition exists. the system will display a visual alert or sound an audio alarm to alert you to impending danger. if any of selected danger area alert is in pending state. new alert for new the same category of danger area will not cause new alert. You can select objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example. For example. . which may not be the visualised chart. This is very useful with raster chart material such as ARCS. The system can utilise these areas when calculating chart alerts. If the Chart page is not displayed.5 "Route Planning". select them for indication or alert. Set watch sector for your ship. Activating own ship check”. If you want chart alerts to be included in some other objects or areas. 5.2. Check that "Chart Alerts" is set for display.3 "Highlighting chart alert". see chapter “11. See section 11. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator can use for chart alerts. 4.2.art erts Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of chart alerts. For more information. i User has to select safety depth suitable for your ship. 2. See section 11. click the Chart tab to display it. In the route planning mode.2. Make a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the route. Enter desired depth in the Safety contour field. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below. For more information. do the following: 1. In the example above the safe water depth is set for 8 m. Select route as monitored route. Note: If the chart does not contain selected depth contour. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. Select suitable safety contour for your ship. 3. See section 11. 3. see section 11. The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated your ship's position. define a new route or select an existing one.1 "Choosing safety contour". .2 "Choosing objects in chart alerts".4. 1. To select suitable depth. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. the system will automatically select next deeper contour. In the Ignore box at the top of the window.art erts i i You can also include calculation areas that have to be noted when sailing (for example. To remove an alert. click it in the Indication or Alert box with the left mouse button then click the Ignore button. 4. To include these areas in chart alerts. the system will display a visual indication when crossing "Restricted Area" and the audio alarm when crossing "Safety contour". 2. The item selected is moved from the Ignore box to the Graphical Indication or Alert/Warning box as appropriate. Set them appropriately. Click the Check Area tab with the left mouse button. In the above example. restricted areas). 9. Click the Indication button to display visual alert. Time or Distance and Width are explained in section 11. 7. Place the cursor on the triangle inside the Initial Settings dialog box to open the Initial Settings menu. 8. . 3. Click the Alerts tab to show the Chart Alerts dialog box. do the following: 1. click it in the Indication or Alert box with the left mouse button then click the Indication or Alert button as appropriate. Select Initial Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel. use the left mouse button to click the alert item you wish to process. 6. or Alert/Warn button to get the audio alarm.4 "Activating Own ship Check". Select what alert type you desire. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Select Chart Alerts parameters then push the scrollwheel. 5. To change an alert method. You can select from the following areas: x x x x x x x x x x x x x x "Safety Contour" "Areas To Be Avoided" "User Chart Danger Area" "Traffic Separation Zone" "Inshore Traffic Zone" "Restricted Area" "Caution Area" "Offshore Production Area" "Military Practice Area" "Seaplane Landing Area" "Submarine Transit Lane" "Anchorage Area" "Marine Farm / Aquaculture" "PSSA Area" .art erts i There are the areas that the ECDIS detects and provides the audio alarm or visual indication if estimated your ship's position or planned or monitored route cross the area defined on the Chart Alerts page. select ON to highlight alert areas. Spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display then push the left mouse button. 2. Follow the procedure below to turn alert area highlighting on. as shown right. 1. In the Chart Alert highlight box. Click the right or left arrow tab to select the Chart page. .art erts i i i The user can select to highlight chart alert areas. 3. Danger Symbol must checked. In the Symbol page. you can include symbols in the chart alert by checking Danger Symbol. otherwise danger symbols of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alert. otherwise danger lines of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alert. 2.art erts i i i For user chart symbols. do the following: 1. Danger Symbol i To include lines in the chart alert. Click the Symbol tab. Danger Line must checked. 3. To include symbols in the chart alert. To display this box. . Place the cursor on UserChart in the information area. you can include lines in the chart alert by checking Danger Line. use the option Danger Symbol in the Symbol page of the Plan User Chart dialog box. check the Danger Line box in the Line page of the Plan User Chart dialog box. first check the Enables changes box then check the Danger Symbol box of the Plan User Chart dialog box. The dangerous symbol is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use). The dangerous line is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use). Click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box. In the Line page. The figure below shows the behaviour of a danger symbol. In the Area page. otherwise danger areas of a user chart cannot be used in the chart alert. line and area in the chart alert check. check the Danger Area box in the Area page of the Plan User Chart dialog box. Danger Area must checked. you can include areas in the chart alert by checking Danger Area.art erts To include areas in the chart alert. resentation of an erous rea resentation of an erous Sy o resentation of an erous ine . The dangerous area is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use). 2. X i Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Set the Time or Distance and Width as appropriate. . Click the Check Area tab. Sector size is defined by time and Width or by distance and Width. Calculation of your ship predicted movement area is done using watch sector from your ship's position. Roll the wheel to select Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel. Place the cursor in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the menu displayed at left.art erts i i 1. 4. X 6. 7. Roll the scrollwheel to select Chart Alert parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Click the X at the top right corner to close the dialog box. do the following: Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close 3. To set them. The figure below and on the next page shows how a watch sector is displayed on the ECDIS display. X X X X 5. art erts Chart alert always uses the largest scale chart available no matter which chart is selected for display. . See the chapter on route planning. or check alerts by using category of alert. c) Check the Enable changes box. a) Open the Plan Route dialog box by place the cursor put on Route in information area and click Plan (see section 13. Enter safety contour you want to use. b) Click the Alerts tab. The system will check a route leg by leg and when finished you will see the number of Legs and Alerts below the tab buttons.1 "Choosing safety contour". Click the Check tab then click the Start button to generate a list of chart alerts. use display and approve dates corresponding to the dates you are going to sail. If there are alerts included in the planned route. For more information on route planning.2. Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier than it is to take place. define waypoints and other necessary information. Plan a route. on the Alerts page in the Plan Route dialog box. Danger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or operator-selected chart alert areas are crossed by the planned route. You can generate a list of chart alerts that cross by the planned route.2). 3. See section 11. . Select dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring. shown below. 2. check alerts leg by leg. WPT Alerts: Alerts by leg Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes This route is unchecked. then click the alert to process from the Ignore during monitoring list then click the Indication or Alert button as appropriate to select what type of alert you want. 4. WPT Legs by alert Alerts: 11 Alerts by leg Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored.art erts i The system will calculate chart alerts using operator-defined channel limit for routes. This can be done as follows: 1. see the chapter on route planning. All the alerts for each leg where alerts occur are shown in the Alerts list. In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box. Select the Alert from the Alerts by leg field then click Locate leg button. The list of alerts is based on selections made in the Chart alert parameters sub menu. do the following: 1. the system is able to show you legs on the route where danger areas are located.art erts i i After you have done chart alert calculation. the Alerts by leg field has a selection box where you may select desired leg number. To find chart alerts by route leg. . The system will display selected leg on the electronic chart area as shown below. WPT Legs by alert Alerts: 11 Alerts by leg Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes 2. The system can show alerts by their category. WPT Legs by alert Alerts: 11 Alerts by leg Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes 2. . The system will display selected leg on electronic chart area as shown below. To find chart alerts for a route by alert category. Select the leg number from the Leg field then click Locate leg button. the Legs by alert field has a selection box where you may select desired leg number.art erts i i After you have done chart alert calculation. In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box. the system is able to show you legs on the route where the chart alerts are located. do the following: 1. .art erts i i Route monitoring can be divided into two categories: your ship estimated position and monitored route. The figure above shows how the system highlights chart alerts inside channel limits of a monitored route and inside predicted movement area of your ship. 2). For further details.art erts Note: The system has a route monitor that facilitates safe use of routes. To show the route monitor. open the Route Monitor by place the cursor put on Route in information area and click Monitor (see section 14. lines and areas and calculate chart alert from this material. Suggested SPD Average SPD profile i In case of ARCS charts. You can check your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to use together with a route plan. when you start planning of next voyage. The chart alert calculation is done with route and predicted movement area of your ship. The system can use user chart symbols. do the following: . use the Alerts page in this dialog box to verify difference between actual and planned situation. see Chapter 15 "User Chart Control". This figure shows chart alert used with an ARCS chart. To get chart alert with a user chart. If the text "Checked conditions differ" appears at the bottom of the Monitor Route dialog box. the operator can define danger areas by using a user chart. 6. lines and/or areas for chart alerts. planned route and your ship. In the route planning mode. See section 11.art 1. Check that "Chart Alert Warning Area" is set for display.4 "Activating Own Ship Check" for the procedure.3 "Highlighting chart alerts" for the procedure.2. 2. 3. Select user chart danger area indication or alert position. 5. The system is ready for chart alerts based on user chart for monitored route.2 "Choosing objects used in chart alerts" for the procedure.2. Make chart alert for the route if there are indications of danger areas along the route. See section 11. erts Create a new user chart or select an existing one in which has been defined symbols have been defined. . Modify your route if necessary.5 "Route Planning". define a new route or select an existing one. 4. Select route as monitored route. See Chapter 15 for how to create a user chart. See section 11. by using Exchange with Monitored in the Route menu. See section 11. Set watch sector for your ship. art erts This page intentionally left blank. . The list below shows the display mode and chart orientation combinations available. RM. spin the scrollwheel to select orientation desired then push the scrollwheel. In the relative motion mode. True Motion: x x True Motion North Up True Motion Course Up In the true motion display mode. or when you use the TM Reset function. In the true motion mode. TM. or when you use the TM Reset function. Note: When using Route-up RM. and relative motion. the ECDIS shows the chart information and radar targets moving relative to your ship's position fixed on the screen. accessed from the mouse functions area or the CU/TM R key on the keyboard-equipped unit. the orientation of the chart is automatically reset when it reaches the TM reset boundary. They are true motion. the orientation of the chart is automatically reset when it reaches the TM reset boundary. accessed from the mouse functions area or the CU/TM R key on the keyboard-equipped unit. . Relative Motion: x x x Relative Motion North Up Relative Motion Course Up Relative Motion Route Up In the relative motion display mode. The display mode currently in use is shown at the top left corner on the screen.i i i i i There are two display modes to present your ship’s movement on the electronic chart. i i i i i Place the cursor on the orientation indication at the top left corner on the screen. the ECDIS shows your ship's position and other movable data such as radar targets moving on the earth-fixed chart background. the chart is redrawn whenever the chart source is changed. EBL. then press and hold down the left mouse button while rotating the trackball. The corresponding VRM must be turned off to use a range marker. Marks dialog box.) The EBLs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or unchecking "EBL" on the Set 1 or Set 2 page. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from your ship's position up to the edge of the screen. If you locate the cursor over the intersection of a VRM and an EBL. i i i i There are two EBLs. Note: If you are using the Control Unit RCU-018. 2 EBL. 2. Marks dialog box. EBL and reference point. above the EBL OFF and EBL ON keys. Info: Turn on/off numerical information about VRM. 1 and No. To adjust an EBL. . Provides a second set of the items contained in Set 1. 1 EBL and the short dashed one is the No. The range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM rotary encoder. 2. To display the Nav. i i You have two methods available to adjust the EBL. REF point: Turn on/off the reference point on the electronic chart. The ring interval depends on scale of displayed chart. or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles and its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. spin the scrollwheel to display Show Value/Info/Nav Marks in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. 1 and No. Two sets of these marks are provided on the Nav. Press the EBL ON key to display either of the EBLs. The EBLs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or unchecking EBL on the Set 1 or Set 2 page. the EBLs and VRMs can also be turned on or off from the keyboard. or you can put the cursor on an EBL. You can directly enter a numeric value for the EBL on the Nav. No.a i ation oo s i i Navigation marks consist of two sets of Reference Point. using the left mouse button and trackball. Each EBL carries a range marker. VRM. Marks dialog box. you can adjust them together. EBL: Turn on/off EBL (Electronic Bearing Line). and four parallel index lines. use the EBL rotary encoder. Centered: Center of VRM and EBL matched to ship position. which extends from the reference point. which is displayed around the reference point. so that you can arrange each set according to a particular navigation operation. The long dashed line is the No. (Note that this can also be done from the keyboard-equipped control unit. Rings: Turn on/off the range rings. Successive presses of the EBL ON key toggle the active EBL between No. VRM: Turn on/off the VRM (Variable Range Marker). which circumscribe the reference point. Pt. (Note that this can also be done from the keyboard-equipped control unit. You can directly enter a numeric value for the VRM on the Nav. above the VRM OFF and VRM ON keys. If you locate the cursor over the intersection of a VRM and an EBL. 2. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by different lengths of their dashes.) The VRMs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or unchecking "VRM" on the Set 1 or Set 2 page. Press the VRM ON key to display either of the VRMs. use the VRM rotary encoder. 2. 1 and No. i i You have two methods available to adjust the VRM. To adjust a VRM. Marks dialog box. then press and hold down the left mouse button while rotating the trackball. or you can locate cursor over the VRM. using the left mouse button and trackball. Marks dialog box. shown on the display with a cross mark (if turned on in the Nav Marks dialog box). 1 and No. To select the location for the reference point. open the Nav. put the cursor at the location desired then push the right mouse button. is a specified location to which measurements of range and bearing are referred. Successive presses of the VRM ON key toggle the active VRM between No. check Ref.a i ation oo s i i i i There are two VRMs. you can adjust them together. i i i The reference point. Display ‰ REF point ‰ VRM ‰ EBL ‰ Range: ‰ Info 2NM LAT LON REF point ‰ centered Centered reference point with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) . which appear as dashed rings so that you can discriminate them from the fixed range rings. No. a i ation oo s Display ‰ REF point ‰ VRM ‰ EBL ‰ Range: ‰ Info 2NM LAT LON REF point ‰ centered Reference point off centered with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) Display ‰ REF point ‰ VRM ‰ EBL ‰ Range: ‰ Info 2NM LAT LON REF point ‰ centered Centered reference point with range ring . To display the Nav. . Distance: Set distance (NM) between lines. the EBLs and VRMs can also be turned on or off from the keyboard.PI4: Select desired Parallel index (PI1-PI4) in a list box and move cursor over text OFF or ON to switch PI on or off display. Marks dialog box. There are four sets of parallel indexes for use. Bearing type: Set Line angle setting (true or relative). PI 1. Note: If you are using the Control Head RCU-018. Mode: Set index line reference to own ship heading: parallel or perpendicular. Reset PI Lines: Reset Bearing to relative 0 degrees and Distance to 1 NM and Mode to Parallel. Open PI pages to adjust parallel index.a i ation oo s i i i Parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. 3 or 6. Index Lines: Select number of index lines to display 1. spin the scrollwheel to display Show Value/Info/Nav Marks in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. 2. a i ation oo s This page intentionally left blank. . It also calculates safe water areas based on operatordefined channel limits. there is a limitation to display a route. great circle) Fuel saving ETD for the first waypoint ETA for the last waypoint Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation Name of the user chart to use during route monitoring together with this planned route Name of the Notes to use during route monitoring together with this planned route Using the above-mentioned data. latitude and longitude of each waypoint Radius of turn circle at each waypoint Safe channel limits Chart alert calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart danger Minimum and maximum speed for each leg The navigation method (rhumb line. The calculated data is displayed in tabular form that can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a file for later use. The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring your route. the system calculates speed. fuel consumption and WOP for the Autopilot. The route files thus formed contain the Autopilot commands for each waypoint. The plan includes: x x x x x x x x x x x x x Route name Name. set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on display.i i A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The main functions of route planning are: x x x x x x Define waypoints Define turnings for each waypoint Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints). Define the speed for each leg Calculation for ETD and ETA Calculation for most economical sailing Note: Limitation of displayed route If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western (0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display. . ETAs for each waypoint. To avoid this. course and length for each leg. i i 1. that is. The Plan Route menu is where you select. 2. See section 13. . 3. 3. Place the cursor on Route in the information area. To complete route planning. a route has been selected.3 "Using the check page". See section 13. 4. you can show it by placing the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box. unselect or create a route. Modify your route if necessary.4 "Creating a New Route". See section 13.6 "Route Optimization". See section 13. Optimize your route. Click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. and the following dialog box appears: Route: not selected 2. Route plan is used for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. do the following 1.4. Create a new route or select an existing one. If it is not shown.oute annin i The main parameters for the route planning are: x x x x Latitude and longitude of the waypoint Channel limits to the waypoint Turning radius of the waypoint Maximum and minimum speed limits for a leg i There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. The Plan Route dialog box appears together with the Plan Route menu. shown on the next page.5 "Modifying an Existing Route". Planned route is used both as alternative route and as an editable route.) are selected on the Route page in the Symbol Display dialog box. See also section 13. right-click the TO WPT then enter correct WPT. Copy from Monitored: Copy monitored route to plan route. WPT Alerts WPT LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH LIM/m MIN/kn MAX/kn WPT count Delete WPT . Passage Plan Report: Generate a combined report from active planned route and active Notes. and a list box appears. An input box appears. If this is not done. see below. and unintended waypoint could become the TO WPT.4 "Creating a New Route". enter name for new route. Create: Create a new route. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate route from the list box. The operation is similar to how you select a route. push the scrollwheel to confirm then click the OK button.oute annin Select: Select an existing route and edit it for use. etc. Backup and Restore: You can make a backup of a route to a floppy disk or restore a route from a floppy disk. If this occurs. Unselect: Deselect a route here. using the scrollwheel. Select "Select" from the menu and push the scrollwheel. Exchange with Monitored: This function exchanges planned and monitored routes. The route name may have up to 30 alphanumeric characters. Report: Generate report of planned route. For the procedure. NOTICE: Before using this function. make sure that desired options of the planned route (Center line. set the next TO WPT on the Prepare page of the Plan dialog box. Note: To display a planned route. Leg marks. Channel borders. WPT marks. See Chapter 17 for the procedure. Full WPT Report: Generate detailed report of planned route. If you use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations.3 "Choosing Datum". For more information to select datum. Click the arrow tabs or right mouse button (or NEXT key on the keyboardequipped control unit) to select the Route page. although it is recommended to use native datum of the chart. . then you could use any datum. i Selection of datum is very important.oute annin Spin the scrollwheel to display Symbol Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area then click the left mouse button to open the Symbol Display dialog box. see section 15. especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions or if you use a digitizer. ) Do this for all waypoints of your route. 3. Channel limit. 9. put the cursor on the triangle. Alarm (to get the audio alarm) or Ignore (to remove check item) button as appropriate. To print a waypoint report.oute annin i Select Route Monitor X X 6. Check Enable changes in the Plan Route dialog box. WPT Alerts WPT WPT LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH LIM/m MIN/kn MAX/kn 2. After entering a waypoint. 4. Use the Alerts page to define safety contour and other specified conditions for checking the route. if you are using Time table optimizing. Max) as appropriate in the Plan Route dialog box. Enter a name (max. The ECDIS can examine chart database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts. Use the Parameters page to enter Estimated Time of Departure (ETD) and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA). 6. WPT Alerts 5. Left-click Route in the information area. put the cursor on the triangle to show the Plan Route menu. edit Name. Radius. (If you want to change the font size. before clicking the Print Text button. Plan X WPT count Delete WPT 7. click the Start button. 5. When name is ready. click the OK button. Select position of a waypoint by placing the cursor on the location desired on the electronic chart display then pushing the left mouse button. 7. do the following: 1. 8. Left-click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. open the Plan Route dialog box. Select desired optimizing mode from the Optimize window. Steering mode. spin the scrollwheel to change value then push the scrollwheel. Click the Print Text button. Select Create. select font size then push the scrollwheel. (Place the cursor on an item.) . Select item from a list then click Indication (to get a visual indication). Use the Check page to detect areas where depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist. select Report or Full Report from the menu then push the scrollwheel. WPT Alerts Legs by Alert Alerts by Leg Alerts: Alert: 9. Safety margin and Speed (Min. Write name of new Route Plan 8. 2. WPT Alerts To make a complete route for a voyage. Put the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the Route Plan menu. To create a list of alerts. 30 alphanumeric characters) for the route by spinning the scrollwheel to select character desired and confirming desired character by pushing the scrollwheel. Note: Routes can only be modified in the North-up or Course-up mode. Define extension for channel to be checked against selected alerts. You can define direction and distance for next waypoint. the button name changes to Adjust after). Enable changes: Check to edit waypoints. Center line. WPT's latitude co-ordinate is displayed in selected datum. Import new waypoints from already existing routes into your current route. for each leg. Define minimum speed of ship used with a leg. Delete current waypoint. Add a new waypoint after current waypoint. (If the waypoint is the last waypoint in a route. WPT: NAME: LAT: LON: Leg/° Leg/NM: Mode: RAD/NM: CH LIM/m : Margin/m (Spd) MIN/kn: (Spd) MAX/kn: Insert before: Insert after: Each waypoint has a number. WPT marks and leg marks are made visible on top of the electronic chart. Define turning radius for each waypoint. Insert a new waypoint before the current waypoint. channel borders. Define maximum speed of ship used with a leg. Reverse sailing order of the entire route. Delete WPT: Import: Reverse route: Display all: . WPT's longitude co-ordinate is displayed in selected datum. Bearing of leg Leg's length (nm) Define steering mode. rhumb line or great circle. Define channel limit for each leg. You can name each waypoint.oute annin i WPT Alerts WPT i LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH LIM/m MIN/kn MAX/kn WPT count Delete WPT Following fields and buttons can be found in the WPT page. by visual or audible indication. . This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions. Enable changes Check here in order to enable editing. Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alert calculation. Note: A route may only be modified when using the north-up or course-up mode. Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alert calculation. Deep contour selected for chart alert calculation Copy system settings to here. This allows you to check safety with conditions different from those selected for system use.) You can select safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the route. Only the visual alert is released. (You cannot get both visual and audible indications for a condition. Ignore during monitoring Indication during monitoring Alarm/Warning during monitoring Safety contour Copy from used settings Chart objects in this list box are not used for chart alert calculation. Both visual and audio alarms of selected chart objects are generated by the system.oute annin i The Alerts page lets you define conditions along a route for which you want to be alerted. To continue. If your voyage lasts more than one week. always use current date during your voyage. In this case use scale range 1:1 000 – 1: 500 000. This storage happens when you activate the safe water calculation by pushing the Start button. set current date at least once per week during your voyage. The stored names are the names of the planned user chart and planned Notes. You also store the names of the user chart and Notes to use during route monitoring together with planned route on this page. WPT Legs by alert Alerts: 11 Alerts by leg Alerts: Legs by alert Alert: Planned Notes The time used for the Chart Alert check is subject to chart database and route distance. always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan. one of the dialog boxes shown right appears as a reminder. Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation. . Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning.oute annin i The Check page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route. When the Start button is clicked. click the Yes button. If selected scale for displayed chart(s) is smaller than 1:5000 000. Chart Alert calculation is not performed. oute annin i The Parameters page allows you to set departure time and arrival time for your route. If not selected. ETA can be calculated between two specified waypoints. .6. max profit and min. ( Income * 1000$) Optimize types are max. Budget for this voyage. (0 is automatically the last waypoint).6. Also total length of the route is displayed. see section 13.) Safety margin MIN: Speed limit: Income: Optimize: i i i After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation. speed. Enable changes: Check in order to enable editing. timetable. (0 is automatically the first waypoint) First part is planned estimated time of arrival to last waypoint. Note: A route may only be modified when using the north-up or course-up mode. Define extension for channel to be checked against selected alerts. (Description is provided in section 13. If you want do optimization with specific strategy. Description: ETD/UTC: ETA/UTC: Enter note concerning the route. Second part is calculated ETA that may differ from planned ETA if it is impossible for them to agree with selected optimization method. speed.1 "Available route optimization strategies". Planned estimated time of departure from a specified waypoint. Also optimization type is selected in this page.1 "Available route optimization strategies". Set speed limit for a route. you can optimize your route. cost. then optimization will be done automatically with max. Alerts . ECDIS will select the most suitable To WPT based on your ship's position and Final WPT based on waypoint selected on the Parameters page. Use this page if you are going to use the exchange function to select planned route as monitored route.oute annin i The Prepare page allows you to prepare for exchange of planned route with monitored route. If you do not use this page to define To WPT and Final WPT for steering in the planning mode. . Enter distance and direction for next waypoint.oute annin i i i i WPT WPT Alerts LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH lim/m MIN/l\kn MAX/kn WPT count Adjust after Delete WPT Modifying an existing route Main parameters for the route planning are: x x x x Latitude and longitude of the waypoint Channel limits to the waypoint Turning radius of the waypoint Maximum and minimum speed limits for a leg i x x x i ii To change position of a waypoint you have following alternatives: Enter latitude and longitude on the WPT page in the Plan Route dialog box. Drag and drop waypoint using the left mouse button. then select desired WPT. spin the scrollwheel to set co-ordinates then push the scrollwheel to confirm. then highlight number of WPT by cursor then push the left mouse button. 2. 3. . Enter Direction and Distance in respective box in the Next WPT field then click the OK button. Click the Adjust after button. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. Place the cursor in the Lat or Lon field as appropriate. Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.oute annin i 1. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. Check Enable changes. INSERT/MODIFY NEXT WPT Current WPT: 1 Next WPT NM OK 4. i i i ii i Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. 2. Check Enable changes. 1. i i i i i Position of WPT can be defined using distance and direction between two waypoints. and the following dialog box appears. min/max speed. Push the scrollwheel to confirm changes. 3. steering mode. Press and hold down the left mouse button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position. such as name. turning radius. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. 2. i To change other data of a waypoint. . do the following: Place the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change data. Keep the button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at desired position.oute annin i 1. Drag and drop waypoint to next WPT position (in this case waypoint number 9 is taken to a next WPT position) i 1. WPT WPT Alerts LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH lim/m MIN/l\kn MAX/kn WPT count Adjust after Delete WPT 4. i i ii Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. 2. Check Enable changes. then put the cursor on the waypoint you want to process. Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. For how to modify waypoint data. INSERT/MODIFY NEXT WPT Current WPT: 1 Next WPT NM OK i i If you want to insert a waypoint between two waypoints. Click the Insert after button in the Waypoints page. on the WPT page. use the Insert before button. Modify data of added waypoint. Enter direction and distance for waypoint then click the OK button. Place the cursor in the electronic chart area on the location desired for a waypoint then push the left mouse button.oute annin i x x i There are two ways that you can add a new waypoint at the end of a route: Use the cursor and left mouse button to define position of a waypoint. do the following: 1. Select last waypoint as current waypoint. 2. Select WPT 7 then click the Insert before button. This inserts a waypoint next to current waypoint. Check Enable changes. To add a new waypoint by using the left mouse button. you want insert a new waypoint between waypoints 6 and 7. see paragraph 13. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. 3. The waypoint is added at the end of route. Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. WPT is highlighted on the WPT list.5.3 "Changing other waypoint data". For example. do the following: 1. The new waypoint will be inserted between WPT 6 and WPT 7. 3. . 2. To add a new waypoint by the Insert after button. Use the Adjust after button in the WPT page. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. Check Enable changes. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired option then push the scrollwheel. Click the Import button. When finished. 2. or place the cursor directly on the waypoint on the screen. In the Copy from window. 5. Direct or Reverse. Enter first waypoint to copy in "First WPT to copy". 3. To enter them after a WPT in a route. Check Enable changes. Click the Delete WPT button. Highlight the WPT number on the WPT list that you wish to delete. Check Enable changes. The following dialog box appears. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired number then push the scrollwheel. put the cursor in the Route box. Enter number of waypoints to copy in "Number of WPTs". If you want to enter them before a WPT in the route where WPTs will be imported. i Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. . 6. 4. "Reverse" copies them in reverse order. 7.oute annin i To delete a waypoint. 9. i i You are able to select waypoints from other routes to import them to current route. spin the scrollwheel to select the route from which to copy waypoints then push the scrollwheel. enter waypoint number in the "Copy before WPT" box. 8. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. enter waypoint number in the "Copy after WPT" box. Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. To import waypoints do the following: 1. Click the Copy button. Enter where to import waypoints. do the following: 1. click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box. WPT IMPORT WPT total First WPT to copy Number of WPTs WPT total Copy after WPT Copy before WPT 3. Select copying order. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select WPT number then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired number then push the scrollwheel. "Direct" copies the waypoints in their original order. enter waypoint number in the "Copy after WPT" box (if applicable). When finished. Check Enable changes. click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box. The following dialog box appears. To import waypoints do the following: 1. WPT total Copy after WPT Copy before WPT When text "Import from ext. device button. WPT IMPORT WPT total Copy after WPT Copy before WPT When WPTs are imported. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired number then push the scrollwheel. Place the cursor on Route in the information area then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. like FURUNO GP-80 or GP-90 GPS Navigator to current route. you can monitor progress of it as it is shown picture above. 2. WPT IMPORT WPT total First WPT to copy Number of WPTs WPT total Copy after WPT Copy before WPT 3. WPT IMPORT WPT total Copy after WPT Copy before WPT When it is ready you will have "Transfer ready" message as shown picture above. To enter them after a WPT in a route. Enter where to import waypoints. Click the Import button. device: Waiting messages" appears. Click the Done button. 6. WPT IMPORT 4. Press the Copy from ext.oute annin i i i You are able to import waypoints from other external device. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. . you can start importing WPTs from a GPS Navigator. If you want to enter them before a WPT in the route where WPTs will be imported enter waypoint number in the "Copy before WPT" box. 5. When you added a new waypoint. Time Table: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required ETA. . etc. 2. Click the Reverse button. Optimization calculates all parameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints. modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data. etc. maneuvering start point. WOP. Max. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.). Maximum speed is never exceeded. Typically it is enough if you do the following. Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or its neighbors.) together with speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. Cost: This calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the speed which gives the minimum total cost. 1.oute annin i ii You may reverse the order of waypoints in a plan route. There are four methods for optimization: Max Speed: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather. the route is optimized from the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box. the message "Impossible turn at WPTXX" (XX=waypoint number) may appear (in red). Copy before WPT Impossible turn at WPT2 i i i i i i i i After all waypoints are inserted. on the WPT page in the Plan Route dialog box. Profit: This calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time unit). ice. Min. It means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for the ship to sail along a certain leg. Check Enable changes. fouling. Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. Click the WPT tab to open the WPT page. 9 12.8 4. The monitor display shows ETD.oute annin i i i You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD). Enter speed limit. i i i With entered EDT as reference.0 16. You can define speed limit and optimize type in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box and in the WPT page of the Plan Route dialog box you can give min.8 4.2 8.0 timetable 10. Click the Parameters tab to open the Parameters page. ETA/UTC (Max.0 12.8 6.2 16.8 4. and max. speed and optimization types. WPT 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 min speed 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 4 4 6 4 cost 4.0 4. ETA may be entered in ETA/UTC box. Select desired optimization strategy from the Optimize field.8 4.9 12. These values are given while planning a route. speed not required) in respective boxes.0 16. The table and illustration below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed.9 12.9 12.9 8. Check Enable changes. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. ETC/UTC. speed for each leg.8 6.2 15. however ETA is shown below it. i i A speed profile is defined by general max.2 16. 1.9 12.2 16.8 profit 10. 2.2 16.2 16. speed limit and calculated ETA.9 12. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired strategy then push the scrollwheel.0 15.8 4.0 4. desired number of waypoints and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box to optimize your route.9 12.9 12. 3. ETA is calculated with entered speed limit.0 6.0 Max speed 10 15 17 17 17 15 17 17 17 17 8 max speed 10 15 20 20 20 15 20 20 20 17 8 i a s ee a rofit cost in s ee i s ee ti eta e . oute annin This report is generated when you select Report from the Plan Route menu. . WPT report consists information of: . put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box. but the distance is shorter distance compensated for planned radius for each waypoint. select Route-Plan from the status bar. To display the report viewer.Planned courses .Planned fuel consumption -Total distance of route. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button. . Distance is not directly calculated from LAT and LON values of WPTs location.Planned speeds . To close the report viewer. click X in the right corner of the report viewer. but the distance is shorter distance compensated for planned radius for each waypoint.Distances between waypoints.Estimated times of arrival (ETA) . Distance is not directly calculated from LAT and LON values of WPTs location. select Report then push the scrollwheel.Position of waypoints . [Text View] Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11 Close . Select desired option from the list then push the scrollwheel. Place the cursor on the triangle in the report window.oute annin i i If you want to change the size of the font for the report: 1. 2. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button. select Full WPT Report from the menu then push the scrollwheel. place the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box. To close the report viewer. .oute annin The Full WPT Report provides detailed information on each waypoint in a plan route. select Route-Plan from the status bar. To display the report viewer. click X in the right corner of the report viewer. The example below shows that a passage plan has been generated using the route plan "SOUTHAMPTON ROTTERDAM" and Notes generated for "SOUTHAMPTOROTTERDAM". An example of WPT report An example of Notes report . To close the report.oute annin Passage Plan report generates WPT report together with Notes report. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button. To display the report viewer. click X in the right corner of the report viewer. The system automatically attaches Notes from the planning mode on the route plan when you select the Passage Plan report. select Passage Plan Report from the menu then push the scrollwheel. select Route-Plan from the status bar. put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box. oute annin An example of a passage plan report. Notes text notes are placed between waypoints based on their position (in which leg defined Notes will be activated) . oute annin This page intentionally left blank. . displayed in the electronic chart area: x x x x The route is displayed with red thick long dashed line. see section 11. For more information. put the cursor on Route in the information area. always use current date as Approve Until and Display Until during your voyage. Each leg has information about planned speed. These limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. .i i i Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship’s behavior relative to the monitored route. If your voyage lasts more than one week. put the cursor in the Monitor combo box. Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation. Each leg has information about planned course to steer. see section 8. For further details.12 "Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart". The monitored route consists of the following information.2 "Chart alerts". spin the scrollwheel to select route then push the scrollwheel. The information area displays the data on the ship’s position relative to the monitored route. i i Route: not selected Select Route Monitor X Plan To select the route to monitor. set current date at least once per week during your voyage. The ECDIS automatically sets the last waypoint of your monitored route as the final waypoint. do the following: 1. i To display this dialog box. To select TO waypoint. the message shown below may appear when the geometry of the route makes it impossible to sail the ship. select Route from the information area then click the Monitor button. 3. To avoid this. Click Route on the information area then click the Monitor button. set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on display. there is a limitation to display a route. Mandatory route checking can be enabled from the Installation Parameters – Trackpilot menu. Place the cursor in the To WPT box then spin the scrollwheel to select desired WPT. Check that the TO waypoint is the desired one. Note 2: Limitation of displayed route If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western (0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display. For more information. 2. Push the scrollwheel to confirm your selection. the system selects a next waypoint automatically. . see the Installation Manual. i Average When you have selected a route to monitor. Note 3: DNV mandates route checking.oute onitorin Note 1: When you select a route for monitoring. The ECDIS will automatically advance to a next waypoint when you pass the TO waypoint. Select the Plan Route dialog box and make necessary modifications. spin the scrollwheel to select a waypoint. then click the Monitor button. Speed limit setting ETD ETA . and the ECDIS automatically does this when you select the route to monitor. However. sometimes you may prefer to use some other waypoint as the final waypoint of a monitored route. To select a waypoint as final waypoint. 2.oute onitorin i i i Normally you use the last waypoint in a monitored route as the final waypoint. Click Route in the information area. Push the scrollwheel to confirm your selection. do the following: 1. "TO WPT" and "NEXT WPT" are indicated on this list. 3. i i i i WPT WPT LAT LON SPD CSE M Rad NAME Planned ETA (UTC+1) You can view waypoint information for the monitored route by clicking the Waypoints tab in the Monitor Route dialog box. Place the cursor in the Final WPT box. This information is printed from route planning information made for this voyage. "Leg marks" enables display of planned speed and planned course to steer in a route. a Radar selections dialog appears. place the cursor on Radar in the status bar. User Chart and Notes are sent to radar if "Send to Radar" is set "ON". . move cursor ON or OFF text after "Send to Radar" and spin the scrollwheel to select desired ON or OFF then push the scrollwheel. To show this display. channel borders. User Chart and Notes to radar. information of Route. you have to define on Radar Selection dialog box if the ECDIS sends Route. When Route. To change "Send to Radar" ON/OFF. "Wheel over line" enables display of a line which denotes turn start line for a waypoint. push the left mouse button then click an arrow tab to display the Route menu. spin the scrollwheel to show Symbol Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area.oute onitorin i i i To display a monitored route. make sure that desired options of the monitored route (center line. i If ECDIS workstation is set as SINGLE mode. "WPT-mark"enables display of a waypoint's number in a route. This line appears when "WPT approach" is coming and disappears when turning has started. User Chart or Notes is selected to Monitor mode. WPT marks. leg marks and wheel over line) are selected on the Route page of the Chart Display dialog box. oute onitorin i The system has a built-in route assistant that facilitates safe use of routes. Remedy: Use Alerts and Selections pages to set them as they were when route was planned. The assistant reminds you if x x You are using a route that you have not checked following recent change to your route plan. "Checked conditions differ" means that current conditions differ from set conditions of route plan. user chart and Notes that you did not plan to be used together. Remedy: check route plan for the route. Route appears in red in the information area. During route planning. you can check your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to use together with a route plan. If the conditions defined during route plan do not meet the conditions during route monitoring. The following indications may appear on the Monitoring page: "This route is unchecked". You use a combination of a route plan. WPT Alerts WPT Alerts WPT WPT NM NM WPT WPT NM NM Suggested SPD Average SPD profile kn kn Suggested SPD Average SPD profile kn kn This route is unchecked Checked conditions differ . Reminds you that you did not check the route plan after the route was modified. Mon. Planned Notes: Planned Notes: . The Selection page may show the following messages: "Current selection is different" This means the name of user chart and/or Notes in the monitoring mode is not the same as route planning check. Remedy: Open Chart Alerts parameters to set them as they were at the time the route was planned. Remedy: Check route planning for the route with attached user chart and/or Notes.oute onitorin The Alerts page may show the following message: "* = Current selection differ" indicates which conditions are currently set differently as planned. Remedy: Click the Use button to select user chart and/or Notes in the monitoring mode. "This has been changed after Route Planning Check" This means that user chart and/or Notes was modified after the latest route planning check. "Ass. Lower window: x x x x x To WPT: The waypoint that the ship is approaching. Out of gate indicates that. Plan: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT". Turn enabled" and "Assisted turn" Go Track mode: "Goto Track". then the text "(corr)" appears (in red) in the Plan field. Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route. including off track. then the text "(corr)" appears (in red) in the Plan field. which is based on current speed and planned turning radius. then the ship will be outside of the channel at wheel over point. x x Below is an example with additional text information x Additional textual information is available if any of following steering modes are in use: x x Waypoint mode: "Goto WPT". "Goto WPT Great circle". Time: Time remaining until WOP (dd:hh:mm:ss). Ch LIM: Planned width of channel to approach "To WPT". "Track Great circle" and "Track Turn" Permanent alerts are available regardless of the steering mode used and these are as follows: x x "Outside channel" is indicated by showing "Off track" in orange and its value in red. Turn rate: Calculated rate of turn. Note that if the gyro value is compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error compensation have been enabled in Ship and Route parameters in the Initial Settings menu. x x . You can monitor the route from the two Plan Speed windows in the information area. "Out of gate" is shown in orange. drift and gyro error compensation.oute onitorin i i Upper window: x x Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach "To WPT". Dist WOP: Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at "To WPT" will be given. Next: Planned course to steer after "To WPT". if the ship continues using the current course. Off track: Perpendicular distance of the ship from the track. Next WPT: The WPT following the "To WPT". Note that if the gyro value is compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error compensation have been enabled in the Ship and Route parameters in the Initial Settings menu. Turn RAD: Planned turning radius at "To WPT". "Ass. "Track Great circle" and "Track Appr. . "Goto AW Great circle". see Chapter 32 "Steering with TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot PR-6000". "Ass. enabled". "Goto OS Great circle". Enabled". Appr. Track Turn enabled". enabled" . enabled". "Track Turn" For further information about steering with the FAP-2000. "Track". "GoOS Appr. Turn enabled" and "Assisted turn" For further information about steering with the PT-500A."Ass. i Following information can be seen with different steering modes: x x Open Sea mode: "Goto OS". "GoAW Turn enabled" and "Goto AW turn" For further information about steering with the PR-6000. Enabled". see Chapter 31 "Steering with YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A". "Goto WPT Great circle". Turn enabled" and "Assisted turn" Go Track mode: "Goto Track". i Following information can be seen with steering mode: x NAVI: "Autopilot Conflict". i Following information can be seen with different steering modes: x x Waypoint mode: "Goto WPT". "Ass.oute onitorin i i i i Information about steering mode is available on Route monitor windows which depends on connected optional autopilot and used route steering mode. "GoOS Turn enabled" and "Goto OS turn" All Waters mode: "Goto AW". Appr. "GoAW Appr. see Chapter 30 "Steering with FURUNO Autopilot FAP-2000". Trial: You can enter speed to test ETAs with different speeds. Monitored route is optimized using "Max Speed". ETA WPT: Indicates waypoint number of special ETA waypoint and estimated time and distance to it. speed for calculation) the Trial speed box replaces the Average Speed box and trial speed is shown in that box. i i Estimated time of arrival to a waypoint is calculated by the ECDIS. Alerts WPT WPT 12 04 Oct 04 18:58 NM WPT NM Suggested SPD Average SPD profile kn kn SPD profile: There are three calculation strategies: x x x Plan: The system calculates with optimization made in route planning. . Note that if Speed profile is selected as Current.oute onitorin i To WPT: Indicates approaching "TO WPT".. The operator can select waypoint number and speed profile for calculation in the Monitoring page of the Monitor Route dialog box. Current: The system calculates ETAs using average speed of last five minutes.e. own ship average speed (i. Final WPT: Indicates waypoint number of final waypoint and estimated time and distance to it. You can enter Average speed and system will calculate ETAs. Speed profile is changed to Average speed.oute Average: onitorin Select Average from the Speed profile box to enter desired speed for calculation of ETA to waypoint. WPT WPT NM WPT NM SPD Average kn kn SPD profile . Value also appears in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box. Off Plan: Indicates time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final WPT. onitorin NM NM SPD kn kn Average SPD profile Plan: This displays ETA at final WPT. The table below shows how the system calculates ETAs. Type of selected speed profile / optimization on Route Monitor dialog box Speed profile: Plan MAX SPEED Speed profile: Plan TIMETABLE Speed profile: Plan ECO: COST Speed profile: Plan ECO: PROFIT Speed profile: Trial Speed profile: Current Used speed from current point to the To WPT current average speed current average speed current average speed current average speed current trial speed current average speed Used speed from the To WPT to the final WPT planned leg speed planned leg speed planned leg speed planned leg speed current trial speed current average speed .oute Time table optimization displayed in route monitoring. Suggested SPD: The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the final WPT would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table". “x” being the time specified. . 364 Route: Cancel disabled: Appears when you try to cancel current monitored route while the system is in automatic route steering. 458 Route: Last WPT approach alert: Appears when own ship arrives “x” minutes from the last waypoint. 352 Route: Illegal ETA WPT: Appears when the system cannot use the selected ETA waypoint. 454 Route: End reached: Appears when own ship passes the last waypoint. Leave automatic route steering and select a new route. The reason might be corrupted or missing route file. 457 Route: Outside chl limits alert: Appears if own ship is outside the monitored channel. Leave automatic route steering and cancel the current route. Normally this alert only appears if alert 458 is left unacknowledged. The reason might be corrupted or missing route file. The following alerts are related to route monitoring when automatic route steering is not used: 451 Route: WPT approach alert: Appears when own ship is “x” minutes of the wheel over point of the next waypoint. The system cancels current route monitoring.oute onitorin i i The following alerts are related to route monitoring. 360 Route: WPT change disabled: Appears when you try to change next or final waypoint while the system is in automatic route steering. “x” being the time specified. Leave automatic route steering and change the waypoint. 353 Route: Illegal To WPT: Appears when the system cannot use the selected “To WPT”. Acknowledgement of this alert cancels current route monitoring. 354 Route: Illegal final WPT: Appears when the system cannot use the selected final waypoint. The reason might be corrupted or missing route file. 363 Route: Select disabled: Appears when the you try to select a new route for route monitoring while the system is in automatic route steering. Points: It doesn't itself have any symbol on the radar screen. Route line: Displayed on both radar overlay and ECDIS. but it is a very important element of a user chart For further details. etc. 80 nearest elements of drawing point displayed. Lines can be used in chart alert calculation and/or display on the radar: x x Navigation lines: Displayed on both radar overlay and ECDIS. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. x x x . Symbols can be used in chart alert calculation. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area. with max. traffic separation lines. wrecks. NMT (Not More Than) line.2 "What is a User Chart Point and How is it Used?". Tidals can be used to make own notes about tides at operatordefined points. Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart. the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar overlay. They are always available regardless of the type of chart material used. Single line with an arrowhead directed at the base of a charted object. lines and letter/number. an alert or indication is generated by the system. see Chapter 11. Navigation lines are reference lines for coastline. Displayed on ECDIS only. see section 15. NLT (Not Less Than) line: A danger bearing or clearing line. Route lines are zones for anchoring. These charts are intended for highlighting safety-related items like position of important navigation marks.i User charts are simple overlay charts that the operator makes for his own purposes. x x x x Area: User can define closed areas that the system can use to detect safe water areas. etc. Tidals: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. x Line: You can define six different types of lines. etc. number of items below: x x x x 200 Points 2000 Lines 1000 Symbols (alphanumerics) 50 Areas. fixed targets. A user chart consists of points. an area can have 20 corner points. In this way the radar display can be kept as "clean" as possible for radar target detection. Depth contour: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. Symbols: User selectable symbols can be displayed on both displays or on the ECDIS display only. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline. safe area for the ship. When route or your ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol. When your ship is moving in the area covered by the user chart. Coastline: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. lighthouses. the system generates a warning to the operator. lines and areas. Size of user chart is limited to have the max. The operator is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in ARCS or S57 format. For further details about chart alerts. The operator is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in ARCS or S57 format. Symbols are used to indicate buoys. The user charts can also be shown on the ECDIS display. line or area that is defined as a dangerous one. symbols. User charts areas can be used to activate alerts and indications based on operator-defined danger symbols. They can be displayed on both the radar display and the electronic chart. The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based on the ship’s actual position. etc. Depth line shows the selected depth levels. .ser art ontro A user chart can be selected for the monitoring mode. Below is an example how to know which user chart is used for monitoring mode and which one is used in planning mode. Another user chart mode modifies the user chart planning mode. Eventually the monitored and planned user charts copy the operation of monitored and planned routes. which means that it is displayed on connected radar display and it can be used in chart alert calculation. User Chart Monitor X DISP Plan DISP The UserChart field in the information area where the user chart can be selected for the monitoring or planning mode. It is possible to have both the monitored and planned user chart at the same time if separate plan and monitor units are used. a user chart is only displayed on the ECDIS display. In the planning mode. it is not displayed on the connected radar nor is it used in chart alert calculation. Select: User can specify user chart to use. along with appropriate dialog box. Full report: Generates report about all the objects in a user chart. . or put the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box. one of the menus shown below appears. you can show the menu on the display by clicking the Plan or Monitor button again. [User Chart] Go Plan mode Select Unselect Backup and Restore Point report Line report Area report Symbols report Full report Report for radar Close Point report: Generates report about points in a user chart. Backup and Restore: User can make backup copy of user chart or restore user chart from backup device.ser art ontro i i Left-click UserChart in the information area then click Plan or Monitor button to open corresponding dialog box. If no User Chart has been selected. Report for radar: Generates report about all the objects in a user chart that are displayed on the radar screen. Line report: Generates report about lines in a user chart. If you want to make further selection from a menu and only the dialog box is shown. Create: User can create a new user chart. Go Monitor mode>Go Monitor mode: User chart used in planning mode can be switched directly to monitoring mode. Area report: Generates report about area objects in a user chart. Unselect: Remove current user chart from active use. Tidal report: Generates report about tides in a user chart. Push the scrollwheel to show the sub menu shown below. Go Plan mode>Go Plan mode: User chart used in monitoring mode can be switched directly to planning mode. Combine: User can combine two or more user charts together. [User Chart] Go Monitor mode Select Unselect Create Backup and Restore Combine Point report Line report Area report Symbols report Tidal report Full report Report for radar Close Go Monitor(or Plan) mode: The operator can switch user chart mode between plan and monitoring modes with Go Monitor(Plan) mode on the menu. Symbols report: Generates report about symbols in a user chart. if you don't define points. If the user chart has more than 60 lines or 20 symbols and if the user chart does not contain any points. Sub charts are small enough (max 80 elements) to be sent for display on the radar. Points are used to create sub-charts for radar use. you close the user chart window with the Cancel button on the keyboard-equipped control unit or you select a user chart from the menu. 60 lines and 20 symbols from the complete user chart. the system will generate the alert “2101 UserChart: Need Points” when you select that user chart for use. . which is performed automatically. Note than lines are counted both from lines and area objects.e.ser art ontro i i i i A point is a center point for a sub chart inside a user chart. when you leave editing (i. The symbol used for points is box with "I" inside: ¨¨¨ This an example of a complex user chart with several hundreds of lines and symbols. Sub charts are made with post processing. you uncheck Enable changes). The system always require a point even the amount of lines intended for the radar display is less than 60 and if the amount of symbols intended for the radar display is less than 20. It reminds you that only a part of your lines will be visible on the connected radar. The radar can display max.. Each point can collect 60 nearest lines and 20 nearest symbols in a sub chart. Note the position used for points to collect the sub charts. art ontro .ser Below are some examples of sub-charts. especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions from the control panel or keyboard or if you use digitizer. do the following: Put cursor here and roll scrollwheel to select User Chart in Monitor mode User Chart Monitor X DISP Plan DISP i If ECDIS workstation is set as SINGLE mode. To change "Send to Radar" ON/OFF. If you only use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations. User Chart and Notes to radar. place the cursor on Radar in the status bar. you have to define on Radar Selection dialog box if the ECDIS sends Route.ser art ontro i Selection of datum is very important. although it is recommended to use native datum of the chart. information of Route. a Radar selections dialog appears. To activate the monitoring mode and select a user chart for the monitoring mode. i i i i The user chart that is selected for the monitoring mode is indicated in the UserChart dialog box (left-click UserChart in the information area to show). User Chart and Notes are sent to radar if "Send to Radar" is set "ON". then you could use any datum. When Route. . move cursor ON or OFF text after "Send to Radar" and spin the scrollwheel to select desired ON or OFF then push the scrollwheel. If "UserChart" is red this means that the workstation is currently displaying the user chart for the planning mode. User Chart or Notes is selected to Monitor mode. To activate the planning mode and select a user chart for the planning mode. User Chart Monitor X DISP X Plan DISP X Put cursor here and roll scrollwheel to select User Chart in Planning Mode . do as shown in the illustration below.ser art ontro i i i If "User Chart" in the information area is white (or black depending on color scheme in use) it means that the workstation is in the monitoring mode user chart. Use the cursor to select position for points then push the left mouse button. 6. uncheck it if you do not want the symbol or label to appear on the radar. Click the Line tab then check Enable changes. Define Name. Click the Symbol tab then check Enable changes. Define Name for area. do the following: 1. 3. Use cursor and left mouse button to define location of points. 2. Name and Symbol character in case of symbol. . Spin the scrollwheel in the Element type box to select line type then push the scrollwheel. Check "Danger Line" if you want to use the line in chart alert calculation. Type. use the mouse to locate the cursor then push the left mouse button. Check "Danger Symbol" to use the symbol in chart alert calculation. 7.ser art ontro i You can create and modify a user chart when you have selected the planning mode of user chart. Symbols & Tidals. To mark a tidal on the screen. select Create from the menu then push the scrollwheel. "Display on radar" is automatically selected. Enter a name for the user chart. 4. 4. Click the OK button to finish. To make a complete user chart. 5. Use the cursor to select position for symbol or label then push the left mouse button. Left-click UserChart in the information area then click the Plan button. 6. that Points. define also if it is displayed on Radar display (On Radar) and used in Chart Alerts calculation (Danger Area). 7. X 2. Select User Chart Monitor 1. Orientation. Click the Area tab then check Enable changes. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box. The Plan User Chart dialog box appears in the information area. 5. spin the scrollwheel to select character and push it to confirm character. click the Add button in the Area field. Click the Add button then Define Style (Symbol or Label). Strength and Time for Tidal. check "New start position". Lines and Areas of User chart are selected to Std or Oth from the Mariner page of the Chart Display menu. Click the Tidal tab then check Enable changes. make sure. To start a new line from a next WPT position. To make a new area. Use the cursor to specify position for line point then push the left mouse button. kn Danger Symbol Note: If you want to display a user chart on the electronic chart. Use the scrollwheel to enter a name for the line in the Name field. DISP Plan DISP 3. Click the Point tab then check Enable changes. The Tidal symbol is displayed only on the ECDIS display. push the right mouse button (Next Card) then click the tab with the left mouse button. Add new record next to current record with the same information. To select this page.ser art ontro i The Point page lets you define points on a user chart. Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart. . Manually enter latitude and longitude of point in this box. Point box: Name: Position: Add: Import: Delete: Shows the current and total number of points. This function deletes current point. Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode. Permits naming of current point. Select a user chart from which to import points. Select a user chart from which to import symbols. Symbol box: Style: Name: Symbol: Position: Display on radar: Danger Symbol: Add: Import: Delete: Shows the current and total number of symbols You can select either Label (displayed only on ECDIS) or Symbol (displayed also on TT display). Check to use symbol in chart calculation. . operator can give name for displayed text on ECDIS Manually enter latitude and longitude of symbol in this box. If available.ser art ontro The Symbol page lets you draw symbols on a user chart. This function deletes current symbol. Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode. push the right mouse button (Next Card). operator can give name to symbol. Danger Symbol Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart. Add new record to end of symbol list. click the tab with the left mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the keyboardequipped control unit. Check to also display the symbol on the radar screen. If available. To select this page. User can either edit position by entering new co-ordinates or by showing new location with the trackball and left mouse button. any newly entered line will be connected to previous line. Available types are: x x x x x x Navigation line Route line Depth contour Coast line NMT line.not less than Navigation and route lines may also be displayed on the radar screen. Depth contours. To select this page. Select a user chart from which to import lines. known as clearing line . This function deletes current record of line.ser art ontro i The Line page lets you inscribe lines on a user chart. Import: Delete: . Manually enter ending latitude and longitude of line in this box. Line box: Name: Element type: Shows the current and total number of line points.not more than NLT line. User can select appropriate line type from combo box. Danger Line: Start position: End position: New start position: Add: Check to use line in chart alert calculation. coast lines NMT lines and NLT lines are displayed only on the ECDIS screen. Permits naming of current line. click the tab with the left mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the keyboardequipped control unit Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart. This function adds new record next to current record. known as clearing line . push the right mouse button (Next Card). If unchecked. Check to draw a new line. Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode. Manually enter starting latitude and longitude in this box. Permits naming of current tide.ser art ontro i The Tidal page lets you inscribe tidal data on a user chart. Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode. Note that time of the tide is always in local time. course and time for tide. User can select type of tide here. This function adds new record next to current record. Manually enter latitude and longitude of tide in this box. kn Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart. push the right mouse button (Next Card) then click the tab with the left mouse button. Tidal box: Name: Type: Position: Orientation. User is able to select from the list of user charts to import to current tidal file. To select this page. . This function deletes current record of tide. Strength and Time: Add: Import: Delete: Shows the current and total number of tidal points. You may enter speed. . Delete area. Click button then set area.ser art ontro The Area page lets you inscribe areas on a user chart. Sets different area. Check to include the current area in chart alert calculation. To select this page. Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode. You may assign a name to the current area. push the right mouse button (Next Card) then click the tab with the left mouse button. Import area. See description on next page. i When a operator defines an area for a user chart he adds an area object then gives a name and selects if it is displayed on radar and/or if it is used for safe water calculation (Danger Area). Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart. Area box: Name: On Radar: Danger Area: Add: Import: Delete: Corner Points of Area: Number of current area appears in this field. Check to also display the area on the radar display. User can select area by editing desired number in the Current box or create new one. 5. two methods are available: x x Enter desired area number of user chart object in the Rec box. Open user chart then check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box. Select desired area object to display from the Area field then click the Delete button. 4. Define corner points on the electronic chart area using the cursor and the left mouse button. To define more areas. Place the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart then push the scrollwheel. Open the Area page as described on the previous page. do the following: 1. put the cursor in the Current box and use scrollwheel to change desired number. To add a new user chart area. 4. Current indicates which area of a user chart is selected for modification. to define a safe water area for display on the radar. Keep the button held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position desired. Place the cursor on the corner point you want to move to a next WPT position. 2. Use the Info feature to find area. 2. Select appropriate chart scale so you can see desired area of user chart on display. roll the trackball to put the cursor on desired position. for example. To modify number. i i In the Area field. 3. i To completely delete an area from a user chart.ser art ontro i An area of a user chart can be used. i ii i The easiest way to move a corner point is to drag and drop it to a desired position. check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box. Click the Add button in the Area field. To modify another area. Check Enable changes. Give a name for the area and check Danger Area to use it in chart alert calculation and check "On Radar" to show the area on the radar as well. 3. This can be done as follows: 1. While pressing and holding down the left mouse button. continue from step 2. . . To add a new user chart object by using the Add button. see section 15. line or tidal". i i i i In this manual the term "user chart object" refers to any of point. To modify user chart areas. This adds a new user chart object to the end of file. 5. Place the cursor in the electronic chart on the desired position then push the left mouse button. Line and Tidal data. line or tidal. Click the Copy button to copy selected areas. see section 15. Modify position of operator object. Click the Add button in the selected user chart object page. open the appropriate user chart object page in the Plan User Chart dialog box. Modify other data of user chart object.7. To select a user chart object to modify. The Current field shows the user chart object currently selected for modification. To add a new user chart object you have following methods available: x x Use the left mouse button (Edit Insert feature). Click the Add button in corresponding user chart object page. (You may also import areas to a new chart.7 "Changing other data of point. which is a copy of current user chart object. symbol. 2. spin the scrollwheel to select a chart then push the scrollwheel. Enter into the "First record to copy" field the area number from which you want to start copying. Click the Import button in the Area field to show the User Chart Import dialog box appears. If you do not want copy. Enter in the "Number of records" field how many areas you want copy into the active user chart file. do the following: 1. symbol. The procedure for modifying a user chart object is common to all user chart objects. 4. Modify data of added user chart object. line or tidal. click the X at the top right corner to quit. symbol.) Open the Areas page then do as below: 1.ser art ontro i You can copy Areas of User Chart from another User Chart file to active User Chart file. symbol. New user chart object appears. "Total record count" shows number of areas stored in selected user chart. line or tidal". Open desired user chart object page. 3.7 "Changing other data of point. 4. Symbol. 2. 2. 3. use the Area page. Open user chart desired with UserChart in the status bar then check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box. For how to modify position. Open desired user chart object page. Select chart from which to copy areas in the Chart box." on the next page. For how to modify Point. do the following: 1. 3. To add a new user chart object by using the left mouse button.7. Modify position following "Changing position of a point. Drag and drop a user chart object with the left mouse button. To select the user chart object to modify. 3. Keep the button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position desired. i 1. symbol. i i i To change other data of a user chart object. i i i To delete a user chart object. the number indicates user chart object that is currently selected for modification. Push the scrollwheel to confirm. such as name. i 1. line or tidal to modify" on this page. line or tidal. To change a co-ordinate. do the following: Open desired user chart object page. in the appropriate box. symbol. 2. If you want to select a different number. To change the number put the cursor in the Current box. Use the Info feature to find area. put the cursor to the right of the digit to change. i i ii Open desired user chart object page. 3. 2. For more information. In the Current field. i 1. i 1. do the following: Select desired user chart object. click the left mouse button. Enter co-ordinates in the Position field. . 2. Click the OK button. element type. Place the cursor on the user chart object in the electronic chart area then press and hold down the left mouse button while rolling the trackball to position the user chart object. The procedure for modifying a user chart object is common to all user chart objects. symbol. i i i ii i Open desired user chart object page. Place the cursor in desired edit box then use the scrollwheel to enter data. i ii i i i You can change the position of a user chart object two ways: x x Enter latitude and longitude in the Position field. spin the scrollwheel to select number then push the scrollwheel. Click the Delete button in the selected user chart object page. open the appropriate user chart object page. Select user chart object to delete. Note that lines have starting and ending point position fields. spin the scrollwheel to select desired value then push the scrollwheel. see "Choosing a point. Select desired user chart object. 2. Place the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart then push the scrollwheel. do one of the following: x x Enter desired number of user chart object in the Current box. 3.ser art ontro i i i i i In this manual the term "user chart object" refers to any of point. Click the Import button. select the chart from which to copy user chart objects. 5. . Left-click UserChart in the information area to show the User Chart dialog box. do the following: 1. To import User chart object do the following: 1. enter number of records to copy. To join two or more user charts. Select a chart with the Chart box in the Copy from window then push the scrollwheel. Check Enables changes. Click the Copy button. 9. The dialog box shown right appears. The Element category field shows the category elements that will be copied. or select "Create" and create a new chart. 8. Put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan User Chart dialog box. 3. enter the number of the object from which to begin copying. 5. 6. Click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box. 4. 7. In the First record to copy box. i i The ECDIS allows you to combine two or more user charts into one user chart. In the Number of records box. Open desired user chart object page. 2. Select a chart with "Select" then press the OK button. 6. 4. Put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan User Chart dialog box.ser art ontro i i i i User is able to select User chart objects from other user chart to import them to current User chart. Click the Copy button to copy. 3. Select Combine then push the scrollwheel. 7. 2. In the Chart box. and you can select which chart objects to display from the Mariner page in the Symbol Display dialog box. Below are some examples from the same user chart with different selections. An example with only radar part of lines. symbols and areas displayed . This user chart has all user chart objects displayed.ser art ontro i i i User charts can be displayed on the ECDIS display. Note that this is also a very good example how many and where the points should be defined. No symbols displayed .ser art ontro An example with only symbols and points displayed. For further details. Move the cursor onto the triangle in the report window. symbol and tidal) as follows: 1. 2. The other usage is to read User Chart files originating from other planning or navigation station. do the following: 1. . [Text View] Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11 Close 2. area. see section 17. i i i If you want to change the size of the font in a report hard copy. [User Chart] Go Monitor mode Select Unselect Create Backup and Restore Combine Point report Line report Area report Symbols report Tidal report Full report Report for radar Close 3. This feature is also useful for carrying user charts to other planning or navigation station.6 "Restoring a File from a Floppy Disk". Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the User Chart menu. To print the report. click the Print Text button.5 "Backing up a File to a Floppy Disk". For further details. line. see section 17.ser art ontro i i You may make backups of user charts. Select desired report from the report group then push the scrollwheel. i i This procedure can be used to read backup copies of any User Chart file if some data is lost during Notes modifying. See the next page for sample reports. Click UserChart in the information bar then click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box. You may generate a report for each chart object (point. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired font size from the list then push the scrollwheel. 4. ser art ontro Points report Lines report Areas report Symbols report Full report Report for radar . .ser art ontro This page intentionally left blank. the system will make a comparison against your ship's position. (See figure below. notebook pages (= records) in the selected Notes file are compared with your ship's position once per minute to select Notes. Further.i A navigation-related notebook is called "Notes".) The operator may assign a brief message that will appear on the radar display together with the notice of the proximity of the relevant point. Position of own ship when Notes will disappear i Location of Notes Range Position of own ship when Notes will disappear Position of own ship when Notes will be activated Position of own ship when Notes will be activated i Distance less than 10 NM Location of Notes Alert mode "when entering range" selected Alert mode "when passing" selected (range automatically selected to 10 NM) . it generates the alert "850 Notes: New Record". when the ship has passed a waypoint. The operator specifies range for each Notes record. The ECDIS compares Notes range and your ship's position and displays Notes when your ship goes within the range set for the Notes. If the system finds that you have arrived within a new Notes notebook page. While the ship sails. Notes is a "notebook data" file that provides messages for the operator relative to a specific ship position in the monitoring mode. which means that Notes gives predefined messages for the operator relative to a specific ship position. Notes is used to define predefined messages relative to your ship's position. then the text "Notes" is in red.otes Notes can be selected for the monitoring mode. If the displayed Notes on the ECDIS display are the monitored Notes. then the text "Notes" is in black (or white depending on color scheme). In the planning mode. Eventually the monitored and planned Notes copy the operation of the monitored and planned routes. If the displayed Notes on the ECDIS display are the planned Notes. Below is an example of how to know which Notes is used in the monitoring mode and which is used in the planning mode. . The name of the planned Notes is only available in the dialog box for the planning mode of Notes. Select Notes Monitor X DISP Plan DISP The Notes field in the information area always shows the name of the Notes selected for the monitoring mode. Another mode is for modifying Notes in the planning mode. Go Monitor mode> Go Monitor mode. i 4. Place the cursor on Notes in the information area. text. text and range marker . and range marker Four different variations as examples of how Notes is presented on the chart area: 1. THIS IS A TEST i Position marker and text 3. Position marker Position marker and text Position marker and range marker Position marker. Select: Selects Notes to use. Using Go Plan mode> Go Plan mode. 4. THIS IS A TEST i Position marker and range marker Position marker. Backup and Restore: User can make backup copy from Notes or restore from backup media. If no menu appears.otes i To prepare Notes. make sure that Notes options are turned on in the Mariner page of the Symbol Display dialog box. click the same button once more to open the menu. Unselect: Unselect removes Notes from active use. do the following: 1. 2. Note: If you want Notes to be displayed on the electronic chart. Report: Generates tabulated report from selected Notes. i Position marker 2. then click the Plan or Monitor button as appropriate. 3. Notes used in the planning mode can be switched directly to the monitoring mode. monitor or planning mode. Notes used in the monitoring mode can be switched directly to the planning mode. If no Notes is selected. 1. 2. the Notes menu (shown below) appears in addition to the Monitor Notes dialog box or Plan Notes dialog box. otes i i i i Do as shown below to select Notes for use in the monitoring mode. User Chart and Notes are sent to radar if "Send to Radar" is set "ON". When Route. you have to define on Radar Selection dialog box if the ECDIS sends Route. User Chart and Notes to radar. Place cursor here. a Radar selections dialog appears. Select Notes Monitor X DISP Plan DISP i If ECDIS workstation is set as SINGLE mode. . place the cursor on Radar in the status bar. User Chart or Notes is selected to Monitor mode. information of Route. To change "Send to Radar" ON/OFF. spin scrollwheel to choose Notes and push scrollwheel. move cursor ON or OFF text after "Send to Radar" and spin the scrollwheel to select desired ON or OFF then push the scrollwheel. When the ship is within the range set for a Notes. Checking "Enable changes" always changes the monitor Notes mode to the plan Notes mode. LON). Control range for the system to activate current record of Notes. This indicates the latitude and longitude position of current record (LAT.otes i i i i If "View all records" is not selected (checked): x x Opens "Current Record" page. LON: Alert: This indicates current number of active records. i If "View all records" is selected: x x x Opens "View Record" page. the information of current record appears. . Select "View all records". You can view any Notes record by clicking the arrow keys. something like the dialog box shown right. View record box: LAT. Checking "Enable changes" always changes the monitor Notes mode to the plan Notes mode. To activate the planning mode and select Notes for the planning mode.otes i i i If "Notes" in the information area is black (or white depending on color scheme) this means that the workstation is in the monitoring mode for Notes. do the following: Select Notes Monitor X DISP Plan DISP Move cursor over this and use scrollwheel to select Notes in planning mode . You may import an existing file (whole file or part of file). to current Notes file. Deletes current record of Notes. Note: Notes may only be modified in the North-up or Course-up mode. Check to enable changes. after the ship has passed the calculated point. which appears on the screen. put the cursor in the text window. Add: Import: Delete: . Range from own ship at which current Notes is activated on the screen or when passing notes distance is fixed to 10 NM. To edit the text. LAT. This function adds a new record next to current record. LON Alert: Description: Indicates the latitude and longitude position of current record.otes i i i i Edit Record box: Enable changes: This indicates current number of active records. spin the scrollwheel to select character then push the scrollwheel. The operator may edit a Notes message record. User can edit position by entering new co-ordinates or by choosing new location with the trackball then pushing the left mouse button. Roll the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired for Notes then push the left mouse button. check "Enable changes". Place the cursor on the location in the chart area where you want to add a new Notes. It is recommended to use the true motion display mode while editing. . i 1. Repeat to enter name desired then click the OK button. enter the range from your ship at which to activate the Notes. In the Range box. 2. To create a new Notes. New Notes record appears at the end of file. i To add a new Notes record the following choices are available: x x Using the left mouse button. text message. Modify Range. as appropriate. spin the scrollwheel to select character then push the scrollwheel. Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box and check Enable changes.otes i You can create and modify Notes. Using the Add button in the Edit page. Position. Click Notes in the information area then click the Plan button to show the Plan Notes dialog box. select Create from the menu then push the scrollwheel. do the following: 1. In the Edit Record page of the Plan Notes dialog box. X DISP 3. Select Notes Monitor 1. 2. Enter a name for the Notes. enter desired message in the Description window. spin the scrollwheel to select character and push the scrollwheel to confirm. Click the triangle mark. To show text message on the screen. etc. 3. 3. then push the left mouse button. Plan DISP 2. and this can be done in the planning mode. otes 1. Press and hold down the left mouse button while rolling the trackball to position the Notes mark where desired. then push the scrollwheel. 2. For how to modify position. Modify position of Notes record. Keep the button pressed and held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at position desired. i ii Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes.3 "Changing Notes record position". see section 16. Modify other data of Notes record as appropriate. i i i ii i Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes. This adds a new Notes record to the end of record.2 "Choosing Notes record to modify".4 "Changing other data of Notes record". Click the Add button. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to change digit then push the scrollwheel to confirm. i 1. i i The Current box in the Plan Notes dialog box shows the Notes currently selected for modification. Place the cursor on desired Notes in the electronic chart area. 3. Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes. i x x ii To change the position of a Notes. 2. 2. i 1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the Notes you wish to move. 4.6.6. 3. Select desired Notes. Drag and drop Notes mark using the trackball and left mouse button. spin the scrollwheel to select record number then push the scrollwheel. .6. using the scrollwheel. Enter co-ordinate in Lat (Lon) field as appropriate. For how to modify other data in a Notes record. and it is a copy of current Notes record. two choices are available: Enter latitude and longitude in the Position field on the Edit page. see section "16. To select a different Notes the following methods are available: x x Enter desired record number in the Current box. following section 16. Click the Delete button. "Copy to Notes" shows where the Notes record is to be copied to and "First page copied as page" shows the number that the first record from the Notes source will be copied into the current Notes. 4. Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes. then push the scrollwheel to confirm. 3.6. following section 16. . i You may import Notes records from other Notes records as follows: 1.6. Place the cursor in the desired edit box. 2. 2. following section 16. do the following: 1. 2. Click the Import button to show the following dialog box. After confirming settings. spin the scrollwheel to select desired value.2. In the Notes field. i To delete a Notes record. 3.otes i To change function range or character data of Notes. Select desired Notes record to delete. 5. Enter first Notes record to copy in the First page to copy field.2. do the following: 1. such as range and text. 6. Enter number of Notes records to copy in the Number of pages to copy field. Select desired Notes record. Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes. click the Copy button to import Notes records. select the source Notes. Note: Use only IBM PC formatted floppy disks. The Backup & Restore dialog box is where backup and restore operations are initiated. rename and delete. The operator may make backup copies to backup devices or restore from backup device to hard disk. are listed below. which are used to access the system’s database. From those menus the operator may execute hard disk operations such as backup. These pushbuttons and menu commands. copy. Selection of file category Operation on local hard disk Operation with all files in category Operation on backup device/medium .i i There are several menus from which the operator may initiate backup and restore functions. Select desired file from the Hard Disk field. do the following: Select desired file from the Hard Disk field. Enter new name for selected file then click the OK button. Select desired file category. The categories consist of the following files: You can select desired category from the File category box in the Backup & Restore dialog box. 2. i 1. 3. . To rename a file. i 1. i You can rename a file using the Rename function in the Backup & Restore dialog box. Click the Copy button. i You can make a copy of an original file using the Copy function in the Backup & Restore dialog box. 4. the system shows all the possible functions executable with the selected category. 2. Click the Rename button. For the selected category. 3.ac u erations i x x x x x x x x x x Route plans User Charts Notes Installation parameters Display Settings Paper Chart Setups Presentation Libraries Logs Manual Updates All Charts and Updates i i The system automatically selects corresponding file depending on your selection. do the following: Select desired file category from the Category field. 4. To copy a file. Enter new name for selected file then click the OK button. Select desired file from the Backup Device field. do the following: Select desired Drive from the Drive field. Click the Restore button. 3. . 3. i You can delete a file as follows: 1.ac u erations i 1. 4. 2. i Select desired file from the Hard Disk field. insert a floppy disk in the disk drive then do the following: Select desired file from the Hard Disk field. Select desired file category. Click the Backup button. Select desired Drive from the Drive field. i 1. 2. To make a backup of a file to a floppy disk. 4. To restore a file stored on a floppy disk. Click the Delete button. i i You can restore a file with one stored on a floppy disk. 2. Select desired file category. i i You can make a backup from an original file to a floppy disk. 3. Select desired file category. see "Reading a File from Planning or Navigation Station" on the next page DO NOT use the backup function between two ECDIS workstations when both workstations operate as master/slave or multi-mode (or one workstation mode indication is red (single)) ECDIS 1 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE ECDIS 2 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE LAN . user charts. Backup to floppy disk ECDIS 1 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE ECDIS 2 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE LAN To use the Backup function: 1. From the menu. 5. it is recommended that you use the Restore function instead of Backup. see the illustration below for when it is possible to use the Backup function. user chart. routes. Press the Backup button. 2. Open desired menu. between ECDIS workstations. but backup is done to external device/media. Select desired file from the Hard disk field. select the Backup and Restore command. etc. Select backup drive from the Backup device field. For more information. etc. Between ECDIS workstations when both worstations are set as single workstation mode ECDIS 1 SINGLE ECDIS 2 SINGLE LAN Between both workstations are set as Master/Slave or Multi-workstation mode. 4. files can be moved from one workstation to another and vice versa. If you want to copy charts. To copy files between ECDIS workstations use the Restore function. For use of Backup. Backup to additional ECDIS PC which operates in SINGLE workstation mode The figure below shows when you should not use the backup function to copy files between ECDIS workstations. to a backup medium. Note: The intention of the Backup function is to make a backup copy of a route. 3.ac u erations i i i i i i If there are two ECDIS workstations connected via a LAN. Select Backup and Restore from the menu. When moving files from the ECDIS to a backup device the ECDIS converts the file to Inc format. Select desired menu. Select desired menu. i i Route and user chart files can be read in vector system format (Inc) files. 3. Select backup drive from the Backup device field. To do this. Select desired menu. . 5. 3. Select backup drive from the Backup device field. 1. do the following: 1. 4. When loading Inc format files. 5. From the Backup Device field. 2. i i i The Route and User chart files can be read in vector system format (Inc). it is possible to read files from planning station to navigation station and vice versa. 4. select desired file. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field. Select Backup and Restore from the menu. From the Hard Disk field. 4. From the Backup Device field. Select backup drive from the Backup device field. the ECDIS converts the files to the format used with the ECDIS.ac u erations i i i i i i If there are two ECDIS workstations connected via a LAN. Select Backup and Restore command from menu. 2. To do this: 1. select desired file. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field. select desired file then select Backup file format as Inc. 2. Click the Backup button in the Hard Disk field. 5. 3. do the following: 1. Select the Backup and Restore command from the menu. select desired file. From the Hard disk field. . 4. Select the Backup and Restore command from the menu. 3. To restore a route using ASCII data. Select desired backup format with Backup format. Select desired Backup Format. For further details see Appendix 5. Select backup drive from the Backup device field. For further details see Appendix 5. 5. 3. 4. i The following formats are available for route backup and restore: x x x x x ASCII PROPRIETARY ASCII POSITION. or to restore some ASCII text produced by some other application to the ECDIS. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field. do the following: 1. 2. list of WPT names and Latitude/Longitude ASCII POSITION WPT NAME list of Latitude/Longitude and WPT names ASCII FULL. all route related information i Sometimes it is useful to restore to the ECDIS route information stored in an ASCII text file that was produced by some other application. 5. list of Latitude/Longitude values ASCII WPT NAME POSITION.ac u erations i The following formats are available for route backup and restore: x x x x x ASCII PROPRIETARY ASCII POSITION (list of Latitude/Longitude values) ASCII WPT NAME POSITION (list of WPT names and Latitude/Longitude) ASCII POSITION WPT NAME (list of Latitude/Longitude and WPT names) ASCII FULL (all route related information) i Sometimes it is useful to save route information as an ASCII text file for use with some other application. To make a backup of a route in ASCII format. Select backup drive in the Backup drive field. 2. Click the Backup button in the Hard Disk field. Select desired file. Note: To copy charts between ECDIS workstations. Between ECDIS workstations when both worstations are set as single workstation mode ECDIS 1 SINGLE ECDIS 2 SINGLE LAN Between both workstations are set as Master/Slave or Multi-workstation mode. 3. If you want to make a backup of chart material to backup ECDIS. open the Backup & Restore dialog box and do the following: 1. Backup to floppy disk ECDIS 1 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE ECDIS 2 MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE LAN Backup to additional ECDIS PC which operates in SINGLE workstation mode . However. For use of Backup. open the Chart menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu. After the backup has been completed. see the illustration below for when it is possible to use the Backup function. the backup ECDIS doesn’t automatically start to use possible new material. 2. Click the Backup button. but backup is done to external device/media. it is recommended that you use the Restore function instead of Backup. the hard disk content of the backup ECDIS is identical with backup ECDIS. To do this.ac u erations i i The ECDIS lets you keep a chart database identical both in the hard disk of the ECDIS and the hard disk of the backup ECDIS. Select file category Select Drive for backup of ECDIS at Drive in the Backup Device window. Note: After the restore has been completed. select the drive where backup ECDIS is stored. open the Chart menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu. . Select file category. At Drive in the Backup Device window. click the Restore button. open the Backup and Restore dialog box and do the following: 1. the hard disk content of the backup ECDIS is identical with backup ECDIS. If you want restore a backup of some chart material from the backup ECDIS. 2. Then.ac u erations i i The ECDIS lets you keep a chart database identical both in the hard disk of the ECDIS and the hard disk of backup the ECDIS. To do this. However. the backup ECDIS doesn’t automatically start to use possible new material. navigation workstation and planning station) Multiple workstation (for example. For further details see the service manual. navigation workstations) An access server takes care of information shared inside the system to keep workstations consistent within the common reference system concept. XX. The access server also monitors if a workstation has a right to make certain actions (for example if a workstation has usage rights to change monitored route for the system).i i i A system is comprised of one or more Workstation(s) and it is configured as follows: x x x Single workstation Multiple workstation (for example. User selections used for route planning are separate for each workstation The Installation parameters of the system define if the system consists of more than one workstation and in which the access server is running. manual updates and Notes Some operator selections are shared (for example safety contour). while some other operator selections are defined separately for each workstation. user charts. The common reference system concept includes the following features: x x x x x x Shared navigation sensors Shared alert management Shared chart databases for S57 (ENC) and ARCS Shared databases for routes.XX XX.XX . you can select which workstation to use as a sensor source. navigation sensors.) 1. the other workstation is used for selections for the monitoring mode and system use).. The alternative selection is "Single workstation" and it is used for two purposes: x x If you do not have more than one workstation powered. Switch to single mode when conducting SENC conversion of S57 or C-MAP CM-93/2 charts. Mode: Normally. Check Mode and change from Multi Workstation to Single Workstation. Right-click MULTI in the information area. . etc. Sensor source: This box shows the Workstation into which all the navigation sensors are connected. user chart monitoring mode. If you want to use this workstation of your system temporarily as a totally independent separate workstation. route monitor. Note that this is only a request for shared operation. If you have a fully redundant system where all the sensors are connected to all workstations.) and system use (for example. Note that during the "Single workstation" mode the system does not use the common reference system concept.e. x x 2. Usage rights: The following options are available to request usage rights: x Master: Only this workstation can be used to make selections for the monitoring mode (for example. if the current workstation holding Master usage rights is changed from Master to any other alternative. The difference between Slave and Plan usage rights is that Plan retains that status but Slave will be changed to Multi. (All stations must be in the single mode in SENC conversion. Tracked Target source. in a multi-workstation environment. the following dialog box appears when choosing the Initial Settings menu. Check Usage Rights and change from Multi(slave) to Master. 2.). 3. Plan: Only this workstation can access the planning mode (i. etc. Multi: This workstation shares usage rights in order to make selections for the monitoring mode and system use with the other Workstation set as Multi. Open the box by moving the cursor onto the workstation mode indication and pushing the right mouse button.o on eference Syste i If the system has a dual workstation. 1. then you do not get Multi usage rights. i i i i The operator may change the operating mode to "single" or "multi". then this workstation is selected for "single workstation" mode. then select "Single workstation" mode. 3. but Slave usage rights. since everything you do is not shared by other workstations. If any other Workstation has been selected as Master. this selection should always be "Multi workstation". global_catalog. To prevent this. deleted. and the newly created file is time-stamped "Monday.cat is deleted. When this occurs. x x x x x Chart data ARCS S57 Manual updates Permits i i x If you have the multi-workstation mode in use. x When ECDIS is installed or updated. This same operating procedure applies if charts are loaded and updated while the multi-workstation mode is active. The access server is responsible for harmonizing data on all workstations when any data listed below has been changed in one of the workstations. x For multi-workstation system.cat. For how to change the mode. charts are then automatically loaded to Workstation B for harmonization of charts. i i When the multi-workstation mode is used. viewing dates set.o on eference Syste The common reference system concept provides that all alerts are indicated in all workstations and a single acknowledge of alert from any workstation is enough to acknowledge the alert from all workstations. switch to single-workstation mode. x Do not turn off the power of an ECDIS unit when charts are being harmonized between two ECDIS units in the multi-workstation mode.cat of both the ARCS system and S57 system is deleted. removed. however. to prevent the overload condition. 1601 9:00:00 AM". in the following operating sequence: Chart menuĺSystemĺRefresh charts after backup. with no order or priority. for example.5 "Mode of Workstations". January 01.) This usually presents no problem with harmonization of S57 charts. ECDIS charts are harmonized whenever a chart is loaded. After harmonization is completed. However. the ECDIS workstation having the latest "global_catalog. Manual update. "use" the time stamp obtained from "Set chart viewing date" and execute "Set chart viewing date" on the ECDIS on which to harmonize S57 charts. the ECDIS workstation to be harmonized has more charts than the other ECDIS workstation but its global_catalog. etc. Both chart systems are harmonized with the latest charts. which causes slow operation. if "Permanent Warning" appears during the rebuild.cat is older than the ECDIS workstation with fewer charts. x In the multi-workstation mode. The unit that was turned off may malfunction after activating the single-workstation mode. (This happens only when it and the S57_setup_file are deleted together. the current time stamp is applied. Chart removal. The date of global_catalog. manually updated. information between workstations is shared via the access server. Manual chart viewing dates. see section 18. Permit removal. If harmonization is executed between ECDIS units operating in the singleworkstation mode.cat is modified in the following instances: Permit loading. etc. This will always give the most recent time stamp to the ECDIS to be harmonized. it is recommended that loading or updating of ARCS and S57 charts be made when the ship is NOT sailing on restricted waters.cat is written over and its time stamp becomes older than the ECDIS time stamp. the time stamp for global_catalog. . x Turn off the radar overlay feature before conducting harmonization after loading or updating charts. "Set chart viewing date" will be executed. etc. To load or update charts while sailing. After ECDIS is restarted.cat for both the S57 system and ARCS system is changed whenever respective charts are loaded. if charts are loaded and updated at Workstation A in the single mode then the mode is switched to multimode. This can cause loss of charts if. This causes the ECDIS to revert to the harmonized state directly after installation. rebuild is executed to create a new global_catalog. charts must be refreshed at Workstation B. Chart loading. because harmonising of databases may cause delay in system operations. x The date of modification of global_catalog. If only global_catalog. Chart update.cat" is used for harmonization. loading. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X X Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. the access server starts harmonising databases in order to get databases identical on all workstations. 4.o on eference Syste You can set access server display options ON if you want to monitor access server windows to know harmonization status. Harmonising starts when "Enable changes" selection is removed or corresponding window(s) are closed. the access server indicates the need for pending harmonisation. After harmonisation has been done. This window can be closed by clicking the "Access server is currently harmonizing" window. 3. updating. Note: The Stop button in the Progress of harmonization window is intended to stop the harmonization in case of system malfunction. the route. If the system recognises that any data mentioned above has been changed in one workstation. etc. 2. . When the access server recognises that the editing. Select Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu then Access Server Display from the submenu. X X X X 5. If you click the Details… button. Select Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel. session has been completed in one workstation. the messages shown below may appear. using the window shown right. the access server locks it and rejects further selection of it in other workstations until "Enable changes" selection is removed or the Plan Route dialog box is closed. To set access server display ON/OFF. the "Progress of harmonization" window appears to give detailed information about harmonization progress. When access server windows are displayed. do the following: 1. When route. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the menu shown left. user chart or Notes is selected for the planning mode. user chart or Notes can be selected in another workstation for the planning mode. whenever harmonization is completed by the system. The message "Access Server is currently harmonizing" appears to alert you to this action. o on eference Syste i The common reference system concept allows that some selections and settings made by a operator in one workstation are transferred to the other workstation. These are as follows: x x x x x x Route, user chart and Notes in monitoring mode Selected sensors in speed/course and position pages (including position alignment of your ship and gyro correction) in the Sensors dialog box Settings for chart alerts and watch sector Settings of conditions for voyage and dangerous targets recordings Ship parameters (table of forwarding distance, optimization parameters and navigation parameters) Setting for position discrepancy limit i A workstation can have different usage rights. Master and Multi (Slave) rights allow control of both planning and monitoring modes and navigation sensors. Slave (Multi) and Plan usage rights allow only control of the planning mode. Workstations can be set so that x x One has Master usage rights. The rest has Slave (Multi) or Plan usage rights. One or two have Multi (Slave) usage rights. The rest has Plan usage rights. i i One single workstation can be selected to control the monitoring mode and navigation sensors. This means that this particular workstation is used to select route, user chart and Notes for the monitoring mode. To select configuration of system in which one workstation has usage rights set as Master, do the following: 1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Check the Usage rights box and select Master from the List box. NM 2. 3. The indication MASTER appears at the lower right hand corner on the selected workstation. 4. The indication SLAVE appears at the lower right hand corner on the other workstation. o on eference Syste i i i Multiple workstations can be selected to control monitoring modes and navigation sensors. This means that these particular workstations are used to select route, user chart and Notes for monitoring modes. However, the multiple control requires that none of the other workstations is set for Master usage rights. If the other workstation is set for Master usage rights, then this workstation can be set only as Slave or Plan. The transition from Slave to Multi usage right is automatic. If later the usage right selections in the other workstation are changed, then the usage rights in this workstation is automatically set as Multi or Slave based on non-existence or existence of a Master usage rights workstation. To select configuration of system in which multiple workstations have usage rights set as Multi, do the following: 1. 2. Operate at the workstation for which you like to give Multi or Slave usage rights. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Check the Usage rights box and select either Multi (Slave) or Slave (Multi) from the List box. First alternative indicates the selection and second alternative in parenthesis indicates the provisional selection. Provisional selection may be used by the system if new usage rights selections are made in the other workstation. NM NM 3. OR 4. If, based on your request, you got shared Multi usage rights, then the indication MULTI appears at the lower right hand corner of display. If one of the workstations was already selected as Master, then the system cannot give you Multi usage rights. In this case the indication SLAVE appears at the lower right hand corner of display. SLAVE o on eference Syste i i Workstation can be selected to control only the planning mode. This means that particular workstation is used to edit route, user chart and Notes in the planning mode. Selection of Plan usage rights is done in the Installation Parameters of the ECDIS by service personnel. The operator is not able to set these usage rights. Note that a workstation selected for Plan usage rights still has full viewing access to navigation sensors and to monitored routes, user charts, etc. This is important because it allows that parallel operator(s) can monitor navigation situation. To verify configuration of the system in which a selected workstation has usage rights set as Plan, do the following: 1. 2. Operate at the workstation for which you like to give Plan usage rights. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Check Usage rights and select Plan from the list box. NM 3. The indication PLAN appears at the lower right hand corner of the display. o on eference Syste Normally the sensor source of a system is a single workstation to which all the sensors are connected. All workstations share the navigation sensors. The workstation selected as a sensor source is connected to all sensors. The workstations that can be used as sensor source are shown in the Sensor source list box in the Sensors dialog box. Typically, the following kinds of installations for connecting sensors to the system are used: x x One workstation to which all the sensors are connected and the others have only one DGPS connected (minimum system configuration which fulfil IMO back-up arrangement for the ECDIS). Multiple workstations to which all the sensors are connected (fully redundant workstations) Consult with the installer to know the installation method. Note: If you have a fully redundant system where all the sensors are connected to all workstations, it is possible to have the same information available no matter which workstation is selected as the sensor source. If there is any difference in installation parameters due to different combination of sensors connected, the information available may vary when changing the sensor source. It is highly recommended that you change sensor source only when it is required (for example when you have some failure in communications, when hardware fails, etc.) and also to change the sensor source only when it is safe for navigation to do so. (Change of sensor source will take some time during which the system is not fully operational.) To change sensor source, do the following: 1. 2. Operate at the workstation for which you want to set sensor source. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Check Sensor source then select sensor source from the list box. Radar SPD/CRS POSN 3. kn Communication program is started at the workstation specified as the sensor source responsible for receiving and transmitting data from/to sensors. The workstation selected as sensor source is also indicated at the top of the Sensors dialog box. Gyro 1 Gyro 2 Rate gyro (calc.) 0.0 /min o on eference Syste i The system is designed so that information and operations can be shared among workstations. Sharing requires that the access server be running in the specified workstation. (This is an installation parameter. See the Installation Manual.) The access server requires that the workstation be designated as multi workstation. If something fails in a workstation or in the LAN connecting the workstations that prevents multi workstation operations, it is possible to switch the mode to single workstation. If the mode of a workstation that is defined in the installation parameters for the access server is set as a single workstation, the access server is stopped and the workstation continues as if they are separate individual ECDIS systems. Note: When the mode is single workstation, no data are harmonised nor are information of operator selection shared between workstations. i To change sensor source, do the following: 1. Operate at the workstation for which you want to set sensor source. i i i 2. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. 3. Check Mode and select appropriate workstation from the List box. NM NM Single In this example, mode was changed from multi to single. The selection Single workstation disables selections of usage rights and sensor source and stops the access server operations on the workstation. In the single workstation mode, the indication SINGLE appears at the lower right hand corner in red. o on eference Syste i If something fails while the access server is harmonizing workstations, the following window appears to indicate that harmonising has failed. i i i i The window below indicates that operation of the access server is pending. This means that you have not closed all windows. To solve this, click the Cancel button several times to erase all windows from the ECDIS display. o on eference Syste The access server log is used to analyze and diagnose access server operation. Service personnel can use this log to check the access server for proper operation. To access the access server log, do the following: 1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to display the menu shown left. Select Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and select Access Server Log from the sub menu. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X 2. 3. X X X X X o on eference Syste i The human interface log is used to analyse and diagnose system operation. Service personnel can use this log to check the system for proper operation. To activate the human interface log, do the following: 1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X X 2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to display the menu shown left. 3. Select Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and select Human Interface log from the sub menu. X X X X . . x x x x a gat o Se so s Co o efe e ce S, Dual a is log and radar are having common reference point, which Sensors which are used for position like E is located on Conning position. The values of Center and Conning positions are depending on si e and geometry of the ship. Offsets from Antenna osition to Conning osition of osition Sensors depend on the location of osition Sensor antennas. Offsets from Antenna osition to Conning osition of Radars depend on the location of Radar antennas. Offset of transducer position to Conning osition of dual a is log depend on the location of dual a is log s transducer. All the values are maintained in Installation parameters. During commissioning of system, engineer will set all the values for the system. End users have limited access to Installation parameters. This is controlled by a Authori ing key disc. The Authori ing key disc is a floppy which contains necessary key to allow access into editing of the installation parameters. - . a i atio e or .2 C oos g a gat o Se so s The operator can select navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the Sensors dialog bo . To access this dialog bo , put the cursor on the osition field in the information area then push the right mouse button. Checkbo status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If there is no value shown for a sensor this means that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on sensors that are in use on the ship. .2. Se so s alog o esc to S ee Cou se age Source: In a multiple workstation environment verify that the sensor source indicated at the top of dialog bo is the intended one. Manual speed: If checked, operator can enter value t for speed. Note: This is used only if there are no other speed or SO sensors selected. og: If checked, a log is used as water speed source. no pulse is used to indicate that a log device with closed contact relay interface using 2 pulses/nm does not give any pulses and thus the speed might be wrong. If og is selected and no pulse condition is detected, then the system generates the alert 5 og data unreliable . Note: If you have a dual-a is Doppler log which can measure both water and bottom track, then installation parameters can be set to receive water tracking as log device. Dual log water : If checked, a dual log is used as speed and course source. water is used to indicate that this information is from water track of dual log. Dual log bottom : If selected, a dual log is used as speed and course source. bottom is used to indicate that this information is from bottom track of dual log. SPD/CRS POSN kn kn kn kn kn Radar kn Gyro 1 Gyro 2 Rate gyro (calc.) 0.0 /min -2 . a i atio e or Radar: If checked, radar is used as speed and course source. The following indications appear to denote source: bottom : og operating in bottom tracking mode. water : og operating in water tracking mode. posit. : osition receiver such as S. manual : Manual speed reftgt : Tracked Target Manual heading: If selected, the operator enters heading manually. Note that this is used only if there are no other sensors selected. G ro1: eading source is a gyrocompass. mag means the source is magnetic heading. True heading source has no indication. If the source of yro1 is a gyro with synchro or stepper interface, the indication re uire set appears when you need to set a new initial value for the gyro. G ro2: True heading source has no indication. If you have both gyro1 and gyro2 selected and if their value differs more than 5 , the system generates the alert yro data unreliable . Rate g ro: eading source is a Rate of Turn gyro. movement. Setting initial value of gyro1: Initial setting of gyro1 is not necessary if it outputs serial data. owever, if it is of synchro or stepper type, you will need to set initial gyro value. If gyro1 re uires initial value, then the indication re uire set is displayed. se the scrollwheel to enter initial value. After you enter a value re uire set disappears. calc. means the rate of turn is calculated from gyro - . a i atio e or Position page The field of a position sensor contains a label here R NO and M 2 which indicates the name of the sensor a status primary/secondary/off which indicates if the sensor is used or not position at conning position and local datum speed and course which has mag if the course is referenced to magnetic north. A D S position sensor has additional te t Diff, if differential signal is in use. atitude and longitude values will appear in red and with additional te t in the following conditions: x x alman filter has e cluded the sensor from its estimated position. Additional te t is E cluded . Received position from position sensor is in another datum as set to be received in the ECDIS. Additional te t is Datum . If position sensors have position discrepancy active. Additional te t is Discrepancy . kn LORAN Off SPD/CRS POSN NM DR kn DGPS-1st kn x ° kn osition sensors have priority, which is indicated as primary or secondary . Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off. If a position sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another position sensor was selected as primary, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to secondary state. hen the position source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another position source, then you get the alert osition source change . Note that alert is active only when the alman filter is off because the filter has its own process to calculate estimated position and in that process priority given by primary and secondary is not used. If a D S is selected as primary or secondary, and its status changes from no Diff to Diff or from Diff to no Diff the system generates the alert 727 D S pos. Source change alert numbers are from 727 to 7 2 depending on position receiver . ri no alert and Sec no alert can be selected from the D S bo if you want to disable the alert 727 D S pos. source change . These selections are intended for the area where the differential coverage is fading. One e ample is if you sail along coastline but you are so far away that the differential signal changes its status very often. The system generates the alert 7 Datum mismatch alert numbers are from 7 to 7 depending on the position receiver if output datum of a selected position sensor status other than Off is changed from S- to another datum or if selected position sensor does not send datum message. Additional te t datum appears, in red. urther, lat/lon values for the position sensor turn red. If the position sensor is also used for system position, alman filter and your ship s position at/ on values and datum used are indicated in red. If output datum of a selected position sensor is changed from no datum message or another datum to S- and the operator has used the selection rimary or Secondary, then the system generates the alert 7 Datum change alert numbers are from 7 to 7 depending on position receiver . Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. It was introduced in standard IEC 11 2-1 Ed2, published in uly 2 . Only E S for e ample S or D S which has IEC 11 21 Ed 2 2 -7 indicated in their type approval certificate can support the ECDIS to detect datum mismatch. The system generates the alert 7 osition discrepancy if there is discrepancy in position. Together with this alert, the system shows the te t Discrepancy in red in the osition page for a position sensor which has position discrepancy active. - . a i atio e or Enable: Check to align chart, using the drag and drop feature. Chart alignment: Alignment is automatically selected if the operator has defined position offset by using the chart align feature. The offset values are given in nautical miles and degrees. If position alignment is used, the operator is reminded of it every minutes by the alert 11 ChartAlign: over min . Dead rec: The system automatically selects dead reckoning if there are no valid and selected position sources and if there are valid and selected speed and course sources. If the system has selected dead reckoning, then the operator can enter a ne t T position for the ship in the at and on fields. alman filter: The alman filter calculates estimated position using all valid and selected position, speed and course sensors. Select On to activate this feature. -5 . a i atio e or t e age Set and Drift: See description below. ind: ind True or North speed t or m/s and direction are displayed. Note that true wind is wind relative to your ship heading. or further details, see section 1 .11 ind Sensor . Depth below trans: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may be entered to alert you to emperature: ater surface temperature. kn POSN kn ater current: Tide at current position. S targets: Status of AIS data. Check Danger Alms to get alert for dangerous or lost target. ost kn Set and drift: Check the Manual bo to manually set speed and course of drift. Note that you can select manual drift only if there are no automatic sources for SO and CO . In other words, you have neither a dual-a is log nor any position receiver available. Angle Spd Difference between heading and CO Speed component of the drift vector Crs Course component of the drift vector ector defined by SO and CO is e ual to vector sum of vectors defined by S D and D orth and set and drift . cs C s a gle C cr a le ater ee hea i o hi ee o er ro co r e o er ro ee o ri t co r e o ri t i ere ce et ee a C - . a i atio e or . Sou ce of os t o The figure below shows how source for position is selected. The alman filter uses all position sensors which have either primary or secondary as input for its calculation. D S and SY EDIS position sensors are considered more accurate than other position sensors. The latitude and longitude position is shown at the upper right corner on the ECDIS display, and in the e ample below the position source is D S. Other indications which may be displayed in the position area are as follows: x x x x x x x x NO POS : Appears in red when no dead reckoning sensors are selected and valid. DE D REC: Shown in red when position source is dead reckoning. DGPS GPS: OR N DECC or S ED S: Name of position source. S device has lost the D S signal. S device has OS DGPS: Shown in red when the operator-selected D F OS DGPS: Shown in red when the alman filter is in use and the operator-selected D lost the D S signal. F F ER G : Shown when the position source is the alman filter with high-precision position sensor. ER: Shown when position source is the alman filter without high-precision position sensor. B DF ER: Shown in red when position source is the alman filter and the filter has e cluded at least one of the selected sensors because of poor accuracy. . PRIMARY . SECONDARY . PRIMARY . SECONDARY 1. ° 15. . 1. ° 15. 5 °31.2 24°3 . 31 4 (POSN) (POSN) (POSN) If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data or the differential mode is changed on a D S device, the system immediately generates the alert osition source change . If the alman filter is used, the system generates the alert 1 ilter: os source change after a time out period of sec. If a selected D S sensor changes its operation mode and its status is primary or secondary, then the system generates the alert 727 D S pos. source change 727 for first sensor, 72 for second, etc. . These alerts are not generated if the operator has selected ri no alert or Sec no alert. If source of position includes a position sensor which is in datum mismatch condition, the latitude, longitude and selected datum are displayed in red. -7 -8 . See Source of osition on section 1 . GPS in diff. rimary and Secondary position sources. primary position and secondary position: System position: sed for navigation and steering. primary and secondary positions of your ship may be plotted on the ECDIS display with the ast tracks feature. In this e ample. mode or SYLEDIS selected as SECONDARY Not selected or no position Selected and position exists Any other than GPS in diff. x x x a a Seco a os t o s of S The system has three different positions for your ship: System position. Secondary position of your ship is not available as latitude/longitude value for the operator. You can control their visibility from the Tracking page of the Symbol Display dialog bo .. Secondary position: osition generated by position source selected as secondary position source. rimary position: osition generated by position source selected as primary position source. The position source for secondary position of your ship is selected either as Secondary or as Sec no alert on the osition page of the Sensors dialog bo . a i atio e or . mode or SYLEDIS selected as SECONDARY Not selected or no position Selected and position exists Secondary position of the own ship used by the system Secondary position of own ship is is not valid System. The position source for primary position of your ship is selected either as rimary or as ri no alert on the osition page of the Sensors dialog bo . . shown right. past tracks are plotted using Ship system position. 0q 15. Drift is the difference between speed over water and speed over ground. CO is speed over ground and course over ground. a i atio e or . when the system calculates ROT from movement of heading.0 kn 071. . - . if the value includes gyro correction.6 kn Not selected or no value GYRO from RADAR Available Not available Alarm 402 No Course Available ROT used by the system is shown in the Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog bo .206’N 024q36. man if the value has been manually entered or corr .5 os t o sc e a c le t You can activate the alert 7 osition discrepancy from the Initial Settings dialog bo . The Rate yro field shows the te t calc. stern speed transversal and center speed longitudinal . Note that the alert is also effective between your ship s position and any positions. Manual COURSE Selected Not selected GYRO 1 Selected and value exists Heading used by the system GYRO 2 Selected and value exists Not selected or no value HDG SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) WGS 84 DGPS 59q31. SO . eading used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. respectively.. Sou ce of S ft a oc C S ee g S ee Co ea g o e ts The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are selected. meaning the value is referenced to true North. The alert is active between primary position and any secondary positions. heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown without additional te t. Speed is speed over water. No te t is shown when the value is received from an ROT gyro. Additional gyro-related te t which may appear are mag if the value is referenced to magnetic North.731’E 071. since ECDIS compass position discrepancy between position used by system your ship s position and any individual position sensor selected as primary or secondary source of position. which is displayed in red. To deactivate the alert set limit as .6 kn 0. .0q 15. Docking speed components are bow speed transversal . In the e ample shown below. 6 kn KALMAN filter calculation result from the movement of position Not selected or no value Selected and value exists Water speed and Gyro heading The figure below show the source of docking speed components used for the predictor.0q 15.0q 15.0 kn 071.. wat and man could come from direct interfaces of the system or from the connected radar.206’N 024q36. Other te t which denote SO /CO source are OT : ottom tracking dual-a is log CA C : Speed calculated from SO AT : ater tracking log RDR : Mi ed sources of CO and SO in the connected radar OSN : Average of selected position sensors I TER : alman filter MAN : Manual entry Note that pos .6 kn 0. CO and SO are from selected position sensors and this is indicated with the te t pos . GPS or SYLEDIS Not selected or no value DUAL L OG (Bottom track of dual-axis doppler log) Not selected or no value RADAR (measures SOG/COG from target = Autodrift) Not selected or no value Selected and value existts Selected and value exists Selected and value exists SOG/COG used by the system Average of SOG/COG from all selected Decca.Target Not selected or no value Selected and value exists HDG SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) WGS 84 DGPS 59q31. In the e ample below. bot .731’E 071. Average of SOG/COG from all selected DGPS. Loran or Ref. a i atio e or SPD/CRS POSN Calculated ROT from movement of Heading Selected in Installation parameters kn Not selected in Installation parameters Value exists ROT used by system kn kn kn ROT Gyro Radar kn No value Alarm 718 ROT gyro error (CALC) SO /CO used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. - . . a i atio e or tallatio e C ee ea i ara eter o the e ater e ee the te the e et al e te the te Calc lator o a ter ee e the te te - . set and drift have been entered manually since the Manual bo is checked. a i atio e or The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation..2 .0q 1. Manual Drift Not el s ect ed Selected Drift used by system Calculator POSN kn SOG/COG used by the system Speed (water speed) used by system Heading used by system .1q 2.731’E 071.206’N 024q36. Other te t which may appear to show source of set and drift are O : og or dual-a is log OSN osition sensor I TER : alman filter MAN : Manual entry.7 kn 045. if available from any of selected position receiver Not available Available Alarm 401 No Speed Available Drift used by the system is shown in the Other page of the Sensors dialog bo . Manual SPEED LOG (Water track of dual-axis doppler log OR pi lot log) Not selected or no value Selected Not selected Selected and value exists Speed used by the system (water speed) RADAR (measures water speed) Not selected or no value Selected and value exists HDG SPD (CALC) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) WGS 84 DGPS 59q31. In the e ample below.0 kn SOG.8 kn 1. Note that the source of SO and CO is not only speed and course sensors.5 Source of SO . erify and select valid sensors in the Speed/Course and os pages of the Sensors dialog bo for SO and CO used by the system. the system generates the alert 1 No speed available . Speed. hen no speed source is available. at which time it generates the alert 1 SO CO unreliable . CO . a i atio e or le t elate to S C s ee ea g ft a oc g s ee co o e ts It is possible that the operator has not selected any speed or heading sensors. - . but the source can also be position-fi ing e uipment. or that the selected sensors do not have any valid values. hen no heading source is available the system generates the alert 2 No heading available . see section 1 . ROT. because it cannot even perform dead reckoning.. Drift and Docking Speed Components . This kind of a situation is critical for the system. The system may find that SO and/or CO from the sensors are unreliable. or more information about source priority for SO /CO . eading. with the te t indication active or backup in the yro 1 or yro 2 field. operator change position of irst priority yro Select selector and for automatic changes i. The track control system can continue smoothly with a backup gyro.. This smoothing is used both for operator re uested changes i.7 ual o te face fo - DN NA T-A re uires dual gyro interface for a track control system.. The ECDIS indicates the state of irst priority yro Select selector switch on the Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog bo .e.. a i atio e or . The benefit of this arrangement is that loss of a single gyro does not interrupt track control.e.. Smoothing is added for smooth transition i.e. Gyro 1 First priority Gyro selector Gyro 2 Gyro AR P A Repeater AR A P Common Distribution Unit for Gyro (Selected gyro (Gyro 1 or Gyro 2) AR P A Radar Gyro 1 Gyro 2 Gyro 2 Select Gyro 1 IEC-61162-1 ($XxHDT) or Stepper/Synchro SPD/CRS POSN Gyro 1 kn ECDIS AutoPilot Gyro 2 through Trackpilot kn kn kn Radar Gyro 2 kn (CALC) Gyro data distribution for track control system - . without une pected large rudder movements from one gyro source to another gyro source. which consists of the ECDIS and a Autopilot A -2 . automatic continuation with backup source . Dual gyro interface is accomplished by connecting two gyros yro 1 and yro 2 directly to the Autopilot A 2 . ECDIS and common gyro distribution unit. A selection switch first priority yro selector is used to select heading source for Autopilot A -2 . cor1 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 1 and that gyro correction has been used cor2 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 2 and that gyro correction has been used mg1 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 1 which is a magnetic compass mg2 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 2 which is a magnetic compass HDG (2) SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) WGS 84 DGPS 59q31. are as follows: x x x x x x 1 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 1. .7.5 . 2 : eading used by the ECDIS is from yro 2.0q 15.731'E 071.6 kn 0.206'N 024q36..0q 15. which appear at the upper right corner.0 kn 071. a i atio e or . fo cat o of g o sou ce at o a ea ossible gyro source indications.6 kn Above is an e ample where irst priority yro selection switch is in state yro 2. In this case. the system automatically selects yro 2 to be used as the source of heading. ECDIS generates alert 7 5 for missing yro 1 and alert 7 for missing yro 2.7. irst priority yro Select selector backup : The system uses value from this gyro which is NOT selected by In the e ample screen at left in the figure below. heading value from yro 1 is lost. alert A 11 Reference gyro missing or Compass comparison alert is generated at the Autopilot A -2 . If the deviation between gyro 1 and gyro 2 is over 5 . alert A 1 Missing working hen no gyro value is received from gyro selected by gyro is generated at the Autopilot A -2 . - . kn kn (CALC) (CALC) . a i atio e or Se so s alog o The Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog bo shows gyro indication as follows: x x active : The system uses value from this gyro which is selected by irst priority yro Select selector . In this case the te t 2 appears at the upper right corner.. hen no gyro value is received from a gyro not selected by irst priority gyro selection . Note that alert A 11 is activated also if the deviation between yro 1 and yro 2 is too large default is 12 . then ECDIS generates the alert yro data unreliable. In the e ample screen at right in the figure below. The indication active in the yro 2 field indicates that the system uses operator-selected gyro as source of heading State of irst priority gyro selector switch . The indication backup in the yro 2 field means that a backup gyro is used. heading information from yro 2 is used by a Autopilot A -2 and the ECDIS.2 o-assoc ate ale ts irst priority gyro selection . If a position sensor has position discrepancy active. etc. The result of the processing is a smoothed position which is used as final position of the ship. new start position of the filter is set as an average value of the enabled sensors sensors with any selection other than O . A position ump is caused by line change in Decca. The filter can be selected or deselected by switching it ON or O . see section 1 .. Operator can manually include or e clude sensors. Remaining sensors sensors with any selection other than O are included in the filter processing. S. The alman filter is designed to support automatic route steering and thus it re uires that you have some speed. If the filter is used without automatic route steering then. The purpose of this filter is to continuously monitor the position given by each individual sensor to determine if the sensor is reliable or not. in case of alert . ith automatic route steering the system keeps the filter selected. The filter can calculate estimated position using all operative position sensors. After generating the alert . The filter knows the behavior of different types of sensors oran. or further details. D S. hen switching filter state from ON to O . Decca. hen the filter is selected. the system generates the alert ilter: Speed below kn . Change the filter state from O to ON. . but repeats alert 2 . The filter eliminates all position umps in the final position even if there is a position ump in a sensor. the operator should evaluate which sensor caused the problem. etc. only the filter itself is set in the O state. put the cursor on the osition indication. To view position sensor status. Disable the bad sensor then turn the filter ON again. Note that the filter indicates unreliable position sensor by showing position in red. The filter has one main alert ilter: os unreliable .. This can happen if there is only one position sensor connected and the position generated by it becomes unreliable or if there are more position sensors but they are deviating too much. Also selected gyro and log sensors are included into this analysis. loss of differential signal with D S. This feature enables the operator to control how much discrepancy there can be between the alman filter position and any position sensor. . this causes a ump in the position. a i atio e or . The system can check that each selected position sensor is within position discrepancy limit set by the operator. the system will use its normal method to select position source from available sensor. alerts are generated if the system does not have a valid position available. This change of available sensor may or may not affect the operation of the filter. gyro selected and valid in order to operate. The filter re uires at least one position sensor and one course sensor i. osition Discrepancy Alert .7 . This alert means that the filter is not able to calculate the position from the connected sensors. No alerts are generated for position umps of the position sensors selected to be used with the filter as long as the filter is able to estimate a reliable position based on selected position sensors. If there is a change in the availability of the sensor selected with the alman filter and if the filter cannot continue the same level of position accuracy. If the speed is less than the value set in the installation parameters for e ample kt . Normally. the system also selects the filter as O after generating the alert . confirm that Sensors appears in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. If you don t use automatic route steering. and the filter continues processing from current position.e. it is automatically e cluded from the alman filter. then the system generates the alert 1 ilter: os source change . Alert can appear also if the speed/course sensor og or yro is found to be unreliable. After the alert is generated.8 lte e at o The ECDIS has an automatic multi-sensor alman filter for position. It reminds you that if you want to continue automatic route steering you need to select one of the position sensors. a i atio e or . automatic route steering and alert lert ilter: os unreliable Route: CRS ump possible Meaning The filter is not able to calculate the position from the connected sensors. most probably your ship will perform a turn as a conse uence of ne t T position. gyro and log or Two position sensors and gyro And for OTO Track: x x One high-precision position sensor. ith automatic route steering the minimum selection is for OTO aypoint: x x x One position sensors. You tried to enable automatic route steering without an independent speed source. You lost high-precision position sensor during program track and remaining sensor doesn t meet the minimum re uirements for high-precision sensor remaining selection doesn t meet the minimum. Then.8 . You tried to enable automatic route steering for OTO Track mode without a high-precision sensor. You lost high-precision sensor in automatic steering. and remaining sensor doesn t meet the minimum re uirements for highprecision sensor. 5 rogTrack: Needs log sensor . OTO Track mode. 2 Route: Needs diff pos. I TER I : There is a high-precision position sensor selected and available for the filter. which both re uire an independent speed source.. this minimum selection is not suitable for automatic route steering or program track. 7 Disabled: Needs filter on 75 Route: Needs filter ON 7 Route: Needs log sensor Disabled: Needs log sensor 1 Disabled: Needs diff pos. secondary position sensors and gyro Source of position indicates what kind of sensors the filter is using for position calculation. lte a auto at c oute stee g The filter can operate based on only one position sensor and one gyro. rogram Track . You lost the alman filter position during program track. enerated after alert 2 is displayed. owever.8. It is possible to use track steering modes which re uire accurate position oto Track. The permanent indication is shown at the top right hand corner: x x I TER: There is no high-precision position sensor selected and available for the filter. lte state auto at c oute stee ga ale t Filter state. rogTrack: Needs ilter ON rogTrack: Needs diff pos. gyro and log or One high-precision position sensor. og device is lost during automatic route steering and your remaining log selection doesn t meet minimum re uirements. ilter is lost during automatic route steering. You tried to enable automatic route steering without alman filter positioning. You lost a log device during program track and your remaining log devices selections don t meet the minimum re uirements. 2. Note: If the radar overlay is on the ECDIS display when position alignment is done. . To align position. based on selected speed/course sensors. radar echo target and ECDIS chart material. then check Enable chart align. . the system will repeat alert 75 Route: Needs filter ON every 15 seconds. the operator should leave automatic route steering and evaluate which sensor caused the problem. then x x Mode of radar overlay is temporarily changed to Radar over Chart . os t o al g e t ea s of t e C S If the radar echo targets symbols are not positioned correctly. Select desired chart material ARCS or S57 . os t o lg e t minutes to remind the operator The position alignment feature functions to fine-tune ship s position by using radar overlay. do the following: 1. Then. lace the cursor on the position indication in the information area then push the right mouse button to display the Sensors dialog bo . If you don t leave automatic route steering. Select suitable radar target manually for tracking. Open the osition page. ECDIS temporarily uses radar overlay color also for your ship and Tracked Target symbols. a i atio e or out ale t lte os u el a le If the filter is used with automatic route steering then. Drag and drop means that you place the ob ect on desired location by rolling the trackball while pressing and holding down the left mouse button then anchoring the ob ect by releasing the left mouse button. SPD/CRS POSN NM - . switch it on. in case of alert ilter: os unreliable . Don t select any sensor which causes umping. there is either position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors. the ECDIS will generate the following alert every to align position: 11 ChartAlign: over min . If the ship position from a position sensor is acceptable. all position sensors and the filter itself are switched O and the system continues with backup dead reckoning. . . you can turn the filter ON again and continue automatic route steering. In this case it is recommended that you leave automatic route steering and continue using a more traditional steering mode until you find the reason why alert was generated. Moving is done by dragging and dropping your ship symbol or Tracked Target to desired location. osition may be aligned on the ECDIS display by moving your ship s position or by moving Tracked Target s position. After the alert is generated.. If position alignment is in use. a i atio e or . See the figure at the top of the ne t page.206’N 024q36.6 kn -2 .0q 15. Also the range and bearing of the offset are shown in the osition page of the Sensors dialog bo . See figures below..6 kn 0. se the trackball and the left mouse button to drag and drop a symbol or suitable chart detail on a radar target. After position alignment If the position source is dead reckoning. there is no offset and the te t indication O SET does not appear. If the position source is something other than dead reckoning.0q 15. the position set with chart alignment is the new start position for dead reckoning. HDG SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) WGS 84 DGPS OFFSET 59q31. then the indication O SET is displayed at the upper part of the information area.731’E 071. Before position alignment 5. SPD/CRS POSN NM The indication O SET appears on the ECDIS display. You can see range and bearing of the offset in the osition page of the Sensors dialog bo .0 kn 071. In this case. a i atio e or .731’E -2 . HDG 071. . .0q SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) 15. Check that the indication O position source indication..0 kn 071. 2.. esett g os t o al g e t To reset position alignment. SPD/CRS POSN NM .206’N 024q36. ncheck Chart Align .0q 15.6 kn 0. proceed as follows: Open the Sensors dialog bo then open the osition page.6 kn SET is not shown in the upper part of the information area. to the right of the WGS 84 DGPS 59q31.2 1. 0q 15. if the gyrocompass itself does not make any corresponding correction. POSN -22 . HDG SPD (WAT) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) 071.0q 15.731’E If you have enabled both yro error correction from ship parameters and yro error compensation from route parameters. yro error correction is used to remove the difference between the chart north and the gyro north. Some gyrocompass systems also include correction for dynamic settling error. The current value of gyro correction and its method are displayed in the Other page of the Sensors dialog bo as shown in the e ample at right..0 kn 071.6 kn 0. course to steer used by automatic route steering is compensated in this case. o o Co ect o Typical gyro error sources are installation error. WGS 84 DGPS 59q31. on Tracked Target drawn on the ECDIS display or on radar overlay drawn on the ECDIS display. which may use automatic or manual input for speed and latitude. as shown in the e ample at right. Automatic gyro error correction based on tabled speed/latitude correction can be used.206’N 024q36. Typically you detect gyro error on a user chart superimposed on the TT picture. yro error can be corrected totally or partially in the gyro compass system itself. then this condition is always visible in the information area. Also. then lan and Ne t in the information area display show compensated values. a i atio e or .6 kn If you have enabled yro error correction see the ne t page and if this correction has modified the value of your ship heading. Many gyro compass systems have automatic speed/latitude corrector. yro error compensation can be used to: x x x x Correct user chart on radar screen Correct Tracked Target positions on ECDIS display Correct radar overlay drawn on ECDIS display Compensate courses used in route monitoring and automatic route steering. Red corr means the gyro value has been corrected. speed/latitude error and dynamic settling error. Table means speed/latitude table is the source for gyro correction Manual indicates manual entry of gyro correction. yro error correction must be set for Auto for yro spd/lat error to be effective. Note that to enable this function you have to switch yro error correction to the Manual position. . spin the scrollwheel to select Auto then push the scrollwheel. Select Ship and Route parameters from the sub menu then push the scrollwheel. lace the cursor in the yro error correction bo . push the left mouse button. do the following: Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area. a i atio e or . Manual: Enables manual gyro error correction. a l g g o e o co ect o To enable gyro error correction. This enables automatic gyro correction. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X X X X X X o co ect o alog o elate sett gs S a a ete s f el S a oute a a ete s Ship parameters field G ro error correction: x x x Off: Disables any gyro error correction. Max corr: Sets limit for ma imum correction allowed. select Navigation arameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel. ECDIS and route steering. uto: Enables automatic gyro correction based on tabled speed/latitude. which is effective for radar. in the Manual gyro correction field. Route parameters field G ro error compensation: Select ON if set courses in route steering are corrected for gyro error. select Initial Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel. -2 . 2. . 1. lace the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog bo . . Manual corr: Ad usts gyro error manually. G ro spd lat error: Selects the automatic gyro error compensation based on tabled speed/latitude correction. Typical value is degrees.. The wind values are as shown below. a i atio e or .. true wind speed ind angle reference: eading The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data. Ship information: CO : deg SO : . Se so ECDIS can display and output wind data in the following three formats: pparent: ind meter-measured wind speed and direction. ind angle reference: eading North: True wind angle. true wind speed ind angle reference: True North heoretical: True wind angle.7 kt eading: 5 deg Apparent: North: Theoretical: ind angle 5 deg deg 2 5 deg ind speed 1 kt 5 kt 5kt -2 . stallat o a a ete fo se so There are installation parameters for a wind sensor: x Source of True wind Setting for inputted serial data x Display format Relative wind. true wind x Output format to radar output format to radar The tables which follow describe the above-mentioned parameters. . read as Apparent data and North and Theoretical are calculated. T True is e tracted from the M sentence. a i atio e or True wind or Relative wind may be selected from the Other dialog bo in the Sensors menu.. read as North data and Apparent and Theoretical are calculated. D and Calculate True ind North and use it directly s la fo Option at Option in Sensor dialog bo Rel wind True wind North North Theoretical Display Rel Theoretical or True North Display Rel Apparent or True North Display Rel Apparent or True Theoretical Theoretical Apparent Apparent -25 . Sou ce of t ue Option Receive R elative/Apparent ind Receive T heoretical ind Receiver T rue ind ind and Calculate True Description R Relative is e tracted from the M sentence. read as Theoretical data and North and Apparent are calculated. POSN kn Relative wind/true wind selection box kn . reyed options are default settings. T True is e tracted from the M sentence. Description sentence is T True and North data is sentence is T True and Theoretical data is sentence is R Relative and Apparent data sentence is R Relative and Theoretical Option on Sensor dialog bo Rel ind True wind The reference field of the M sentence is T True and North data is output. The reference field of the M data is output. a i atio e or ut ut to a a Option Output T True/North only Output T True/Theoretical only Output R Rel/Apparent only Output R Rel/Theoretical only The output sentence of the items below changes according to setting of Rel ind and True ind. Output T True/North or R Apparent Output T True/North or R Theoretical Output T True/Theoretical or R Apparent The reference field of the M output. The reference field of the M sentence is T True and Theoretical data is output. The reference field of the M sentence is T True and North data is output. The reference field of the M output.. -2 . The reference field of the M sentence is R Relative and Apparent data is output. The reference field of the M is output. The reference field of the M sentence is R Relative and Apparent data is output The reference field of the M sentence is R Relative and Theoretical data is output. based on the depth below the transducer. -27 . If the measured depth is less than the set at Echo alert. in the Echo alert bo . If re uired. POSN kn kn The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. a i atio e or . echo sounder is shown on the Other page in the Sensors dialog bo . The content of the Other page in the Sensor menu depends on sensors connected.. 2 e t Se so The depth output from a depth sensor for e ample. In this e ample there are two transducers bow and aft installed. you can activate an alert. the system generates the alert 2 Depth below limit . Error : ost connection to radar 2. og Error : ost connection to log sensor. 2 Engine Control Comm Error : ost connection to engine control. 1 Echo Sounder Error : ost connection to echo sounder sensor. -28 . 3 1 Source Radar changed : ost connection to the radar which is the source Tracked Targets and speed/course information. 5 G ro Error : ost connection to gyro1 sensor. 24 Radar s stem Error : Displayed if radar number reports internal failure. Error : ost connection to radar . 1 B. Error : ost connection to radar . Then. are related to sensors. As a conse uence the system loses Tracked Targets and speed/course available from radar. 13 Position E Error : ost connection to position sensor number 2. As a conse uence the system loses Tracked Targets and speed/course available from radar. 12 Position E Error : ost connection to position sensor number 1. Se so . Error : ost connection to radar 1. if other radars e ist. 1 RO g ro error : ost connection to ROT gyro sensor. 23 Radar s stem Error : Displayed if radar number reports internal failure. which are not described elsewhere. G ro Error : ost connection to gyro2 sensor. 355 Radar Comm. the system selects one of them as the new source of Tracked Targets and speed/course information and the system generates alert 71.elate le ts The following alerts. As a conse uence the system loses Tracked Targets and speed/course available from radar. 15 Position E Error : ost connection to position sensor number .dapter Error : ost connection to -Adapter. Dual xis og Error : ost connection to dual-a is log sensor. 11 ind Sensor Error : ost connection to wind sensor. a i atio e or . 14 Position E Error : ost connection to position sensor number . 22 Radar s stem Error : Displayed if radar number 2 reports internal failure. 1 Position E Error : ost connection to position sensor number 5. As a conse uence the system loses Tracked Targets and speed/course available from radar. 35 Radar Comm.. 35 Radar Comm. 35 Radar Comm. 21 Radar s stem Error : Displayed if radar number 1 reports internal failure. which is an interface to various navigation sensors. which could be an interface to various navigation sensors. Place the cursor on an arrow tab and click it until the Targets page appears.001 for S57 charts. 2. Click an arrow tab in the Chart Display dialog box until the Targets page appears. 2. Select desired Tracked symbol size from the Tracked Tgt Size list box. Small TT symbol STD TT symbol . Select desired color for TT symbol from the Color list box. Spin the scrollwheel to display Symbol Display/Info in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. An alert “642 TT storage 95% full” will be given when 95 tracked targets are on display.500. OFF). AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1.000.i i Tracked targets may also be displayed on the ECDIS display. 4.001 for ARCS charts. 6. do the following: 1. if it is not already displayed. This allows display of AIS and tracked targets on top of the largest scale ocean charts (original scale 1:3. 5.000) when they are zoomed to overscale. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to display Symbol Display/Info in the mouse functions area. Put the cursor on the text TT in the information area then left-click to select one of the options (AUTO MAN. To do this. An alert “643 TT storage 100% full” will be given when 100 tracked targets or more are on display. Push the left mouse button.900. Note 1: Maximum number of Tracked Targets on ECDIS display is 100. Targets which are being tracked by radar can also be displayed on the ECDIS screen. Note 2: AIS and tracked targets viewing limitations are as below. x x AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1. 3. 1. Put the cursor on the CPA distance value and use the scrollwheel to set distance for CPA. thus a radar may show a target as dangerous while ECDIS shows it as safe and vice versa. 3.ar et rac in unctions A dangerous tracked target is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in red color. Put the cursor on the text "CPA OFF" then left-click to get distance and time fields. Put the cursor on the TCPA time value and use the scrollwheel to set time for CPA. Put the cursor on the text CPA then right-click to show the Target alerts dialog box. The ECDIS has its own definition for dangerous target limits. i 1. 2. i i i You can enable or disable the danger alarm (buzzer) for dangerous tracked targets as follows: 1. Check Danger alarm in the TT window to get the audio alarm for dangerous tracked targets. 2. i i You can set the CPA and TCPA limits used by the ECDIS in the information area. . for lost tracked targets in the TT window. Put the cursor on the text "Lost TGT alarm" then right-click to open the CPA auto activate dialog box. . The FILT option lets you set additional conditions for lost tracked targets. See the dialog box below. ship speed). Set desired additional conditions (Max range and Min.ar et rac in unctions A lost tracked radar target is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in green and dark yellow alternately. FILT or ALL (whichever is shown) in the Lost TGT alarm line. i i i Put the cursor on the text OFF. spin the scrollwheel and left click to confirm selection. this depends on selected display scale and target’s speed. T Vect(G) or True vector stabilised to Sea. All presentation modes can be used with relative motion or true motion.ar et rac in unctions i i i Targets vector can be displayed relative to own ship's heading R Vect or with reference to the North (true vector stabilised to Ground. T Vect(S)). Note. spin the scrollwheel to select setting then push the scrollwheel. . Ticks are removed automatically on display if they are too tightly spaced. that tick marks of speed vectors are controlled on target Page of Display (Velocity Vector ON/OFF). Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set on the information area Place the cursor on the item you wish to change. See the figure below for location of vector-related items. A radar has its own setting for dangerous targets and thus a target which is dangerous on the radar display can be safe on ECDIS and vice versa. Tracking or Lost. x Status of target. when using True Vectors (S) or COG and SOG when using other speed vector modes. it is shown as a dangerous TT on the ECDIS display. Lon) User can set Closest Point of Approach (CPA). Note that the CPA and TCPA limits are only for ECDIS. If a TT is within the CPA. “Query” indicates a new target for which there is not yet enough tracking history to have target speed. On the ECDIS display. CPA and TCPA limits are common for ECDIS display and danger target log function of TT and AIS targets. Note that if TCPA has a negative value. Status can be Query. and Time for CPA (TCPA) to define dangerous TT. Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT) The detailed target display dialog for a TT displays the contents of the basic TT display plus the following information. put the cursor on a desired tracked target then push the scrollwheel. push the left mouse button. x Position of target (Lat. a dangerous tracked target blinks in red color. TT on ECDIS screen TT display window Expanded TT display The basic target display dialog for a tracked target consists of the following information: x x x x x Target’s number Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship Speed Through Water (STW) and true course (CRS) of the target. SINGLE .ar et rac in unctions i i i i On the ECDIS display. CPA and TCPA. To display detailed information. course. this means that you have already passed the closest point and the tracked target is going away from own ship. CPA and TCPA available. . put the cursor on Radar in the status bar to show the Radar selections dialog box. Put the cursor on "tracked target source" number. To change the source of radar targets. spin the scrollwheel to select desired source then push the scrollwheel. The reason for automatic change is that the communication with current source is in failure state. i The alert "355 Radar comm error" indicates failure to receive data from connected radars. To find the source of tracked targets. put the cursor on Radar in the status bar.ar et rac in unctions Tracked targets on ECDIS can be monitored from one source at the time. The alert "371 Source Radar changed" informs that the system has automatically changed the source of radar targets from current source to a new source. Spin the scrollwheel to display Symbol Display/Info in the mouse functions area. keep the cursor on the time indication and right-click to open the Symbol Settings dialog. at the locations circled in the illustration below. Select Density (Sparse. Put the cursor on the time value and spin the scrollwheel to set value. . Put the cursor on the text "PASTPOSN OFF" then left-click to show the time options. Dense) to define density of points and Style to define points style (Points. (in minutes). 1. Points and dots).ar et rac in unctions i i ii Past Positions (or the length of trace) and presentation mode can be set on the information area. To modify the style of Target Past positions. 2. 4. Medium. 3. Click an arrow tab in the dialog box until the Tracking page appears. Left-click to set the length for the track. see section 24.3 "Dangerous targets log".3.ar et rac in unctions i i Target recording is used to record tracked target information to the danger targets log. . For more information about recording a dangerous target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. When you acknowledged of lost target alert. ECDIS can display AIS targets which are within the operator-defined range (max.14 kn Class B: SOTDMA speed between 14 . CPA. moored. bearing. The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets.23 kn Class B: SOTDMA speed greater than 23 kn Class A and Class B: no speed available ATON SAR Base station SART . The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets. Type of Ship IMO nominal reporting interval 10 s 6s 2s 3 min 10 s 3 min 30 s 3 min 30 s 15 s 5s N/A 3 min 10 s 10 s N/A Lost target indication (reporting interval >) 50 s 30 s 10 s 10 min 50 s 10 min 150 s 10 min 150 s 75 s 25 s 10 min 10 min 50 s 50 s 18 min Pre-set rate for automatic removal of lost target 430 s 430 s 430 s 36 min 36 min 36 min 430 s 36 min 430 s 430 s 430 s 36 min 30 min 430 s 430 s 30 min Class A: speed between 0-14 kn Class A: speed between 14 .23 kn Class A: speed greater than 23 kn Class A: anchored.i i An AIS transponder can be connected to the ECDIS to display AIS targets received from the AIS transponder. The ECDIS can store up to 1. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range. AIS symbol will be removed on ECDIS display. The maximum number of targets which can be displayed is 240 and the operator may select the number of targets to display. Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading. moored. etc. Based on the table below. If lost target is not acknowledged. automatic removal of AIS symbol is done as shown table below. which is based on reported Speed Over Ground (SOG).3 Displaying AIS Targets". When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets.500 AIS targets in its storage buffer. speed greater than 3 kn Class B: CS speed between 0 – 2 kn Class B: CS speed greater than 2 kn Class B: SOTDMA speed between 0 – 2 kn Class B: SOTDMA speed between 2 . the ECDIS defines which AIS targets are in tracking or lost. not under control or grounded. the Alert 639 is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. see chapter "21. not under control or grounded. speed between 0-3 kn Class A: anchored. range is 48 nm). TCPA. For more information. Course Over Ground (COG). Only active AIS targets generate alerts.IS ar et unctions An AIS transponder “sees” all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging either x x Class A AIS Class B AIS Additionally the AIS transponder receives messages other than ships: x x x AIS Base station AIS on airborne SAR craft AIS on ATON (AIS aid to navigation) There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets. ECDIS generates AIS-related alerts and these are "Alert 632: Dangerous AIS target" and "Alert 633: Lost AIS target". the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. The feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets which need supervision. . Further. Initially any new AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not-active (="sleeping"). the alert “636 AIS display 95% full” appears. An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. and of those only a few will be significant for your ship. the operator can pick active AIS targets and change their status to non-active. The ECDIS further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing non-active targets to active targets. the alert “637 AIS display 100% full” appears. User can pick any AIS target and change it from non-active to active. The operator can enable or disable AIS target alerts as desired. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector. headline. When 95% of user set limit is reached for displayed AIS targets. The alert “638 AIS storage 95% full” will be given when 95 percent of 1500 targets are in storage buffer and the alert “639 AIS storage 100% full” will be given when 1500 targets or more are in storage buffer. When user set limit is reached. if they meet the dangerous target limits set by CPA and TCPA. An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the ECDIS display. etc. Such nonactive targets are shown with a small triangle. rot indicator. Active AIS target Selected AIS target turning to port AIS target turning starboard.IS ar et unctions Below you can find symbols used for AIS in different status: Sleeping AIS target AIS dangerous target blinking red until acknowledged. ROT is measured by ROT gyro ATON symbol Lost AIS target. red X-sign blinking above AIS symbol until acknowledged . then it is displayed as red symbol. SART and Base Station. To do this.1. TCPA or RANGE) then push the scrollwheel or the left button. number of AIS target on display is user defined.3. spin the scrollwheel to select the filtering method desired (CPA. 3. An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. . Maximum range of AIS target from own ship on ECDIS display is 48 NM. For more information. Set of “Length min” does not filter ATON.3. When 95% of user set limit is reached for displayed AIS targets. DISP ALL). the alert “636 AIS display 95% full” appears. 2. The alert “638 AIS storage 95% full” will be given when 95 percent of 1500 targets are in storage buffer and the alert “639 AIS storage 100% full” will be given when 1500 targets or more are in storage buffer.3. then max. Select maximum number and maximum range of AIS symbols on display Select "Priority". see chapter “21. When user set limit is reached. For more information. For more information. then “Priority” selection is used to select AIS target on ECDIS display. then max. Check desired categories of AIS targets to be displayed in "AIS filter" field. Filtering AIS targets”.IS ar et unctions i i Targets which are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the ECDIS display. Filtering AIS targets”. see chapter “21. see chapter “21. Number of AIS targets on display can be limited by filtering AIS targets (option DISP FIL). Note that set of “Speed min” does not filter ATON and Base station. 4. range of AIS target is user defined. Range of AIS target can be limited by Filtering AIS targets (option DISP FIL). Set min speed and length for displayed AIS target. Maximum number of AIS target on ECDIS display is 240. Note.1. SAR Aircraft. Filtering AIS targets”. If number of AIS target on ECDIS display will exceed the limit. i i Right-click the AIS setting indication in the information area to show the AIS filter page. the alert “637 AIS display 100% full” appears. Examples of how the AIS filter works are shown in the illustrations on the next few pages. An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. shown below. DISP FIL.1. Put the cursor on the text AIS in the information area then push the left mouse button to select an option (DISP OFF. 1. 900.001 for S57 charts. Filtered by TCPA Filtered by Range Filtered by CPA Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows: x x AIS and tracked target are displayed on top of chart 1:1.000.IS ar et unctions Below are examples of how targets are filtered using various filtering methods.500. . The left illustration shows the cal signs of targets and the right illustration shows the names of targets.000) when they are zoomed to "overscale". This allows display of AIS and tracked target on top of the largest scale ocean charts (original scale 1:3.001 for ARCS charts. AIS and tracked target are displayed on top of chart 1:1. IS ar et unctions The right illustration shows AIS targets with "Outlines" and the left illustration shows AIS targets with "point symbols". AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>7.5 mm) on the Tracking page in the Symbol Display dialog box and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of the true scale symbol is larger than 6 mm on the chart display. . . 3. Then the target symbol is displayed in red color. disabling audio alert for dangerous AIS targets" below. in the information area. Check or uncheck Danger alarm in the AIS window as appropriate. A dangerous AIS target is displayed as a blinking target symbol in red as long as you acknowledge the "AIS dangerous target" alert. You can enable or disable the audio alert for dangerous targets. i 1. i i You can enable or disable the danger alarm (buzzer) for dangerous AIS targets as follows: Set the cursor on the text "CPA" then right-click to get the Target alerts dialog box. Put the cursor on the text "CPA OFF" then left-click to get the distance and time fields. See "Enabling. i 1. Put the cursor on the time value and use the scrollwheel to set time for CPA. i i You can set CPA and TCPA limits used by the ECDIS. Put the cursor on the distance value and use the scrollwheel to set distance for CPA.IS ar et unctions i i i A dangerous AIS target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set in the information area. Target alerts 2. 2. ALL). FILT. Put the cursor on the text "CPA auto act." then rightclick to open the CPA auto activate dialog box. For FILT. x x x OFF activates no AIS targets inside the CPA limit ALL activates all AIS targets inside the CPA limit FILT activates the AIS targets inside CPA limit that meet conditions set for CPA auto activate. you can set additional conditions for AIS target. Select the setting for CPA auto activation as follows 1.IS ar et unctions i i i You can get automatic activation of a sleeping AIS target when it is within the set CPA limit. 3. 2." then left-click to select desired option (OFF. The options are OFF. Put the cursor on the text "CPA auto act. FILT or ALL. Set desired additional conditions for auto activation of AIS target (sleeping target->active target) . Introduction” . AIS symbol will be removed from display. If alert “633: Lost AIS target" is not acknowledged in certain time of period. ship length). ship speed." then right-click to open the CPA auto activate dialog box. 2. FILT. Put the cursor on the text "Lost target alert. i 1. ALL). When alert “633: Lost AIS target" is acknowledged. For more information about lost target reporting interval and pre-set rate for automatic removal of lost target can be found in table in chapter “21. Exclude class B and Min. you can set additional conditions for lost AIS target.1. Set desired additional conditions for lost AIS target in AIS field (Max range. lost AIS target symbol will be automatically removed from display. . Min. i i i Put the cursor on the text "Lost target alarm" then left-click to select desired option (OFF.IS ar et unctions A lost AIS target is indicated with an X through the AIS target symbol. For FILT. ground stabilized relative to own ship. Ticks are removed automatically on display if they are too tightly spaced. when user set limit is reached. at the locations circled in the illustration below. RVECT. true ground stabilized or TVECT (S). true sea stabilized. The alert “737 AIS receive error” warns that data from an AIS transponder is not correctly received.IS ar et unctions i i i AIS target’s relative vector is displayed relative to your ship's velocity vector. which means that the own ship velocity vector disappears and the target vectors are the result of target and own ship course and speed. The alert “637 AIS display 100% full” appears. The alert “638 AIS storage 95% full” will be given when 95 percent of 1500 targets are in storage buffer The alert “639 AIS storage 100% full” will be given when 1500 targets or more are in storage buffer. that tick marks of speed vectors are controlled on target Page of Display (Velocity Vector ON/OFF). Vector time (or the length of vectors) and mode can be set on the status bar. this depends on selected display scale and target’s speed. The alert “636 AIS display 95% full” appears. Note. AIS target overflow . True speed vector modes are TVECT (G). when 95% of user set limit reached. Bow Closest Time LAT and LON of the target . The AIS Target Dialog window appears. AIS target on ECDIS display AIS target dialog window The Target Dialog window displays the following information for an AIS target: AIS Target Name or Call Sign SOG: Speed over Ground of the target STW: Speed Through Water (when using TVect (S) mode) BRG: True bearing from own ship RNG: Distance from own ship COG: Course over Ground of the target CRS: True Course (when using TVect (S) mode) HDG: heading Status of target: indicates target status ROT: Rate of turn CPA and TCPA BCR. similar to the one shown below. BCT: Bow Closest Range.IS ar et unctions i i Place the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the scrollwheel. IS ar et unctions If more detailed information is needed. The operator can set Closest Point of Approach (CPA). put the cursor in the Target Dialog window then push the left mouse button to get the Target Details window. in red. The ECDIS display shows a dangerous AIS target with its symbol blinking. then CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are not calculated and not displayed. Note that the same situation occurs with tracked target. . AIS has its own setting for dangerous targets and thus a target which is dangerous on the AIS display can be safe on ECDIS and vice versa. and Time to CPA (TCPA) to define dangerous AIS targets. it is shown as a dangerous AIS target on the ECDIS display. If an AIS target is within the CPA and TCPA settings. Note2: If TCPA has a negative value it means that you have already passed the closest point and the AIS target is going away from your ship. Note: Availability of data in the Target Details window is subject to the content the AIS transponder reports. it is shown as a dangerous AIS target on the ECDIS display. If an AIS target locates within the CPA and TCPA values. CPA and TCPA limits are common for ECDIS display and danger target log function of TT and AIS targets. Note1: If your ship's position is based on Dead Reckoning. Note that the CPA limit are only for ECDIS. If a target changes its speed. 4. Medium. Put the cursor on the time value and the scrollwheel to set value. Spin the scrollwheel to display Symbol Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Sample past position displays 1. .IS ar et unctions i i ii The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets. 3. at the locations circled in the illustration below. To modify style of Target Past positions. put the cursor over the time indication and right-click to open the Display Settings dialog. If it changes course. Points and dots) to set point configuration. Click an arrow tab in the dialog box until the Tracking page appears. Past Positions (or the length of trace) and presentation mode can be set on the information area. Select Density (Sparse. Put the cursor on the text "PASTPOSN OFF then left-click to get the time field. Set the length of track (in minutes). Dense) to define density of points and Style (Points. 2. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached. the spacing will be uneven. its plotted course will not be a straight line. . 1. Use left button to get “<” sign to select AIS symbol for priority for AIS target. push left button once more to get “>” sign to select priority for TT symbol target. Show TGT Call Sign from the Target menu to display name and call sign alternately or without any label. This is useful when you have both TT and AIS showing symbol about the same target. i i i You can select whether TT or AIS has priority to display target data. Place the cursor in the upper left corner of the Target Dialog window then select No Label. See the figure below for how the data display changes when changing from call signs to names and vice versa.IS ar et unctions i i i You can display either the name or call sign of AIS targets on the ECDIS display. Move cursor location shown below. Show TGT Name. IS ar et unctions i x i You can verify the status of the AIS interface on the Other page in the Sensors dialog box. Received Data: Whether data from AIS transponder is correctly received or not (Status: OK or Error). x x . Storage: Whether maximum number of AIS targets for storage has been exceeded or not (Status: OK or Overflow). The lower part of this page is reserved for AIS interface monitoring. Display: Whether maximum number of AIS targets set for display on the ECDIS has been exceeded within the defined maximum range or not (Status: OK or Overflow). IS ar et unctions i You may send and receive messages via the VHF link. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. AIS target related information is displayed in this field. Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. Select how to send a safety message. . Each message has an individual name based on time of creation or time of receiving of message. Display date and time when message is sent. Original message name is displayed here if selected safety message is reply for received message. an iceberg sighted. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS. Select message format. Specify channel for transmitting. which is where all phases of AIS safety messages are initiated. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation. Display status of selected safety message. do the following: 1. SAFETY MESSAGE The Safety Message dialog box contains the following items: Filter: Name: Status: Send: Org: Vessel: Address: Msg Type: Channel: Select category of messages to show in the Safety Message menu. to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships in the area. Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Routine messages are also permitted. for example. To open the Safety message dialog box. 2. Place the cursor in the Address box. select channel over which to broadcast your message. 5. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. Use the Msg Type box to select message type. At the Channel box. 3. To send to a specific vessel. Binary Message for routine message. 7. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the submenu. Select Create Message from the menu and push the scrollwheel. Four choices are available. The Safety message dialog box appears. . in the MMSI input box. Spin the scrollwheel to select Addressed to or Broadcast to All as appropriate then push the scrollwheel. This can be done as follows: 1. 4. enter MMSI of ship. Check Enable changes. 6. Select Broadcast to All to send to all nearby AIS transponder-equipped ships. Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Safety Message for safety message.IS ar et unctions i You can create a safety message on the ECDIS for transmission by the AIS transponder. 2. 8. To get vessel information. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. Safety message broadcast: Binary message broadcast: Safety message addressed to MMSI: Binary message addressed to MMSI: 161 characters 156 characters 156 characters 151 characters 10. If message is sent successfully. call sign and ship name of the target. Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel. proceed as follows: 1. 4. i i You can find vessel information for an addressed safety message. To send the message. put the cursor on the triangle to show the sub menu.IS ar et unctions 9. 2. the status is changed from Unsent to Sent. To send a message to the vessel. Place the cursor on a desired AIS target on the ECDIS chart then push the scrollwheel to get MMSI number. Enter the text of your message in the box below Channel. select Send Message then push the scrollwheel. Call sign and MMSI of the vessel selected are shown in the Vessel field in the Safety Message dialog box. select Addressed from the Address box then set other items as appropriate. The number of characters that may be entered depends on message type. . referring to the procedure on the preceding page. 3. This is useful when you want to send a Safety message to a specific vessel. 2. 4. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.IS ar et unctions i i When a message is received by AIS. The Safety Message dialog box shows the message received by the AIS transponder. do the following: 1. 3. To read the message. it is indicated on the ECDIS with the alert "604 AIS message received". Check Enable changes. SAFETY MESSAGE . Place the cursor on the triangle to open the sub menu. In the Filter field.IS ar et unctions i To reply to a safety message. Enter your reply in the text window. Select Send Message then push the scrollwheel. select Received from the upper box and the message to reply to from the lower box. 5. 4. . 6. proceed as follows: 1.2. SAFETY MESSAGE 2. Select Message Type and Channel as appropriate referring to section 21. 3. Display the Safety Message dialog box then check Enable changes.7. This information contains voyage related data and ship related data. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. Messages used in communications are VDO. . If you need to change any information.IS ar et unctions i Own ship information sent by the AIS transponder can be modified in ECDIS. do following: 1. Select AIS Own Ship Info from the menu then push the scrollwheel to show the AIS Own Ship Info dialog box. message types are 1-3 and 5 Class B target. In VDO message following message types are used: ƒ ƒ Class A target. check the "Enable changes" box then modify desired field. To view or modify own ship information. 2. 3. Note: Messages transferred between ECDIS and AIS are following specification in standard IEC-61162. SSD and VSD. message types are 19 or 24 Note: This function requires an AIS transponder. consisting of the pages "Voyage" and "Own Ship". .IS ar et unctions This page intentionally left blank. To display NAVTEX message: 1.i NAVTEX (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency direct-printing service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts. . Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the Main menu. Typically such coordinates show the point or area of interest for the Navtex message. as well as urgent marine safety information to ships. i i When NAVTEX message is received in ECDIS an alert "798 NAVTEX message received" appears. In the Filter field. Note: Lat/Lon field is a list of lat/lon coordinates found from Navtex message using artifical intelligence. 2. NAVTEX messages can be read and written in ECDIS. Select NAVTEX Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 3. select Unread. .a te essa es This page intentionally left blank. 50 nm . the scale of the radar overlay is automatically changed.000 is almost equal to traditional radar range of 1. The "ECDIS and radar" mode operates using rules for the type-approved ECDIS to visualize the radar echo image. This mode should only be used temporarily because legally the equipment is not an ECDIS that can legally replace paper chart when operating with "Radar over chart".75 nm Chart scale 1:20. because the equipment is not an ECDIS that can legally replace paper chart when operating with the "radar video only" mode. The "radar over chart" mode draws radar echo image on top of the chart. Radar overlay video can be received by two methods by ECDIS: 1. The "ECDIS only" mode operates without the radar echo image. Selected scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. The rule of thumb for range of displayed area: x x Chart scale 1:10. if the mariner is unable to achieve exact match. Through Radar overlay card fitted in the ECDIS Through LAN from FAR-2x07 Radars. The "radar video only" mode should only be used temporarily to check radar echo presentation. then the mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation that his navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and accurately. 2. However.000 is almost equal to traditional radar range of 0.i The radar overlay is optionally available. The maximum range of the radar overlay is 24 nautical miles. This ECDIS can use radar echo image in several operator selectable modes. This means that the radar echo image can be output from the radar unit and shown on the ECDIS chart display. Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an essential security feature. it is a very strong indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what he sees. When you change the chart scale. which are capable to send radar video to LAN This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the chart and radar echo image. If the radar echo image and the chart display match. the radar overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display You can select how to display the radar overlay with the Radar selector on the status bar. To activate the radar overlay. .a ar er ay i i Radar overlay can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on Vector charts (S57). do the following: Place the cursor on Mode selection (location shown above) and spin wheel to select “ECDIS and Radar”. “Radar over Chart” or “Radar video only” in the status bar then push the left mouse button. Radar overlay source indicates source radar overlay. In the example display below the source is MAST X. i i If there is more than one Radar video source available and connected to ECDIS.a ar er ay i Place the cursor on Radar in the status bar. and the Radar Selection window appears. you can change the radar overlay source by clicking Radar Overlay source then spin the scrollwheel to select a source. Selected source is displayed on Radar Overlay dialog box and on upper status bar: (In case of LAN Radar Overlay) . If there are more than one radar video source available. you can use external switch to select desired source of Radar video overlay. a ar er ay i You can select from the following presentation modes with the radar overlay: ECDIS only: Only chart is displayed on the ECDIS. ECDIS and radar presentation Radar video only: Radar over chart presentation Only radar echo image is drawn on the ECDIS display. Radar over chart: Radar echo image is drawn on top of the chart. the radar image is drawn on top of the chart. ECDIS and radar: With S57 chart material. If you use the ARCS chart material. . the radar echo image is mixed into the chart so that some chart features lie above or beneath the radar image. This presentation follows the drawing rules of the Standard S52ed3.1 of IHO. check and readjust the gain because these two controls affect one another. sea clutter and rain clutter are independent from the same controls of any radar display. indicating no heading signal. and echo average. "Noise" is automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images.a ar er ay i i The Radar Overlay dialog box has controls for adjustment of the radar image . "Noise" is automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images. Note 2: Gain. The sea clutter control removes sea clutter from the radar echo image. sea clutter. Note 1: Sea clutter and rain clutter controls are not available in Radar Overlay dialog box if radar video is received through LAN from FAR-2x07 radars. When you adjust the sea clutter. check and readjust the sea clutter because these two controls affect one another. Sea clutter and rain clutter are controlled on the TT display that controls the transmitter. In the right-hand figure the indication "No Headline" is displayed. Note: After adjusting the gain. trigger or azimuth signal from the radar transceiver. i Gain control is used to set the sensitivity of the radar echo image. it is indicated in the Radar Overly dialog box. echo stretch. When you adjust the gain. Note: After adjusting the sea clutter. . rain clutter.gain. Note 3: If the ECDIS fails to receive heading. their optimum position may be different from those on the radar display. Therefore. interference rejector. use control of sea clutter on radar. If you have radar overlay video through LAN from FAR-2x07 radar. (for LAN Radar Overlay) (for Radar Overlay Card) Indicates source of current radar overlay. EAV3 and OFF. The choices are EAV1. so as not to miss weak targets.a ar er ay i The rain clutter control removes rain clutter from the radar echo image. Echo average: You can turn echo averaging on or off. . Three options are available: OFF. use control of rain clutter on radar. Scan-to-scan correlation averages echoes over successive picture frames to distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter. Select OFF when no noise exists. Select LOW or HIGH according to amount of noise. EAV3: Stably displays distant target. "Noise" is automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images. Noise: Radar echoes can be displayed with gradation of green color. IR1 and IR2. EAV2: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys. EAV1: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppress brilliance of unstable echoes. If you have radar overlay video through LAN from FAR-2x07 radar. "ES1" emphasise both noise and target level echoes while "ES2" emphasizes only target level echoes. Select suitable level to reduce interference from other radars. i i i Interference rejector: The interference rejector suppresses mutual radar interference that may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar operating in the same frequency band. Select OFF when no noise exists. Echo stretch: Echo stretch emphasizes radar echo to increase detectability of targets. Echo stretch ES2 Echo stretch OFF Clear: Removes noise from the screen. When you adjust the rain clutter. EAV2. If this occurs. lower the gain (from the keyboard or the GAIN dialog box) to erase the Overload indication. the warning "Overload" appears in red on the status bar. .a ar er ay ii When the number of targets on the screen exceeds the capacity of the CPU. If the overload condition continues. The gain is temporarily lowered automatically then gradually raised. the above-mentioned process is repeated. so as not to conceal landmasses. interference rejector.23. and "75%" displays radar echoes very faintly. Adjust controls (gain. b) Adjust the Gain control to properly set the gain.7 Transparency Transparency controls "see through" behavior of the radar overlay. sea clutter. rain clutter. When the overload condition occurs. etc) on the radar to obtain proper radar image. on the radar.4. adjust the gain on the radar to obtain proper picture. do the following: a) Set IR to IR1. 23. On the radar overlay dialog box. Note: The condition of the radar echo changes with adjustment of range. do the following: 3. "25%" displays radar echoes somewhat faintly. The option "Opaque" superimposes radar echoes on the chart display without modifying their color. Radar Overlay When the overload condition occurs. It is recommended to use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels. etc. Adjust Gain.5 Operational Differences Between ECDIS only Mode and Modes with Radar Overlay There are some operational differences between ECDIS only mode and modes with Radar Overlay. 23. x x Scale indication in nautical miles when using Radar Overlay Scale maximum with Radar Overlay video is 24 NM 23-8 . IR1 LOW Set IR to IR1. 4. 3. 2. radar overlay range offset.a ar er ay i i i i ii There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match exactly. position receiver antenna offset. The example below shows how different gyro value set at radar display and at ECDIS affect the display of the ECDIS. 4. 3. Therefore. Gyro Inaccurate chart Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset) Inaccurate position Position offset Inaccurate chart Wrong datum Datum offset with ARCS material Improper installation parameters (conning position offset. 2. i There are several reasons why the radar echo image and tracked target symbols do not match exactly. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset. The radar echo is a reflection from the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the radar echo. 1. radar overlay range offset. Different gyro value at radar and ECDIS Equal gyro value at radar and ECDIS . Bearing error sources: 1. the radar echo should start from the chart feature and existed as far as the radar pulse length goes. 5. The mismatch is a combination of several reasons and removing one reason doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. 2. 6. datum selected for position receiver) Position error sources i 1. There is a fundamental difference between the radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. Different gyro value at radar display and at ECDIS. conning position offset). . i There are two ways to compensate for gyro-induced bearing error: 2) Table-based gyro speed/latitude correction (Note that the ECDIS's built-in correction facility doesn't correct dynamic error. Manual gyro correction in use (right-hand figure) x TT and radar overlay match perfectly. i i i ii i It is very important that output co-ordinates of a position device is the same as the ECDIS expects to receive. otherwise you may get incorrect position in the ECDIS. i i i ii i ii See section 19. x Chart features and radar overlay have some mismatch. Verify in position device configurations that output of coordinates is WGS-84 and also check in the installation parameters of the ECIDS that it is set to receive position in WGS-84 datum. x Chart features and radar overlay match perfectly.9. No manual gyro correction (left-hand figure) x TT and radar overlay match perfectly. etc.a ar er ay i 1) Manual x Adjust value of manual gyro correction.) x Turn On Gyro speed/latitude correction in the Ship and Route Parameters dialog box. settling time after course change.1 "Position alignment by means of ECDIS". a ar er ay Alerts generated by Radar Overlay are related to ECDIS workstation where Radar overlay card is located. Alert number 100: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 102: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13 -----------------------------------NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. Alert number 106: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. This means that Radar overlay related alerts on first ECDIS workstation starts with alert number 100 and Radar overlay related alerts on the No. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. Alert number 101: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13 -----------------------------------NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 107: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. CHECK RADAR PROCESSOR. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY. . Alert number 104: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR RADAR OVERLAY.2 ECDIS starts with alert number 200. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON ON RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 103: RADOV NO VIDEO /14 -----------------------------------NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 105: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE. . Alert number 110: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND TT PROCESSOR. Alert number 111: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA FROM RADAR PROCESSOR OVER LAN CONNECTION CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.a ar er ay Alert number 108: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12 -----------------------------------FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. i i i The ECDIS records various voyage-related items like movement and position of your ship and dangerous radar targets (from radar). Spin the scrollwheel to display Event/Info/MOB in the mouse functions area then push the left or right mouse button as appropriate.e. . These events are also recorded into the Voyage log. Right mouse button (MOB): Records MOB position to the logbook. The comment is displayed only in the electronic chart area if Events is selected for display in the Tracking page of the Chart Display dialog box. The operator may print the contents of any log. The EVENT dialog box appears. These items are recorded in the following logs: Voyage log: Details log: Records entire voyage. speed and course once every minute. Chart Usage log: Alert log: Records information of used charts in display. Records alerts generated by the system. i. Danger Targets log: Records tracked target data.. Records position. The ECDIS can display Events and MOB. Left mouse button (Event): Records an event to the logbook. a sailing of a route from first point to the last. i The Events and Man Overboard (MOB) functions are accessed with the mouse. where you can write a comment (up to 48 alphanumeric characters) for an event. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel.ecor in unctions i The details log contains voyage information of the last 12 hours. click the Print Log button. if used. Use First 1000. see section 24. You may print the entire log or a desired part. To change print font size. x x x x x x Date and time Position of your ship as output by selected navigator. Speed over ground and course over ground. put the cursor on the triangle and select desired font size. bearing) values. i i i To open the details log. Select Details Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel.3. do as follows: 1. The following window appears. Otherwise click the Cancel button. 4. Heading. if used. . Gyro correction value. Various information is recorded in the details log once per minute. Note: For how to make a user chart from this log. To print the log. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in log viewer. select Print All from the menu. 2. Prev 1000. 3.8 "Making a user chart from the log (past track)". To print whole log. The system will start viewing program of log. Confirm that you want to open the log by clicking the OK button. Alignment (range. Confirm that you want to open the log by clicking the OK button. Use First 1000. which are recorded into the Voyage log. Otherwise click the Cancel button. Check Enable changes then enter description desired in the text box. Alert Log Alert Queue Spin the me scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Alerts generated by the system. This data is filed in the log as type "MOB". i i To open the voyage log. User is able to define time period. (For example. To print the log. This data is filed in the log as type "Posdev". You may print the entire log or a desired part. put the cursor on the triangle and select desired font size.ecor in unctions The voyage log holds data for the entire voyage. User can define limits for course change and speed change of your ship to be recorded. This data is filed in the log as type "Alert". 3. Select Voyage Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel. . This data is filed in the log as type "Auto". The system will start viewing program of log. once per 4 hours). User is able to select alerts. To print whole log. Standard event. Positions. select Print All from the menu. Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in log viewer. Note 2: For how to make a user chart from this log. how often there is a recording regardless of course or speed changes. Man Over Board event. This data is filed in the log as type "User". do the following: 1. Note 1: You can add a description to a log entry.8 "Making a user chart from the log (past track)".3. To change print font size. This data is filed in the log as type "Ship". see section 24. using the scrollwheel. The following window appears. Prev 1000. recording the following data: x x x x x x Changes of course and speed. click the Print Log button. 2. . a log entry is made. 4. A backup copy of the voyage log can be made. i For how to empty the voyage log.3. in the Alerts window.3. do the following: 1. voyage or danger target log". 2. see Chapter 33 "Alerts". For alert numbers and their meanings. To set them. Select Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 5. click the Voyage tab to open it. See section 24.7 "Resetting (emptying) voyage and danger target logs". see section 24. using the scrollwheel.6 "Making backup copy from details. 3. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Select alerts (alert numbers) to record. If the Voyage page is not already open. When the speed or course changes by the amount set here. Set desired limits for speed and course and also logging interval.ecor in unctions i ii i The operator can define limits for course change and speed change of your ship to be recorded and also time period for automatic logging. A maximum of 6 observations can be entered to obtain a fix.) An example of saving direct position or position calculated by the system FURUNO An example of saving position based on operator observation First you should locate the position of your observation on the ECDIS chart. MFDF is Medium Frequency Direction Finder. Two or more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the ship’s current position. These are: x x x Direct sensor position (GPS. If you are satisfied. .ecor in unctions i ii The operator may manually save positions to the voyage log in various ways. astronomical and MFDF. Select appropriate method from the Device list box. the two separate EBL and VRM available in the Nav Marks dialog box. etc. then click the Record button to save the position observation into the voyage log. The latitude/longitude position of the cursor is then copied to the Lat and Lon fields. Position fixes defined by Line of Position (LOP) A plotted line on which a vessel is located. Record tab as one of the Position Sources. it is an “estimated position” (EP). Line of Position (LOP) can be found in the Sensors dialog. Open the Sensors dialog box then click the Record tab. Use. If the position is based on only two observations. Loran. determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. In case a User Observation is selected.) Positions calculated by the system (in example below such are Kalman filter and Dead reckoning) User observations. otherwise it is called a fix. for example. put the cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display then press the left mouse button. (Visual. If you wish you can also enter Lat and Lon values manually. and a second observation may be entered. Time transfer If the observations are not simultaneous. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected (or when Add button is clicked). they should be transferred to a common time.). x One minute after the latest measurement it is labeled as a “DR” (dead reckoned position) x Computed position times out in 5 minutes after the latest measurement. If the estimate is valid. The added observations can be edited or deleted after selecting them in the counter. The position estimate and the record function follow the same logic. which means that Transfer off shows a position that has no relevance and Transfer to latest sends an old position to the voyage log (timestamp in the log does not match the position). after which it disappears without any notice to the user. When at least two measurements are entered. In the case of an EP. • ARCS: click anywhere in the chart. Timeouts The observations cannot be used long after they were made because dead reckoning is inaccurate. x An observation times out in 10 minutes. If dead reckoning is active. or if two lines are nearly parallel or don’t intersect at all. light. and a position symbol appears on the chart. for example. a message is displayed under the coordinates. If a valid position estimate cannot be obtained. Discrepancy between LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may be viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart – which is displayed if position event display is on in chart display settings). and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the chart. This may happen. the letters TPL are shown beside its timestamp on the chart. Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship’s current position information.0 NM. Click Add button to include the observation in the fix computation. the letters EP are shown on the right side of the coordinates. the EP or fix is computed and the coordinates are shown in the top part of the dialog. Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes. Transfer to latest transfers the measurements as if they were all made at the time of the newest measurement. Continuous transfer transfers all measurements to real time. .ecor in Basic operation: unctions Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog boxes or they can be selected graphically on the chart: • S57: click on a charted object (beacon. The accuracy limit (estimated standard error) is 1. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of the dialog. buoy etc. The word “new” indicates that the observation currently displayed is not yet included in the fix computation. Transfer off can be used to check where the measurement origins are. if the lines / circles have multiple crossings that are far apart. Transfering is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a position line (or ring) is transferred. the button Use for DR is visible and clicking it will make the LOP position a new starting point for DR. the Record button can be clicked to record the current position estimate in the voyage log. The counter shows “new/1”. CPA and TCPA of both AIS and tracked targets Position (Lat. select Print All from the menu. Lon). click the Print Log button. index of target (number of tracked target on radar or IMO MMSI number from AIS transponder). Note: For how to make a user chart from this log. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. 4. To print the log. Otherwise click the Cancel button. . Heading (Hdg) information of AIS target. see section 24. The following window appears. speed (Spd) and course (Crs) of both AIS and tracked targets. Prev 1000.ecor in unctions The danger targets log stores information about targets which are received from a tracked target and/or targets which are received from an AIS transponder (AIS targets). i i To open the Danger Target log.8 "Making a user chart from the log (past track)". Confirm that you want to open the log by clicking the OK button. Select Danger Target Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in log viewer. The system will start viewing program of log. To print whole log. do the following: 1. put the cursor on the triangle and select desired font size. To change print font size. Use First 1000. information of all tracked targets (including nondangerous targets) are recorded into the danger targets log. You may print the entire log or a desired part. If a tracked target or AIS target is within the set CPA and TCPA.3. 2. This data is as follows: x x x x Date and time. 3. TCPA and log interval. 3.8 "Making a user chart from the log (past track)". If an tracked target is inside the CPA and TCPA. a radar has its own setting for dangerous targets and thus a target which is dangerous at an tracked target display can be safe on the ECDIS and vice versa. Time to CPA (TCPA) and Log interval for viewing dangerous tracked target and AIS targets on the ECDIS display. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Set desired limits for CPA. click the Danger Targets tab to open it. Find number of tracked target or name of AIS target. 2.3. 1. it is shown as a dangerous tracked target on the ECDIS display. Log interval defines time period for logging. Select Settings from the Record menu then open the Danger Targets page. A dangerous tracked target or AIS target is blinking and its color is green and red alternately. Select Record from the menu and Settings from the submenu. i To save past track of selected tracked target or AIS target. User can also alternatively log only information of a single selected tracked target or AIS target. If this option is selected. Note: The operator may select logging of the track of a single AIS and/or tracked target. 3. In the Log Single Target window. remove selection from the boxes in the Log Single Target window. Note that these limits are only for ECDIS. only information of the target(s) selected is recorded. Note: By choosing a single target only the selected target's information is recorded. select tracked target number and/or AIS target name from the tracked target and AIS boxes.ecor in unctions i ii i i i The operator may set Closest Point of Approach (CPA). if he selects in the Log Single Target window the desired number from the tracked target and/or AIS box. by placing the cursor on the target and pushing the scrollwheel. You can make a user chart from the danger target log. If you want to record information of all danger targets. 2. do the following: 1. 4. . For further details see section 24. If the Danger Targets page is not already open. 4. select Record then select appropriate Log item. . The example below shows the Details Log. Voyage or Danger Targets log. A Print dialog box appears. To print a log. click the Print Log button. The following information is recorded in the chart usage log: x x x x x x x x Chart ID Chart edition The latest update included to chart Displayed Updates Until Approved Updates Until Center position of display (Lat. The entire log will be printed. 2. Place the cursor on the triangle to show Log File menu and select Print Log.ecor in unctions The chart usage log stores which charts were displayed on the ECDIS chart display area or which were used for chart alerts. Lon). i Open the Main menu. click the OK button. 3. select Print All from the menu. i i 1. To print whole log. Scale of chart display Details of chart selected for display i i i This procedure is the same if you make User Chart from Details. 2. do the following: 1. Voyage or Danger Targets log) you can select font size for printed version.ecor in unctions i i In each log (Details. 3. Open desired log. . Place the cursor on the triangle on the upper left corner and select Print Font. To change font size. Select desired font size. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. 2. Select desired log and drive for backup copy. 5. Then. 4. . 3.ecor in unctions i i If necessary you can make a backup copy of ECDIS logs onto a floppy disk as follows: 1. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. click the Backup button. The Backup and Restore dialog box appears. Select Backup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel. If necessary. Danger Target) from which you want to make a user chart then push the scrollwheel. 1. Select the log entries which you want to use to create a user chart. voyage and danger target. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 3. Click the OK button to reset the selected log. 2. To reset a log. 2. . Click the OK button to continue. do the following: 1. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel.ecor in unctions i i It may be useful to reset (empty) the voyage and danger targets logs when you are starting a new voyage. 4. Select the log (Details. The system will ask you if you are sure to reset selected log. The past track of the Danger Log target is useful for making a use chart from a single target. Select Reset from the menu then push the scrollwheel. i You may create a user chart from any log among details. 3. Voyage. 4. Select the log to reset from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. 5. make a backup copy before resetting. . Click the Save button. 8. Click the triangle and select "Save as User Chart" to show log. 6. Confirm creating of user chart by clicking the OK button. Elements will be displayed on radar: Check to display the chart on the radar screen. Note: If your selected range for conversion from log to user chart contains periods of invalid your ship's positions. The User Chart Conversion dialog box appears. then the user chart has a gap in the line for these periods.3 NM: Check to have the system filter the selected log so that the minimum distance between points in the user chart is 0.3 nm. 7. This dialog box contains the following fields: User chart name: Enter name for the user chart.ecor in unctions 5. Select points with distance > 0. Open the Record menu following step 1 in the above procedure.ecor in unctions The Alert Log collects and records alarms generated by the system. 2. i i 1. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. The Alert Log appears on the display. 4.ALERT LOG 3. See below for an example.ALERT LOG To open the log. A Print dialog box appears. 2. You may view a list of generated alarms using the Alerts Log. Select Alert Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel. . Select Alert Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel. proceed as follows: 1. Click the Print Text button. TEXT VIEW . TEXT VIEW . click the OK button to print (complete log). Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. This information is available on the Count page of the Sensors dialog box. To reset the distance trip counter. shown right.ecor in unctions i Distance and trip counters have separate fields for both through water and over ground distances. click the Reset trip counter on the Count page. The trip counter can also be reset from the Record menu as shown below. i . . 3. Select Distance Counter from the submenu then push the scrollwheel. Select Reset from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. click the OK button to reset the trip counter. do the following: 1. You are asked if you are sure to reset the distance and trip counters.ecor in unctions i i i To reset the distance and trip counters. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Select Trip Counter from the submenu then push the scrollwheel. Select Reset from the menu then push the scrollwheel. do the following: 1. click the OK button to reset those counter. 2. 4. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. It is useful to reset the distance counter when you are starting a new voyage. 4. 3. Select Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. To reset only the trip counter. You are asked if you are sure to reset the trip counter. 2. : Alarm triggered i i 1. where you start the anchor watch.i Anchor watch checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest. the alert "874: Anchor watch" appears. If your ship drifts more than the distance set. Drop the anchor then click the Drop Anchor button. To activate the anchor watch: 6. If vessel travels more than the distance set here. 4. the alert 874 appears. Select Anchor Watch. 2. 3. 5. Enter desired value in the Drag circle field. Open the main menu. click the Start Anchor Watch button. Alarm setting Your ship's position. . Set the limit for anchor watch on the menu. To start anchor watch. Select Anchor Watch. 3. 2. Click the Stop Anchor Watch button. . Open the main menu.nc or atc i To deactivate the anchor watch: i 1. a transformation has to be made somewhere in the system. The difference between two datums is never constant. Exceptions: x The ARCS (raster) material includes polynomials for each chart. due to differences between electronic sea chart system and the chart material displayed. The correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question. the correction terms are printed in lieu of datum.Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced. However. generally used in paper charts. Datums used in paper charts have been traditionally national datums for historical reasons. therefore compatibility with electronic charts may be complicated. ii i i In early days of electronic positioning devices. making it possible for the ECS system to solve the difference between the WGS-84 datum and the local datum with an accuracy sufficient for authority responsibility. With the spread of the GPS. datums received little attention because the commonly used systems utilised special charts (like Decca charts). data output was added to these systems. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum. i Until now. resulting in displaying a permanent warning window when displayed in ARCS compatible systems. resulting in the respective transfer of the local datum. An accurate position is of no value if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. In some charts. but still no attention was paid to datums and the position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. Later on. is not generally valid with electronic sea charts. x ENC vector material which according to S57 standard has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in the WGS-84 datum. the WGS-84 datum is not a general solution for all positioning systems. however. . for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. datum has become better known. WGS undefi. but depends on position. Not doing so can result in errors of several sea miles. the mentioned difference is not known with sufficient accuracy. In some paper charts. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum. electronic sea charts have generally been based on rasterizing or vectorizing of paper charts. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum. If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different. C Sa se Selecta le ocal atu The ECDIS allows the operator to change viewed datum. Only an E S for e ample S or D S which has IEC 11 2-1 Ed 2 2 -7 indicated in its type approval certificate can support the ECDIS to detect datum mismatch.5 C Sa atu The real ECDIS uses ENC material. ut it changes the numerical values of positions displayed on the ECDIS display into the operator-selected datum. In practice this is impossible. previously NMEA 1 does not include a datum message. IMO re uires that the ECDIS must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the S. Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. This selection of the datum does not change anything inside the ECDIS for navigation calculation processes or for electronic sea chart display processes.. published in uly 2 .datum. the classification societies only approve a positioning device interfaced with the ECDIS in which datum cannot be changed i. is always S.. ositioning devices connected to the ECDIS must work in the S. chor atch 2 . It was introduced in standard IEC 11 2-1 Ed2. 2 -2 . because the standard used by positioning devices IEC 11 2. 2 . This is very useful... especially if you like to plot positions from the ECDIS on a traditional paper chart.e. produced to standards using S. Conse uently.datum. 27. Function keys Operation Parameter backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation Library Acess Server and Diagnostic Close X X X X X X 27- . S A E. To open the Initial Settings menu. a a ete s Setu a a ete s The Initial Settings menu in the Initial Settings dialog bo contains the installation parameters. lace the cursor on the te t SIN E. do the following: 1. 2. navigation parameters and optimi ation parameters which define the configuration of the ECDIS and operative parameters which are either used to control steering and navigation calculation or used during route planning. M TI or MASTER whichever is shown on the lower right corner of the information area. lace the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog bo to show the Initial Settings menu. AN. then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog bo . 27. confirm that Initial Settings appears in the mouse functions area. see "Optimization parameters setting" on page 27-7. i i i Prints navigation parameters to default printer. i i i i Prints optimization parameters to default printer. i i Parameters for your ship and routes. User can make backup copy of parameters. . Use the right mouse button to change time zone and/or time. See Chapter 17 for details. x x Use the left mouse button to display UTC time and local time alternately... For more information about setting navigation parameters. see "Ship and route parameters" on page 27-4. the following conditions must be met: x x x Set time on workstation selected as the sensor source. i The ECDIS system parameters are set by the installation parameters.0) Greenwich Mean T Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Local Time: 07 Jan 2009 08:35 In order to set the time. date and time Time Zone: (0. which is delivered by the manufacturer. For details see the installation manual. Date . Set time zone. Kalman filter should be OFF. Note: Access to the installation parameters requires a key disk. Set Time Zone. Turn off any track steering mode (Goto WPT or Goto Track). For further details. i i i This function is used to define parameters for speed and fuel consumption.ara eters Setu i Place the cursor on the date and time presentation on right-hand side of ECDIS display. 2. . Place the cursor on the datum indication at the upper right corner of the display. If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material. These parameters are concerned with hardware configurations and set-up. all numerical latitude-longitude position values are presented in your selected datum. To select datum do the following: 1. Installation parameters are described in detail in the Installation Manual. See also "ECDIS and Datum" on page 26-2. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate datum then push the scrollwheel. it is recommended that you use the same datum as your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic system and points taken or plotted on your current paper chart. are true only if you have selected native datum of that ARCS chart. These positions. because you use ARCS together with matching official paper chart and because you have selected as datum the datum of your matching official paper chart. They need only be set during installation and if sensor configuration changes. rasterized charts contain some rasterized position information. Normally this is the natural situation. Once you have selected a datum. Note: If you use ARCS raster chart material.ara eters Setu i i i The installation parameters command is used to set installation parameters for the system. like scales in the edges of ARCS charts. It is essential that you use Datum in a consistent way. i Datum is used to select between different models of the earth. Start limit: Set the maximum approach angle against planned course in order to accept start of automatic route steering.: enter value for manual gyro correction.ara eters Setu i i i The purpose of navigation parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship. draught of ship.: enter max. WPT approach: Set the alert time before approaching the wheel over point. auto. It should be well in advance of the WPT approach alert time. Select Navigation parameters then push the scrollwheel. line RAD: Used to define the default value of radius between waypoints during automatic route steering. GYRO error: Enables/disables the gyro error compensation of set course during automatic route steering. 2. 3. Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters’ importance. MAX height: Max. Turn end tol: This defines the window for the detection of the end of turn.: Select On or Off MAX CORR. value for correction MAN CORR. Drift compensation. MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower right corner. MAX ROT: Indicates the maximum rate of turn of the ship. WPT prewarn: Set the alert time before approaching the wheel over point. SLAVE. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE. PLAN. When using FURUNO FAP-2000 or YOKOGAWA PT-500A When using TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 . Def. do the following: 1. Select Ship and Route parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel. then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box. SPD/LAT CORR. i MAX speed: Maximum speed the ship can do. These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system.: Enables/disables the drift compensation during automatic route steering. In order to edit Ship and Route parameters. They must be maintained carefully. height of ship above sea level. Typical values are between 2 to 4 degrees. MAX draught: Max. manual or off. GYRO correction: Source: Select method of gyro error correction. if the turn goes "long" or is too "sharp". select Navigation parameters then push the scrollwheel. then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box. In order to edit forwarding distances parameters. using the curved EBL. Normally these parameters are entered during sea trial but can also be modified later on. 3. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE. The parameter should also be verified with a different radius. How to set Forwarding distances for FAP-2000 You can define set of Forwarding Distances both for "Go To Track" and "Go To WPT" steering modes. You can define set of Forwarding Distances both for "Go To Track" and "Go To WPT" steering modes. Check "Enable changes" to modify desired set of Forwarding Distances. MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower right corner. SLAVE. PLAN. 4. How to set forwarding distances for Autopilot PT-500A In order to edit forwarding distances parameters. and verify from the radar. Select Forwarding distance then push the scrollwheel. (Most important radius values are between 0. do the following: 1. .3 to 1. 2. do the following: 1. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial settings dialog box. Check Enable changes to modify desired set of Forwarding Distances. 4. MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower right corner. select Navigation parameters then push the scrollwheel. Select Forwarding distance then push the scrollwheel. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE.0 nm). See the next page. then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box. 3. with a SMALL RADIUS (0.ara eters Setu i i The forwarding distance is the distance the ship travels straight after the steering command is given to the autopilot. The logic to verify the correct distance is to perform a maneuver of 90 degrees (Port and Starboard). SLAVE. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial settings dialog box. This distance may vary with a different required radius of turn. PLAN.3 nm). 2. After doing forwarding distances. When service state is checked. Check "Enable changes" to modify desired set of Forwarding Distances. then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box.ara eters Setu How to set forwarding distances for TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 In order to edit forwarding distances parameters. Select Forwarding distance then push the scrollwheel. 6. 3. 2. select Navigation parameters then push the scrollwheel. 4. Normally these parameters are entered during sea trial but can also be modified later on. do the following: 1. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE. See figures below: Wheel Over Point (WOP) Forwarding distance = 1 Radius Next course How forwarding distance is defined Influence of forwarding distance to ship's turn . check "Service state". MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower right corner. the dialog box shown right appears. PLAN. To operate without XTE gain. be sure to uncheck "Service state". 5. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial settings dialog box. SLAVE. 6. 3.5 KN = 0. 2. 4. prepare the following graphic in order to find those 11 points. Modify optimization parameters by placing the cursor in the desired edit box and using the scrollwheel to set value. Transfer those 11 points to the table in the ECDIS. Select Planning parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu.ara eters Setu i i i i The optimization parameters are used in optimization calculation.72 Ton / Hour HFO Use the second graphic for diesel oil. Prior to entering data in the form. Note 1: HFO: Heavy fuel oil. if diesel oil consumption is relative to the speed. Push the scrollwheel to confirm. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Select Optimization parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Set 11 points on the graphic as explained above. . DO: Diesel oil Note 2: It is not necessary to enter leading zero ("0"). do the following: 1. There are 11 different speeds available to define fuel consumption on those specific speeds. In order to modify optimization parameters. Select Initial Settings and push the scrollwheel. Use more points where the curve bends more. Example: 3. This is a very important data table that contains ship's fuel consumption with the different speeds. Therefore these parameters must be defined before calculation. 5. ara eters Setu This page intentionally left blank. . 3. In the ARCS Colors window. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area.i i i i i Note: Use of the brilliance control (with FURUNO-supplied monitor) may adversely affect the visibility of information on the night display. [Chart Menu] . Select Colors from the submenu then push the scrollwheel. you can see if individual colors can be distinguished when viewing. You may want to adjust brilliance. For ARCS chart this tool is Colors. You have a tool to check that you can clearly see all details of the charts. Select System from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 1. 2. This lets you see how light levels may affect the visibility of the chart. then push the right mouse button. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. For ARCS chart this tool is Colors. 6. You have a tool to check that you can clearly see all details of the charts. A diagonal line should be present in each of the twenty (1-20) boxes if color differentiation is proper.o or a i ration i i i You may want to adjust brilliance. Color differentiation diagram 5. . 3. Click the X button to quit. Press each button in the Return dialog at the left side of the screen to display corresponding symbol. 4. Select ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu then push the scrollwheel. For S57 charts this tool is the color differentiation test diagram. The color differentiation test diagram is a part of ECDIS chart 1 and you can use it as follows: 1. Select "Color differentiation diagram" from the submenu then push the scrollwheel. the ECDIS becomes inoperative and this is indicated by sounding the buzzer and flashing the lamp in the SYSTEM FAILURE key on the keyboard-equipped control unit.o or a i ration Set brilliance and contrast to calibrated positions. Note: During any self-test. do the following: 1. Use the gray scale test to visually inspect neutral shades of grey. 3. Exit Selftest 5. select Selftest from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button. Select Display then push the left mouse button. To activate the grey scale test. Select Initial Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Click OK to leave ECDIS mode and start Selftest 4. Click the OK button. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box. . The system will end normal operation and start the self-test mode. 2. 8. If the menu at the left side has disappeared. The system will then start normal operation. . Click the Exit Test button to exit the test mode.o or 6. and the following display appears: Grey scale test pattern 7. roll the trackball rightward to display it. 9. Check for proper display of gray shades. Click the Exit button with the left mouse button to close the display. a i ration Click the Gray Scale button at the upper left-hand corner of display with the left mouse button. For more information about how to process these windows. eight sensors/adapter). see the description of the installation parameters in the installation manual. where you can arrange the layout of the conning display. kn kn kn Conning display . The figure below shows the locations of operator-defined windows. There are six predefined places on the conning display where you can specify data to display. which output analog data and up to eight sensors that output serial data. make navigation calculations from the data display and show the results on the conning display (option). Data displayed on the conning display depends on the settings in the ECDIS and the conning display configuration set in the installation parameters. It can adopt information output by the sensors in either analog or digital format.i i i i The ECDIS can receive data from various sensors. The content of the windows are defined in the installation parameters. The ECDIS can be connected to up to16 sensors (two LAN adapters. The center of the conning display is fixed to show information defined by the manufacturer. this depends on which sensors are installed and connected on board the ship. Typically information which is displayed on the conning display are received from following sensors: x x x x x x x x x Position sensors Wind sensor Gyro Rate of turn gyro Log Dual-axis log Rudder Propellers Thrusters TO WPT kn 485 Route: WPT prewarning NM kn kn 11 Dec 2008 kn Typical layout of conning display in navigate mode .onnin is ay i i The conning display shows collected data from different sensors. and the data below is available for display. However. onnin is ay i The ROT window monitors actual ROT. see Chapter 19 "Navigation Sensors". The scale is available from 35 to 90 degrees. dual speed readout. i The speed window shows the following information: kn x Bow speed x Longitudinal speed kn x Stern speed x Direction of true wind relative to your ship. The size of the Speed window depends on of Rudder window selected. (True wind must be selected on the menu to get true wind. For further details. kn For how to set the speed window. This window shows center speed. For further details. see Chapter 19 "Navigation Sensors". both in digital and analog formats. Speed window shows speed through water (SPD) and Speed Over Ground SOG kn Source of SPD is shown upper left corner and source of SOG is shown upper right corner. The text CALC" appears when ROT is calculated by the system. kn Note: There are two different sizes in the vertical direction for the Speed window. with installation parameters. x Diamond figure shows heading in graphical format.) kn x Source of speed indicator (BOTTOM in example) This window shows center speed. : For further details. see Chapter 19 "Navigation Sensors". . see the installation manual. single speed readout. and is set at installation. i i The heading window shows the following information: x Gyro course. which is displayed in digital format in the upper center box and analog format in the center of the window. Numerical value for ordered rudder position available. ii i The position window shows the following information: x x x x LAT and LON of your ship's position Source of your ship's position. Local date and time. In this example the source is ordered rudder (ORD). i NM NM i x x x x x i The drift and radius window shows the following information: SET RADIUS: Current set radius on Autopilot FAP-2000. To get this window. Double rudder window for actual and order rudder. see the installation manual. Second rudder and source of the second rudder. the size of the speed window should be set to "small size or small with double window". COG: Course Over Ground and source of it. See Chapter 25 "Datum". HDG: Current heading DRIFT: Direction and angle of drift. Datum of your ship's position. For information. Double rudder window for actual and order rudder. In this example the source is actual rudder (ACT).onnin is ay i The rudder window shows the following information: First rudder and source of the first rudder. See Chapter 19 "Navigation Sensors". In this example only one rudder is connected. . ACT RADIUS: Current radius of turn. Current date and time used in the ECDIS. SET COURSE: Current set course.T. PROG CRS: Course after turn designed by program course change or program track steering mode.O. MODE: Indicates selected steering mode.O.onnin is ay i x kn i The Autopilot FAP-2000 window displays the following information: SET R. x x x x NM This is called the Autopilot FAP-2000 existed window. MODE: Current turning mode.: Current set rate of turn based on current speed and set turning radius. SET COURSE: Current set course. SET SPEED MODE ACKN.x kn (steering mode) (steering related warning) ii i .x NM xxx. ACKN WARNING: Steering-related alerts displayed in lower status bar of ECDIS are also displayed on the conning display. PLAN SPEED: Planned speed in current leg of the monitored route.x deg/min xx. i SET COURSE SET RADIUS SET R. WARNING i xxx. where the following additional information is available: x x x x x SET RADIUS: Indicates selected radius for turn.T. SET HDG: Calculated heading for ship based on SET COURSE and DRIFT.x deg x. This information is available when the program track steering is in use. Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route including off track.6 NM (1) (1) Route present leg C (2) Route next leg (2) . where the following additional information is available: x NEXT: Planned course to steer after "To WPT". DIST WOP: Distance to Wheel Over Point (WOP) Route window TO WPT TIME: Time left to reach WOP OFF TRACK: Distance to center line of route NM An example of a route with a next leg window. Note: The text "(corr)" in red color is displayed beside NEXT to indicate that the value of the planned course to steer after "To WPT" is compensated for gyro error correction. x RADIUS: Planned turning radius of "To WPT". drift and gyro error compensation.onnin is ay i TO WPT When you have selected a route to monitor. NM Route with next leg i ii i i i ii i COURSE RADIUS 0. This condition exists if "Gyro error correction" has been enabled in the Navigation parameters. the route window shows the following information: NM To WPT: The waypoint your ship is approaching. gyro value is compensated for gyro error correction and gyro error compensation have been enabled in Navigation parameters. i ii i i i i i NM . in digital and analog formats. 100 m and 200 m. Depth alert limit is also shown. 40 1020 32 1008 24 996 16 984 8 972 kn kn 40 1020 32 1008 24 996 16 984 8 972 i The depth window shows.Air pressure (optional) Weather conditions of last 12 hours are shown.Wind speed .Wind direction. true or relative . Three depth scales are available: 50 m.onnin is ay i REL WIND kn kn i The weather and wind window shows . the latest 30 minutes of depth data fed from an echo sounder. The content of this window is defined with Thrusters 1-4 in the Installation parameters. The content of this window is defined with Propellers 1-4 in the Installation parameters. fuel consumption per hour and fuel consumption per nautical mile. i i i Three different types of propellers windows are available and one is selected during the installation. The bar on the left shows planned speed or fuel consumption and the bar at right shows actual situation.onnin is ay i kn hl l/NM i The fuel consumption window displays three sets of indications that show ship’s speed. Each indication has two vertical bars. SPD FC FC/NM i Two types of thruster windows are available and one is selected during the installation. . The content of this window is defined with Propellers 1-4 in the Installation parameters. $xxRPM)". $xxXDR.onnin is ay i i i i You can select during installation actual and ordered information of propeller using Engine Control Device Type "IEC 61162-1 (MAN B+W. Single Single CPP Dual Dual CPP . ACT ORD ORD ACT i i i i ii i Four different types of propellers windows are available and one is selected during the installation. onnin is ay i i i i i ii You can select during installation ordered RPM and Pitch and Control Position using Engine Control Device type "IEC 61162-1 (MAN B+W. $xxXDR. $xxRPM)" Select "Bow thruster and Engine" on Conning Display. The content of this window is defined with Azimuth in the Installation parameters. . i i i Two different types of azimuth propulsion windows are available and one is selected during the installation. PLAN LEG: Planned speed for current leg (based on plan). kn kn kn i The message window is available with connection of a central alert unit (option). SUGGESTED: If optimization type is "timetable". The conning display shows the speedpilot alert as self-explanatory text. where nn is the number of the alert. For other optimization types this is blank. OFF. SPEEDPILOT: Selected mode in Speed Pilot. The speedpilot display shows alerts as ALnn. SET: Set position of handle and set speed of speedpilot during operation mode SET of the speedpilot. ACTUAL: Speed and source of the speed used by the speedpilot. SET or PLAN. . PLAN: Set position of handle and set speed of speedpilot during operation mode PLAN of the speedpilot. and it shows various alerts generated by the central alert unit.onnin is ay i kn kn kn kn kn i The speedpilot window displays the following data: x x x ROUTE: Optimization type for monitored route. then this indicates suggested speed to keep the timetable. Blank during other operation modes. Blank during other operation modes. kn kn kn kn kn x x x x kn kn The last row is reserved for alert indication. i This window shows all active or pending alerts in priority order. i PORT PROPULSION PITCH PORT PROPULSION PITCH BOW THRUSTER STERN THRUSTER XXX RPM XXX% XXX RPM XXX% XXX% XXX% i ii i .onnin is ay i i i i This window shows engine starting air pressure. For more information.12 "List of Alerts". see section 33. i i i You may select the conning display mode from the Conning Display dialog box. push the left mouse button. select conning display mode from the Conning mode list box then push the scrollwheel. The parameters for each display mode are selected during the installation. click an arrow tab in the dialog box several times to display it. spin the scrollwheel to select a palette and push the scrollwheel to confirm. Push the left mouse button to show the Chart Display dialog box. If the Chart page is not active. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area. When you change color palette of the ECDIS you also change the palette of the conning display. Select the background color from the Background list box.onnin is ay i i The conning display shows data collected from different sensors and also data from ECDIS and Autopilot processors. 4. The conning display window appears in where you can select desired conning mode. select Conning Display from the menu. i i i The conning display is using the same color palette as the ECDIS. Select palette scheme from the Palette list box. select Conning Display from the menu. and one of these modes may be selected from a dialog box. Harbour 2 mode. i i i You may select the background color for the conning display. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area. select conning display mode from the Background list box then push the scrollwheel. There are four different conning display modes. on the Installation parameters. 1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area. Navigate 1 mode and Navigate 2 mode. 3. Harbour 1 mode. push the left mouse button. . If you want to back to ECDIS display you can press any key except Alert Ack. Or System Failure on Control Head. i i i To enable swapping between ECDIS display and Conning Display you have to configure “Conning Display” function to one of four function keys. it is possible to use it for both an ECDIS display and a Conning display. Then you can switch between ECDIS display and Conning Display. press F2 key (this example) on Control Head. To switch ECDIS display to Conning Display. . Below is example where F2 is used to activate Conning Display on ECDIS monitor.onnin is ay i i i If you have only one monitor. if ECDIS software installation has been done for “ECDIS with Conning Display (1 display unit)”. .i i i i This chapter describes the steering functions available with the FURUNO Autopilot FAP-2000. This Autopilot receives position. Hand Steering Autopilot Steering Steering Go to Waypoint Go to Track Steering modes of the ECDIS together with the Autopilot FAP-2000 i The manual steering modes are: x x x Steering wheel Wing steering control Override tiller While in a manual steering mode. i Note that all steering-related functions are available only if the ECDIS system is also connected to the optional Autopilot FAP-2000. compares this with the track section to be steered. and applies the ship model to calculate and command the necessary rudder angle. the ECDIS provides indication of the rudder angle and the hand steering mode. heading and speed data. (Curved EBL can also be displayed. . The ECDIS displays required heading. The ECDIS system performs turns using planned radius. radius. rate of turn and predicted turn. In the track mode. Like at the approach to a waypoint. the planned track is followed at the maximum accuracy between waypoints and also in turns (position-controlled turn). the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn. the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn when approaching a waypoint.Steerin it uto i ot i x x x i The operator sets the required heading of the ship. but not in the Heading Control mode. A turn is initiated by the operator. The turning radius is also set by the operator (or in Heading Control mode the rudder angle limit). When approaching a next waypoint.) i The ECDIS system will follow the planned track to a next waypoint with moderate accuracy to get more economical sailing (sailing in ocean areas). Also for steering with selected TT models. . Medium or Loaded 8: Performance indicator: Performance status.Steerin it uto i ot i This section describes the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. 1-6: Steering mode selection x x x x x x PROGRAM TRACK: Programmed track-controlled heading change using set radius. Medium or Precise 9: Status indicator: Shows selected mode and state of readiness. GOTO TRACK: Track-controlled automatic route steering GOTO WAYPOINT: Course-controlled automatic route steering HEADING CONTROL: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle limit RADIUS CONTROL: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE: Programmed heading-controlled course change using set radius 7: Loading condition indicator: Loading conditions. Light. Economy. and DECREASE. 16: Displays: x x x ROT in Radius Control mode Speed in Heading Control mode Speed warning indicator (LOG FAILURE or LOW) . performance and conditions. auto speed. lamps show when the tiller can be used to set a radius or a rudder angle limit. PORT and STBD lamps show when the tiller can be used to set course. rudder limit function. INCREASE. 12: Tiller x x x Set course and radius. 13: Gyro reading and a bar graph showing rate of turn 14: Set Heading display includes: x x x Off course alert Turn side Rudder-on limit indication 15: Displays: x x x Radius set-point in Radius Control mode Rudder limit in Heading Control mode AUTO LIMIT lamp lights to indicate selection of automatic rudder limit function.Steerin x x x x it uto i ot Autopilot FAP-2000 in operation: READY Autopilot FAP-2000 control mode: HEADING/TRACK Autopilot FAP-2000 automatic route steering: ROUTE Autopilot FAP-2000 track controlled turn: TURN 10: Alert indicator and buzzer cancel x x ALERT lamp for other Autopilot FAP-2000-related alerts and errors RESET button for acknowledging other Autopilot FAP-2000-related alerts and errors. 11: Special function keypad x x x Select manual speed Adjust panel dimmer Set manual speed value. it doesn't require position data. affect the ship. . x x x x x x x Mode selection: PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE and HEADING lamps are lit. affect the ship. i The radius control steering mode can be used always. This is displayed on the radar screen. the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the planned designed turn. If wind.Steerin it uto i ot i The heading control steering mode can be used always. etc. Immediate course change when the tiller is used to set the heading. etc. it doesn't require any position source. Course change is activated by pushing START HEADING CHANGE. Course change is defined as heading controlled with the set rudder angle limit. x x x x Mode selection: RADIUS CONTROL RADIUS CONTROL and HEADING lamps are lit Course change is radius controlled with set radius If wind. This is displayed on the radar screen. x x x x Mode selection: HEADING CONTROL The HEADING CONTROL and HEADING lamps are lit. control is returned to RADIUS CONTROL. it doesn't require position data. which are also displayed on the radar screen. i Program heading change steering mode can be used always. the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn. The tiller is first used to set a new heading and radius. "START HEADING CHANGE" flashes if the newly set heading is different from the currently used heading. After activation. current. current. This is displayed on the radar screen. TRACK and TURN lamps are lit. current. x Alert "494 ProgTrack: Needs Log sens. the mode becomes PROGRAM TRACK. the alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to "radius control". Course change is activated by pushing START HEADING CHANGE. If wind. This alert will be repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes and if the condition continues. The following alerts may be released in the Program track steering mode: x Alert "488 Steering:Stop-system fail": Internal failure . This alert will be repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes and if the condition continues. Course change is track controlled with set radius. the alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to "radius control". x Alert "503 ProgTrack:Need higher Spd": The Kalman filter is used with the program track but the speed is below the limit set for the track steering in the installation parameters.e. the alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop . etc. The tiller is first used to set a new heading and radius.Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to "radius control". . This will be repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes and if the condition continues. This alert will be repeated every four minutes for next 10 minutes and if the condition continues. which are also displayed on the radar screen. "START HEADING CHANGE" flashes if newly set heading is different from currently used set heading. x Alert "498 Use manual rudder control": Generated every 2 minutes to alert the operator to control the rudder manually. affect the ship.Program track steering mode is cancelled.": The Kalman filter is used with the program track but without including an independent speed source (separate log sensor or two position sensors). After activation. the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn. x Alert "504 ProgTrack: Use Radius ctrl. when the Autopilot FAP-2000 has lost the gyro and thus cannot control the rudder.Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to "radius control". the alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop .Steerin it uto i ot The Program track steering mode can be used with the Kalman filter and a high-precision sensor such as DGPS: x x x x x x x x Mode selection: PROGRAM TRACK PROGRAM TRACK. 495 or 503 have been valid for the last 10 minutes.Sensor Fail": No gyro data or if conditions of alert 493. x Alert "495 ProgTrack: Needs diff Pos. DGPS). x Alert "493 ProgTrack: Needs Filter ON": The Kalman filter is not used with the program track. alert 493. x Alert "509 ProgTrack:Need sog/cog ref": Appears when there is no Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG) available from the position sensor(s) or bottom track from a dual-axis log. This alert is repeated every four minutes.": The Kalman filter is used with the program track but without a highprecision sensor (for example. x Alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop . 495 or 503 has been valid 2 minutes). 494. This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue the program track (i. the alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop . 494. This alert will be repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes and if the condition continues.Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to "radius control".": Informs the operator to change the steering mode to "radius control". Steerin it uto i ot i HEADING CONTROL Set heading Set radius Radius control Design before execution Full curved EBL on radar screen Wind. compensation Needs gyro Needs log Needs high-precision position Needs direct SOG/COG sensor Yes No No No No No Yes No No No RADIUS CONTROL Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No PROGRAM TRACK Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes . current. etc. Steerin it uto i ot i i In automatic route steering. you can use either the Go to Waypoint mode or the Go to Track mode. Go to WPT and Go to Track modes can be activated when your ship is located inside a channel of a monitored route. Automatic route steering can be used with a predefined monitored route. and return to set course in Go to Track. the system cannot increase the approach angle towards the center line of the route. i Note: If the off track error is more than 100 meters in the "Go to Track" mode. . the ship will always make way toward the waypoint in Go to WPT. See the figure below for differences between "Go to WPT" and "Go to Track". As shown. your ship stabilizes typically in a constant offtrack position. affect the ship between waypoints. current. etc. Originally planned turn Originally planned WP DYNAMIC WP Wheel over line for non-dynamic WP used by "Go To Track" Wheel over line for dynamic WP i x x x x x Mode selection: GO TO WAYPOINT GO TO WAYPOINT and ROUTE lamps are lit. which is set automatically.Steerin it uto i ot See the figure below to find how location of dynamic WPT is defined when the "Go to Waypoint" mode is used. the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the planned turn. affect the ship during turns. This kind of turn is called an "assisted turn". the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting from the planned route. etc. current. a non-dynamic waypoint is used. Can be used when the ship has accurate position source available. the Goto Waypoint mode uses the dynamic location of a waypoint. Steering is course controlled with set radius. Normally. However. if alert 413 is active. . The tiller can be used to set radius. If cross-track error is used alone. The system has three means to prevent drifting from the planned route. which is always active Drift compensation available from route parameters Gyro error compensation available from route parameters If wind. which is displayed on the radar screen. but not course. The means are: x x x x x x Measured cross-track error from the center line. If wind. and they are most effective when used together. etc. Steering is track-controlled with set radius. compensation in turns Needs gyro Needs log Precision of position equipment Needs direct sog/cog sensor 1 1 i GO TO WAYPOINT Automatic Automatic / Manual Yes Yes Yes Yes Low gain No Yes Yes Good No 1 GO TO TRACK Automatic Automatic / Manual Yes No Yes Yes High gain Yes Yes Yes Highi Yes Precision of position is good with LORAN and GPS. Wind. which is always active. your ship stabilizes typically in a constant offtrack position. Drift compensation is available from the route parameters. The tiller can be used to set radius. current. i Set course Set radius Radius control Dynamic waypoint location Design before execution Full curved EBL on radar screen Wind. which is set automatically. x x Can be used when the ship has high-precision position source available. Goto Track mode uses non-dynamic waypoint. affect the ship between waypoints. and they are most effective when used together. current. If wind. Gyro error compensation is available from the route parameters. the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting from the planned route. compensation in linear parts between WPT. If cross-track error is used alone. etc. but not heading.Steerin it uto i ot x x x x x Mode selection GO TO TRACK GO TO TRACK button and ROUTE and TRACK lamps are lit. The system has three means to prevent drifting from the planned route. Precision of position is high with DGPS and SYLEDIS. current. . etc. The means are: x x x Measured cross-track error from the centerline. you get the alert "470 Disabled: Needs filter on". . ii Route steering with the Goto Track mode requires that you have at least one high-precision position receiver and direct SOG/COG reference available and in use.01 nm). Route steering requires that you have at least either one log and position receiver or two position receivers available and in use. This lets the Kalman filter exclude from position calculation a sensor that has large position discrepancy. Alert "502 Disabled: Need higher Spd" appears when the speed used by the Kalman filter calculation is below the limit set for track steering in the installation parameters. x If the position discrepancy limit is set very small (0.e. If any of the conditions described above is lost during the Goto Track mode. DGPS. see section 27. you get the alert "490 Disabled: Needs log sensor". the system automatically activates the Goto WPT mode within 10 minutes and you get the alert "489 Route: Changed to Go to WPT". but you may also experience frequent release of the alert. At least one high-precision position is available and in use when the permanent indication FILTER HIGH appears at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary sensors is exceeded. etc. Route steering requires activation of the Kalman filter. Alert "499 Disabled: Needs good Pos" appears when the filter did not have high-precision position sensor for route steering. This also influences the Goto WPT.Steerin it uto i ot ii ii i i The Goto WPT and Goto Track modes can be activated when your ship is located inside a channel of a monitored route. Goto Track and Program track steering modes. It is recommended to activate the position discrepancy detector (i.. Note that a standard GPS or a DGPS without differential position available are not acceptable as high-precision position receivers. If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without an independent speed source. set position discrepancy limit > 0).1. are considered high-precision position receivers. the system will quickly alert you to the discrepancy.4 "Navigation parameters setting". For further details. If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without the filter. It is also required that the Speed Over Ground (SOG) reference is available either from position sensor(s) or bottom track from a dual-axis log. The difference between actual heading and planned course to approach "To WPT" must be less than the limit set in the route steering parameters in order to initiate automatic route steering. the indication "Goto WPT" appears in the route monitor window. the indication "Goto WPT Great circle" appears in the route monitor window. Go to WPT If a Go to WPT is activated.Steerin it uto i ot i i i Route steering can be activated by pushing the GOTO WAYPOINT or GOTO TRACK button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 panel. If the planned course to approach a "To WPT" is defined using Great Circle. . the lamp will then light to indicate the used route steering mode. the indication "Track Great circle" appears in the route monitor window. the indication "Goto Track" appears in the route monitor window. Go to Track If Go to Track is activated. as shown right. When route steering is not used or if the ECDIS did not accept the requested route steering mode. The lamp of the pushed button will start to flash and if the ECDIS accepts the requested route steering mode. If the planned course to approach a "To WPT" is defined using Great Circle. there is no indication of route steering in the route monitor window. Alert "468 Disabled: Out of course" informs you that the difference between current heading of your ship and the required set course to start the route steering is greater than set by the operator in the route start limit angle of route parameters. Check that you have properly enabled the Autopilot FAP-2000 for steering. Alert "470 Disabled: Needs filter on" informs you that you didn't have the Kalman filter ON at the time of the request. because the filter eliminates sudden jumps of the position and thus prevents unpredictable maneuvers of your ship. Alert "464 Route: No selected route" informs you that there is no route selected for route monitoring. a dual-axis log or two position receivers. Alert "477 Disabled: Out of channel" informs you that the current location of your ship is not inside channel of a monitored route. Alert "502 Disabled: Need higher Spd" appears when the speed used by the Kalman filter calculation is below the limit set for track steering in the installation parameters. Check and reset correct "To WPT" for route monitoring. . Selected sensors must include at least one high-precision sensor. Check your selection of sensors. Route steering requires that you use the Kalman filter. and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary sensors is exceeded. Alert "465 Route: Illegal WPT" informs you that there is a route selected for route monitoring. Alert "490 Disabled: Needs log sensor" informs you that the Kalman filter did not have an independent speed source. Alert "510 Disabled: Out of turn" appears when Goto WPT or Goto Track button was pressed when the route monitoring of the system detects that your ship is turning.Steerin it uto i ot i i There are several reasons why the requested route steering mode could not be accepted: Alert "467 Disabled: Steering off" informs you that the ECDIS didn't have steering controlling permission at the time of the request. Alert "499 Disabled: Needs good Pos" appears when the Kalman filter did not have a high-precision position sensor for route steering. but your ship's location is out of the turn. Alert "491 Disabled: Needs diff Pos" informs you that the Kalman filter did not have high-precision position sensor for "Goto track" steering mode. You need either a log. but the selection of the next or final waypoint is missing or illegal. Alert "508 Disabled: Need sog/cog ref" appears when neither Speed Over Ground (SOG) nor Course Over Ground COG) is available from position senor(s) or bottom track of a dual-axis log. Check your selection of sensors. Enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. the operation that will occur depends on if you acknowledged the preceding acknowledgeable visual indication "485 Route: WPT prewarning". the text "Ass. the visual indication "485 Route: WPT prewarning" appears on the ECDIS display and the ACKN. re arnin oint roac oint ee er oint ay oint re arn a ar ti e a ar a roac ti e for ar in istance f ra ius en of turn As soon as the ship arrives to the wheel over point. the acknowledgeable visual indication "451 Route: WPT approach alert" appears on the ECDIS display and the ACKN. Note that these alerts are programmable (the time before you reach a turn) and it is relative to the starting point of the maneuver). TURN IS ALWAYS ENABLED. WARNING button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 lights. WARNING button on the Autopilot FAP-2000’s control lights and the buzzer sounds. At the "pre-warning point". During a maneuver. . Appr. at the approach point. Go to Track When the "pre-warning point" is passed in the "Go to Track" mode and the acknowledgeable visual indication "485 Route: WPT prewarning" is acknowledged at the control panel of the Autopilot FAP-2000. indicating the planned radius for maneuver. If you acknowledged the alert 485 then. See the figure below for description. At the "approach point". Go to WPT When the "pre-warning point" is passed in the "Go to WPT" mode and the acknowledgeable visual indication "485 Route: WPT prewarning" is acknowledged at the control panel of the Autopilot FAP-2000. the alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" appears on the ECDIS display and the ACKN.Steerin it uto i ot i i i Automatic route steering navigation tries to keep the ship always inside the channel limits and go to a next waypoint. the alert 451 will be changed from an acknowledgeable visual indication to an audio alarm. If you did not acknowledge the alert 485 at the approach point. Enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. THE ONLY WAY TO DISABLE THE AUTOMATIC TURN IS TO SELECT ANOTHER STEERING MODE. the text "Track Appr. WARNING button on the Autopilot FAP2000's control panel lights. If you do not acknowledge alert 451 before wheel over point. the ECDIS sends a new course command to the Autopilot FAP2000 and the corresponding maneuver is initiated. both the radar display and the ECDIS display show the Curved EBL. After you acknowledge the alert 458. Go to Track When the "approach point" is passed and acknowledgeable visual indication or alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" is acknowledged.Steerin it uto i ot If acknowledgeable visual indication 485 is not acknowledged. the text "Track Turn enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. Go to WPT When the "approach point" is passed and acknowledgeable visual indication or alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" is acknowledged. the text "Ass. Go to Track During the turn the text "Track Turn" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. Go to WPT During the turn the text "Assisted Turn" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. the route steering is automatically terminated and the Autopilot FAP-2000 goes into the Radius Control mode. . Turn enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. Note: When you approach the last waypoint the acknowledgeable visual indication or alert "458 Route: Last WPT approach" appears. the text in the route monitor window will remain the same as it was before the prewarning point (Goto Track or Goto WPT). The ACKN. the ship will be outside of the channel at the wheel over point. if the ship continues using the current course. Buzzer sounds from the Autopilot FAP-2000’s panel. WARNING button of the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel lights to provide visual alert (see example below). Intermittent audio/visual alerts appear as follows: x x x Alert number and text are visible at lower right corner of the ECDIS display (see example below). permanent and intermittent. Permanent alerts are available regardless of the steering mode used: x x Outside channel is indicated by displaying the text "Off track" in orange and its value in red. 458 Route: Last WPT approach . You acknowledge an intermittent alert by clicking the ACKN. WARNING button on the Autopilot FAP-2000’s panel. Out of gate indicates that. The text "Out of Gate" is orange.Steerin it uto i ot i i There are two types of alerts relevant to route steering. Sensor Fail" appears. Alert 492 will be repeated every four minutes for next 10 minutes and if condition still exists. if DGPS has changed its mode to normal mode. rate of turn in the route parameters. Speed/Course sensors and position sensors can be source of SOG and COG. Alert "460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed" appears when the set radius value in the Autopilot FAP-2000 panel together with the current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set for Max. Typical guidance alerts not described in other chapters are: Alert "475 Route: Needs filter on". Alert 476 will be repeated every four minutes for next 10 minutes and if condition still exists. Go To Track mode uses fixed value of 30 degrees) to keep the track.Sensor Fail" is generated and steering mode is automatically changed to Radius Control.Steerin it uto i ot Typical intermittent alerts not described in other chapters are: Alert "410 Filter: Pos source change" appears when differential GPS used in filter positioning has changed its operation mode either from differential mode to normal mode or normal mode to differential mode. After the alert 456. rate of turn in the Route parameters. Alert is repeated every 2 minutes for 10 minutes after which alert "497 Route: Stop . Alert "488 Steering: Stop-System fail" appears when the system has internal failure. Alert "478 Route: Needs good Pos" appears when the Kalman filter did not have high precision position sensor for route steering and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary position or between your ship and any position is exceeded. Alert "497 Route: Stop . This alert is repeated every five minutes. when the Autopilot FAP-2000 has lost gyro and thus cannot control rudder. . if the condition continues. This alert is activated if your ship is within value WPT approach alert time set in Route Parameters from the wheel over point. if the condition continues. Alert "413 SOG&COG unreliable" appears when the system finds out that SOG and COG from sensors are inaccurate. Alert "498 Use manual rudder control" appears every two minutes to advise the operator to use manual control of rudder. Alert "469 Autopilot FAP-2000: off course" appears when the Autopilot FAP-2000 needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in Installation parameters for Go To Waypoint mode. 492 or 501 has been valid for last 10 minutes. Alert "456 Route: WPT approach error" appears when your ship speed is decreased more than waypoint approach alert time + 100 seconds away from the wheel over point after the operator has already acknowledged alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" to enable the next automatic turn. This alert is repeated every five minutes. Alert "476 Route: Needs log sensor" appears when the position from the Kalman filter cannot be compared against an independently operating log. which appears when the position from the Kalman filter is not available. 478. Alert "457 Route: Outside chl limits" appears when your ship goes outside the planned channel. alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto WPT" is generated and steering mode is automatically changed to Goto WPT.Sensor Fail" appears when no gyro data is received or if conditions of alert 475. Alert "455 Route: off course". appears when the system needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in Installation parameters) to keep the track. If the steering mode is "Goto Track" alert "492 Route: Needs diff Pos" also appears. alert "497 Route: Stop Sensor Fail" is generated and steering mode is automatically changed to Radius Control. 476. Alert "492 Route: Needs diff Pos" appears for any use of Goto Track with Kalman filter but without a high precision sensor (an example is DGPS). Alert 475 will be repeated every four minutes for next 10 minutes and if condition still exists. which prevents continuation of Goto Waypoint or Goto Track. Alert "461 Route: ROT will be exceed" appears when the planned radius for next waypoint together with the current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set for Max. the next turn is not enabled and the system will generate a new alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" when appropriate. alert "497 Route: Stop . Sensor Fail" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to Radius Control. Use FAP-2000's RADIUS CONTROL. This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Goto Track (i. Now the route steering is disabled until the GO TO WAYPOINT or GO TO TRACK button is pushed again.4. push the desired mode button and follow normal instructions. appears as an early warning indication that the system may enter state of freeze. You have several options with which to set the collision avoidance or any other maneuver: x x x x x Use override tiller. Use FAP-2000's HEADING CONTROL. Alert "506 Route: Use Radius control" is instruction for the operator to change the steering mode to Radius Control. you may interrupt an automatic route steering turn and continue it in the manual steering mode. However. which appears. This alert is repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes and if condition still exists. if the condition continues. Note that in order to return to route steering the ship heading must point to the next waypoint. See section 30. alert "497 Route: Stop .e. If the condition still exists after 10 minutes. Alert "505 Route: Use Goto WPT" is instruction for the operator to change the steering mode to Goto WPT. alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto WPT" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to Goto WPT.e. Use FAP-2000's Program Track. otherwise the alert "468 Disabled: Out of course" is generated. 476 or 501 has been valid 2 minutes). This alert is repeated every 5 minutes. direct rudder pump operation button or non-follow-up rudder control.5 "Summary of manual steering modes".Steerin it uto i ot Alert "501 Route: Needs higher Speed" appears for any use of Goto Track with the Kalman filter but speed below limit set for track steering in the Installation Parameters. Alert "516 Autopilot FAP-2000: Drift limit". but there are also several other reasons to interrupt route steering. alert 492 or 507 has been valid two minutes). Alert "788 System Frozen".) You can also during turns use all methods described in the above-mentioned section "Collision avoidance maneuver during automatic route steering". You need to restart ECDIS EC1000C processor. This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Goto Track (i. i x x i i There are two cases where the automatic route turn must be stopped or modified: The turn cannot be performed up to the final value." appears when any use of Goto Track with the Kalman filter but without direct Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG) available from position sensor(s) or from bottom track of a dual-axis log. This alert is repeated every four minutes. ( Too fast or too slow. The turn that your ship will perform is outside of the planned turn. . Use follow-up rudder control. alert 475. To use any of the above autopilot modes. Alert "507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. if the autopilot needs more than a set limit to compensate drift(the limit is available in Installation parameters for Track mode (max drift compensation)). i i i i i i Often route steering is interrupted by a collision avoidance maneuver. This alert is repeated every four minutes. This is used in case the ship is not performing the planned radius and the radius must be modified. the helmsman wishes to change the course to 90°. i i Accurate route steering is defined as a small cross-track error when automatically following a route. Two of the route parameters . The turn will be finished to that value. then both of these parameters should be enabled. Before activating the Gyro error compensation. The new situation is shown on the radar screen. If the actual turning is too fast. The same logic applies for too slow turning.Steerin it uto i ot x If the turn has already started. x Now the manual steering is enabled and your turn continues with previously set values of course and radius.Drift compensation and Gyro error compensation . Example: Actual course = 45°. the set course display on the Autopilot FAP-2000 shows the new course value. . new course = 120°.10 "Gyro Error Correction" to find the available methods for gyro error compensation. Push the RADIUS CONTROL button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel then use the tiller to set the new course to 90°. 2. Push the button once. If you need the most accurate route steering. x Using the tiller. x Push the RADIUS CONTROL button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. The set course already shows 120°. see section 19. use the tiller on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel to increase the radius. At the moment the ship’s heading is 60°. 1. set the new intended course. route turn was enabled.have a significant effect on the accuracy of route steering. With some selected radar models you can also use the RADIUS INCR button. You can transfer control from the active panel to the non-active panel by pushing one of the steering mode buttons (RADIUS CONTROL. GOTO TRACK and PROGRAM TRACK). Steering mode Heading Control Radius Control Program Track Goto WPT Goto Track Lamp indication Heading Heading Track Route Route and Track Radius/Rudder limit display Rudder limit Radius Radius Radius Radius . GOTO WAYPOINT. To continue with the previous steering mode. GOTO TRACK and PROGRAM TRACK). Both active and non-active panels indicate the steering mode in use by lamps and displays. In this case: x x x The active panel is indicated by a light in one of the steering mode buttons (RADIUS CONTROL. Note that you can observe the lamp indications to know the current steering mode. COURSE CONTROL. This action lets you change the steering mode or continue with the previous one. GOTO WAYPOINT. push the steering mode button corresponding to the previous steering mode. See the table below. COURSE CONTROL.Steerin it uto i ot ii i i i i The Autopilot FAP-2000 system may incorporate several control panels. The table below summaries properties of each applicable steering mode. then it is Turn. PHC = Program Heading Change PTT = Program Track . (***) If the difference between the heading and set course is less than 10 degrees. then it is Linear. If those lamps are on.Steerin it uto i ot i The Autopilot FAP-2000 allows the operator to design a turn beforehand and to begin execution of the turn when the START COURSE CHANGE button is pushed. If the lamps are off. Steering mode Rule applicable Turn control Change of Set course Change of Radius Change of rudder limit Curved EBL "Start course change" does not flash Not applicable Not applicable If displayed indicates ongoing turn If displayed indicates ongoing turn Displays ongoing turn Curved EBL "Start course change" flashes Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Display planned turn Display planned turn Heading control PHC + Heading control Radius control PHC + Radius control PHC + Radius control (executing a turn) PTT Turn or linear Turn or linear Turn or linear Linear (**) (***) Turn (**) (***) Rudder angle limit Rudder angle limit Radius control Radius control Radius control Immediate action No action until click of Start (*) Immediate action No action until click of Start (*) No action until click of Start (*) Not applicable Not applicable Immediate Immediate Immediate Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Immediate Not available Linear (**) Turn (**) Not applicable Position controlled radius No action until click of Start (*) No action until click of Start (*) Immediate Not applicable Not applicable If displayed indicates ongoing turn Displays ongoing turn Display planned turn Display planned turn PTT (executing a turn) Not available (*) "Start course change" flashes to indicate immediate execution of the changed set course. (**) "Increase" and "Decrease" lamps indicate "Linear" and "Turn". then the situation is interpreted as Linear. Steerin it uto i ot i i i i i In addition to the Autopilot FAP-2000. the Autopilot FAP-2000 always sets a course equal to the gyro course. While in the "HAND" mode. These pending modes are indicated by flashing the lamp in the START HEADING CHANGE button. The only exceptions are pending program modes (PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE and PROGRAM TRACK). "HAND" can function to override the tiller. Goto Track or Program Track. direct rudder pump operation buttons. i i i The operator can change from any steering mode to any other steering mode. shown on the set course display. switch from any Autopilot FAP-2000 steering mode to the "HAND" mode (and back again to switch back to Autopilot FAP-2000 control). when the new mode continues from currently used set course. a ship may have a steering selection unit of some kind which minimally incorporates "HAND" and "AUTOPILOT FAP-2000" functions. The new steering mode continues from the previously displayed course. The diagram below shows all other possible steering mode changes. For example. If you want the ship to go "steady as she goes" while in the middle of any Autopilot FAP-2000 operation. it is possible to leave automatic route steering and return to automatic route steering during both linear parts and turns. but not activation of Goto WPT. ro ra ourse an e ress ro ra course c an e a ius ontro oto ress Start course c an e ress a ius contro a ius ontro oto rac ress ea in contro ea in ontro ro ra ress ress Start course c an e ro ra course c an e rac ro ra ourse an e ea in ontro . User can change to the "HAND" mode from any of the Autopilot FAP-2000 steering modes. non-follow-up rudder control or follow-up rudder control. There is various information available about Autopilot's state. 2. Set Course over ground value CRS Steering mode Set turning radius at “TO” WPT Set parameters for loading condition and track steering accuracy Autopilot alarm (red text) Set value for heading NM Calculated R.Steerin it uto i ot i To activate Autopilot display: 1. Select Autopilot from the menu.O. Move cursor to right hand side over Route monitor window.T at “TO” WPT Autopilot warning (orange text) Off track from planned Autopilot dialog box . 3. In mouse guidance box text "Menu/ /Select Sidebar" appears. i i i You can open Autopilot display on side bar of ECDIS. Press right mouse button to open Sidebar menu. Drift compensation set as OFF: . .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000.Ship has trouble in following imaginary line over ground.Ship follows monitored route. .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP-2000. Below is a summary of effect of various environmental conditions.Drift compensation OFF: .Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route. Drift compensation ON: .Steerin it uto i ot i ii i The system has many available steering modes. Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Program track i Goto Waypoint Goto Track Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation ON: . .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit . Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation OFF: . .Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route. High wind and/or current Ship is drifting.Ship follows monitored route in an off-track position inside the channel limit. no wind. Moderate wind and/or current Ship has at tendency to drift. i Environment conditions Heading control Radius control Program heading change Calm sea.Ship accurately follows imaginary line over ground.Ship follows nicely imaginary line over ground.COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000. .Ship accurately follows imaginary line over ground. Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship follows monitored route Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation ON: .Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. no current COG is about the same as Set Course in Autopilot FAP2000. Drift compensation ON: .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000.Ship follows monitored route.Ship has trouble in following imaginary line over ground. .Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit.Ship has trouble in following imaginary line over ground. Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation OFF: .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000.Ship follows imaginary line over ground.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit.Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit. Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation ON: . . Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation OFF: .Ship follows imaginary line over ground.COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000. . .Steerin it uto i ot Environment conditions Heading control Radius control Program heading change Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track Slow change of wind and/or current There is no compensation for change Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation ON: .Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. .Ship follows monitored route. but may drift away from imaginary line then return to it.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) There is no compensation for change Drift compensation ON: .Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. but may need full channel limit area.COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000. Drift compensation OFF: . Ship may have trouble in following imaginary line over ground.Ship follows monitored route. Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation ON: .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000.Ship follows monitored route. but may need full channel limit area. Drift compensation ON or OFF: . . Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation OFF: .ship may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) There is no compensation for change Drift compensation ON: . but may drift away from imaginary line then return to it. Drift compensation set as OFF: .Ship follows monitored route.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. .Ship follows imaginary line over ground.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit.COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000. .Ship follows imaginary line over ground. . Drift compensation ON: .Steerin it uto i ot Environment conditions Heading control Radius control Program heading change Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track Slow change of speed There is no compensation for change Drift compensation ON or OFF: .COG is equal to course set on Autopilot FAP2000. Drift compensation OFF: .Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit. Ship follows curved EBL. Slow change of wind and/or current Ship goes inside or outside of turn. Drift compensation OFF: .Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route. Drift compensation ON: .Ship goes inside or outside of turn. Drift compensation ON: . but may need full channel limit area. Drift compensation ON: . .Ship follows monitored route. Drift compensation ON: .Ship goes fast inside or outside of turn.Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows curved EBL. Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship follows monitored route Drift compensation OFF: .Ship goes inside or outside of turn. Drift compensation ON or OFF: . no current Ship follows curved EBL.Steerin it uto i ot i Environment conditions Heading control Radius control Program heading change Calm sea. but may go outside channel limit area.Ship has trouble in following imaginary line over ground. Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship goes inside or outside of turn. Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows curved EBL Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship may have troubles in following monitored route inside the channel limit. Drift compensation OFF: . Ship goes inside or outside of turn.Ship goes inside or outside of turn. High wind and/or current Ship goes fast inside or outside of turn. no wind. Drift compensation OFF: .Ship follows monitored route. Program track Goto Waypoint (assisted turn) Goto Track Moderate wind and/or current Drift compensation set as OFF: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation OFF: .Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit.Ship goes inside or outside of turn.1.Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows curved EBL. but may drift from curved EBL then return back to curved EBL.Ship goes inside or outside of turn. Slow change of speed Ship follows curved EBL. Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Steerin it uto i ot Environment conditions Heading control Radius control Program heading change Program track Goto Waypoint (assisted turn) Goto Track Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) Ship goes fast inside or outside of turn. but may need full channel limit area.Ship goes fast inside or outside of turn. but may need full channel limit area.Ship follows monitored route. . Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation ON: . Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) Ship goes inside or outside of turn.Ship drifting away from curved EBL and may not return back to curved EBL. Drift compensation OFF: . Drift compensation ON: .4 "Navigation parameters setting". Drift compensation ON: . see section 27.Ship follows curved EBL. For further details. Note: Drift compensation is turned on or off in the Ship and Route parameters in the Navigation Parameters dialog box.Ship goes inside or outside of turn. but may drift from curved EBL then return back to curved EBL. Drift compensation ON or OFF: .Ship follows curved EBL.Ship follows monitored route. Drift compensation ON or OFF: . Drift compensation OFF: . If ship is turning.” Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail” or “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail”. Note: Backup navigator alert is activated if alert is not acknowledged within 30 seconds. Rudder order is frozen for last value in order to approximately continue ahead. i i Associated alerts Immediately x Sensor alert “755: Gyro error (Autopilot FAP2000)” is generated at ECDIS. x x . If ship is in linear part. For more information about this alert. Study situation. Within few seconds x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. x x x x Within few seconds x Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail” or “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. If ship is turning. Acknowledge alerts. x Reminder x i i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS x Sensor alert. Study situation. see "Description of Backup Navigator Alert". x x Acknowledge alerts. for example Alert “705: Gyro error” or “706: Gyro error. x x i Expected system performance i What end user should do x x Acknowledge alerts.” Alert “402 No heading available. Repeat every 2 minutes x Alert “498 Use manual rudder control” is generated at ECDIS. Study situation. actual heading is used as set heading. Study situation. x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. Change immediately to manual control of rudder.Steerin it uto i ot i i ii Below is a summary of system behavior in various failures when Program Track. i Expected system performance x If ship is in linear part. Alarm 10 is generated at Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. Acknowledge alerts. last-set heading and radius remain. Goto Waypoint or Goto track steering mode is in use. rudder order is frozen for last value in order to approximately continue rate of turn. What end user should do x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. last-set heading and radius remain. If ship is in linear part.” Alert “506 Route: Use Radius control” or “504 Progtrack: Use Radius Ctrl. Acknowledge alerts. etc. actual heading is used as set heading. Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Study situation. “712…716: Position equipment error”. x x Guidance for navigator x x x Reminder x x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode.” Alert “476 Route Needs log sensor” or “494 Progtrack: Needs log sens. Study situation.” Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail” or “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.Steerin it uto i ot Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Sensor alert. If ship is turning. Alert “476 Route Needs log sensor” or “494 Progtrack: Needs log sens. Study situation. for example Alert “708: Log error”. . Change immediately to local autopilot control. Acknowledge alerts. x x x x Acknowledge alerts.” Expected system performance What end user should do x x x x Acknowledge alerts. ” Alert “503 ProgTrack: Needs higher Speed” or “501 Route: Needs higher Speed.” Alert “503 ProgTrack: Needs higher Speed” or “501 Route: Needs higher Speed. last-set heading and radius remain. actual heading is used as set heading. Study situation.” Alert “506 Route: Use Radius control” or “504 Progtrack: Use Radius Ctrl. If ship is turning. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. x x Reminder x x x x x x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. Acknowledge alerts. If ship is in linear part. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts.Steerin it uto i ot Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert “408 Filter: Speed below xx. Study situation.” Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail” or Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.” Expected system performance What end user should do x x x x x x Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts. Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds x x After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes x x Guidance for navigator x Change immediately to local autopilot control.” Alert “410 Filter: Pos source change. . Acknowledge alerts. Change to Goto WPT steering mode. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation.” Expected system performance x What end user should do x x x Program Track mode requires differential position.” x Expected system performance What end user should do x x After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x Alert “505 Route: Use Goto WPT. i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert “509 Progtrack: Needs sog/cog ref. x Alert “489 Route: Changed to Goto WPT. . If ship is turning. Study situation. x Alert “507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. Study situation.Steerin it uto i ot i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert “507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. x x Acknowledge alerts. After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes x x x x Alert “509 Progtrack: Needs sog/cog ref.” Alert “504 Progtrack: Use Radius Ctrl. Acknowledge alerts.” x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode.” x Reminder x x x Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail. x x Acknowledge alerts.” Acknowledge alerts. Study situation.” Instruction for navigator x x x Reminder x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Goto WPT mode. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts. actual heading is used as set heading. last-set heading and radius remain. Change immediately to local autopilot control. Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alerts. Study situation.” Acknowledge alerts. If ship is in linear part. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation.” Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail” or Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. If ship is turning. Study situation.” Alert “475 Route Needs filter ON”. then dead reckoning is based on last plausible speed from position sensors. Guidance for navigator x Change immediately to local autopilot control. actual heading is used as set heading.” x x x Reminder x x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. . then dead reckoning is based on them and gyro.Steerin it uto i ot ii Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x OR x Within 30 seconds x Kalman filter detects jump. This is indicated by showing own ship position. x x x x Acknowledge alerts. If ship is in linear part. x x After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x Alert “506 Route: Use Radius control” or “504 Progtrack: Use Radius Ctrl. x x Acknowledge alerts. Alert “712…716: Position equipment error” Expected system performance What end user should do x x Acknowledge alerts. If you have log or dual-axis log. Study situation. last-set heading and radius remain. or “493 Progtrack: Needs filter ON. SOG and COG in red. Study situation. The source indication for SOG and COG is “(LAST)”. If you have log or dual-axis log.” x Kalman Filter is switched Off and system uses dead reckoning for positioning. etc. Alerts “400 Filter: Position unreliable” and “406 Route: Course jump possible. Acknowledge alerts. last-set heading and radius remain. If ship is in linear part. Study situation.” Alert “410 Filter: Pos source changed.” Alert “504 Progtrack: Use Radius Ctrl.” Alert “410 Filter: Pos source changed. Acknowledge alerts.” x Reminder x x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode.” Acknowledge alerts. i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert “727…731: Lost DGPS” or “712…716: Position equipment error. Change immediately to local autopilot control. x x Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Study situation. Study situation.” Alert “505 Route: Use Goto WPT.” x Reminder x x x Alert “489 Route: Changed to Goto WPT. Acknowledge alerts. Guidance for navigator Expected system performance What end user should do x x x x x x x Acknowledge alerts. Change to Goto WPT steering mode. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. .” Alert “492 Route: Needs diff pos. Study situation. Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes x x x x x Alert “503 ProgTrack: Needs diff pos. Guidance for navigator x x x x Acknowledge alerts.” Alert “495 Progtrack: Needs diff pos. Acknowledge alert. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts.” x x Program Track mode requires differential position.Steerin it uto i ot i i i ii Expected system performance What end user should do x x x x x x Goto Track requires differential position. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. actual heading is used as set heading. x x x Alert “496 ProgTrack StopSensor fail. Acknowledge alerts. Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert “727…731: Lost DGPS” or “712…716: Position equipment error.” x Automatic change of steering mode to Goto WPT mode. If ship is in turn. Study situation. Study situation.” Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x x x x Alert “492 Route: Needs diff pos. Acknowledge alert. Study situation. Study situation. If ship is in turn. x x Acknowledge alerts. If ship is in linear part. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. If ship is in turn. Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes x x x x Alert “478 Route: Needs good Pos” Acknowledge alerts. Alert “488 Steering: Stopsystem fail” generated at ECDIS. last-set heading and radius remain.Steerin it uto i ot i i ii ii i What end user should do x x Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) Precondition If sensors in Filter calculation are NOT inside user-selected position discrepancy limit. last-set heading and radius remain. actual heading is used as set heading. Alarm 12 is generated at the Autopilot FAP-2000. If ship is in linear part. actual heading is used as set heading. x x i What end user should do Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Change to local autopilot control. x x x x x x x Guidance for navigator x x x Reminder x x x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts. x x Alert “407 Position discrepancy” Alert “727…731: Lost DGPS” or “712…716: Position equipment error” Alert “410 Filter: Pos source changed” Alert “478 Route: Needs good Pos” Alert “506 Route: Use Radius control” Expected system performance Acknowledge alerts. x Alert “497 Route StopSensor fail” Acknowledge alerts. x . i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds x i Expected system performance x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. Study situation. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts. This speed is called the "internal speed reference". What end user should do x x Acknowledge alerts. loaded) selects rudder gain. If ship is in linear part. Control strategy (economy. . MEDIUM and PRECISE by using the FUNC. x i x x The operator may select among ECONOMY. Alert “488 Steering: Stopsystem fail” and “480 Trackpilot Receive error” is generated at the ECDIS. ii x x i The operator may select among LIGHT. If ship is in turn. Load condition (light.Steerin it uto i ot i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds x i Expected system performance x x Automatic change of steering mode to Radius Control mode. The operator may select internal speed reference or manual speed with the MANUAL SPEED button. medium. MEDIUM and LOADED by using the FUNC. precise) selects course-keeping accuracy. medium. Alarm 05 is generated at the Autopilot FAP-2000. x i i x i The Autopilot FAP-2000 uses the speed from its own log input interface or from the serial line coming from an integrated computer. SETUP button and the ARROW buttons. actual heading is used as set heading. SETUP button and the ARROW buttons. last-set heading and radius remain. and one is selected during the installation. Study situation. Steerin it uto i ot i i i i x x x x i ALARM lamp on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel goes on. Alarm is displayed on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel as OFF COURSE/SPEED WARNING or as an alarm number "AL: NN", where NN is the number of an alert. Alarm is acknowledged by pushing the RESET button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. List of typical alerts: OFF COURSE SPEED WARNING The ship is not following set course. The speed is below 20% or above 120% of MCR speed (max. cruising speed). For further details, see the Autopilot’s operator’s manual. Another reason is that the Autopilot FAP-2000 has lost speed data from the ECDIS. In this case, the Autopilot FAP-2000 uses its backup speed source or last plausible speed. ON LIMIT Autopilot FAP-2000 uses rudder up to its set limit value. Normally this is only an indication, but if it continues for a long period and the heading of the ship doesn't turn, it is an indication of failure of the steering system. For further details, see the Autopilot’s operator’s manual. Rudder servo: Leak detected or no movement when valve is on. Navigation computer has cancelled a remote mode. 24VDC alert system supply failure. Navigation computer didn't accept a request to go for a remote mode. Missing working gyro. Compass comparison alert or reference gyro missing. Messages from the navigation computer were missing while Autopilot FAP-2000 was in remote mode. AL 04 AL 05 AL 06 AL 07 AL 10 AL 11 AL 12 A central alert system outputs these and other alerts: low voltage alert, stop alert (track control), position differential alert, heading differential alert, course error alert, cross-track error alert, sensor alert, low speed alert, destination arrival alert, track control loss alert, etc. For more information about the alerts the central alert system displays see its Operator’s Manual. Steerin it uto i ot i x x x x ACKN. WARNING lamp of the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel flashes. Type of alert is displayed on the ECDIS display as number and text. Alert is acknowledged by pushing the ACKN. WARNING button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. List of typical alerts: 451 452 455 456 458 460 461 467 468 469 470 475 476 478 485 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 516 Route: WPT approach alert Route: Turning disabled Route: Off course Route: WPT approach error Route: Last WPT approach Pilot: ROT will be exceed Route: ROT will be exceed Disabled - steering off Disabled - out of course Autopilot FAP-2000: Off course Disabled - Need filter ON Route: Need filter ON Route: Need log sensor Route: Need good Posit. Route: WPT prewarning Steering: Stop-system fail Route: Changed to Goto WPT Disabled: Need log sensor Disabled: Need diff pos Route: Need diff pos ProgTrack: Need Filter ON ProgTrack: Need diff pos. ProgTrack: Need log sens ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail Route: Stop - Sensor Fail Use manual rudder control Disabled: Need good Pos. Route: Need higher Speed Disabled: Need higher Speed ProgTrack: Need higher Speed ProgTrack: Use Radius ctrl. Route: Use Goto WPT Route: Use Radius control Route: Need sog/cog ref. Disabled: Need sog/cog ref. ProgTrack: Need sog/cog ref. Disabled: Out of Turn Autopilot FAP-2000: Drift limit Steerin it uto i ot Errors should not happen during normal operation. They are related to internal problems. i x x x x i ALERT lamp on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel lights. Error is displayed on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel as error number type ERR NN, where NN is the number of an error. Error is acknowledged by pushing the RESET button on the Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel. List of typical errors: ERR 12 Autopilot FAP-2000 processor failure i x x x x The ALERT ACK lamp on the ECDIS lights. The type of alert is displayed on the display ECDIS display as number and text. Alert is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control panel’s ALERT button. List of typical alerts: 480 Autopilot FAP-2000 receive error Steerin it uto i ot i The curved EBL is a design and control tool which functions to start a turn at the correct position and to monitor behavior of your ship during the turn. The curved EBL is available on the ECDIS display and on some radar displays. Before you make a turn, you can use the curved EBL to select best position to initiate the intended turn. In this socalled design phase, your ship pushes curved EBL in front of the ship. This design phase is available in the following conditions: x x Program track of the Autopilot FAP-2000 Program course change of the Autopilot FAP-2000 The curved EBL is locked to its position when your ship initiates a turn by x x x Automatic route steering: Goto WPT or Goto Track Program track of the Autopilot FAP-2000 Program course change of the Autopilot FAP-2000 During the turn you can monitor how your ship performs the intended maneuver against the plan by comparing the Curved EBL position and your current your ship's position. Curved EBL designed before the wheel over point Steerin it uto i ot Curved EBL at the wheel over point Curved EBL locked during turn Steerin it uto i ot The curved EBL consists of a straight part at its beginning called "forwarding distance". Then an arc with selected radius and finally an EBL in the direction of the newly requested set course. See the figure below. ee er oint for ar in istance f ra ius ne t course You may adjust forwarding distances to suit your ship’s characteristics. For further details see Chapter 27 "Parameters Set up". i i i i i Program Course Change and Program track steering modes allow you to design turns before you execute them. The system displays only one curved EBL. A newly designed turn takes priority over the currently displayed turn. If turn design is available from the Program Heading Change or Program track steering mode, the curved EBL shows it. If no turn design is available, the curved EBL shows current turn. Steerin it uto i ot i i The Predictor is a tool for estimating your ship’s future positions and behavior, and it is located in the information area. Place the cursor on the text "Predictor" then use left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF. The current setting is shown in the mouse functions area. To set the time for the predictor, put the cursor on the time indication next to Predictor, spin the scrollwheel to select a time then push the scrollwheel. The time from current position to the last of the predicted position may be selected by the between 30 and 180 seconds, in 30 second intervals. The on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of your ships drawn in true scale to successive future positions. The predictor is calculated using current: x Docking speed components: x x x x Transversal bow speed Transversal stern speed Longitudinal center speed Rate of turn These components are assumed to be stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state, even when steering without the Autopilot FAP-2000. Predictor shows drift Predictor in a turn Steerin it uto i ot This page intentionally left blank. i i i i This chapter describes steering functions available with the optional YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT-500A. i i Below is layout of Autopilot PT-500A autopilot steering control unit. Steerin it uto i ot i Note that all steering related functions are available only if the ECDIS system is also connected to an optional Autopilot PT-500A autopilot processor. With Autopilot PT-500A autopilot following steering modes are available: x Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND) x Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO) x Track mode automatic Route steering (Mode selector: NAVI) Note: to use any of above steering modes SYSTEM STEERING SWITCH must be switched as FU (Follow Up). i Switch Steering mode selector to "HAND". While in hand steering mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and indication of steering mode. i i Autopilot steering mode: x Operator sets the required heading of the vessel using "Heading Setting Dial". x Turns are controlled by the rudder limit x Turn is initiated by operator While in Autopilot steering mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and indication of steering mode. The Curved EBL is not available because the use of it requires radius controlled turns. i i The ECDIS system will follow the planned track to next waypoint but with a moderate accuracy in order to have more economic sailing (sailing in ocean areas). When approaching the next waypoint the system is pre alerting operator well before the turn and just before the turn a second acknowledge is required (see section 31.4.5). The ECDIS system performs turns using planned radius. i i Automatic route steering can be used with predefined monitored route. It can be activated when vessel is located inside a channel of monitored route. Steerin it uto i ot The figure above demonstrates performance of the automatic route steering. I I I I I I S I I Figure above to understand how location of Dynamic WPT is defined when "NAVI" steering mode is used. Steerin it uto i ot i i i i Steering is course controlled with set radius between waypoints, if wind, current etc. effects the ship, the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting away from planned route. The system has three means to prevent drifting away from the planned route. They are most effective when used together. If cross track error is used alone, then your ship stabilises typically in a constant off track position. The means are: x Measured cross track error from the center line, which is always active x Drift compensation available from Route Parameters x Gyro error compensation available from Route Parameters During turns, if wind, current etc. effects the ship, the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn which is displayed on radar screen. i I Set heading Set radius Radius control Dynamic waypoint position Design before execution Full curved EBL on radar screen Wind, current etc. compensation in linear parts between WPT. Wind, current etc. compensation in turns Needs gyro Needs log Precision of position equipment automatic automatic yes yes yes yes low gain no yes yes good2 ii i Route steering requires that the position filter is used. For details see section 19.8 "Filter Operation". If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without the filter, you get alert "470 Disabled: Needs filter on" and "471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO". First change mode selector back to "AUTO" or "HAND" in YOKOGAWA autopilot panel then switch Kalman filter "ON". After that try again select "NAVI" mode. Ship heading must point to the next waypoint and vessel must be located inside the channel limits of route, otherwise an alert "468 Disabled - out of course" or "477 Disabled: Out of channel" is given. If you loose the filter position while you perform automatic route steering, you get first alert "475 Route: Needs filter on" then alert "506 Use Heading Control" 2 Precision of position is good with LORAN and GPS. Steerin it uto i ot i Track i i Activate route steering by selecting mode "NAVI" in the YOKOGAWA autopilot panel. If "NAVI" is selected, indication "Track" appears in Route Monitor window of ECDIS display. If the ECDIS did not accept the requested route steering mode, then there is an "Autopilot Conflict" indication in Route Monitor window of the ECDIS Display. Also alerts "470 Disabled: Needs filter on" and "471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO" appear. In YOKOGAWA steering control unit text "Caution-01 CHANGE TO AUTO" appears with buzzer sound. When route steering is not used, there is an empty indication in Route Monitor window of the ECDIS Display. There are several reasons why the requested route steering mode cannot be accepted: Alert "470 Disabled: Needs filter on" informs you that you didn't have the Kalman filter operative and selected in ON position at the time of request. Route steering requires that you use Kalman filter, because the filter eliminates sudden jumps of the position and thus prevents unpredictable manuevers of your ship. Check your selection of the sensors. See more information at Filter Operation. Alert "490 Disabled: Needs log sensor" informs you that the Kalman filter did not have an independent speed source. You need either a log, a dual-axis log or two position receivers. Check your selection of the sensors. See more information at Filter Operation. Alert "468 Disabled: Out of course" informs you that the current heading of your ship and the required set heading to start the route steering has more difference than set by the operator in the Route start limit angle of Route Parameters. Alert "471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO" informs you that ECDIS and YOKOGAWA autopilot cannot perform route steering mode. First change mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO" then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. Alert "477 Disabled: Out of channel" informs you that the current location of ship is not inside channel of monitored route. Alert "464 Route: No selected route" informs you that there is no route selected for route monitoring. Alert "465 Route: Illegal WPT" informs you that the there is a route selected for route monitoring, but the selection of the next or final waypoint is missing or illegal. Steerin it uto i ot i i Automatic route steering navigation tries to keep the ship always inside the channel limits and going to next waypoint. Well before the next waypoint, there will be an alert 485 ROUTE WPT PREWARING. As soon as the alert appears verify that the maneuver is safe and there are no dangerous targets. If the maneuver can be performed press the ALERT ACK pushbutton on the ECDIS control unit. If the maneuver is impossible you can leave the automatic route steering changing "NAVI" to "AUTO" or to "HAND" mode in YOKOGAWA autopilot control unit. TURN IS ALWAYS ENABLED. THE ONLY WAY TO DISABLE THE AUTOMATIC TURN IS TO SELECT ANOTHER STEERING MODE EXCEPT "NAVI" FROM YOKOGAWA AUTOPILOT Note that alert 485 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of the maneuver. See the figure below. At the moment the next waypoint is about to be reached, there will be a second alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert". Note that also alert 451 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of the maneuver. See the figure below.: re arnin oint roac oint ee er oint ay oint a ar re arn ti e a ar a roac ti e for ar in istance f ra ius en of turn As soon as the ship arrives to the wheel over point the ECDIS sends a new course command to the autopilot and the manoeuvre is started. During a manoeuvre the radar display and ECDIS display shows the CURVED EBL indicating the planned radius for manoeuvre. After acknowledge of alert "485 ROUTE: WPT prewarning" the text "Ass. Appr. enabled" appears in Route Monitor window of ECDIS display. After acknowledge of the waypoint approach alert the text "Ass. Turn enabled" appears in Route Monitor window of ECDIS display. During the turn the text "Assisted Turn" appears in Route Monitor window of ECDIS display. Steerin it uto i ot Approaching the last waypoint will give an alert "458 Route: Last WPT approach". With YOKOGAWA autopilot one should leave "NAVI" mode of the YOKOGAWA autopilot before performing acknowledge of the alert 458. This will terminate the route correctly. If one acknowledge alert 458, when YOKOGAWA autopilot is still in "NAVI" mode, then the route steering is automatically terminated and system generates alert "471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO". Steerin it uto i ot i The alerts relevant to the Steering are of two types (permanent and intermittent). Permanent alerts below are available regardless of the used steering mode: x x x x Outside Channel red color of the "Off track" value orange color text "Outside Channel" Out of Gate is indicated by orange text. Out of gate indicates that, if the vessel continues using the current course, then the vessel will be outside of the channel at wheel over point. Permanent alert below is available only during route steering mode: x Rate of Turn Limit is indicated by orange text Intermittent audio/visual alerts appear as follows: x x visual alert and buzzer is located in ECDIS control unit. alert number and text is visible on the lower right corner of the ECDIS screen (see example below) Typical intermittent alerts not described in other chapters are: Alert "457 Route: Outside chl limits", which appears if the own ship is outside the planned channel. Alert "455 Route: off course", which appears, if the system needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in Installation parameters) to keep the track. This alert is repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition continues. Alert "456 Route: WPT approach error", which appears, if because of for example decreasing speed the own ship is more than waypoint approach alert time + 100 seconds away from the wheel over point after the user have already acknowledged alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" to enable the next automatic turn. After the alert 456 the next turn is not enabled and the system will generate a new alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" when appropriate. Alert "460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed", which appears, if the set radius value together with the current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set in Route Parameter Max. rate of turn. Steerin it uto i ot Alert "461 Route: ROT will be exceed", which appears, if the planned radius for next waypoint together with the current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set in Route Parameter Max. rate of turn. This alert is activated if the own ship is within value WPT approach alert time set in Route Parameters from the wheel over point, Alert "469 Autopilot: off course", which appears, if the autopilot needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in Installation parameters for Track mode). This alert is repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition continues. Alert "471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO", which tells that ECDIS and YOKOGAWA autopilot cannot perform Track steering mode. First change mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO" then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. Alert "475 Route: Needs filter on", which appears, if the position from the Kalman filter is not available. This alert is repeated every 15 seconds, if the condition continues. Alert "476 Route: Needs log sensor", which appears, if the position from the Kalman filter cannot be compared against an independently operating log. This alert is repeated every 15 seconds, if the condition continues. Alert "488 Integrated Steering lost", which appears, if the connection to the autopilot is lost during automatic Route Steering and the used integrated steering mode cannot be continued. NOTE: Normally you get first alert "480 Autopilot Receive error" Alert "497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail", if no gyro data is received or if conditions of alert 475 or 476 has been valid for last minute. Alert "506 Route:Use AUTO control" is instruction for user to change steering mode to AUTO. This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Track mode (i.e. alert 475 or 476 has been valid 10-15 seconds). Alert "511 Route:Auto resume disable", if alert 471 has been generated and later condition for alert 471 disappears without changing steering mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO" or "HAND". First change steering mode to "AUTO" or "HAND" then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. Alert "512 Use NFU rudder control", if rudder servo unit cannot be controlled by YOKOGAWA steering control unit, this alert is generated to request a change to Non Follow Up control of rudder(s). First change using System Selector Switch from "FU" to "NFU" then use Non-Follow Up steering lever to control rudder(s). Alert "514 Route:Complete turn", this alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Track mode during turn (i.e. alert 475 or 476 has been valid 10-15 seconds) . Vessel will complete the turn with planned conditions. Alert "515 Conflict - NAVI Compl. turn" which tells that ECDIS and YOKOGAWA autopilot cannot perform Track steering mode after turn. Autopilot uses planned radius to complete the turn. After turn is completed, first change mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO" then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled to start Track steering mode again. Alert "516 Autopilot: Drift limit", which appears, if the autopilot needs more than a set limit to compensate drift(the limit is available in Installation parameters for Track mode (max drift compensation)). This alert is repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition continues. Alert "788 System Frozen", appears as an early warning indication that the system may enter state of freeze. You need to restart ECDIS EC1000C processor. Steerin it uto i ot i i i i i i Often the route steering is interrupted by a collision avoidance manoeuvre, but there are also several other reasons to interrupt the route steering. There are several possibilities to set the collision avoidance or any other manoeuvre: x x x Use Non-Follow Up steering lever to control directly rudder pumps Use Follow Up rudder control (Change mode from "NAVI" to "HAND"). Use local Autopilot Heading control (Change mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO"). Now the route steering is disabled until mode "NAVI" in YOKOGAWA Autopilot panel is selected again. Note that for going back to route steering the ship heading must point to the next waypoint and vessel must be located inside the channel limits, otherwise an alert is given. Steerin it uto i ot i There are two cases that the automatic route turn must be stopped or modified. x x Because the turn cannot be performed up to the final value. Because the turn which ship perform goes outside of the planned turn. ( Too fast or too slow). To stop turn, change steering mode from "NAVI" to "AUTO" on YOKOGAWA Steering control unit. i What do you want to do Use different final value of set course How to do Problem is that radius control is only available in steering mode NAVI. As soon as you change steering mode to something else the vessel stop following radius. Below is what you can do x Change from "NAVI" to "AUTO". This stop turning completely as current gyro heading is selected as new set course for Autopilot. Then set new final value of set course and select suitable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning. Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately radius (i.e. equal rudder angle than before). Then change from "NAVI" to "HAND". Continue manual steering. Change from "NAVI" to NFU. Then use NFU steering lever. Continue manual steering. x x Compensate too fast turning As soon as you change steering mode to something else then "NAVI" the vessel stop following radius. Below is what you can do x Change from "NAVI" to "AUTO". This stop turning completely as current gyro heading is selected as new set course for Autopilot. Then set final value of set course and select suitable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning. Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately larger radius (i.e. smaller rudder angle than before). Then change from "NAVI" to "HAND". Continue manual steering. Change from "NAVI" to NFU. Continue manual steering. x x Compensate too slow turning As soon as you change steering mode to something else then "NAVI" the vessel stop following radius. Below is what you can do x Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately smaller radius (i.e. higher rudder angle than before). Then change from "NAVI" to "HAND". Continue manual steering. Change from "NAVI" to NFU. Continue manual steering. x i Accurate route steering is defined as small cross track error when automatically following the route. Two of the Route Parameters - Drift compensation and Gyro error compensation - have a significant effect for accuracy of route steering. If you need most accurate route steering, then both of these parameters should be enabled. Before activating the Gyro error compensation, see section 19.5 "Gyro Error Correction" to know the possible methods for gyro error compensation. Steerin it uto i ot i i x x x i i In NAVI Mode Speed Data(serial) from ECDIS only. In AUTO Mode:Direct input(LOG Speed) to Autopilot or Manual Speed which set in Autopilot. – In HAND Mode:N/A i x x The operator may select among ECONOMY, PRECISION 1 and PRECISION 2 by using the OPERATION MODE button. Control strategy (ECONOMY, PRECISION 1 and PRECISION 2 ) selects course-keeping accuracy. ii x x i The operator may select among BALLAST, MIDDLE and FULL by using the DRAFT MODE button. Load condition (BALLAST, MIDDLE and FULL ) selects rudder gain. Steerin it uto i ot i i x The ECDIS control unit ALERT ACK lamp goes on. i i x Type of alert is displayed on the display ECDIS display as number and text. x Alert is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALERT ACK button. x List of typical alerts: 451 452 455 456 458 460 461 468 469 470 471 475 476 485 497 506 511 512 514 515 516 Route: WPT approach alert Route: Turning disabled Route: Off course Route: WPT approach error Route: Last WPT approach Pilot: ROT will be exceed Route: ROT will be exceed Disabled - out of course Autopilot: Off course Disabled: Needs filter ON AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO Route: Needs filter ON Route: Needs log sensor Route: WPT prewarning Route: Stop - Sensor Fail Route: Use AUTO control Route: Auto resume disable Use NFU rudder control Route: NAVI complete turn Conflict - NAVI complete turn Autopilot: Drift limit Errors should not happen during normal operation. They are related to internal problems. i x x x x The ECDIS control unit's ALARM ACK lamp goes on Type of alert is displayed on the display ECDIS screen as number and text alert is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALARM ACK button List of typical alerts: 480 488 Auto pilot receive error Integrated steering lost Steerin it uto i ot i To activate Autopilot display: 1. 2. 3. i i i You can open Autopilot display on side bar of ECDIS. There is various information available about Autopilot's state. Move cursor to right hand side over Route monitor window. In mouse guidance box text "Menu/ /Select Sidebar" appears. Press right mouse button to open Sidebar menu. Select Autopilot in the menu. Set ourse o er roun a ue Set turnin ra ius at Set ara eters for oa in con ition an trac steerin accuracy uto i ot a ar re te t Steerin o e Set a ue for ea in a cu ate at uto i ot arnin oran e te t ff trac fro anne but may need full channel limit area vessel may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route. Below is a summary of effect of various environmental conditions i Environment conditions Calm sea.Steerin it uto i ot i ii i The system has many available steering modes. no wind. but may need full channel limit area vessel may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit High wind and/or current Vessel is drifting Slow change of wind and/or current There is no compensation for change Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) There is no compensation for change Slow change of speed There is no compensation for change Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) There is no compensation for change . but may need full channel limit area Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route. no current Moderate wind and/or current Heading control = "AUTO" COG is about the same as Set Course in Auto Pilot Vessel has at tendency to drift i Track = "NAVI" Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: vessel follows monitored route Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel follows monitored route in an off-track position inside the channel limit Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route Drift compensation set as OFF: vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route inside the channel limit Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: Vessel goes fast inside or outside of turn. but may need full channel limit area. Drift compensation set as ON: Vessel follows monitored route. Track Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: vessel follows monitored route Drift compensation set as ON: vessel follows monitored route. but may need full channel limit area Moderate wind and/or current Drift compensation set as OFF: Vessel goes inside or outside of turn High wind and/or current There is no position control of turn.1. Slow change of wind and/or current There is no position control of turn.4 "Navigation parameters setting". Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. Drift compensation set as OFF: Vessel goes fast inside or outside of turn. see section 27. Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. but may go outside channel limit area. There is no position control of turn. Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) Slow change of speed There is no position control of turn. no wind. There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: Vessel goes inside or outside of turn. There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: Vessel goes inside or outside of turn. Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit. Drift Compensation is set ON/OFF in Ship and Route Parameters of Navigation Parameters setting. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF: Vessel follows monitored route. Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) NOTE. no current Heading control There is no position control of turn. . Turn is controlled by rudder angle limit.Steerin it uto i ot i Environment conditions Calm sea. For more information. Study situation. Acknowledge alerts. Change immediately to manual control of rudder. rudder order is frozen for last value in order x to approximately continue rate of turn. x If ship is turning.Use AUTO" on ECDIS" Alert “498 Use manual rudder control” is generated at ECDIS. x x If ship is in linear part. x i Expected system performance x What operator should do Change immediately to manual control of rudder. Alert "471 AP mode conflict . Rudder x order is frozen for last value in order to approximately continue ahead. Alert “497 Route StopSensor fail. i i Associated alerts Immediately x Autopilot Alarm "EMERGENCY-05 Gyro Compass" is generated on Auto pilot control panel Sensor alert “755: Gyro error (Autopilot FAP2000)” is generated at ECDIS.Steerin it uto i ot i i ii Below is a summary of system behaviour in various failures when "NAVI" steering mode is selected to be used. x x Reminder x Repeat every 2 minutes x . Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. x Within few seconds x x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. Study situation.Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 ConflictNAVI compl. Expected system performance Within few seconds x x After Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.Steerin it uto i ot i Associated alerts x Sensor alert. last-set heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector is kept in position "NAVI". Acknowledge alerts. for example Alert “705: Gyro error” or “706: Gyro error. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO..” Alert “402 No heading available” and alert "400 Filter: position Unreliable".” x If ship is in linear part. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" x x i i x x x x i What operator should do Acknowledge alerts. x x x Acknowledge alerts Study situation. Alert “497 Route StopSensor fail” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict . If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x . Study situation. Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel. actual heading is used as set heading. If ship is turning. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict . Study situation. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes x Acknowledge alerts.” x If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict . Study situation.Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 ConflictNAVI compl.” x Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. “712…716: Position equipment error”. If ship is turning.Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" x If ship is in linear part. etc. Alert “476 Route Needs log sensor” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control" If vessel is in turning part of route alert "514 Route: NAVI complete turn" Expected system performance What operator should do x x x x Acknowledge alerts. last-set heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector is kept in position "NAVI". actual heading is used as set heading. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x Guidance for navigator x x x x After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes x Alert “476 Route Needs log sensor” x Reminder x x x Within 10 minutes After Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. x x x x x x x x .Steerin it uto i ot Associated alerts x Sensor alert. Acknowledge alerts Study situation. Study situation. for example Alert “708: Log error”. Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel. Acknowledge alerts.. Study situation. Study situation. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO.” x Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.” Alert "501 Route: Needs higher Speed.” Alert “410 Filter: Pos source change.Steerin it uto i ot Associated alerts x Expected system performance What operator should do x x x x x x Alert “408 Filter: Speed below xx. . Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel.Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" x If ship is in linear part. actual heading is used as set heading. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict . x Reminder x x x Within 10 minutes After Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. Acknowledge alerts. Acknowledge alerts. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes x x x x x x x After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes x Alert “501 Route: Needs higher Speed. Acknowledge alerts. Study situation.” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict . If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. Acknowledge alerts Study situation. Study situation. Study situation..” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control" If vessel is in turning part of route alert "514 Route: NAVI complete turn" x Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Study situation. Study situation. lastset heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector x is kept in position "NAVI". x x x x x x x x If ship is turning.Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 Conflict-NAVI compl. Study situation. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts.” x x <CONTINUED on next page> . x x Acknowledge alerts. Expected system performance What operator should do x x Acknowledge alerts. Alerts “400 Filter: Position unreliable” and “406 Route: Course jump possible. etc. Study situation. then dead reckoning is based on last plausible speed from position sensors. If you have log or dual-axis log. Study situation. x x After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes x If vessel is in linear part of route alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control" If vessel is in turning part of route alert "514 Route: NAVI complete turn" Alert “475 Route Needs filter ON” x x After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes x x Reminder x x x Within 10 minutes x Alert “497 Route StopSensor fail. The source indication for SOG and COG is “(LAST)”. then dead reckoning is based on them and gyro. This is indicated by showing own ship position.Steerin it uto i ot ii Associated alerts x Alert “712…716: Position equipment error” OR x Within 30 seconds x Kalman filter detects jump. Guidance for navigator x x x Acknowledge alerts. If you have log or dual-axis log.” x Kalman Filter is switched Off and system uses dead reckoning for positioning. Study situation. SOG and COG in red. Study situation. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. actual heading is used as set heading. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x x If ship is turning.. . After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict .” x Expected system performance x If ship is in linear part. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO. What operator should do x x If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict .Steerin it uto i ot <CONTINUED from previous page> Associated alerts After Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" Acknowledge alerts Study situation. lastset heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector x is kept in position "NAVI".Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 Conflict-NAVI compl. Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel. .” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict . Study situation. Study situation. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. If ship is turning.Steerin it uto i ot P ii i Expected system performance What end user should do x x Associated alerts Precondition If sensors in Filter calculation are NOT inside user-selected position discrepancy limit. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" x If ship is in linear part. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning Acknowledge alerts. Study situation. Study situation. Study situation.” x Alert “497 Route StopSensor fail. Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO. actual heading is used as set heading. lastset heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector is kept in position "NAVI". x x x x x x x x x . If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes x Alert “478 Route: Needs good Pos” x Reminder x x x Within 10 minutes After Alert “497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. x Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes x Alert “407 Position discrepancy” Alert “478 Route: Needs good Pos” If vessel is in linear part of route alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control" If vessel is in turning part of route alert "514 Route: NAVI complete turn" Acknowledge alerts.Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 ConflictNAVI compl. Acknowledge alerts. Acknowledge alerts Study situation. x x x Guidance for navigator x x x Acknowledge alerts. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" x If ship is in linear part. last-set heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector is kept in position "NAVI". If ship is turning. Acknowledge alerts.” x x x x Acknowledge alerts Study situation.Steerin it uto i ot i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds x Expected system performance What end user should do x x Alert “488 Steering: Stop-system fail” and “480 Trackpilot receiver error” generated at ECDIS. Study situation..Use AUTO" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part of route alert "515 Conflict-NAVI compl. If vessel is in linear part of route alert "471 AP mode conflict . actual heading is used as set heading. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO. If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x x . Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel. After Alert “488 Route Stop-Sensor fail. If vessel is in linear part of x route alert "471 AP mode conflict . If ship is turning. last-set heading and radius are used to complete the turn as long as Autopilot mode selector is kept in position "NAVI". If vessel is in turning part then either keep steering mode NAVI to complete the turn or change to steering mode AUTO to stop turning x x x . actual heading is used as set heading. Autopilot uses last Plausible Speed from ECDIS.Use AUTO" in x ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 Navigation" on Autopilot control panel If vessel is in turning part x of route alert "515 Conflict-NAVI compl. Turn" in ECDIS and alarm "CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL TURN" in Autopilot control panel.” x Alert “488 Steering: Stopsystem fail” generated at the ECDIS. Expected system performance What end user should do x x x x x Acknowledge alerts. After the turn is completed the alert changes in ECDIS as "471 AP mode conflict . Acknowledge alerts Study situation. If vessel is in linear part then Change steering mode to AUTO.. Study situation.Use AUTO" and in Autopilot control panel as "CAUTION-01 Navigation" If ship is in linear part.Steerin it uto i ot i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds After Alert “488 Route Stop-Sensor fail. During the turn you can monitor how your ship performs the intended maneuver against the plan by comparing the Curved EBL position and your current your ship's position. This EBL is available on the ECDIS display and selected radar displays. Locked Curved EBL during turn.Steerin it uto i ot i i The curved EBL is a control tool to monitor automatic operation of Track (="NAVI") steering mode. When your ship starts a turn initiated by Automatic Route steering the Curved EBL is locked to its position. . Curved EBL at the wheel over point. After the WPT Approach but before start of turn the curved EBL display next intended turn. even when steering without the Autopilot FAP-2000. The on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of your ships drawn in true scale to successive future positions. The predictor can be used in every steering-state. in 30 second intervals. and it is available in the information area.Steerin it uto i ot i i The Predictor is a tool for estimating your ship’s future positions and behaviour. Predictor shows drift Predictor in a turn . spin the scrollwheel to select a time then push the scrollwheel. To set the time for the predictor. Place the cursor on the text "Predictor" then use the left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF. put the cursor on the time indication next to Predictor. The predictor is calculated using current: Ɣ Docking speed components: Ɣ Transversal bow speed Ɣ Transversal stern speed Ɣ Longitudinal center speed Ɣ Rate of turn These components are assumed to be stable during the prediction period. The time from current position to the last of the predicted position may be selected by the between 30 and 180 seconds. The current setting is shown in the mouse functions area. Steerin it uto i ot This page intentionally left blank. . 2.i i i i This chapter describes the steering functions available with the optional Autopilot PR-6000. Mode selection unit Mode selection switch Non-Follow up unit . i i Below is the control layout of the autopilot steering control unit. Autopilot PR-6000 control panel 1. 3. Repeater switch 12. Max rudder angle selection unit 20. option Override steering method. 5. RC/Nav (Mode selector: RC) Remote Control steering on port wing. In this mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and steering mode. Order rudder angle indicator 17. option Remote Control steering on starboard wing. 7. RC/P/W (Mode selector: RC). Alert unit 19. System selection switch 16. Max rudder angle selection switch i Note that all steering-related functions are available only if the ECDIS system is also connected to an optional Autopilot PR-6000 processor. PS display lamps 18. Repeater synchronising knob 11. Steering wheel 14. option i Set the Mode selection switch to "HAND". RC/W/H (Mode selector: RC). Helm unit 13. it I I uto i ot Non-Follow up steering lever Auto steering control knobs Auto unit Course setting knob Remote control steering selection unit Repeater unit 10. option Remote Control steering on wheel house. . RC/S/W (Mode selector: RC). The Autopilot PR-6000 has the following steering modes: x x x x x x x x Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND) Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO) NFU mode for Non-follow up steering mode (Mode selector: NFU) Track mode automatic Route steering. 9. 8.Steerin 4. System selection unit 15. 6. In this case. When the loading condition changes remarkably. and the set course is shown in the SET. turns are controlled by the rudder angle. however. see section 32.O. You can set the desired rudder angle limit using the Rudder limit knob. Bar graph selection indicator Data selection indicator Steering mode indicator Power System indicator indicator Bar graph display Data display Group alarm indicator Individual alarm indicator No. The initial value of the setting course is the ship's heading at that time. At this time. To change the course. perform auto course changing by 20º of port and starboard two or three times. COURSE display. Turns are controlled by the rudder limit or Rate of Turn and initiated by the operator.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i The operator sets the required heading of the vessel by operating the Course Setting knob. While in the NFU steering mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and indication of the steering mode. This value becomes the turn of rate order during automatic course changing. For more information.T and shows the rate of turn (unit deg/min). then he can use steering with the non-follow up lever.5 "Other Operations with the TOKYO KEIKI PR6000.or + while pressing the DATA CHANGE switch. At this time.DEV: COURSE DEVIATION) is shown in the bar graph and AUTO is lit. pressing the DATA CHANGE switch (located at the lower right) shows the turn rate order and the displayed value can be changed by pressing . and observe the state for approx. AUTO goes off when the ship is on the new course. yawing may be large at the departure. press the Course setting knob and release it when desired course appears. Turn the Mode selection switch to the AUTO position. The setting." Pressing the AUTO unit <-SEL switch a number of times lights the data selection indicator R. 15 minutes. See the figure below. cannot be changed during automatic course changing.1 AUTO SET COURSE display Rudder limit angle indicator When a new course is set. . i The operator sets the Steering mode selector to NFU. the course deviation (CO. ) At this time pressing the Enable switch button while pressing the steering location switch moves the mode to the remote steering mode and the lamp of the steering location comes on.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i In the Open Sea mode. the planned track is followed at the maximum accuracy between waypoints and also during turns (position-controlled turn). (The steering mode indicator RC blinks. i Steering mode indicator Steering location selection switch (P/W. not the selected condition. W/H. the operation is same as in HAND mode. the mode becomes the RC mode. the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn. i When the Mode selection switch mode is set to RC. Turn the Remote control steering knob to steer. the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn. The state of the steering mode indicator RC changes from blinking to lighting. When approaching a next waypoint. The hand steering is in use as long as RC blinks. the planned track is followed at moderate and economical accuracy between waypoints and also during turns (position-controlled turn). In the All Waters mode. S/W) Nav entry switch Enable switch Remote control selection unit Steering mode selection switch Remote control steering position . When approaching a next waypoint. In this case. the heading at the time override steering became active is set as heading. At this time beeps sound intermittently from the steering stand then the selected steering mode indicator blinks. Press the ON/OFF override steering switch to enable control of the steering from this unit. Ready Ready lamp lamp Override indicator Override steering reset switch Dimmer knob Dimmer knob 2.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i i i i Starting override steering: 1. Override reset unit . by the Override steering knob. 2. Override steering knob Ready lamp Override steering switch Servo loop fail lamp Buzzer Dimmer knob FU override unit Stopping override steering: 1. Push the ON/OFF switch to show ON in the FU override unit or push the RESET switch on the Override reset unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering mode. If the steering mode was AUTO. Confirm that the Ready lamp in the FU unit is ON. you have to turn the mode selection switch to another steering mode and select the RC mode again. Auto resume is disabled if the steering mode was RC/NAV. and the rudder stops when the lever is returned to the neutral position. Confirm that the Ready lamp in the NFU controller is ON. Stopping override steering: 1. Override steering level Pin stopper Override indicator Ready lamp Override steering reset switch Dimmer knob 3. the heading at the time the override steering became active is set as heading. . beeps sounds from the steering stand then the selected steering mode blinks.Steerin it I I uto i ot i Starting override steering: 1. The ON lamp in the override reset unit is lit. Auto resume is disabled if the steering mode was RC/NAV. The rudder is taken when the lever is turned. Pull out the pin stopper inserted in the override NFU controller and turn the lever to the desired direction. If the steering mode was AUTO. 2. NFU override controller 2. you have to turn the mode selection switch to the other steering mode and select the RC mode again. In this case. Push the RESET switch on the override reset unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering mode. At this time. x x x x Select "Goto AW" at the route monitor dialog box in the ECDIS: Set the Mode selection switch on the autopilot control unit to RC. On the autopilot control unit. Available for use when the position source is outputting accurate position. Automatic route steering can be used with a predefined monitored route. etc. On the Autopilot control unit. Wind. The Goto OS and Goto AW steering modes can be activated when your ship is located inside a channel of a monitored route and in the linear part of a monitored route. Can be used when the position source is outputting accurate position. press the NAV and Enable switch buttons together on the remote control steering unit to activate the automatic steering mode. compensation in turns Needs gyro Needs log Precision of position equipment Needs direct sog/cog sensor i GOTO OS Automatic Automatic Yes Yes Yes Low gain Yes Yes Yes Good No GOTO AW Automatic Automatic Yes Yes Yes High gain Yes Yes Yes High Yes . compensation in linear parts between WPT. current. x x x x Select "Goto OS" at the route monitor dialog box in the ECDIS: Set the Mode selection switch on the autopilot control unit to RC. etc. i Set course Set radius Radius control Design before execution Full curved EBL on radar screen Wind. press the NAV and Enable buttons together on the remote control steering unit to activate the automatic steering mode.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i There are two types of automatic route steering: open sea (=Goto OS) mode or all waters (=Goto AW) mode. current. Steerin it I I uto i ot i 1. First select a route in the monitor mode on the ECDIS. The steering mode indicator "RC" on the autopilot panel lights continuously. steering control is in HAND mode. Remote control selection unit NAV-Ready lamp NAV Enable switch Mode selection switch 3. Press simultaneously NAV and Enable switch buttons. 4. the NAV-Ready lamp comes on. Note that before you press NAV and Enable switch buttons. which is located in the To WPT field. . After you have selected a route in the monitor mode and desired steering mode (Goto OS or Goto AW). Turn the Mode selection switch to RC. 5. 2. Then open the route monitor window. i i Do the following to activate route steering. Therefore it is important that before turning Mode selection switch to RC. check that wheel in center position (mid ship). Select either Goto OS or Goto AW from the list box. the indication "Goto OS Great circle" appears in the route monitor window. the indication Goto OS appears in the route monitor window. . Goto AW When Goto AW is activated.Steerin it I I uto i ot Goto OS When Go to OS is activated. If the planned course to approach a To WPT is defined using Great Circle. the indication "Goto AW" appears in the route monitor window. If the planned course to approach a To WPT is defined using Great Circle. the indication "Goto AW Great circle" appears in the route monitor window. Remedy: Check your selection of the sensors. Remedy: Check the TO and FINAL waypoints. You need either a log.8 "Filter Operation". There are several requirements to start route steering. see section 19. Remedy: Steer vessel heading inside the limit of the required set heading. a dual-axis log or two position receivers. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode when the route monitoring of the system detects that your ship is turning. Remedy: Check and reset correct To WPT for route monitoring. Remedy: Steer vessel inside channel and try again. there is no indication of route steering mode in the route monitor window. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode without an independent speed source. as shown right. The user guidance window may appear when you try to start any route steering mode or if you try to change one route steering mode to another. When you attempt to activate route steering without fulfilling preconditions. Remedy: Switch the Kalman filter "ON" and try again. one of the following user guidance dialog boxes appears: Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode without the Kalman filter. .Steerin it I I uto i ot i i ii i When route steering is not used or the ECDIS did not accept the requested route steering mode. but your location is not within the turn. For more information. When you make a selection in the route monitor window in ECDIS. Reason: You tried to activate route steering outside of channel limits. user guidance may appear if preconditions are not fulfilled. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode when the selection of the TO or FINAL waypoint is missing or illegal. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode when there is a difference between current heading and the required set heading that is greater than set with Route start limit angle in the Route Parameters dialog box. Alert "477 Disabled: Out of channel" informs you that the current location of your ship is not inside a channel of a monitored route. Remedy: Check that GPS in differential mode is selected in the Sensors menu. If the precondition exists when Goto OS or Goto AW is selected.8 "Filter Operation" for more information. First change the mode from "RC" to "AUTO" then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. because the filter eliminates sudden jumps of the position and thus prevents unpredictable maneuvers of your ship. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode when your ship's speed is less than defined for route steering. Check your selection of the sensors. Remedy: Steer vessel to a linear part of the monitored route then try again. Route steering requires that you use the Kalman filter. Reason: If alert 471 has been generated and later condition for alert 471 disappears without changing steering mode from RC to AUTO or HAND.Use AUTO" informs you that the ECDIS and the autopilot cannot start the route steering mode. Alert "471 RC/NAV . Alert "470 Disabled: Needs filter on" informs you that the Kalman filter was not ON at the time of the request. . Remedy: Switch off "bad" sensor in the Sensors page to remove alert 407. See section 19. Reason: You tried to start a route steering mode when your ship is in the turning part of a monitored route. Alert "468 Disabled: Out of course" informs you that there is a difference between the current heading of your ship and the required set heading than that set by the operator in the Route start limit angle of route parameters.8 "Filter Operation" for more information.Steerin it I I uto i ot Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode without SOG/COG reference.TC STOP . Alert "490 Disabled: Needs log sensor" informs you that the Kalman filter did not have an independent speed source. one of following alerts occur. a dual-axis log or two position receivers. See section 19. but it is missing when you pressed the NAV and Enable switch buttons. Remedy: Check your selection of the sensors. Reason: You tried to activate the Goto AW steering mode without a high-precision positioning device (GPS in differential correction mode). Check your selection of the sensors. Remedy: Accelerate speed over the set limit then try again. Remedy: First change the steering mode to AUTO or HAND then check that the preconditions for route steering are fulfilled before changing back to RC. You need either a log. Reason: You tried to activate a route steering mode when Alert 407 Position discrepancy is active. Steerin it I I uto i ot Alert "464 Route: No selected route" informs you that the there is no route selected for route monitoring. Alert "518 Disabled: Not accepted" informs you that the 30-second timeout period has passed after you pressed the NAV and Enable buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. but the selection of the next or final waypoint is missing or illegal. Alert "517 Disabled: In turn" informs you that the current location of your ship is in a turn of a monitored route. Another reason can be that your ship has moved into a turning part of a monitored route before you pressed the NAV and Enable switch buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. Reselect correct TO WPT for monitoring. you have 30 seconds to press the NAV and Enable switch buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. After you select GotoOS or GotoAW at the ECDIS. Alert "465 Route: Illegal WPT" informs you that the there is a route selected for route monitoring. is linear part of track) and the track control system steering mode is Ass.e. Steer to a linear part of a monitored route to activate the track steering mode. . Alert "510 Disabled: Out of turn" informs you that your ship is located outside of the graphical area of turning (i. Turn or Track Turn. otherwise alert 518 is given. Change the steering mode from "RC" to "AUTO". by changing "RC" to "AUTO" or to "HAND" mode in autopilot control unit. when the steering mode is Goto AW. the text "GotoAW Turn" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. If the maneuver is not possible. the ECDIS sends a new course command to the autopilot and the maneuver is started. the alert "485 ROUTE:WPT PREWARING" is given. indicating the planned radius for maneuver. and the autopilot alarm occurs. when the steering mode is Goto OS. the current heading value is used for Set Course value. the text "GoOS Appr. enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. Note that alert 485 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of a maneuver. See the figure below. ETC. TURN IS ALWAYS ENABLED. Approaching the last waypoint will give an alarm "458 Route: Last WPT approach".Steerin it I I uto i ot i i Automatic route steering navigation tries to keep your ship inside the channel limits and going to the next waypoint. During a maneuver. During the turn. the text "GotoOS Turn" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. when TOKYO KEIKI autopilot is still in “RC” mode. During the turn. When alarm 471 occurs. After you acknowledge the waypoint approach alert. THE ONLY WAY TO DISABLE THE AUTOMATIC TURN IS TO SELECT ANOTHER STEERING MODE FROM THE AUTOPILOT. when the steering mode is Goto AW. If you have acknowledged alert 485. At the moment you are about to arrive at the next waypoint. Note also that alert 451 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of a maneuver. This will terminate the route correctly. then alert 451 is indicated (silent). "RC" OR "AUTO". you can leave the automatic route steering. If one acknowledge alarm 458. Well before arriving at a next waypoint. After the waypoint approach alert is acknowledged. . verify that the maneuver is safe and there are no dangerous targets. then the route steering is automatically terminated and steering control is transferred to the autopilot and ECDIS indicates alarm "471 RC/NAV .TC STOP . press the ALERT ACK button on the ECDIS control unit. enabled" appears in the route monitor window of the ECDIS display. As soon as the alert appears. the radar display and the ECDIS display show the CURVED EBL. FOR EX. With TOKYO KEIKI autopilot one should leave “RC” mode of the TOKYO KEIKI autopilot before performing acknowledge of the alarm 458.Use AUTO". a second alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" appears. the text "GoAW Appr. See the figure below: As soon as your ship arrives to a wheel over point. when the steering mode is Goto OS. If the maneuver is safe. if the condition continues. This alert is repeated every five minutes. The permanent alert show right is available only during the route steering mode: x Rate of Turn Limit is indicated by orange text.Steerin it I I uto i ot i There are two types of route steering alerts: permanent and intermittent. Out of Gate is indicated by orange text. "Outside Channel" is shown in orange. Intermittent steering alerts Intermittent audiovisual alerts appear as follows: x x Visual alert and buzzer are generated at the ECDIS control unit. the time to the waypoint approach alert is more than 100 seconds away from the wheel over point after the operator has already acknowledged alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" (to enable the next automatic turn). if your ship continues using the current course. Alert "455 Route: off course" compares the planned course and actual heading. because of a decrease in speed. then your ship will be outside of the channel at a wheel over point. After the alert 456. Alert "460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed" appears when the set radius value together with the current speed of the rate of turn is over the limit set with Max. . Alert number and text are visible at the lower right corner of the ECDIS screen (see example below) Typical intermittent alerts not described in other chapters are: Alert "457 Route: Outside chl limits" appears when your ship is outside the planned channel. rate of turn in the Route Parameters dialog box. Out of gate indicates that. the next turn is not enabled and the system generates a new alert "451 Route: WPT approach alert" when appropriate. Alert "456 Route: WPT approach error" appears when. Permanent route steering alerts Permanent alerts are available regardless of the steering mode: x x x "Off track" value is shown in red. if the TCS (Track Control System) requires a high attack angle towards the planned course to perform track control. Alert "507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. Your ship will complete the turn with planned conditions. Steer to a linear part of the monitored route to activate the track steering mode. available from position sensor(s) or from bottom track of a dual-axis log.Sensor Fail" if no gyro data is received or if conditions of alert 475 or 476 have been valid for last minute. Alert "506 Route:Use AUTO control" is instruction for the operator to change the steering mode to AUTO.Use AUTO" informs you that the ECDIS and the TOKYO KEIKI autopilot cannot activate the track steering mode. . In this case. alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to Goto OS. This alert is repeated every four minutes. Alert "511 Route:Auto resume disable appears when alert 471 has been generated and later the condition for alert 471 disappears without changing the steering mode from "RC" to "AUTO" or "HAND". Alert "476 Route: Needs log sensor" appears when the position from the Kalman filter cannot be compared against an independently operating log. Alert "505 Route: Use Goto OS" is instruction for the operator to change the steering mode to Goto OS. If the condition continues after 10 minutes. This alert is generated to request a change to Non-Follow Up control of the rudder(s).e.Steerin it I I uto i ot Alert "461 Route: ROT will be exceed" appears when the planned radius for a next waypoint together with the current speed of the rate of turn is over the limit set with Max. Alert "515 RC/NAV-TC STOP . if the condition continues. The steering mode is automatically changed to Goto OS. If the condition continues. This alert is repeated every 15 seconds. First change the mode from "RC" to "AUTO" then check that the preconditions for route steering are fulfilled." appears when Goto AW is used with the Kalman filter but without direct Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG). This alert is repeated every 15 seconds. Alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS". rate of turn in the Route Parameters dialog box. if the condition continues. Alert "514 Route:Use AUTO control" this alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue the Track mode during turn (i. Alert "475 Route: Needs filter on" appears when the position from the Kalman filter is not available. Alert 492 will be repeated every four minutes for the next 10 minutes. This alert is activated if your ship is within the value set for WPT approach alert time in the Route Parameters dialog box. change the mode from "RC" to "AUTO" then check that the preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. appears when alert 492 or 507 has been valid 10 minutes. Alert "488 Steering Stop-System Fail" appears when the connection to the autopilot is lost during automatic route steering and the used integrated steering mode cannot be continued. Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . First use the System Selector Switch to switch to "NFU" then use the Non-Follow Up steering lever to control the rudder(s). NOTE: Normally you get alert "480 Autopilot Receive error" first. Alert "497 Route: Stop . Alert "517 Disabled: In turn" informs you that the current location of your ship is in a turn of a monitored route. This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Goto AW (alert 492 or 507 has been valid two minutes). Alert "492 Route: Needs diff Pos" appears for any use of Goto AW with the Kalman filter but without a highprecision sensor (example: DGPS). This alert is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue the Track mode (alert 475 or 476 has been valid 10-15 seconds). First change the steering mode to "AUTO" or "HAND" then check that the preconditions for route steering are fulfilled. Alert "512 Use NFU rudder control" appears if the rudder servo unit cannot be controlled by the TOKYO KEIKI steering control unit.Use AUTO" informs you that neither the ECDIS nor the TOKYO KEIKI autopilot can activate the track steering mode. alert 475 or 476 has been valid 10-15 seconds). alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS" is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to Goto OS. . (Change mode from "RC" to "NFU").limit" warns you if TCS is unable to get your ship to approach the track. but there are also several other reasons to interrupt the route steering. (Change mode from "RC" to "HAND"). Now the route steering is disabled until the "RC" mode in Autopilot panel is selected again. An alert is triggered if your ship is outside the channel limit and if the cross track error is still increasing. Then.Steerin it I I uto i ot Alert "518 Disabled: Not accepted" informs you that the 30-second timeout period has passed after you pressed the NAV and Enable switch buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. Alert "519 Trackpilot: XTE comp. restart the ECDIS EC1000C processor. otherwise an alert is given. you have 30 seconds to press the NAV and Enable switch buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. otherwise alert 518 is given. Alert "788 System Frozen" appears as an early warning indication that the system may freeze. Use the Non Follow Up steering lever to control the rudder pumps directly. Use the local Autopilot Heading control. There are several possibilities to set the collision avoidance or any other maneuver: x x x Use the HAND steering control. To go back to route steering. In this case. the ship heading must be pointed toward the next waypoint and the ship must be located inside the channel limits. Another reason can be that your ship has moved into a turning part of a monitored route before you pressed the NAV and Enable switch buttons on the TOKYO KEIKI control panel. i i i i i i Often the route steering is interrupted by a collision avoidance maneuver. press the NAV and Enable switch buttons together. After you select "GotoOS" or "GotoAW" at the ECDIS. (Change mode from "RC" to "AUTO"). ). Then change directly from "RC" to "HAND". To stop a turn. Continue manual steering.e. a new turn is RATE controlled using the RATE limit set in the Autopilot control unit. turn is continued according to the RATE control to follow the planned turn. smaller rudder angle than before).e. Below is what you can do: x Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately smaller radius (i. x Compensate too slow turning When changing steering mode from "RC" to "AUTO". change from "AUTO" to "HAND".e. When you set a new course. ( Too fast or too slow. smaller rudder angle than before). x x The turn cannot be performed up to the final value. Below is what you can do: x Use the Course setting knob to set a new value for set course. x . The turn which the ship is to perform goes outside of the planned turn. Then. Continue manual steering.Steerin it I I uto i ot i There are two reasons that an automatic route turn must be stopped or modified. change the steering mode from "RC" to "HAND" on the steering control unit.e. Compensate too fast turning When changing the steering mode from "RC" to "AUTO". a turn is continued according to the RATE control set to follow the planned turn. Continue manual steering or Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately larger radius (i. turn is continued in RATE control to follow planned turn. Below is what you can do: x Set the steering wheel to a suitable angle to continue with a larger radius (i. higher rudder angle than before). Then change from "AUTO" to "HAND". higher rudder angle than before). i What do you want to do Use a different final value for set course How to do When you change the steering mode from "RC" to "AUTO". Continue manual steering or Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately smaller radius (i. Then change directly from "RC" to "HAND". You need either a log. Remedy: Switch off "bad" sensor in Sensors page to remove alert 407. one of following User guidance dialog box appears: Reason: Change of route steering modes without the filter.Steerin it I I uto i ot i The mode of automatic route steering can be changed as follows: Open the route monitor window. If you try to change the route steering mode without fulfilling preconditions. Reason: Change from "Goto AW" to "Goto OS" steering mode without high precision positioning device (GPS in differential correction mode). Remedy: Switch Kalman filter "ON" and try again. Remedy: Accelerate speed of vessel over set limit then try again. . Reason:: Change of route steering mode without sog/cog reference. Remedy: Check your selection of the sensors. Select either "Goto OS" or "Goto AW" in the list box which is located in the "To WPT" field. Reason: Change of route steering mode when Alert "407 Position discrepancy" is active. a dualaxis log or two position receivers. Reason: Change of route steering modes without independent speed source. Remedy: Check your selection of the sensors. Remedy: Check that there is a GPS in differential mode available and selected to be used Reason: Change of route steering mode when speed of vessel is less than defined for route steering. then turn on Drift comp. you can set ADPT/WEATHER course keeping mode OPN or range 0-10 to have more economic sailing.has a significant effect for accuracy of route steering. If you need more accurate route steering. If the rudder is too active.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i Accurate route steering is defined as small cross track error when automatically following the route. . One of the Route Parameters . At the autopilot steering control unit you can set ADPT/WEATHER course keeping mode to CNF (Confined) to increase accuracy of route steering.Drift compensation . Selection between automatic ADPT or manual PID steering control is made by setting ADPT course keeping mode (OPN/CNF). rate of turn (1-9). i i This is the adjustment to limit the rudder motion to the least necessary rudder angle during mode:AUTO steering. permitting a little meandering such as when sailing on the open sea. i The optimum value of the rudder ratio changes depending on the ship's speed. It is a desirable condition that the ship goes straight with a rudder angle as small as possible (a lower angle than 5 degrees is desirable) and few rudder operations (less than 6 times a minute is desirable). The weather adjustment becomes necessary when weather or sea state changes. when the course deviation exceeds the value set as the pilot watch. pilot watch (5-15) and rudder angle limit (5-35). If you select WEATHER PID control (0-10) you have manual PID control in use. Light PID is turned on. Confined (CNF) keeps the ship straight on course. this alert rings. The optimum value of the rate of turn changes depending on the loading condition. i During auto steering. the auto steering adjusting control knobs are weather control (AUTO/0-10). Large rudder may be necessary. Course is kept with the least necessary steering. i i Open sea (OPN) when economic condition is preferred. .Steerin it I I uto i ot i i i i For the PID. rudder ratio (1-9). Lights ADPT and CNF/OPN are turned on. limit System Frozen .Sensor Fail Route: Use Goto OS Route:Use AUTO control Route: Need sog/cog ref Disabled: Out of Turn Route:Auto resume disable Route: Use NFU rudder control Route: Use AUTO control RC/NAV .out of course Disabled: Needs filter ON RC/NAV . Alert can be acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALERT ACK button.TC STOP .Use AUTO Disabled: In turn Disabled: Not accepted Trackpilot: XTE comp.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i i x x x The ECDIS control unit's ALERT ACK lamp goes on.Use AUTO Route: Needs filter ON Route: Needs log sensor Route: WPT prewarning Route: Changed to Goto OS Route: Needs diff Pos Route: Stop . Below is a list of typical alerts. The type of alert is displayed on the ECDIS screen as number and text. 451 452 455 456 458 460 461 468 470 471 475 476 485 489 492 497 505 506 507 510 511 512 514 515 517 518 519 788 Route: WPT approach alert Route: Turning disabled Route: Off course Route: WPT approach error Route: Last WPT approach Pilot: ROT will be exceed Route: ROT will be exceed Disabled .TC STOP . 480 488 Auto pilot receive error Steering Stop-System Fail i To activate the autopilot display: 1. This displays shows various information about Autopilot state. They are related to internal problems. i x x x The ECDIS control unit's ALERT ACK lamp goes on. Alert can be acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALERT ACK button. 2. Press the right mouse button to open the Sidebar menu. 3. The mouse guidance box shows "Menu/ /Select Sidebar". The type of alert is displayed on the ECDIS screen as number and text. Move the cursor over the route monitor window. i i i You can open the autopilot display on the sidebar of ECDIS. Select Autopilot from the menu.3˚/min Set ROT Steering mode OffCrs Rud Limit Failure at Autopilot (red text) Rudder servo Off track < 193 m Caution at Autopilot (red text) Off track from planned Autopilot dialog box Steering mode can be: HAND: Hand steering AUTO: Autopilot steering NFU: NFU Steering OVERRID: Override steering RC/NAV-GOTO OS: Track steering in Open Sea mode .0nm 16. Autopilot RC/NAV-GOTO OS Set course Radius calculated for set ROT Set CSE 227. Below is a list of typical alerts.1˚ Radius ROT 1.Steerin it I I uto i ot Errors should not happen during normal operation. Rudder servo: Rudder feedback signal is missing or rudder servo not working correctly. Change steering mode from "RC" to some other steering mode. . Caution texts available on Autopilot dialog box: Rudder on limit: The autopilot has determined that a larger rudder angle is needed to reach set course but rudder is already on limit. TC Stop: Track Steering (RC/NAV) cannot be continued and it has been stopped. OffCrs Rud Limit: Combination of two cautions above. Speed warning : Ship's speed is less than half of the service speed during ADPT auto steering mode. Manual speed : Manually entered speed is used by the autopilot. Off course: The autopilot has detected that vessel heading deviates from set course more than the set limit.Steerin RC/NAV-GOTO AW: Track steering in All Waters mode it I I uto i ot RC/NAV-TC STO : Track steering stopped. Failure texts available on Autopilot dialog box are: Missing gyro: Gyro data is missing or not received correctly at autopilot. Ship follows monitored route*). . Wind and/or current changes slowly. **) The track control system is able to compensate cross-track error up to 30 degrees. no wind.Ship follows monitored route. the full compensation is not available immediately. Below is a summary of effect of various environmental conditions.Ship may have trouble following monitored route inside the channel limit. Moderate wind and/or current High wind and/or current . Ship is drifting. During a turn and after a turn for first 4 minutes this Track Control System uses drift compensation based on the drift situation before the turn. Goto OS + "RC" . limit" informs you that the no further cross-track error based compensation is possible.Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route. There is no compensation for change *) The track control system is able to compensate drift up to 45 degrees.Steerin it I I uto i ot i ii i The system has many available steering modes. If drift situation changes a lot during the turn (current or wind) then vessel may sail outside the channel if the off track compensation cannot compensate the non-ideal drift compensation decided before the turn. Two alerts will warn the operator if the track control system estimates that it is not able to keep your ship within the channel limits.**). . no current Heading control = "AUTO" COG is about the same as Set Course in Autopilot. However.Ship follows monitored route. If drift is larger.**). . . . .Ship may have trouble following monitored route inside the channel limit.Ship follows monitored route*).Ship follows monitored route. Alert "455 Route: Off course" informs you that the track control system cannot use a higher attack angle towards the track. Ship has at tendency to drift. Note 1: Track Control System use a combination of drift compensation and off track compensation to keep your ship inside the channel limit. but may need full channel limit area. i Goto AW+ "RC" . . Alert "519 Trackpilot: XTE comp. your ship may go outside channel limit.Ship follows monitored route. i Environmental conditions Calm sea. . *) . . Alert "519 Trackpilot: XTE comp. the full compensation is not available immediately.**). limit" informs you that no further cross-track error based compensation is possible. . but may need full channel limit area Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) *) The track control system is able to compensate drift up to 45 degrees.Ship follows monitored route.*) .**). However.Ship follows monitored route. Alert "455 Route: Off course" informs you that the track control system cannot use a higher attack angle towards the track. .Ship follows monitored route.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. Two alerts will warn the operator if the track control system estimates that it is not able to keep your ship within channel limits.Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit.Steerin it I I uto i ot Environmental conditions Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) Slow change of speed Heading control = "AUTO" There is no compensation for change Goto OS + "RC" . . your ship may go outside the channel limit. Goto AW+ "RC" .Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit.Ship follows monitored route. **) The track control system is able to compensate cross-track error up to 30 degrees. but may need full channel limit area. There is no compensation for change Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition . If the drift is larger. . Goto OS + "RC" . but may go outside channel limit area. Alert "455 Route: Off course" informs you that the track control system cannot use a higher attack angle towards the track.*) . your ship may go outside the channel limit. Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit.Ship follows monitored route.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit.Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit. Alert "519 Trackpilot: XTE comp.*) .Ship follows monitored route. *) The track control system is able to compensate drift up to 45 degrees. However. the full compensation is not available immediately. Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition.*) . Two alerts will warn the operator if the track control system estimates that it is not able to keep your ship within channel limits.**).Ship follows monitored route. no current Moderate wind and/or current High wind and/or current Heading control = "AUTO" Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition. .**).Ship follows monitored route. If the drift is larger. Goto AW + "RC" . .Ship follows monitored route .**).Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. **) The track control system is able to compensate cross-track error up to 30 degrees. . . no wind.*) . ..Ship follows monitored route.**). . limit" informs you that no further cross-track error based compensation is possible.Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route .Ship may go outside channel limit and return back inside channel limit. Slow change of wind and/or current Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kt current perpendicular to track) Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition.Steerin it I I uto i ot i Environmental conditions Calm sea. Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition.Ship may have trouble in following monitored route inside the channel limit. see section 27.Steerin it I I uto i ot Environmental conditions Slow change of speed Heading control = "AUTO" Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition. Fast change of speed (For example speed decrease from 20 to 7 kt) Ship performs normal autopilot turn under this condition. but may need full channel limit area. For further details. but may need full channel limit area Note: Drift compensation is turned on or off in the Ship and Route parameters in the Navigation Parameters dialog box. .1. but may need full channel limit area .Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route.Ship follows monitored route.4 "Navigation parameters setting".Ship follows monitored route. . Goto AW + "RC" . Goto OS + "RC" . Note: The backup navigator alert is activated if the alert is not acknowledged within 30 seconds.Use AUTO" on ECDIS"." x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel i i i What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. x Acknowledge alerts. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. x Warning lamp RC turns on. x If ship is turning. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts. i i Associated alerts Immediately x Sensor alert "755: Gyro error (Trackpilot)" is generated at ECDIS. x Acknowledge alerts. actual heading is used as set course. see section 33. x Reminder x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . Rudder order is frozen for last value in order to approximately continue ahead. For more information about this alert. What end operator should do x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. last-set course and radius are used to complete the turn. x If ship is turning. Repeated every 2 minutes x Alert "498 Use manual rudder control" is generated at ECDIS." Within few seconds x Alert "402 No heading available". i Expected system performance x If ship is in linear part. x Change steering mode to "AUTO". x Change immediately to manual control of rudder. rudder order is frozen for last value in order to approximately continue rate of turn. After Alert "497 Route Stop-Sensor fail.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i ii Below is a summary of the system behaviour in various failures when the Goto OS or Goto AW steering mode is in use. x Study situation. x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail".9 "Backup Navigator Alert".Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. for example Alert "705: Gyro error" or "4006: Gyro error. i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS x Sensor alert. Within few seconds x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail. Expected system performance x If ship is in linear part. x Study situation. . Mode lamp indicators AUTO and RC start flashing in autopilot control panel. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail". Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes After Alert "497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. x Change immediately to local autopilot control. "712…716: Position equipment error". actual heading is used as set course. x Study situation. etc. Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. x If ship is in linear part." x Alert "476 Route Needs log sensor". x Guidance for navigator. x Acknowledge alerts.Steerin it I I uto i ot Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Sensor alert. x Alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control". x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "476 Route Needs log sensor". x If ship is turning. . x Change steering mode to "AUTO". x Study situation. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts.Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. last set course and radius are used to complete the turn. for example Alert "708: Log error". x Change to Goto OS steering mode. x Study situation. Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. x Study situation. x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts." x Instruction for navigator Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. i Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert "507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail". x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS" x Automatic change of steering mode to Goto OS mode. x Alert "501 Route: Needs higher Speed". x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control". x If ship is turning. x Study situation. x Study situation. actual heading is used as set course." Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes After Alert "497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. x Acknowledge alerts. x If ship is in linear part. x Change steering mode to "AUTO". x Alert "501 Route: Needs higher Speed". x Guidance for navigator x Change immediately to local autopilot control. x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . x Acknowledge alerts. last set course and radius are used to complete the turn." x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts. x Acknowledge alerts." After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x Alert "505 Route: Use Goto OS. x Acknowledge alerts. ." x Alert "410 Filter: Pos source change".. x Study situation.Steerin it I I uto i ot Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert "408 Filter: Speed below xx. x Study situation. Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. x Study situation.Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Alert "507 Route: Need sog/cog ref. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. . actual heading is used as set course. then dead reckoning is based on last plausible speed from position sensors. etc. x If ship is turning. x Study situation. The source indication for SOG and COG is "(LAST)". x Study situation. x If ship is in linear part. Within 30 seconds x Alerts "400 Filter: Position unreliable" and "406 Route: Course jump possible." x Kalman Filter is switched Off and system uses dead reckoning for positioning. This is indicated by showing your ship's position. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts. x If you have log or dual-axis log. x Study situation. x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail.Steerin it I I uto i ot ii Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert "712…716: Position equipment error" x OR x Kalman filter detects jump.Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Change steering mode to "AUTO"." x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . x If you have log or dual-axis log. x Alert "475 Route Needs filter ON" x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes After Alert "497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. x Acknowledge alerts. Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. SOG and COG in red. then dead reckoning is based on them and gyro. x Acknowledge alerts." x Alert "506 Route: Use AUTO control" x Guidance for navigator x Change immediately to local autopilot control. last set course and radius are used to complete the turn. Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. . x Acknowledge alerts. x Guidance for navigator x Acknowledge alerts. Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) x Alert "727…731: Lost DGPS" or "712…716: Position equipment error. x Acknowledge alert. x Study situation.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i i ii Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts." x Automatic change of steering mode to Goto OS mode. x Study situation. ." x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts." x Alert "492 Route: Needs diff pos. x Study situation. x Alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS. x Study situation. x Change to Goto OS steering mode. x Study situation." x Alert "505 Route: Use Goto OS. x Acknowledge alerts." Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 4 minutes Within 10 minutes x Alert "410 Filter: Pos source changed." x Alert "492 Route: Needs diff pos. x Goto AW requires differential position. x Alert "497 Route StopSensor fail". x Study situation." x Alert "410 Filter: Pos source changed" x Alert "478 Route: Needs good Pos" x Alert "506 Route: Use Auto control" Expected system performance x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . x Study situation. x Alert "478 Route: Needs good Pos" x Reminder x Acknowledge alerts. x Study situation. x Study situation. actual heading is used as set course. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. x If ship is in linear part. x Acknowledge alerts. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts. x If ship is turning.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i ii ii i What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts.Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Guidance for navigator x Change to local autopilot control. x Study situation. x Acknowledge alerts. x Acknowledge alerts. last set course and radius are used to complete the turn. x Change steering mode to "AUTO". . x Alert "407 Position discrepancy" x Alert "727…731: Lost DGPS" or "712…716: Position equipment error" Within 90 seconds Within 30 seconds After 2 minutes then every 4 minutes After 4 minutes then every 2 minutes Within 10 minutes After Alert "497 Route Stop-Sensor fail. Associated alerts (generated at ECDIS) Precondition x If sensors in Filter calculation are NOT inside operator selected position discrepancy limit. Steerin it I I uto i ot i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds After Alert "488 Steering: Stop-system fail" i Expected system performance i What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP . i Associated alerts Within 15 seconds i i Expected system performance What end operator should do x Acknowledge alerts. x If ship is turning. x Change steering mode to "AUTO".Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. last-set course and radius are used to complete the turn. x Study situation. actual heading is used as set course. Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. last set course and radius are used to complete the turn. actual heading is used as set course. After Alert "488 Steering: Stop-system fail" . x Alert "488 Steering: Stopsystem fail" and "480 Trackpilot Receive error" is generated at the ECDIS. x Change steering mode to "AUTO". x If ship is in linear part. x Acknowledge alerts x Study situation. Warning lamp RC turns on and steering mode indicator lamp RC start flashing in Autopilot control panel. x Alert "471 RC/NAV-TC STOP .Use AUTO" in ECDIS is generated. x Study situation. x If ship is turning. x If ship is in linear part. x Alert "488 Steering: Stopsystem fail" generated at ECDIS. Steerin it I I uto i ot i i The curved EBL is a control tool to monitor automatic operation of GotoOS and Goto AW (="RC/Nav") steering modes. When your ship starts a turn (initiated by the automatic route steering) the Curved EBL is locked to its position. During the turn you can monitor how your ship performs the intended maneuver against the plan by comparing the Curved EBL position and your current position. After the WPT Approach but before start of turn. The curved EBL is available on ECDIS screen and on some selected radar displays. Curved EBL at the wheel over point. . the curved EBL displays next intended turn. Locked curved EBL during turn. and it is in the information area. even when steering without the Autopilot FAP-2000. The current setting is shown in the mouse functions area. To set the time for the predictor. The predictor is calculated using current: x Docking speed components: x x x x Transversal bow speed Transversal stern speed Longitudinal center speed Rate of turn These components are assumed to be stable during the prediction period. spin the scrollwheel to select a time then push the scrollwheel. The on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of your ships drawn in true scale to successive future positions. The time from current position to the last of the predicted position may be selected by the between 30 and 180 seconds. Place the cursor on the text "Predictor" then use left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF.Steerin it I I uto i ot i i The Predictor is a tool for estimating your ship’s future positions and behaviour. in 30 second intervals. The predictor can be used in every steering-state. Predictor shows drift Predictor in a turn . put the cursor on the time indication next to Predictor. Warning. the alert is shown in plain text and the audio alarm stops. the most of alerts are in this category. In addition to text on flashing yellow background. few alerts only having only text on flashing yellow background without audible sound. "2" in the figure below is the alert area. The alert initially flashes in red. After acknowledgement. only the most urgent alerts which needs your attention. xxx" issued by IMO. then continuous beep until acknowledged (or short beep repeated every 60 seconds). To acknowledge an alert or display the Alert Queue window put the cursor in the alert area then push the left mouse button to acknowledge an alert or push the right mouse button to display the Alert Queue window. There are three kind of alerts generated by the ECDIS. Alerts generated by ECDIS can be divided into three categories: x Alert.i FEA-2x07 is designed to meet requirements set on paper "IMO MSC 252.12. and an audio alarm sounds until acknowledged. where you acknowledge alerts and display the Alert Queue window which shows alerts generated. if not acknowledged in 60 seconds. a short beep generated by ECDIS. To see a list of alerts. see section 33. indicated with "1" in the figure below. . Caution. x x i Alerts are displayed on the ECDIS screen at the lower right corner. for ECDIS workstation number 4. for ECDIS workstation number 3. Window on Conning Display is called Alert message window. where all active or pending alerts of system are shown in priority order. Each workstation has own alert numbers for alerts generated by radar overlay. Chart Calculation and Steering calculation are common for each workstation (i. Alarm range is Alert 200 .erts i Navigation calculation generates the following alerts: x x x Error detected in any sensor Radar communication error Software alerts. Alerts generated by Radar overlay are generated locally on workstation where failure happens (i. for ECDIS workstation number 2. Alarm range is Alert 250 . If in the system there are more than one ECDIS workstation and more than one Radar overlay installed. Alarm range is Alert 150 . It is possible to view alert queue of ECDIS system on Conning display. Alert range is Alert 100 . for ECDIS workstation number 1. to distinguish which Radar overlay is source of alarm they have own set of alert in use.e. all alerts generated by steering calculation appear in the same alert queue as alerts generated by navigation calculation. Alerts generated by Navigation Calculation. Without the Autopilot processor.Alert 211.Alert 111. etc.e.Alert 161. i i i Chart calculation generates the following alerts: x x x New Notes notebook page available Chart alarms based on S57 charts Chart alarms based on user chart’s dangerous symbols. Some of the alerts such as Outside Channel limit are also available without an Autopilot. they can be seen on each workstation’s alert queue with same alert number).Alert 261. lines and areas i i Note that all steering-related functions are available only if the ECDIS processor is also connected to the optional Autopilot processor. For example: "100 RadOv No Headline" for 1st workstation "200 RadOv No Headline" for 2nd workstation . they can only be seen on workstation where it happens). Followed characters are text from ALR x x x .) x x You may view the alarms in the Alert Queue. Acknowledged caution which still exists is shown on yellow background on alert area and alert queue. A caution appears only as a text on flashing yellow background with a short beep. Text indicates reason of alarm “Position source change”. The example shows how alarm 712 changes its priority from 05 to 12 after it is acknowledged.12 "List of Alerts" shows the priorities for each alarm with following syntax: “/1” at the end first line means priority = 1. if acknowledged but the state of alarm still exists. How to read the Alarm Queue (first row as an example): x x x x First digit “05” indicates alarm priority. if unacknowledged and priority = 8. See the example below. When an alarm appears.8 for details. Next six digits indicate arrival time of ALR. Priority 1 is the highest. Acknowledged warning which still exists is shown on yellow background on alert area and alert queue.erts i x i The permanently visible alert is the top most urgent alarm at any moment. Third three digits indicate number from ALR. Place the cursor on the alarm text then push the right mouse button. Third six digits indicate time. (See 33. Warnings have priority from 3 to 6 with same kind of syntax as alarms. Alarms have priority from 1 to 2 to control urgency. Cautions have priority 7 with the same syntax as alarms. How to read the Alert Queue for an alert from a connected sensor: x x First digit “07” indicates alarm priority. a buzzer is continuously sounding until alarm is acknowledged. Unacknowledge warning is shown in black text (or white depending on color scheme) on yellow background flashing and acknowledged alarm which still exists is shown on yellow background. In this example sensor connected to serial line (POS2 = Position equipment 2). If warning is not acknowledged after 60 seconds continuously beep sound is generated until acknowledged. Second four characters “POS2” indicate source. Section 33. “/1/8” at the end of first line means that priority is = 1. Second three digits “712” indicate alarm number. Acknowledged alarm which still exists is shown on red background on alert area and alert queue. Unacknowledged alarm is shown in black text (or white depending on color scheme) on red background flashing. When a warning appears a short beep sound is generated. Based on rules set by IMO MSC 252(83) Central Alert Management can remotely acknowledge some of the alerts and the rest get remote buzzer silence for 30 seconds. The communication with Central Alert management is supervised and if fault is detected then alert "90 CALA OUTPUT CON LOST" is created. ALR message from the sensor includes information about alert on sensor. In addition to this a short beep is generated and flashing yellow indication until acknowledged. "405 Log data unreliable". The communication with the sensor is supervised and if fault is detected then alert "ALARM SENSOR LOST including number 70-85 (depending of serial channel) and source indication label (for example AIS. In this interface all alerts are reported to CAM. This alert is presented though the normal alert system of this ECDIS. When any of above caution is on. doubtful value itself is yellow. This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF.) is created .erts i i i There are a few cautions that have to indicate which are sources of doubtful integrity. POS1 etc. "407 Position discrepancy" and " 413SOG/COG data unreliable. This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF. This is intended for sensors reporting to ECDIS. i An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line of ECDIS. When you acknowledge it then an ACK message is sent to the sensor to perform remote acknowledge. Following values themselves are turned yellow in upper right corner when there is doubtful integrity: x x x x LAT & LON values of own ship position Gyro value Speed value SOG/COG values Following values in Sensor page turn yellow when there is doubtful integrity: x x x x x Position sensors (position discrepancy) position sensors (filter exclude) Gyro sensor Log sensor SOG/COG sensors (dual axis log and position sensors) i An "ALR transmit and ACK receive" communication is available for Central Alert Management (=CAM). This kind of cautions are "404 Gyro data unreliable". then "Backup Navigator Alert" is not generated. Alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto OS" If ECDIS is a part of Track Control System. "Track". "Backup Navigator Alarm" is related to following alarms (Furuno FAP-2000. the "Backup Navigator Alert" should be connected. Goto Track. if any of above alarms happens when the ship is not performing any Track Control mode. If ECDIS is NOT part of Track Control System. The idea behind the IEC 62065 requirement for "Backup Navigator Alarm" is that if the navigator on duty cannot handle the situation (i. It is intended to be connected to Central Alarm System. he does not have time enough to check and to acknowledge all track control related alarm) then more person(s) are called automatically to the bridge. "Goto AW" etc. Note that "Backup Navigator Alarm" is not activated. Goto WPT. "Goto OS".erts i Track Control System (=TCS) standard IEC 62065 require "Backup Navigator Alert".Sensor Fail" "Backup Navigator Alert" related only with TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 Autopilot.) any of alarms listed below is unacknowledged for more than 30 seconds then "Backup Navigator Alarm" closed contact relay is activated. If during Track Control (= Program track. Alarm Transfer System included into Central Alarm System will then transfer "Backup Navigator Alarm" to intended person(s).Sensor Fail" Alert "705: Gyro error" Alert "706: Gyro error" Alert "708: Log error" Alert "708: Dual axis log (WT) error" Alert "709: Dual axis log (BT) error" Alert "712…716: Position equipment error" Alert "727…731: Lost DGPS" Alert "733: Radar spd/crs error" Alert "755: Gyro error (Trackpilot)" Alert "488 Steering:Stop-System fail" "Backup Navigator Alert" related only with FURUNO FAP-2000 Autopilot x Alert "489 Route: Changed to Goto WPT" x Alert "496 ProgTrack: Stop . YOKOGAWA PT-500A or TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000): Alert "400 Filter: Position unreliable" Alert "408 Filter: speed below xx KN" Alert "410 Filter: Pos source change" Alert "451 Route: WPT approach Alert" Alert "458 Route: Last WPT approach" Alert "497 Route: Stop . .e. WHICH DOES NOT CORRESPOND WITH OTHER SPEED SENSORS. Alert number 405: LOG DATA UNRELIABLE /7/14 -----------------------------------LOG GIVES 0 KN SPEED. Alert number 406: ROUTE:COURSE JUMP POSSIBLE /5 -----------------------------------SYSTEM HAS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED TO DEAD RECKONING. VERIFY AND SELECT SPEED SEN SORS IN 'SENSORS' BUTTON Alert number 402: NO HEADING AVAILABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------NO VALID HEADING SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND. CHANGE FROM ROUTE STEERING TO MANUAL STEERING OR CHECK POSITION VERY CAREFULLY BEFORE CHOOSING “ON”. VERIFY AND SELECT SPEED AND POSITION SENSORS THROUGH 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION . VERIFY AND SELECT HEADING SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. Alert number 401: NO SPEED AVAILABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------NO VALID SPEED SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND. . Alert number 400: FILTER: POSITION UNRELIABLE /1 -----------------------------------ECDIS IS NOT ABLE TO ESTIMATE A RELIABLE POSITION.erts i i i i Alert number 320: DEPTH BELOW LIMIT /2/9 -----------------------------------ECHO SOUNDER INDICATES WATER DEPTH BELOW TRANSDUCER TO EXCEED SPECIFIED SAFE LIMIT. Alert number 404: GYRO DATA UNRELIABLE /7/14 -----------------------------------IF YOU HAVE BOTH GYRO1 AND GYRO2 SELECTED AND IF THEY VALUE DIFFERS MORE THAN 5 DEGREES ALERT IS GENERATED. VERIFY AND SELECT SPEED SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. IF YOU NOW SELECT “ON” A POSITION SENSOR YOU MAY GET A JUMP FOR COURSE. VERIFY AND SELECT HEADING SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. LIMIT CAN BE INCREASED BY SETTING “MAX RATE OF TURN” LIMIT OVER 150 DEG/MIN. Alert number 409: POSITION SOURCE CHANGED /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SOURCE OF OWN SHIP PRIMARY POSITION HAS BEEN CHANGED AUTOMATICLLY TO ANOTHER SOURCE THAN BEFORE. .erts Alert number 407: POSITION DISCREPANCY /7/14 -----------------------------------SYSTEM HAS DETECTED MORE DIFFERENCE THAN SET LIMIT BETWEEN OWN SHIP PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POSITIONS OR BETWEEN OWN SHIP AND ANY SENSOR POSITION. Alert number 412: GYRO CORR. VERIFY NEW SOURCE. IF REASON IS FAST MANOUEVRE. CHECK THAT CORRECTION IS VALID. CHECK POSITION SENSORS Alert number 408: FILTER: SPEED BELOW xx KN /3/10 -----------------------------------KALMAN FILTER REQUIRED THAT THE SPEED OF THE OWN SHIP IS MORE THAN SPEED LIMIT SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS. Alert number 413: SOG&COG DATA UNRELIABLE /7/14 ------------------------------------------------------------SOG AND/OR COG DATA FROM SENSORS IS UNRELIABLE. SOURCE CHANGED /5 -----------------------------------IF SOURCE OF GYRO CORRECTION IS CHANGED BY SYSTEM. THEN KALMAN FILTER HAS BEEN SET AUTOMATICALLY OFF BY THE SYSTEM. VERIFY AND SELECT SPEED/COURSE AND POS SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. Alert number 410: FILTER:POS SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR USED IN FILTER POSITIONING HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL Alert number 411: CHARTALING:OVER 30 MINUTES /3 -----------------------------------IF POSITION ALIGNMENT IS USED THEN USER IS REMINDED OF IT EVERY 30 MIN. IF ROUTE STEERING WAS NOT USED. Alert number 357: RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH RADAR 3 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADARS. Alert number 358: RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH RADAR 4 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADARS. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS SELECTED. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS SELECTED. Alert number 361: CHART ALIGN: EXECUTING /6 -----------------------------------IF CHART ALIGNMENT IS DONE BY MEANS OF SELESMAR RADAR. CHANGE FROM ROUTE STEERING MODE BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW NEXT WAYPOINT. Alert number 360: ROUTE: WPT CHANGE DISABLED -----------------------------------NEXT WAYPOINT CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING ROUTE STEERING. ALERT IS DISPLAYED WHEN YOU DEFINE ALIGNMENT. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS SELECTED. Alert number 353: ROUTE:ILLEGAL NEXT WAYPOINT /4 -----------------------------------NEXT WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE. Alert number 356: RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH RADAR 2 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADARS. Alert number 354: ROUTE:ILLEGAL FINAL WAYPOINT /4 -----------------------------------FINAL WAYPOINT DOES NOT EXIST IN ROUTE FILE. Alert number 355: RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH RADAR 1 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADARS.erts Alert number 352: ROUTE:ILLEGAL ETA WAYPOINT /4 -----------------------------------ETA WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE OR ETA WAYPOINT IS NOT BETWEEN NEXT AND FINAL WAYPOINT. /4 . Alert number 371: SOURCE RADAR CHANGED /5 -----------------------------------MASTER RADAR FOR ECDIS HAS BEEN CHANGED. Alert number 364: ROUTE:CANCEL DISABLED /6 -----------------------------------A ROUTE CANNOT BE CANCELED DURING ROUTE STEERING. VERIFY NEW SOURCE OR TRACKED TARGETS Alert number 372: CHARTALIGN: NO LINE AVAIL /3 -----------------------------------TO PERFORM CHART ALIGN WITH A RADAR THERE MUST BE TRANSFERRED USER CHART'S LINES IN THE RADAR. MOVE USER CHART TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE POSTPROCESSING AGAIN FOR USER CHART. USE 'SENSORS' BUTTON TO VERIFY AND SELECT SENSORS TO BE USED.erts Alert number 363: ROUTE:SELECT DISABLED /4 -----------------------------------A NEW ROUTE CANNOT BE SELECTED DURING ROUTE STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE CANCELING THE ROUTE. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW ROUTE. Alert number 365: MANUAL GYRO NOT SELECTED /4 -----------------------------------SELECT MANUAL HEADING IN SENSORS SPD/HDG PAGE. Alert number 367: MANUAL DRIFT DISABLED /4 -----------------------------------MANUAL DRIFT VALUE CAN ONLY BE INSERTED WHEN NO SENSORS PROVIDE SPEED OVER GROUND DATA. Alert number 366: MANUAL SPEED NOT SELECTED /4 -----------------------------------SELECT MANUAL SPEED IN SENSORS SPD/HDG PAGE. . CHECK THAT YOUR CURRENT USER CHART HAS LINES AND THAT THEY ARE VISIBLE ON RADAR DISPLAY Alert number 380: USERCHART: FILE READ ERR /4 -----------------------------------CANNOT READ USER CHART IN MONITOR MODE. CURRENT MONITORED ROUTE HAS AUTOMATICALLY CANCELLED Alert number 457: ROUTE: OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS /2/9 -----------------------------------SHIP IS OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS SPECIFIED FOR CURRENT LEG OF ROUTE. MOVE USER CHART TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE POSTPROCESSING AGAIN FOR USER CHART. Alert number 392: ROUTE: FILE NOT FOUND /4 -----------------------------------CANNOT READ ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE. CHECK SHIP POSITION AND ROUTE Alert number 459: STEERING PARAMETER ERROR /6 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT PARAMETER HAS AN ERROR IN ITS CONTENTS.erts Alert number 381: USER CHART: NEED POINTS /4 -----------------------------------USER CHART HAS MORE THAN 60 LINES OR 20 SYMBOLS AND IT DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY POINTS. USE 'USER CHART' MENU TO SELECT A VALID USER CHART OR ADD POINTS TO CURRENT USER CHART Alert number 382: USERCHART: FILE NOT FOUND /4 -----------------------------------CANNOT READ USER CHART IN MONITOR MODE. . FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WPT. FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WPT. MOVE ROUTE TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME MODIFICATION OF WPT DATA IN WPT PAGE. OPEN ROUTE IN PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME MODIFICATION OF WPT DATA IN WPT PAGE. FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WPT. Alert number 390: ROUTE: FILE READ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------CANNOT OPEN ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE. MOVE ROUTE TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME MODIFICATION OF WPT DATA IN WPT PAGE. CHECK AGAIN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS. Alert number 454: ROUTE: END REACHED /3 -----------------------------------YOU HAVE PASSED THE FINAL WAYPOINT OF YOUR MONITORED ROUTE. Alert number 391: ROUTE: FILE READ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------CANNOT READ ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE. . CHANGE “MAIN STEERING” -SELECT OR TO ANY OTHER POSITION THAN AUTOP. CHECK SELECTED POSITIONING SENSORS.GOTO TRACK . TRY SWITCH FILTER ON.GOTO WAYPOINT . Alert number 601 PARAM CHANNEL CONFLICT /4 ------------------------------------IF IN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS THERE ARE MORE THAN ONE DEVICE USING SAME CHANNEL AND IF IN THAT CASE NO OTHER DEVICES ARE ALLOWED FOR PARALLEL USE.PROGRAM TRACK CURRENT STEERING MODE CANNOT CONTINUE CHECK NEW STEERING SITUATION Alert number 600: PARAM CHANGE DISABLED /3 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CANNOT BE CHANGED IF THE ROUTE STEERING IS ON OR THE KALMAN FILTER IS IN USE. CHECK AND VERIFY TRACKPILOT OPERATION BEFORE NEW TRY Alert number 488: STEERING:STOP-SYSTEM FAIL /3 -----------------------------------CONNECTION TO THE TRACKPILOT HAS BEEN LOST WHILE THE SYSTEM PERFORMED ONE OF THE INTEGRATED STEERING MODES: .erts Alert number 480: TRACKPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANY DATA FROM TRACKPILOT. NOTE: IN SOME SPECIAL CASE MORE THAN ONE DEVICES CAN IN PARALLEL USE SAME CHANNEL (FOR EXAMPLE LOG + DAX) Alert number 610 FILTER INIT ERROR /4 ------------------------------------INITILATION OF FILTER FAILED. Alert number 632: DANGEROUS AIS TARGET /2/9 -----------------------------------AIS TARGET HAS MET DANGEROUS TARGET LIMIT SET BY CPA AND TCA Alert number 633: LOST AIS TARGET /5 -----------------------------------NO Update INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM TRACKED AIS TARGET WITHIN DEFINED REPORTING INTERVAL OF SHIP TYPE Alert number 634: AIS MESSAGE RECEIVED /5/10 -----------------------------------AIS MESSAGE RECEIVED. THEN ALERT 3001 APPEARS. CHECK THE SITUATION AND TRY AGAIN. Alert number 640: TT DANGEROUS /2/9 -----------------------------------TT HAS MET DANGEROUS TARGET LIMIT SET BY CPA AND TCA Alert number 641: TT LOST /5 -----------------------------------TT HAS REPORTED TT LOST. LOAD INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS. SWITCH OFF MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER AND THEN ON AGAIN. Alert number 637: AIS DISPLAY 100% FULL /5/12 -----------------------------------WHEN 100% OF DISPLAY CAPACITY FOR AIS TARGETS ARE IN USE. Alert number 642: TT STORAGE 95% FULL /6/13 -----------------------------------WHEN 95% OF STORAGE CAPACITY FOR TRACKED TARGETS ARE IN USE. Alert number 700: NO SENSOR PARAMETERS /5 -----------------------------------SENSOR PARAMETER FILES ARE MISSING. . Alert number 701: B-ADAPTER ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------B-ADAPTER DOES NOT OPERATE DUE TO A SYSTEM FAULT.erts Alert number 636: AIS DISPLAY 95% FULL /6/13 -----------------------------------WHEN 95% OF DISPLAY CAPACITY FOR AIS TARGETS ARE IN USE. Alert number 638: AIS STORAGE 95% FULL /6/13 -----------------------------------WHEN 95% OF STORAGE CAPACITY FOR AIS TARGETS ARE IN USE. Alert number 639: AIS STORAGE 100% FULL /2/9 -----------------------------------WHEN 100% OF STORAGE CAPACITY FOR AIS TARGETS ARE IN USE. Alert number 637: TT STORAGE 100% FULL /5/12 -----------------------------------WHEN 100% OF DISPLAY CAPACITY FOR TRACKED TARGETS ARE IN USE. CALL SERVICE IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS Alert number 702: ENGINE CONTROL COMM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CONNECTION TO ENGINE CONTROL HAS BEEN LOST. IF REQUIRED USE BACKUP COPY OF PARAMETERS. CHECK THAT CONNECTION IS OK. Alert number 711: WIND SENSOR ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------WIND SENSOR DATA IS NOT RE CEIVED CORRECTLY. IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS. . Alert number 710: ECHO SOUNDER ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------ECHO SOUNDER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY ECHO SOUNDER OPERATION. Alert number 707: GYRO ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------GYRO2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO SELECT VALID SENSORS. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR. Alert number 708: LOG ERROR /5/12 ----------------------------------LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY WIND SENSOR OPERATION. Alert number 712: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO SELECT VALID SPEED SENSORS. Alert number 713: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 709: DUAL AXIS LOG (BT) ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO SELECT VALID SPEED SENSORS.erts Alert number 706: GYRO ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------GYRO1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'INITIAL SETTINGS' MENU TO SET GYRO AGAIN. USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO SELECT VALID SENSORS Alert number 708: DUAL AXIS LOG (WT) ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO SELECT VALID SENSORS. VERIFY ROT GYRO DEVICE. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alert number 718: ROT GYRO ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ROT GYRO DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. VERIFY SENSOR FOR PITCH&ROLL DATA. Alert number 719: PITCH&ROLL SENSOR ERROR 6/13 -----------------------------------PITCH&ROLL DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. . Alert number 716: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 5 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 728: DGPS POS. Alert number 715: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 4 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 717: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 6 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR. SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. Alert number 727: DGPS POS. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR.erts Alert number 714: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 3 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO SELECT VALID POS SENSOR. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. Alert number 731: DGPS POS. OR RESTART ECDIS. SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. Alert number 733: RADAR SPD/CRS ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------RADAR SELECTED AS SPD AND CRS SOURCE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO SELECT VALID SPD/CRS SENSORS Alert number 734: SPEEDPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------DATA FROM SPEEDPILOT IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK CONNECTION OF SPEEDPILOT. Alert number 730: DGPS POS. . SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 6 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. Alert number 735: B-ADAPTER INTERFACE ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------B-ADAPTER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY DUE TO INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR IN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM.erts Alert number 729: DGPS POS. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. SOURCE CHANGE /5/12 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. TO RESTART COMMUNICATION PROGRAM. OPEN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS AND CLICK OK WITHOUT CHANGING ANY PARAMETERS. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED SELECT MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alert number 732: DGPS POS. CHECK CONNECTION TO AIS Alert number 738: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK. Alert number 743: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 6 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK. CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS Alert number 737: AIS RECEIVE ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA FROM AIS IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 740: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK. . Alert number 742: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK.erts Alert number 736: AMWSS COMM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------COMMUNICATION WITH AMWSS FAILS. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 741: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK. Alert number 739: DATUM MISMATCH /6/13 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK. Alert number 748: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 745: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 755: GYRO ERROR(TRACKPILOT) /5/12 -----------------------------------GYRO DATA ON TRACKPILOT IS MISSING. . Alert number 751: RADAR ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CHECK CORRECT CONNECTION OF RADAR 2. Alert number 753: RADAR ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CHECK CORRECT CONNECTION OF RADAR 4. STUDY SITUATION ON TRACKPILOT. Alert number 752: RADAR ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CHECK CORRECT CONNECTION OF RADAR 3.erts Alert number 744: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 747: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 746: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alert number 750: RADAR ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CHECK CORRECT CONNECTION OF RADAR 1. Alert number 749: DATUM CHANGE /5 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 6 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. AL 10 IS ALSO ACTIVE ON TRACKPILOT'S CONTROL PANEL. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND ECHO SOUNDER. Alert number 759: LAN ADAPTER 1 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------LAN ADAPTER 1 IS NOT COMMUNICATING CORRECTLY WITH ECDIS. ECDIS CONTINUE OPERATION WITHOUT INTERFACES. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF WATER CURRENT DATA. Alert number 763: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANADA /5/12 -----------------------------------IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN ADAPTERS IS DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS Alert number 764: LAN FAIL FOR LANADAPTER /5/12 -----------------------------------UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE OR HUB BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. SWITCH POWER OFF/ON ON LAN ADAPTER 1. FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART THE ECDIS. Alert number 758: WATER TEMPERATURE ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF WATER TEMPERATURE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK IP ADDRESSES . SWITCH POWER OFF/ON ON LAN ADAPTER 1. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF WATER TEMPERATURE DATA.erts Alert number 756: AFT ECHO SOUNDER ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA FROM AFT ECHO SOUNDER IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 757: WATER CURRENT ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF WATER CURRENT IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. SWITCH POWER OFF/ON ON LAN ADAPTER 1. Alert number 762: LAN ADAPTER 4 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------LAN ADAPTER 4 IS NOT COMMUNICATING CORRECTLY WITH ECDIS. SWITCH POWER OFF/ON ON LAN ADAPTER 1. Alert number 760: LAN ADAPTER 2 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------LAN ADAPTER 2 IS NOT COMMUNICATING CORRECTLY WITH ECDIS. Alert number 761: LAN ADAPTER 3 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------LAN ADAPTER 3 IS NOT COMMUNICATING CORRECTLY WITH ECDIS. . Alert number 771: LAN FAIL FOR RADAR /5/12 -----------------------------------UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alert number 774: LAN RADAR 3 CONN ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 3. Alert number 769: LAN ADATER 4 PARAM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. Alert number 770: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR RADAR /5/12 -----------------------------------IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN RADAR IS DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS. Alert number 767: LAN ADATER 2 PARAM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. Alert number 773: LAN RADAR 2 CONN ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 2. Alert number 772: LAN RADAR 1 CONN ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 1. “NO LAN ADAPTER(S) DEFINED. FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART THE ECDIS. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. CHECK IP ADDRESSES. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. Alert number 766: LAN ADATER 1 PARAM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR.erts Alert number 765: NO LAN ADATER INSTALLED /5/12 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. Alert number 768: LAN ADATER 3 PARAM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alert number 776: AIR TEMPERATURE ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF AIR TEMPERATURE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 781: LANADATER3 VERSION ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------VERSION OF LAN ADAPTER 3 SOFTWARE IS NOT THE SAME WITH ECDIS SOFTWARE. CHECK THE PARAMETERS. Alert number 778: AIR HUMIDITY ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF AIR HUMIDITY IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 779: LANADATER1 VERSION ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------VERSION OF LAN ADAPTER 1 SOFTWARE IS NOT THE SAME WITH ECDIS SOFTWARE. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. LOAD CORRECT VERSION OF SOFTWARE TO LAN ADAPTER. LOAD CORRECT VERSION OF SOFTWARE TO LAN ADAPTER. LOAD CORRECT VERSION OF SOFTWARE TO LAN ADAPTER. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF AIR PRESSURE DATA. Alert number 780: LANADATER2 VERSION ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------VERSION OF LAN ADAPTER 2 SOFTWARE IS NOT THE SAME WITH ECDIS SOFTWARE. Alert number 782: LANADATER4 VERSION ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------VERSION OF LAN ADAPTER 4 SOFTWARE IS NOT THE SAME WITH ECDIS SOFTWARE. Alert number 783: LAN ADATER PARAM CONFLICT /5/12 -----------------------------------ID OF LAN ADAPTER ON ECDIS IS INCORRECT OR PARAMETER "F" ON LAN ADAPTER IS INCORRECT. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF AIR HUMIDITY DATA. Alert number 777: AIR PRESSURE ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF AIR PRESSURE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF AIR TEMPERATURE DATA.erts Alert number 775: LAN RADAR 4 CONN ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 4. LOAD CORRECT VERSION OF SOFTWARE TO LAN ADAPTER. . CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF RUDDER 2 DATA. /3 APPEARS AS AN EARLY WARNING INDICATION THAT THE SYSTEM MAY ENTER STATE OF FREEZE. Alert number 787: RUDDER4 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF RUDDR 4 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.erts Alert number 784: RUDDER1 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF RUDDR 1 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. . Alert number 789: PROPELLER1 ERROR (ACT) /3/10 -----------------------------------DATA OF PROPELLER 1 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.POS ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------DATA OF PROPELLER CONTROL POSITION IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF PROPELLER 1 DATA. Alert number 797: PROPELLER CONTR. IF THIS ALERT WILL BE GENERATED FREQUENTLY. Alert number 786: RUDDER3 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF RUDDR 3 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CONTACT TO FURUNO SERVICE. Alert number 793: PROPELLER1 ERROR (ORD) /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF PROPELLER 1 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 788 SYSTEM FROZEN. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF RUDDER 1 DATA. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF RUDDER 3 DATA. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF RUDDER 4 DATA. CHECK COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ECDIS AND SOURCE OF PROPELLER 1 DATA. Alert number 785: RUDDER2 ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA OF RUDDR 2 IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 798: NAVTEX MESSGE RECEIVED /3/10 -----------------------------------NEW NAVTEX MESSAGE IS RECEIVED. Alert number 833: EXT. Alert number 837: EXT. Alert number 840: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. Alert number 834: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. Alert number 835: EXT. /3 . NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. Alert number 836: EXT. Alert number 831: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR.erts Alert number 830: EXT. Alert number 850: NEW NOTES NEW NOTES HAS BEEN ACTIVATED. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR /4 -----------------------------------EXTERNAL NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT IS REPORTED HAVING ERROR. Alert number 838: EXT. Alert number 839: EXT. Alert number 832: EXT. erts i Alert number 860: Alert number 861: Alert number 862: Alert number 863: Alert number 864: Alert number 865: Alert number 866: Alert number 867: Alert number 868: Alert number 869: Alert number 870: Alert number 871: Alert number 872: Alert number 873: Alert number 874: SAFETY CONTOUR AREAS TO BE AVOIDED USER CHART DANGER AREA /2/9 /5/12 /5/12 TRAFFIC SEPARATION ZONE /5/12 INSHORE TRAFFIC ZONE RESTRICTED AREA CAUTION AREA /5/12 /5/12 /5/12 /5/12 /5/12 /5/12 OFFSHORE PRODUCTION AREA MILITARY PRACTICE AREA SEAPLANE LANDING AREA SUBMARINE TRANSIT LANE /5/12 ANCHORAGE AREA /5/12 MARINE FARM/AQUACULTURE /5/12 PSSA AREA ANCHOR WATCH /5/12 /5/12 . AND CANCEL THE ROUTE. POSSIBLY DUE TO A POSITION JUMP. REDUCE THE SPEED OR INCREASE RADIUS BY OVERDRIVING WITH 'MAN. WARNING' TO ACCEPT THE END OF ROUTE STEERING. CLICK 'ACKN. WARNING* 'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE HAS THEN AUTOMATICALLY BEEN INITIATED Alert number 454: ROUTE: END REACHED /3 -----------------------------------CLICK 'ACKN. TURNRATE TO BE EXCEEDED. Alert number 460: PILOT: ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /6/13 -----------------------------------THE RADIUS SENT TO AUTOPILOT IS EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR TURNRATE. Alert number 452: ROUTE: TURNING DISABLED /1 -----------------------------------WHEELOVER POINT HAS BEEN PASSED WITHOUT 'ACKN. . VERIFY POSITION AND SPEED SEN SORS IN 'SENSORS' PAGE Alert number 458: ROUTE: LAST WPT APPROACH /1/8 -----------------------------------FINAL WAYPOINT OF THE ROUTE IS REACHED. Alert number 461: ROUTE:ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /6/13 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS BEING APPROACHED WITH TOO HIGH SPEED FOR THE PLANNED RADIUS. WARNING' TO ACCEPT THE TURN. ACCEPT THE SITUATION BY CLICKING 'ACKN. AUTOMATICALLY INITIATE 'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE. SET COURSE'.erts i i i i Alert number 451: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ALERT /1/8 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS NOW BEING APPROACHED. INCREASE THE RADIUS. Alert number 455: ROUTE: OFF COURSE /6/13 -----------------------------------REQUIRED 'SET COURSE' FOR NEXT WAYPOINT EXCEEDS THE 'LOWER OFFCOURSE' OR 'HIGHER OFF COURSE' LIMIT OF PLANNED COURSE. OR REDUCE SPEED. WARNING' Alert number 456: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ERROR /5 -----------------------------------'TIME TO WOP' HAS CHANGED SINCE 'WPT APPROACH' ALERT WAS ACKNOWLEDGED. CAUSING MAX. Alert number 469: TRACKPILOT: OFF COURSE /6/13 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT DOES NOT STEER WITHIN LIMITS OF 'COURSE TO STEER' COMMAND'. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS' Alert number 476: ROUTE: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITH ONE POSITION DEVICE AND WITHOUT ANY LOG DEVICE. VERIFY TRACKPILOT FUNCTIONS. Alert number 467: DISABLED: STEERING OFF /3 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT IS IN 'STEERING OFF' MODE. AND STEERING COMMANDS CANNOT BE EXECUTED. Alert number 465: ROUTE: ILLEGAL WAYPOINT /4 -----------------------------------ROUTE STEERING CANNOT START FROM WAYPOINT 1. USE 'ROUTE MONITOR' PUSHBUTTON TO SELECT “TO WPT” TO BE 2 OR HIGHER. SELECT A ROUTE AND NEXT WAYPOINT THROUGH 'ROUTE MONITOR' PUSHBUTTON. AND ROUTE STEERING CANNOT BE INITIATED. Alert number 470: DISABLED: NEEDS FILTER ON /3 -----------------------------------'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CAN BE USED ONLY WHEN 'FILTER' IS ON AND THERE ARE ENOUGH SPEED.erts Alert number 464: ROUTE: NO SELECTED ROUTE /4 -----------------------------------NO ROUTE HAS BEEN SELECTED. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ PAGE Alert number 475: ROUTE: NEEDS FILTER ON /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITHOUT FILTERED POSITION AVAILABLE. HEADING AND POSITION SENSORS. VERIFY AND SELECT SENSORS IN'SENSORS' . STEERING MUST BE ENABLED AT THE MAIN STEERING SELECTOR Alert number 468: DISABLED: OUT OF COURSE /3 -----------------------------------ROUTE STEERING CAN ONLY BE INITIATED WHEN SHIPS COURSE IS WITHIN THE 'GOTO WPT LIMIT' FOR 'GOTO WPT' OR WITHIN THE 'GOTO TRACK LIMIT' FOR 'GOTO TRACK'. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE TO STEER WITHIN THE LIMITS. /3 -----------------------------------'GOTO TRACK' MODE CAN BE USED ONLY IF A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION SENSOR IS IN USE WITH KALMAN FILTER. Alert number 492: ROUTE: NEEDS DIFF POS. ALTERNATIVES ARE A LOG OR TWO POSITION RECEIVERS Alert number 491: DISABLED: NEEDS DIFF POS. Alert number 494: PROGTRACK: NEEDS LOG SENS. Alert number 489: ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO WPT -----------------------------------SYSTEM CANNOT CONTINUE GOTO TRACK MODE BECAUSE KALMAN FILTER POSITION IS LOST OR NO LOG SENSOR IS AVAILABLE KALMAN FILTER /5 Alert number 490: DISABLED: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /3 -----------------------------------'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CAN BE USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS AN INDEPENDENT SPEED SOURCE. POSITION AND POSITION DISCREPANCY LIMIT BETWEEN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SENSORS IS EXCEEDED.erts Alert number 477: DISABLED: OUT OF CHANNEL /3 -----------------------------------'GOTO WPT' OR 'GOTO TRACK' CAN ONLY BE INITIATED WHEN SHIP IS WITHIN CHANNEL LIMIT OF MONITORED ROUTE. /3/10 -----------------------------------A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM TRACK WITHOUT A LOG SENSOR OR WITHOUT TWO POSITION SENSORS . /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING GOTO WPT STEERING MODE WITHOUT DIFF. Alert number 485: ROUTE: WPT PREWARNING ALERT /5/12 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS SOON BEING APPROACHED. THIS IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALERT 497” APPEARS. Alert number 478: ROUTE: NEEDS GOOD POSIT. STEERING MODE IS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED “GOTO WPT” WITH ALERT 489:ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO WPT Alert number 493: PROGTRACK: NEEDS FILTER ON /3/10 -----------------------------------A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM TRACK WITHOUT FILTERED POSITION AVAILABLE. /5/12 -----------------------------------'GOTO TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE WITHOUT A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION SENSOR. IT IS AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALERT 408”. /3 . Alert number 499: DISABLED: NEEDS GOOD POS /5 -----------------------------------'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CANNOT BE ACTIVATED WITHOUT DIFF. POSITION AND IF POSITION DISCREPANCY LIMIT IS EXCEEDED. IT IS AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALERT 408”. THIS ALERT IS REMINDER THAT TRACKPILOT HAS LOST GYRO HEADING. IT IS REPEATED EVERY TWO MINUTES. Alert number 503: PROGTRACK: NEED HIGHER SPD /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER.erts Alert number 495: PROGTRACK: NEEDS DIFF POS. “ALERT 503” IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALERT 496” APPEARS. SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. IT IS AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALERT 2008” TO ACTIVATE ROUTE STEERING USE HIGHER SPEED . Alert number 502: DISABLED: NEED HIGHER SPD /3 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. /5/12 -----------------------------------A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM TRACK WITHOUT A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION SENSOR Alert number 496: PROGTRACK: STOP-SENSOR FAIL -----------------------------------GYRO. Alert number 498: USE MANUAL RUDDER CONTROL /5/12 -----------------------------------CHANGE IMIDIATELY TO DIRECT CONTROL OF RUDDER. Alert number 501: ROUTE: NEED HIGHER SPEED /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 497: ROUTE: STOP-SENSOR FAIL /3 -----------------------------------GYRO. “ALERT 501” IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALERT 497” APPEARS. -----------------------------------'PROGRAM TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK OF DUAL AXIS LOG. /5/12 -----------------------------------'GOTO TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK OF DUAL AXIS LOG. CHECK AND SET CORRECT “TO WPT” AGAIN FOR ROUTE MONITORING.erts Alert number 504: PROGTRACK: USE RADIUS CTRL. /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE GOTO WPT OR GOTO TRACK Alert number 507: ROUTE: NEED SOG/COG REF. . Alert number /3 /5/12 510: DISABLED: OUT OF TURN /3 -----------------------------------GOTO TRACK OR GOTO WPT STEERING MODE CANNOT BE ACTIVATED IF THE ROUTE MONITORING OF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT ROUTE MONITOR IS in TURN. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE PROGRAM TRACK Alert number 505: ROUTE: USE GOTO WPT /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. BUT OWN SHIP LOCATION IS OUT OF TURN. -----------------------------------GOTO TRACK STEERING MODE CANNOT BE ACTIVATED WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK OF DUAL AXIS LOG Alert number 509: PROG TRACK: NEED SOG/COG REF. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE GOTO TRACK Alert number 506: ROUTE: USE RADIUS CTRL. Alert number 508: DISABLED: NEED SOG/COG REF. THIS ALERT IS REPEATED EVERY 5 MINUTES. TURNRATE TO BE EXCEEDED.erts Alert number 516: AUTOPILOT: DRIFT LIMIT -----------------------------------IF THE AUTOPILOT NEEDS MORE THAN A SET LIMIT TO COMPENSATE DRIFT(THE LIMIT IS AVAILABLE IN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS FOR TRACK MODE (MAX DRIFT COMPENSATION). SET COURSE'. Alert number 460: PILOT: ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /6/13 -----------------------------------THE RADIUS SENT TO AUTOPILOT IS EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR TURNRATE. THIS ALERT IS REPEATED EVERY 5 MINUTES. REDUCE THE SPEED OR INCREASE RADIUS BY OVERDRIVING WITH 'MAN. Alert number 461: ROUTE:ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /6/13 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS BEING APPROACHED WITH TOO HIGH SPEED FOR THE PLANNED RADIUS. WARNING* 'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE HAS THEN AUTOMATICALLY BEEN INITIATED Alert number 455: ROUTE: OFF COURSE /6/13 -----------------------------------SYSTEM NEEDS MORE THAN A SET LIMIT TO KEEP THE TRACK. CAUSING MAX. IF THE CONDITION CONTINUES. OR REDUCE SPEED. Alert number 452: ROUTE: TURNING DISABLED /1 -----------------------------------WHEELOVER POINT HAS BEEN PASSED WITHOUT 'ACKN. LEAVE NAVI MODE BEFORE ACKNOWLEDGED ALERT. Alert number 456: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ERROR /5 -----------------------------------'TIME TO WOP' HAS CHANGED SINCE 'WPT APPROACH' ALERT WAS ACKNOWLEDGED. VERIFY POSITION AND SPEED SEN SORS IN 'SENSORS' PAGE Alert number 458: ROUTE: LAST WPT APPROACH /1/8 -----------------------------------FINAL WAYPOINT OF THE ROUTE IS REACHED. CLICK 'ACKN. POSSIBLY DUE TO A POSITION JUMP. INCREASE THE RADIUS. /5/12 i i i i Alert number 451: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ALERT /1/8 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS NOW BEING APPROACHED. WARNING' TO ACCEPT THE TURN. . Alert number 506: ROUTE:USE AUTO CONTROL /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS' Alert number 476: ROUTE: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITH ONE POSITION DEVICE AND WITHOUT ANY LOG DEVICE. SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. Alert number 470: DISABLED: NEEDS FILTER ON /3 -----------------------------------'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CAN BE USED ONLY WHEN 'FILTER' IS ON AND THERE ARE ENOUGH SPEED. BUT YOU HAVE NOT LEFT 'TRACK' MODE CHANGE IMMEDIATELY TO AUTO' MODE Alert number 475: ROUTE: NEEDS FILTER ON /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITHOUT FILTERED POSITION AVAILABLE. VERIFY AND SELECT SENSORS IN'SENSORS' Alert number 485: ROUTE: WPT PREWARNING ALERT /5/12 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS SOON BEING APPROACHED. VERIFY TRACKPILOT FUNCTIONS.USE AUTO/4/11 -----------------------------------YOU HAVE TRIED TO ACTIVATE TRACK STEERING OR YOU HAVE REACHED THE END OF THE ROUTE. USE 'AUTO' OR 'HAND' MODE TO STEER WITHIN THE LIMITS. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE TRACK MODE . HEADING AND POSITION SENSORS.erts Alert number 468: DISABLED: OUT OF COURSE /3 -----------------------------------ROUTE STEERING CAN ONLY BE INITIATED WHEN SHIPS COURSE IS WITHIN THE 'TRACK LIMIT' FOR 'TRACK. Alert number 497: ROUTE: STOP-SENSOR FAIL /3 -----------------------------------GYRO. Alert number 469: TRACKPILOT: OFF COURSE /6/13 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT DOES NOT STEER WITHIN LIMITS OF 'COURSE TO STEER' COMMAND'. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ PAGE Alert number 471:AP MODE CONFLICT . TURN IS COMPLETED WITH PLANNED RADIUS. FIRST CHANGE USING SYSTEM SELECTOR SWITCH FROM "FU" TO "NFU" AND THEN USE NON-FOLLOW UP STEERING LEVER TO CONTROL RUDDER(S). 514: ROUTE: NAVI COMPLETE TURN /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. 515: CONFLICT-NAVI COMPL. TURN -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE FROM NAVI TO AUTO. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED TO CHANGE NON FOLLOW UP CONTROL OF RUDDER(S).erts Alert number 511: ROUTE:AUTO RESUME DISABLE /3 -----------------------------------IF ALERT 471 HAS BEEN GENERATED AND LATER CONDITION FOR ALERT 471 DISAPPEARS WITHOUT CHANGING STEERING MODE FROM "NAVI" TO "AUTO" OR "HAND". THIS ALERT IS REPEATED EVERY 5 MINUTES. . FIRST CHANGE STEERING MODE TO "AUTO" OR "HAND" AND CHECK THAT PRECONDITIONS FOR ROUTE STEERING ARE FULFILLED. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE TRACK MODE AFTER TURN. Alert number 512: USE NFU RUDDER CONTROL /3/10 -----------------------------------RUDDER SERVO UNIT CANNOT BE CONTROLLED BY YOKOGAWA STEERING CONTROL UNIT. IF THE CONDITION CONTINUES. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF AUTOPILOT CANNOT CONTINUE TRACK MODE. CONTINUE AUTO MODE AFTER TURN. /5/12 Alert number Alert number Alert number 516: AUTOPILOT: DRIFT LIMIT /5/12 -----------------------------------IF THE AUTOPILOT NEEDS MORE THAN A SET LIMIT TO COMPENSATE DRIFT(THE LIMIT IS AVAILABLE IN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS FOR TRACK MODE (MAX DRIFT COMPENSATION)). TURNRATE TO BE EXCEEDED. Alert number 464: ROUTE: NO SELECTED ROUTE /4 -----------------------------------NO ROUTE HAS BEEN SELECTED.erts i i i i Alert number 451: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ALERT /1/8 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS NOW BEING APPROACHED. WARNING' Alert number 456: ROUTE: WPT APPROACH ERROR /3 -----------------------------------'TIME TO WOP' HAS CHANGED SINCE 'WPT APPROACH' ALERT WAS ACKNOWLEDGED. OR REDUCE SPEED. CLICK 'ACKN. CAUSING MAX. Alert number 460: PILOT: ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /3/13 -----------------------------------THE RADIUS SENT TO AUTOPILOT IS EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR TURNRATE. . VERIFY POSITION AND SPEED SEN SORS IN 'SENSORS' PAGE Alert number 458: ROUTE: LAST WPT APPROACH /1/8 -----------------------------------FINAL WAYPOINT OF THE ROUTE IS REACHED. WARNING* 'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE HAS THEN AUTOMATICALLY BEEN INITIATED Alert number 455: ROUTE: OFF COURSE /6/13 -----------------------------------ACTUAL 'HEADING' FOR NEXT WAYPOINT EXCEEDS THE 'LOWER OFFCOURSE' OR 'HIGHER OFF COURSE' LIMIT OF PLANNED COURSE. SELECT A ROUTE AND NEXT WAYPOINT THROUGH 'ROUTE MONITOR' PUSHBUTTON. Alert number 452: ROUTE: TURNING DISABLED /1 -----------------------------------WHEELOVER POINT HAS BEEN PASSED WITHOUT 'ACKN. Alert number 461: ROUTE:ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /6/13 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS BEING APPROACHED WITH TOO HIGH SPEED FOR THE PLANNED RADIUS. WARNING' TO ACCEPT THE TURN. POSSIBLY DUE TO A POSITION JUMP. AND ROUTE STEERING CANNOT BE INITIATED. REDUCE THE SPEED OR INCREASE RADIUS BY OVERDRIVING WITH 'MAN. SET COURSE'. INCREASE THE RADIUS. ACCEPT THE SITUATION BY CLICKING 'ACKN. LEAVE RC MODE BEFORE ACKNOWLEDGED ALERT. Alert number 470: DISABLED: NEEDS FILTER ON /3 -----------------------------------RC STEERING MODE CAN BE USED ONLY WHEN 'FILTER' IS ON AND THERE ARE ENOUGH SPEED. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ PAGE Alert number 471: RC/NAV-TC STOP . Alert number 468: DISABLED: OUT OF COURSE /3 -----------------------------------ROUTE STEERING CAN ONLY BE INITIATED WHEN SHIPS COURSE IS WITHIN THE LIMIT FOR 'GOTO OS' OR WITHIN THE LIMIT FOR 'GOTO AW'. VERIFY AND SELECT POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS' Alert number 476: ROUTE: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITH ONE POSITION DEVICE AND WITHOUT ANY LOG DEVICE. POSITION AND POSITION DISCREPANCY LIMIT BETWEEN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SENSORS IS EXCEEDED. USE 'ROUTE MONITOR' PUSHBUTTON TO SELECT “TO WPT” TO BE 2 OR HIGHER. HEADING AND POSITION SENSORS. USE 'AUTO' MODE TO STEER WITHIN THE LIMITS. VERIFY AND SELECT SENSORS IN'SENSORS' Alert number 478: ROUTE: NEEDS GOOD POSIT.USE AUTO /4/11 -----------------------------------ECDIS AND TOKYO KEIKI AUTOPILOT CANNOT PERFORM TRACK STEERING MODE. /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING GOTO OS STEERING MODE WITHOUT DIFF. FIRST CHANGE MODE FROM "RC" TO "AUTO" AND THEN CHECK THAT PRECONDITIONS FOR ROUTE STEERING ARE FULFILLED. Alert number 480: TRACKPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /5/12 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT AND ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE TOGETHER. THIS IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALERT 497” APPEARS. CHANGE STEERING MODE TO 'AUTO'.erts Alert number 465: ROUTE: ILLEGAL WAYPOINT /4 -----------------------------------ROUTE STEERING CANNOT START FROM WAYPOINT 1. Alert number 475: ROUTE: NEEDS FILTER ON /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING ROUTE STEERING WITHOUT FILTERED POSITION AVAILABLE. . ALTERNATIVES ARE A LOG OR TWO POSITION RECEIVERS Alert number 492: ROUTE: NEEDS DIFF POS. STEERING MODE IS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED “GOTO OS” WITH ALERT 489:ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO OS Alert number 497: ROUTE: STOP-SENSOR FAIL /3 -----------------------------------GYRO. Alert number 505: ROUTE: USE GOTO OS /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. “ALERT 501” IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALERT 497” APPEARS. Alert number 489: ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO OS /5 -----------------------------------IF ALERT 492 OR 507 HAS BEEN VALID FOR 10 MINUTES. Alert number 488: STEERING: STOP-SYSTEM FAIL /3 -----------------------------------TRACKPILOT AND ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE TOGETHER. Alert number 501: ROUTE: NEED HIGHER SPEED /3/10 -----------------------------------THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. /5/12 -----------------------------------'GOTO AW' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE WITHOUT A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION SENSOR. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE GOTO AW Alert number 506: ROUTE: USE AUTO CTRL. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE GOTO OS OR GOTO AW . CHANGE STEERING MODE TO 'AUTO'. STEERING MODE IS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED TO GOTO OS Alert number 490: DISABLED: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /3 -----------------------------------'RC'STEERING MODE CAN BE USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS AN INDEPENDENT SPEED SOURCE.erts Alert number 485: ROUTE: WPT PREWARNING ALERT /5/12 -----------------------------------WAYPOINT IS SOON BEING APPROACHED. SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE. IT IS AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALERT 408”. STEER TO LINEAR PART OF MONITORED ROUTE TO ACTIVATE TRACK STEERING MODE Alert number Alert number Alert number . Alert number 510: DISABLED: OUT OF TURN /3 -----------------------------------GOTO AW OR GOTO OS STEERING MODE CANNOT BE ACTIVATED IF THE ROUTE MONITORING OF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT ROUTE MONITOR IS in TURN. TURN /5/12 -----------------------------------SYSTEM CANNOT PERFORM TRACK STEERING MODE. FIRST CHANGE STEERING MODE TO "AUTO" OR "HAND" AND CHECK THAT PRECONDITIONS FOR ROUTE STEERING ARE FULFILLED. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED TO CHANGE NON-FOLLOW UP CONTROL OF RUDDER(S). FIRST CHANGE USING SYSTEM SELECTOR SWITCH FROM "FU" TO "NFU" AND THEN USE NON-FOLLOW UP STEERING LEVER TO CONTROL RUDDER(S). 514: ROUTE: USE AUTO CONTROL /5/12 -----------------------------------THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE STEERING MODE.erts Alert number 507: ROUTE: NEED SOG/COG REF. FIRST CHANGE MODE FROM "RC" TO "AUTO" AND THEN CHECK THAT PRECONDITIONS FOR ROUTE STEERING ARE FULFILLED 517: DISABLED IN TURN /3 -----------------------------------CURRENT LOCATION OF SHIP IS IN TURN OF MONITORED ROUTE. BUT OWN SHIP LOCATION IS OUT OF TURN. THIS ALERT IS GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO CONTINUE TRACK MODE AFTER TURN. Alert number 511: ROUTE:AUTO RESUME DISABLE /3 -----------------------------------IF ALERT 471 HAS BEEN GENERATED AND LATER CONDITION FOR ALERT 471 DISAPPEARS WITHOUT CHANGING STEERING MODE FROM "RC" TO "AUTO" OR "HAND". 515: CONFLICT-NAVI COMPL. /5/12 -----------------------------------'GOTO AW' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK OF DUAL AXIS LOG. CHECK AND SET CORRECT “TO WPT” AGAIN FOR ROUTE MONITORING. Alert number 512: USE NFU RUDDER CONTROL /3/10 -----------------------------------RUDDER SERVO UNIT CANNOT BE CONTROLLED BY STEERING CONTROL UNIT. erts Alert number 518: DISABLED NOT ACCEPTED /5/12 -----------------------------------30 SECONDS TIMEOUT PERIOD WAS PASSED WHEN PRESSING "NAV" AND "ENABLE SWITCH" BUTTONS ON TOKYO KEIKI CONTROL PANEL. AFTER SELECTION "GOTOOS" OR "GOTOAW" ON ECDIS YOU HAVE 30 SECONDS TO "NAV" AND "ENABLE SWITCH" BUTTONS ON TOKYO KEIKI CONTROL PANEL. LIMIT /5/12 -----------------------------------TRACK CONTROL SYSTEM IS UNABLE TO GET VESSEL TO APPROACH THE TRACK. ALERT IS TRIGGERED IF VESSEL IS OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMIT AND IF CROSS TRACK ERROR IS STILL INCREASING. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 104: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. ANOTHER REASON CAN BE THAT VESSEL HAS MOVED INTO TURNING PART OF A MONITORED ROUTE BEFORE PRESSING "NAV" AND "ENABLE SWITCH" BUTTONS ON TOKYO KEIKI CONTROL PANEL. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 101: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13 -----------------------------------NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 102: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13 -----------------------------------NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 519: TRACKPILOT: XTE COMP. CHECK RADAR PROCESSOR . CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON ON RADAR OVERLAY. OTHERWISE ALERT 518 IS GIVEN. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 103: RADOV NO VIDEO /14 -----------------------------------NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. i Alert number 100: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 204: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 201: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13 -----------------------------------NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. Alert number 200: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. IF NECESSARY. Alert number 107: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. CHECK CONNECTION TO RADAR 1. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 202: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13 -----------------------------------NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 203: RADOV NO VIDEO /14 -----------------------------------NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON ON RADAR OVERLAY. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF.erts Alert number 105: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE. Alert number 109: RADOV NO ECHO DATA 6/13 -----------------------------------NO RADAR VIDEO AVAILABLE. CHECK RADAR PROCESSOR . Alert number 106: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FAILS BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. RESTART ECDIS AND RADAR. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 151: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13 -----------------------------------NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY.erts Alert number 205: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. Alert number 207: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. CHECK CONNECTION TO RADAR 2. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON ON RADAR OVERLAY. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. Alert number 206: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FAILS BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. RESTART ECDIS AND RADAR. IF NECESSARY. Alert number 209: RADOV NO ECHO DATA 6/13 -----------------------------------NO RADAR VIDEO AVAILABLE. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 153: RADOV NO VIDEO /14 -----------------------------------NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 152: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13 -----------------------------------NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK RADAR PROCESSOR . Alert number 150: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 154: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 253: RADOV NO VIDEO /14 -----------------------------------NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. REINSTALL ECDIS SW.erts Alert number 155: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON ON RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 159: RADOV NO ECHO DATA 6/13 -----------------------------------NO RADAR VIDEO AVAILABLE. CHECK CONNECTION TO RADAR 3. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 251: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13 -----------------------------------NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. Alert number 250: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK RADAR PROCESSOR . Alert number 157: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. RESTART ECDIS AND RADAR. IF NECESSARY. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. Alert number 156: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FAILS BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 252: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13 -----------------------------------NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY Alert number 254: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13 -----------------------------------NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR RADAR OVERLAY. i An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line of ECDIS. REINSTALL ECDIS SW. POS1 etc. CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. Alert number 90: CALA OUTPUT CONN. Alert number 256: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FAILS BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. LOST /7/14 -----------------------------------.erts Alert number 255: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE. Etc. The communication with the sensor is supervised and if fault is detected then alert "ALARM SENSOR LOST including number 70-85 (depending of serial channel) and source indication label (for example AIS. This is intended for sensors reporting to ECDIS. Alert number 259: RADOV NO ECHO DATA 6/13 -----------------------------------NO RADAR VIDEO AVAILABLE. For example: Alert number 70: XXXX ALARM SENSOR LOST /7/14 -----------------------------------COMMUNICATION FAULT DETECTED WITH SENSOR CONNECTED TO CHANNEL 1. Alert number 257: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 6/13 -----------------------------------FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION FOR RADAR FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND RADAR PROCESSOR. ALR message from the sensor includes information about alert on sensor. . REINSTALL ECDIS SW. Alert number XXXX: “XXXX” + “NUMBER” + “TEXT” /7/14 -----------------------------------FROM EXTERNAL SOURCE “XXXX” INDICATES SOURCE. THE COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL ALERT MANAGEMENT IS SUPERVISED AND IF FAULT IS DETECTED.) is created. RESTART ECDIS AND RADAR. IF NECESSARY. CHECK CONNECTION TO RADAR 4. Do not use solvents such as thinner. Check that all cabling is firmly connected and is not damaged. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts. especially plastic connectors. they may remove paint and markings. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. NOTICE Do not apply paint. WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not open the equipment.i i Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic system. as they can strip the coating from the LCD. there are no operator-serviceable parts inside. 3 to 6 months Cabling . If you cannot restore normal operation after following the troubleshooting procedures do not attempt to check inside any unit. i Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. Remarks Do not use chemicalbased cleaners to clean either unit. Water-diluted mild detergent may be used if desired. Any repair work should be referred to a qualified technician. use an LCD cleaner. DO NOT use chemical cleaners to clean the display unit. To remove dirt or salt deposits. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment. Interval When needed Check point FURUNO-supplied LCD monitor and processor unit Check and measures Dust or dirt may be removed from the cabinet with soft cloth. Also. do not use a degreaser or an antifog solution. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment. using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching. Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below. acetone or benzene for cleaning. anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment. They can remove paint and markings. A regular maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below. wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. check if the fuse has blown. Use of a wrong fuse can damage the equipment or cause fire. When the voltage of the battery is low the time is wrong. find out the cause before replacing the fuse. Fuse (5A) i The PCI-951-5S-RS-R40 circuit board in the processor unit contains a lithium battery that preserves data when the power is turned off. contact your dealer for advice. all default settings are restored. at your earliest convenience. 000-549-064 WARNING Use the proper fuse. If it has blown. .aintenance an rou es ootin i The 5A fuse located at the back of the processor unit protects the system from overcurrent and internal fault. If it blows again after replacement. Name Fuse (5A) Type FGB0-A 5A AC125V Code No. have the battery replaced by a qualified technician. When this occurs. If the power cannot be turned on. etc. x Check connection of dongle x Select route as monitored. x Check sensor selections in Sensors dialog box. x Connect LAN adapter cable. x fuse has blown. (Continued on next page) . x ship’s mains is off. x planned route has not been selected visible top on chart.there are no operator-serviceable parts inside. x monitor route has not been selected visible top on chart. If you cannot restore normal operation do not check inside the equipment . x Click Delete button on Symbol page several times. position cannot be found x sensors are not selected in Sensor dialog box." message appears monitored route is not displayed x brilliance is too low. x Select route as planned. x Adjust brilliance. nothing appears on the display ECDIS program doesn’t start. x symbols may be superimposed by one another. Troubleshooting If… the power cannot be turned on Then… Remedy x power connector may have loosened. x Check connector. x Replace fuse. x Check ship’s mains.aintenance an rou es ootin i The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which to restore normal operation. x LAN adapter cable may have loosened. symbol of user chart cannot be erased x "Enable changes" is not selected. x dongle connected to printer port may have loosened. "No connection to dongle. x Open Route page of Symbol Display dialog box and select Monitor route parts. x route has not been selected. planned route is not displayed x route has not been selected. x Select "Enable changes" in User Chart dialog box. x Open Route page of Symbol Display dialog box and select planned route parts. x license has expired. x past track is not selected visible. x Activate ARCS charts display mode: Open Chart menu and select Activate ARCS Charts from the menu. x user chart display is selected for planning mode.aintenance an rou es ootin Troubleshooting (continued from previous page) If… ARCS chart cannot be displayed Then… Remedy x ARCS display mode is not activated. x Renew ARCS license. x LAN Adapter cable may have loosened. x ECDIS has failed to post process chart for radar. x Connect LAN adapter cable. S57 chart cannot be displayed x S57 chart display mode is not activated. cannot convert CMAP charts "permit missing" past track is not displayed x if ECDIS software has been updated then C-MAP permit information has been lost. x Close User Chart dialog box to activate post processing for user chart. monitored user chart is not displayed on ECDIS display x user chart is not selected visible. .. x Select user chart in monitoring mode. x Open Mariner page of Symbol Display dialog box and select User Chart’s parts. x Activate S57 charts display mode: Open Chart menu and select Activate S57 Charts from the menu. x Define correct subscription of CMAP charts again by selecting correct zones or areas. x Open Tracking page of Symbol Display dialog box and select Past track of System. user chart is not displayed on radar display x user chart is not selected in monitoring mode. x Unselect user chart in planning mode. Click the OK button to show the self-test menu. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area. 4. then push the left mouse button.aintenance an rou es ootin In addition to the color calibration tests mentioned in Chapter 28. For further details. . Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu. (Other diagnostic tests are also provided. Select Selftest then push the left mouse button. As the message on the screen says move the cursor leftward and upward then push the left mouse button. 3. Select Initial Settings and push the left mouse button. 5. however these are intended for service technicians. the ECDIS provides a keyboard test that the operator may use to check keyboard of the RCU-018. see the service manual. You are asked if it is OK to leave ECDIS and start the self-test. 2.) 1. on the self-test menu. ER B ER ON button. Their on-screen location is in the Control ead window. push the hot keys. Confirm that the bu er sounds.15. rocessor cooler assy. Operate radar-related controls E and RM rotary encoders. Click the Exit est button to uit the test. A/C SEA and AIN . . The trackball s and Y location is shown in the and Y bo es. Click the S S EM F RE OFF button. 12. A/C RAIN. Mai te a ce a ro le hooti .. 7. . 11. Co su a le a ts Consumable parts Part pe 117 AD board CR2 M 2 2 12 2 25 -AAAC -A7 Code No. Click the button again to stop the flashing and silence the bu er. Click the bu er. Click the button again to silence the 11. Operate the trackball. an ithium battery on C ower supply ard disk - . ush each key. The perimeter of the on-screen key. Spin the scrollwheel. hours Expected life The table below lists all the consumable parts in the processor unit. . button or scrollwheel blackens if the pushed item is functioning normally. Thirty seconds after the button is clicked the bu er sounds and the S S EM F RE key flashes. Confirm that the figure in the bo above the scrollwheel s on-screen location becomes larger or smaller with scrollwheel operation. Click the Control ead button to show the control head-checking screen. or the Control nit RC . Replace these parts before their e pected e piration. 1 . mouse button and scrollwheel. -151-5 7 -151-5 -15 -15 2-1 -1 -151-575 7 years 7 years years 1 years 2 . The figure in the corresponding on-screen location becomes larger or smaller with control operation. a ols a S ols ol a e a e cri tio ol ra hic s t ue scale outl e hi ca e i la e he a e o er electio either ea i th or le th i ore tha . c eloc t ecto cato sta l sat o ro ta ili atio i i icate o le arro hea a ater ta ili atio i i icate a i le arro hea . - . s s lfe s ol . eloc t ecto c e e ts t e .e S e at o s . ea l e hi li e a CC . e thro h the . ea gl e hi li e ori i ate ro CC . a a a te a os t o hi ol i icate locatio o the ra ar a te a. CC Co i te t Co o e ere ce oi t . . C 88 re ere ce . elect i o itio o ra ar a te a i i la e ith ol ol i la ialo . c ac e a a ta gets a ge ous ta get a a ero tar et it la h til ac ol i re o le e i ia eter -2 . a t trac li e. a ta gets all er electio la a ta gets all la er electio i i . i at l ol a re iatio e cto or o hi . . ast t ac t e c e e ts i e i cre e t are re e te a i le li e er e ic lar to the a t trac .e . a . . a a a ta gets state ac e a t or ol i ac e a alte at e t or ol i ac u s t o i ia eter ia eter ia eter . a ast t ac te a t trac i i thic li e. c ast t ac ast os t o s a t o itio are ra a ille circ lar ol . all . a e or a t trac i i icate a e or eco ar i i icate re thi icate ri ar thi li e. oth hea i a C are o the orie tatio i to ar to o i la . ct ate S ta gets scale outl e t ue hi ca e i la e he a e o er electio either ea i th or le th i ore tha . o tli e . or . a oth hea i a C are o the orie tatio i to ar to o i la ct ate S ta gets cti ate tar et a ho a e or call i rie tatio i to ar hea i or C i hea i o . c ct ate S ta gets a ge ous ta gets a a ero tar et it la h til ac ol i re o le e .e i ol a re iatio . ct ate S ta gets l es t r i icator ea g - . Slee g S ta gets rie tatio i to ar hea i C i hea i o . a ct ate l es S ta gets ea g . e i ol a re iatio .8 a eloc t ecto s a ar tar et tar et .8 eloc t ecto s c e e ts a ar tar et t e tar et .8 eloc t ecto s e cto at Sarah J Sarah J - . e i ol a re iatio . i Sa eal al to a gat o i i i o itho t V a ith V o itio i re . S sea c a t a s tte -S escue -5 . a get ast os t o s . ost ta gets o t tar et ol i re a la h til ac o le e it .e . i ol a re iatio Selecte ta gets . a a o t e t a o t - . eel o e os t o . a le o o rce la el are ora etc. -7 . c outes .la e la e ro te le li e are otte e li e a i icate la e ee a eari . lotte os t o s lotte o itio i cl e o e la el . W01 133T 15kn W02 116T 10kn W03 069T 10kn W04 . W03 153T 15kn W04 136T 15kn W05 089T 10kn W06 .e i ol a re iatio . outes .o to Mo itore ro te le li e are a he e li e a i icate la e ee a eari . ei or i i i itho t la el . -8 . . a ge ea g l o calle tra itio al a e cleari li e. ct al ti al trea e oli ector a re icte ti al trea e a he ector. a ge g lg t o te la o te Mo itor a o hi Chart lar earch area e a er hi hli ht to i icate iolatio a ai t er electe a er . . al st ea er e i e ti al trea ol are a aila le a art o erChart. .e . a el i e to i icate ea re e t tra erre ea rec o i . i ol a re iatio e of os t o re iatio i . er e i e cleari li e ol are a aila le a art o erChart. se cu so . lect o c ea eco e a ar er. gl e ith ra e le ho . oar e e t ha la el i ol a re iatio .e . e er i icate e e t to the Vo a e recor . a allel e l es - . e t a e t ar recor e i Ma o er M . a a le a ge a e . a ge gs . 2 AC AC Act AIS ANT A ARCS A TO A AI A CR CT R RI CA CA C CCR CCRS CDROM Ch C CO CORR C A C CRS CT D DIS DIST DR E E ECDIS ENC E E ERR ETA ETD I S e at o s Acknowledge Ac uire Activate Automatic Identification System Antenna Autopilot Admiralty Raster Chart System Automatic Available Ac uisition one ow Crossing Range ow Crossing Time earing rilliance Calibrate Calculated Consistent Common Reference oint Consistent Common Reference System Compact Disc Read Only Memory Channel Change Course Over the round Corrected / Correction Closest oint of Approach Central rocessing nit Course Course Through the Differential Display Distance Dead Reckoning East Electronic earing ine Electronic Chart Display and Information System Electronic Navigational Chart Estimated osition E uipment Error Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time Of Departure S ater - .e i ol a re iatio . e E T I T C ND S D SC I S ID INS / AT IM ON O MAN MA MIN MMSI MO N NA N T NMT N C OS Oth AST OSN I OSN R RAD RAIN RE RE RENC R RM RN ROT R E ternal ilter / iltered reat Circle round lobal ositioning System uard one eading eading ine igh Speed Craft Integrated ridge System Identification Integrated Navigation System atitude / ongitude atitude imit ongitude ine Of osition Manual Ma imum Minimum Maritime Mobile Services Identity Number Man Overboard North Navigation Not ess Than Not More Than Not nder Command Own Ship Other ast ositions arallel Inde osition Relative Radius Anti Clutter Rain Reference / Echo reference Relative Regional ENC Co-ordinating Centre Rhumb ine Relative Motion Range Rate Of Turn Receive ine i ol a re iatio - . e S S57 SART S SEA SENC SO S D STA ST D Std ST SYM T TC A T T TM T TT T TC ECT RM AT S O T i ol a South re iatio I O Special publication 57 Search And Rescue Transponder Transversal Speed Anti Clutter Sea System ENC Speed Over the round Speed Stabili ed Starboard Standard Speed Through the Symbol True Time to C A Target True Motion Transferred ine Of osition Target Tracking / Tracked Target Transmit Coordinated niversal Time ector ariable Range Marker est ater orld eodetic System heel Over oint aypoint ater .2 . Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. See the ne t several pages for the display associated with each dialog bo item. 2. . Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired item then push the scrollwheel.e 2 C SC a t International ydrographic Organi ation I O has published a set of charts where you can find e amples of symbology used in S57 charts. Roll the wheel to choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu then push the scrollwheel. do the following: 1. Everything is visible if you set all layers for Standard or Other in the Other 1 and Other 2 pages in the Chart Display dialog bo . Choose Overview from the menu then push the scrollwheel. . To open the I O ECDIS Chart 1 on the display. - . You can study them by using the Info/ elp feature and by switching different layers ON and O in the Chart Display dialog bo . e i C Chart nformation about the chart display nformation about the chart display - . 5 .e i C Chart Nature and Man made features Port features . Currents. - . etc. Pipelines. eabed. etc.e i C Chart epths. bstructions. 7 .e i C Chart Traffic routes pecial areas . e i C Chart Aids and ervices Buoys and Beacons .8 . e i C Chart Topmarks Color test diagram - . e i C Chart Mariners navigational symbols -2 . a e c a to s lfe s ols o colo o ult -colo e t -2 .e te et g S57 C a ts The following e amples give you a short introduction to the features of S57 charts. e i ter reti Chart la o s ol e ou a es te o full l g t secto s -22 . afety m and eep m hallow m.e i ter reti Chart S allo safet a ee co tou s hallow m. afety m and eep m afety depth m afety depth m -2 . e i ter reti Chart S allo atte te s o Sta o o ect o a age of C a t ese tat o s la alog o C a t ata co e age -2 . e i ter reti Chart a featu es ate a sea e featu es aff c outes -25 . e i ter reti Chart Caut o a a eas fo at o a eas uo s a eaco s g ts -2 . e i ter reti Chart og s g als a as Se ces -27 . e i ter reti Chart te s o fo t e age C at s la alog o at o a out c a t ata a featu es Sou gs -28 . e i ter reti Chart e t co tou s cu e t ag et c Sea e a o st uct o s Se ces a s all c aft fac l t es -2 . e i ter reti Chart S ec al a eas t o al fo at o a a la le o ta t te t - . e i ter reti Chart e to a es fo t e os t o age C at s la alog o e ot g g t esc to s atu e of sea e - . e i ter reti Chart eog a c a es etc.2 . S e t e t s ag et cs et a a c o age u es . on the back of the installation CD bo or on a sticker placed on the e uipment.no or by fa 751 7 1 . a license will be generated and transmitted back to the operator. eg st at o of t e s ste at C- o a Your system that has the capability to use the CM. . . 751 7 1 Email: technical C-MA . SR. . Once this license has been received it should be input using the icense Administrator software designed and supplied by the ECDIS/ECS manufacturer. To do so an Aladdin eToken supplied by C-MA must be connected to the system if the system has and supports S . The actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself. and contains vital information that will allows C-MA to monitor and maintain your licenses throughout the lifetime of the system. It is essential that the re uired information be sent to C-MA when ordering charts for a system.e C. / database./ database. Area or Cell and these can be seen on our Internet pages at www. rice uotations can be obtained via your chart dealer or direct from your local C-MA office. In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MA CMdone. There are two types of licenses. there are a number of things that must be . .no - . or in the form of a file called ASS ORD.2 e g c a ts A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above.no or fa ed to C-MA Norway AS 7 51 7 1.1 specifications. urchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. l g l ce ses Once the order has been received at C-MA . These charts are fully compliant with the latest I O S-57 . Once the license order has been prepared it should be emailed to license C-MA . ailure to renew a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable./ worldwide vector chart database. That you have correctly typed the license string. either by email license C-MA . Charts can be ordered by one. . purchase and subscription. . or contact C-MA Norway: If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MA : Contact nformation: or information or help please call you re nearest C-MA Office details can be found on the reverse side of the C-MA chart CO bo C-MA Norway AS ost o 212 ovlandsveien 5 7 Egersund Norway Tel.no or by downloading the Chart roduct Catalogue also available on the web site. C-MA issues order forms specifying the information that is re uired.C-MA . C- C Ca tog a C a ts c Se ce Your ECDIS system has the capability of using and displaying the latest CMA CM. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string 1 characters . 751 7 a . That the registered OR D database is available. This ID must be provided on all chart orders. The eToken provides the system with a uni ue System ID that enables C-MA to issue correct licenses. ƒ ƒ ƒ ou les oot g That you have registered the OR D database in the D ADMIN application. IC-ENC. which is available on CM / professional D D. They are delivered onboard in ENC format using S-57 and Sthen charts are loaded into ECDIS. If you change CD ROM service to D D service. the previous CM/2 lobal Chart Database is compatible for use with the EA-2 7. Official Electronic Navigational Charts distributed by C-MA on D D./ format. - . You have to keep charts up-to-date separately. you need to also have a new license for the D D service. priority of displaying the chart is in ENC delivery. Two of them are using CM. Additionally. Note: CM-ENC is available. hen using any C-MA chart. remove old charts from ECDIS before loading charts from new delivery. In ENC delivery charts are distributed directly from source like RIMAR.2 . the indication Non ENC Data appears at the upper right corner on the ECDIS display. Contact your chart agent or C-MA for details.e i CM CM Chart . These data sets contain two databases: ƒ ƒ ƒ CM-ENC SENC delivery . This database contains chart data original produced both by C-Map and ydrographic Office. mportant notice If you are using both services ENC and SENC deliveries having the same chart name loaded into ECDIS through both deliveries. C a t Su sc Cse ce t o Se ce R NO There are three different services available through C-MA Cartographic service that can be used in ECDIS EA-2 7. This database contains chart data original produced both by C-Map and ydrographic Office. If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery. A etc. A CM-ENC delivery is SENC delivery.2. lobal Chart Database. Chart pdates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart updates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. lobal Chart Database. which is available on CM / professional CD-ROM. S57 Chart Service from an RENC In SENC delivery charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard and loading to ECDIS. . . see section .2 at s S C el e oth deliveries can be used in EA-2 7.2. or more information. ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. 1 coded ENC in CM-ENC format.5 .2.2 C - C se ce S C el e Chart data distributed through the service is S57 ed. or ed. on ECDIS there are not any indications on upper right corner. . . hen using charts loaded and updated using CM-ENC service. .. C se ce RENC service produced by rimer or IC-ENC is considered to legally fulfil SO AS re uirements as primary aid of navigation. hen using charts loaded and updated using RENC or N O service.1-coded ENC. or ed.e i CM CM Chart . on ECDIS there are not any indications on upper right corner. . . National ydrographic Organi ation N O may have arranged similar subscription service as RENC on its own waters.2. - . Chart data distributed through the service is S57 ed. If there is indication No ENC Available you have to refer paper charts in navigation.2.5 C - of C - of a C - 2 se ces hen using any of mentioned above you will always have indication “No ENC Available” on upper right corner of ECDIS.7 .e i CM CM Chart . . ualit of data: uantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features. CM. . choosing Chart egend from the menu then pushing the scrollwheel. 1. The information is displayed with reference to your ship s position if automatic TM reset is active. ast displa ed update: Number of last update. This feature is called the multi-chart display. This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. y definition this must be S . which is visible on the chart screen. Areas where ENC and CM / rof or CM / rof are not available CM /2 is displayed. which provides various data about the chart currently displayed. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display. . Edition number: Edition number of the chart.8 . which is visible on the chart screen. if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. Navigational purpose: S57 charts are compiled for a variety of navigational purposes. CM / is displayed. Pro ection: ro ection of the chart. Sounding datum: Datum used for soundings. or with reference to the current position of the cursor if automatic TM Reset is O . Cell name: Name of chart. pdate issue date: Date to which the last update. is effective.ENC 2. C C at s la /2 charts. Alternatives are Overview. Areas where ENC is not available CM-ENC are shown. The navigational purpose. . eneral. which is visible on the chart screen. Approach. ssue date: Issue date of the ase cell of the chart. clicking the right mouse button. is indicated in this field.e i CM CM Chart . Coastal. can be toggled on and off by placing the cursor in the sidebar. arbour and erthing. CM / rof or CM rof and CM /2 are available. date: Issue date of last update. the system will open more S57 chart cells for display. ast update appl. The chart legend. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. priority is as shown above. CM / /2 rof and CM / rof If there is available the same navigational purpose charts over the area. ori ontal datum: ori ontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. Vertical datum: ertical datum of the chart. CM . These charts have the t o uct o CM / charts are vector charts displayed together with ENC S57 and CM priority order shown below. given by the chart producer. for which an individual S57 chart has been compiled by a ydrographic Office. The pro ection is always Mercator. - . clearance height .: Amount of magnetic variation. Select Ignore Scale use same scale as used on previously loaded CM currently used for ARCS chart . 2. / chart or Sync Scale use scale . . A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button. rom the Chart Catalogue dialog bo . Select Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu.. Depth: nit of measurement for depth. Spin the scrollwheel to select Chart Catalogue and then push the scrollwheel. C oos g c a ts fo a catalogue e g C oos g a c a t f o To select a chart for viewing from a catalogue. 1. use the cursor to select desired chart. .2 C oos g C c at ate al to use Do the procedure below to display CM / charts in the ARCS mode. .e i CM CM Chart Magnetic var. 2. 2. Open the Chart menu and select Activate S57 chart. do the following: 1. To display the catalogue. eight: nit of measurement for height above sea level for e ample. do the following: 1. Click the Open button. . C-Map does not appear.5. View Filters x Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display. - . SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format. 4. 3. x x x Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit. see paragraph . approach. general. 2. Group: or further details. 1. 3.e i CM CM Chart kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 1. Group: Display charts which are member of selected group. coastal. Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display. Selected Chart x x x Cell: Name of the chart Cell Status: Opens Cell Status window. 4. “ rouping S57 chart cells”. harbour. Source of Chart Catalogue x x x x CD: Display charts available in a named “CD ROM”. 5. C-Map: Display charts available from C-Map. RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts which are cancelled in an RENC. If C-Map charts are not installed. 2. RENC: Display charts available from an RENC. berthing . x Navigation purpose: Display charts for selected navigation purpose overview. Orange Red Blue Magenta - . The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows: Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been cancelled. or e ample. the SENC is missing the latest updates or the chart has been cancelled. but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. in SENC format for another software version or in SENC format for another ECDIS. You have a permit to use the chart. then all loaded updates are included into the SENC. The chart is available either in ENC format. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC.e i CM CM Chart 5. If the chart is permit free. The chart re uires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the chart currently. Either the SENC is from a former edition. you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you loaded a chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is also up-to-date. where it umps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship s course. Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a place other than your ship s current position.and Range change the chart scale. the indication “TM Reset off” or “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. Move cursor to desired place on chart and then push the right mouse button. Release right button to get chart redrawn. in the true motion mode. In the true motion mode. your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true motion movement from that position. To restore own ship s position to the screen center. Set Chart Center. OOM IN and OOM O T keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If you use relative motion. your ship will immediately ump to the true motion reset position. hen true motion reset is off. display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button. you reset own position with TM Reset. it will automatically ump to the true motion reset position. eep button pressed down while moving cursor over desired place. OOM IN and OOM O T keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display.2 . If. In the relative motion mode. You can repeat this until you have desired area on screen. . The dialog bo shown below appears. Active scroll.e i CM CM Chart o s g ou c a ts You may view CM. If true motion reset is on. you use ShipOffcenter. you can select a new fi ed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter. hen it reaches the true motion reset borderline. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area. oo g fo c a ts a ou ou s You can use either true motion or relative motion. in the relative motion mode. the indication “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area. your ship will immediately ump to the true motion reset position and use that position as fi ed position to stay on screen. se the scrollwheel to set the latitude and longitude position for chart center then click the Set Center button. Ship Center Ship Offcenter and TM Reset. se Range . If true motion reset is active. The basic tools for browsing charts are Range-. your ship stays in a fi ed position. while the chart moves on screen. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing position. Range . If. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying and clicking TM Reset in the mouse functions area . The system automatically selects ne t larger or smaller scale. ctivate Scroll allows you to look ahead from a place other than own ship s current position. If. Range . in the true motion mode. hen true motion reset is off. your ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline.and Range to select desired chart scale. you reset own position with TM Reset./ charts using different positions and different scales. the message arger Scale Data E ists appears. harbour. x Navigation purpose: Display charts for selected navigation purpose overview. x SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format. The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows: Green Red You can view chart on ECDIS. chart database stored on ECDIS. You cannot view chart on ECDIS. Source of Chart Catalogue x CD: Display charts available in a named CD . se Navigation purpose selection to view desired charts. 1. approach. 3. C a t catalogue of C- c a ts You can use the chart catalogue to graphically view content of loaded C-MA database s into ECDIS. Selected Chart x x Cell: Name of the chart Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display. Open the Chart menu and select Catalogue. Select Source of Chart Catalogue as C-MA . general. View Filters x Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display. Charts for which you possess a valid license are marked in green. x C-M P: Display charts of CM 2. . coastal. . x RENC: Display charts available from an RENC. 1. because license is missing or license has e pired for the chart. x RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts that are cancelled in an RENC. 4. x Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit.e i CM CM Chart . berthing . . - . x Group: Display charts that are member of selected group. ed. Charts for which you have no license or the license has e pired are shown as red borderlines. ind eToken ID in the following se uence: Menu ĺ Chart Menu ĺ C-MA Ed ĺ icenses It is indicated as System ID. demo x Coverage re uired x Duration of license orld. oad Database s into ECDIS. Area . . t o uct o / professional/ charts.usr . icense of CM . C-MA is able to process a code that is delivered onboard as a te t string or a file called password. development./ professional/ charts. . S57 a ag g Cuse c a ts t e C/ professional/ charts. It ce s g s ste The licensing system used with CM- / professional/ charts is based on the serial number of eToken. You will receive C-MA database s on CD-ROM or D D. . . elow are the steps necessary for ordering CM- ind eToken ID. See System ID for C-MA . - . The following information is needed to apply for subscription of CMx Company Name: x ser Name: / professional charts: x Dongle ID available on tag of eToken : x Reason for icense sale. one .e i CM CM Chart . You will receive icense s for C-MA database s either in file or character string. . . The eToken is connected to S port on the ECDIS and it identifies ECDIS for CMmust be connected to ECDIS always when using CM. Define your subscription and deliver this information to your chart agent together with System ID information. S ste fo C- Each ECDIS has individual eToken connected to S . See oad of / . See CM / database to ECDIS . .2 1. 2. cell month or 1 year x Database version available on CD ROM label : ased on this information. .5 x CM x CM / / C ata ase / Databases that can be loaded into ECDIS: There are three different CM rofessional. Click oad database to hard disc button.5 . proceed as follows: 1. oa of C ata ase to C S oad and register for use.e i CM CM Chart .Chart Menu . Menu . The following dialog bo appears insert Charts are available on CM / professional CD ROM. available on CD-ROM rofessional . To load them from CD to ECDIS.C-Map Ed CD/D D.5. . 2. ait until loading process completed. available on D D x CM-ENC. available on D D . . You can see loaded database version and issue date. 2 se of / ult le ata ases rofessional. insert CD 2. . Click oad database to hard dis button. The following dialog bo appears. - .C-Map Ed ROM/D D.5. .e i CM CM Chart . 1. oad and register for use.Chart Menu . Menu . Above is an e ample where CM-ENC and CM / rofessional databases are loaded into ECDIS. ait until loading process completed. CM / rofessional and CM-ENC databases at the same time at the It is possible to use CM same workstation. You can see loaded database version and issue date. Enter desired e piry date in “Add e pired at”. then double click desired charts in left hand side list bo . The code defines coverage of charts you can display on ECDIS. Click icense order. 1. you have to order a code which is sent to C-Map directly or through Chart agent. . Note that you have to overwrite e isting date by entering the whole date. CM / rofessional and CM-ENC C-Map generates own license. Select desired ydrographic Office.7 . ce se of C / To view charts of C-Map database s . Menu . irst open sub folder by clicking sign. . C eate l ce se o e to f le To get access to CM / chart data base. you need to load license for database. To order code proceed as follows: 1.Chart Menu . or each database CM rofessional.e i CM CM Chart . .C-Map Ed icenses 2. Selected charts are shown in list bo right hand side. 2 l ce se f o f le To get access to CM / chart data base.8 .Chart Menu . The code defines coverage of charts you can display on ECDIS. Menu .C-Map Ed icenses 2. Send the order file to Chart Agent of yours or directly to C-Map. . . . i CM CM Chart Insert floppy disk or other removable media to store order. To enter code proceed as follows: 1. you have to enter a code which is received from C-Map directly or through Chart agent.e 2. Click Add icenses from file. . Select desired drive A: . . If the above dialog bo appears it indicates that there is mismatch between chart database and password./ professional CD-ROM. Click ES button. . - . Successfully loaded code will be indicated with following dialog bo . 7. You can see in icense Adm dialog bo listed your licenses. Click O button.usr. Check that you have password. Click Close button to close dialog bo . ice e or o e ha ee loa e i thi te . .usr which is delivered to you to be used together with CM. You have to confirm load of new code i CM CM Chart 5.e . Click Close button. Now reading code. . Chart Menu . . Add string received from C-MA to the icense string field then click the dd icense button. Click the icense list button to see entered licenses. .C-MA Ed - 2. l ce se a uall If you receive license as a as follows: icense string . Close the icenseAdm dialog bo by clicking the sign in upper right corner. proceed icenses. Menu . .e i CM CM Chart . -5 . 1. To enter code. you can enter this string manually into ECDIS. E piry date of license can be seen in icense Adm. Dialog bo . After this period of time charts won t be displayed. a following dialog bo appears to remind you e piration of C-Map license. After e piration.e i CM CM Chart . -5 . contact your chart agent to renew your C-MA license s . This indication is shown 1 days before e piration. The following ermanent arning dialog bo is displayed. charts of e pired license s are displayed for two months of period. thi ca e e ir o lice e ta e lace e o e r ar . hen warning of license s e piration appears. . e e al of l ce se As an early warning. / rofessional CD ROM onboard three times. The end user can then copy these updates floppy disk. Select pdate Charts in C-MA Ed menu.7 o to ee C a ts u to ate During subscription time of period. To keep up-to-date between CD issuing period. you will receive CM. C eat g u ate o e f le from the menu. This automatic email server will process the update re uest. .e i CM CM Chart . You can create an update order file as follows: Open the Chart menu and select C-MA Ed [Chart Menu] -52 . 1. They are able to create an update order file from the ECDIS and send this by email directly to updates c-map.no. prepare the updates and automatically return them.7. you can use Real Time pdating service. ECDIS users do not have possibility to connect to the internet directly from the ECDIS. S memory stick or CD-ROM and apply them to the ECDIS. Click the O button. Select ones or Areas to be updated.no You will receive updates for your re uest automatically. the following dialog bo appears: 5. i CM CM Chart . Click the Create button then select the drive where to save the Chart pdate Order file. -5 . . . hen Chart pdate Order file is generated and saved to destination. pdate order file to address updates C-MA .e 2. oa gc a tu ates f o t e f le menu and hen you have received an update file via e-mail. then you can load it to ECDIS.7.2 1. . click the ppl Chart pdate from Files button. Open the Chart menu and select C-MA Ed in the menu. In C-MA Chart pdate dialog bo .e i CM CM Chart . -5 . In C-MA RT pdate dialog bo . Select pdate Charts in C-MA Ed Apply pdates from e-mail in pdate charts menu. [Chart Menu] 2. select drive where updates are saved and click the ppl pdates button. i CM CM Chart -55 . Click the O button. the following dialog bo appears.e . hen completed. e e of c a t u ates menu and You can see a list of changes for every updated chart as follows: Open the Chart menu and select C-MA Ed in the menu.7.e i CM CM Chart . 1. [Chart Menu] 2. Select pdate Charts in C-MA Ed Apply pdates from e-mail in pdate charts menu. -5 . Review updates in te t mode and click the Review updates button. In the RT dialog bo . click the -57 .e . Click the button. 5. button. Select from the list shown below. Select a chart from the list. . i CM CM Chart . Select C-Map pdate Status in C-Map Ed.Date of pdate file loaded to ECDIS A 2 12 .Date of pdate file processed D2 1112 for database above using RT . Open the Chart menu and select C-Map Ed [Chart Menu] from the menu. : The ollowing information is available: .e i CM CM Chart .7.Database version number ENC version 227 . C-Map Database pdate Status dialog appears. Click O to close dialog. 1. -58 . o to e u ate status of C c a ts menu. 2. date .Date of pdate file processed D for database above using RT . 1. C-Map Database pdate history viewer appears. 2. Click O to close dialog.Date of pdate file loaded to ECDIS A .5 o to e u ate sto of C c a ts menu.e i CM CM Chart . Select C-Map pdate Status in C-Map Ed. The following information is available: . -5 .oading date of Database with version number ENC ASE version 227.7. Open the Chart menu and select C-Map Ed [Chart Menu] from the menu. proceed as follows: 1. .7.e i CM CM Chart . Select pdate Charts in C-MA Ed Apply pdates from e-mail in pdate charts menu. check will end to status “O ” If not. Click Chec Database Signature button. - . contact your chart agent to get database on another D D or CD. o to c ec ata ase s g atu e menu and To check database signature. If signature is O . Open the Chart menu and select C-MA Ed in the menu. 2. [Chart Menu] 2. Select oad and register for use from the C-MA You can remove CM ECDIS.e i CM CM Chart . Close CM- / Database Administrator dialog bo by clicking in upper right corner. e o gC C a ts from the menu. This will remove license and entire database from Open the Chart menu and select C-MA Ed Ed menu. . . Select desired database. / charts from ECDIS using nregister. - .8 1. Confirm your action by clicking the O button. The dialog bo shown below appears. .e i CM CM Chart This page intentionally left blank.2 . charts can be updated only by loading a newer complete set of CM.format is encrypted to prevent unauthorised use. but it doesn t have ENC status as defined by IMO.e C5. or how to switch from multi-mode to single mode. efore any CM. therefore the operator needs an authorisation code to view any CM. it is loaded into your hard disk and converted into the system s own internal format SENC . available from CMA Norway A/S.charts. CM. referring to page 2 -2. see the procedure on page 1 -2. urther. . CM.chart.chart material is stored into two CD ROMs. CM. . I O and IEC and thus it cannot be used to replace paper charts.chart can be used in the ECDIS. or further details on CMcharts. turn the radar overlay off. 5. see the chapter on vector chart material. This authorisation code is entered manually. Note: SENC conversion must be done in the single workstation mode. 5 C C a ts 2 C a ts C- t o uct o This electronic chart system is also compatible with C-MA vector chart format CM.charts. This material is used like ydrographic Offices S57ed charts. 5.2 S57 c a t lege t C- c a ts An example of chart legend with C MAP chart - . . turn off automatic SENC conversion and turn on Automatic Display ntil. oad C-MA charts by CD ROM catalogue. Define your subscription of C-MA charts.2. the serial number of the serial numbered C-MA CD ROM and the hardware identifier of your electronic chart system. oading C-MA charts from a CD ROM into - . See section A5. Other possible messages when loading C-MA charts are e plained in the section A5. You select either re uired C-MA areas or ones and your electronic chart system generates a operator code based on your selection. do the following: 1.e i CM CM Chart 5. Select automatic conversion into the SENC and setting of Display and Approve update dates automatically. See section A5.charts into your system.2.5 the system . If loaded chart is already in the hard disk with older issue date. 2. a ag g Cce s g s ste use c a ts t e C- The licensing system used with C-MA is based on serial numbered CD ROMs and authorisation codes received from C-MA Norway A/S.2. See section A5. oad C-MA charts by CD ROM catalogue. You enter the received authorisation code into the system then you can load and convert the CM.5 oading C-MA charts from a CD ROM into the system . 2.2. Defining subscription of C-MA charts . You send the operator code to C-MA Norway A/S and they send to you an authorisation code. There are neither edition number nor update number in C-MA charts.2.2 5.2. 5.2. See section A5.5 the system . oading C-MA charts from a CD ROM into 5. The procedure for loading the reissue is the same as loading of the C-MA charts for the first time. If you get a new release of a C-MA CD ROM. the system loads selected newer chart automatically. On the Chart menu.2. Automatic display until setting . so the system recognises changed charts using issue date of the chart.2 ett g sta te t C- c a ts 1. ee g C- c a ts u to ate At regular intervals C-MA will reissue its charts to keep them up-to-date. Send operator code to your chart agent.5 . Enter authori ation code into the ECDIS. Select charts that you want to use in the ECDIS. 5. se the function oad by CD ROM catalogue to select which chart to load. After receiving an authori ation code. uild a group of re uired C-MA charts. ased on operator code information.e i CM CM Chart 5. oad serial number of C-MA into the ECDIS. .2. . 2. 2. ef g su sc t o of C- c a ts efore you can be an authori ed operator of C-MA charts you must do the following: urchase CD ROM s of C-MA from your chart agent. . do the following: 1. by ones or areas. You will receive an authori ation code from the producer of C-MA charts. 1. This code is used to identify your chart folio for the producer of C-MA . the producer of C-MA charts is able to generate permission for the charts you have selected. . . enerate operator code. oad C-MA charts using the function iew loaded CD ROM catalogue . button. 2. Insert your C-MA CD ROM in the CD ROM-drive and select desired drive. Click the Non. . . In the NON. The CD ROM serial number is shown in the SerNo field. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button.. .e i CM CM Chart oa g se al u e of C Each CD ROM has an individual serial number that is used to identify the operator of C-MA charts. 5.O button to show the following window. Select Chart ermits from the menu then push the scrollwheel. - .O ser/Auth Code window. do the following: [Chart Menu] 1. click the oad CD Ser no. In order to load the serial number into the ECDIS. The ECDIS generates a operator code that is sent to the producer of the C-MA charts. . Select Chart ermits from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. To define subscription by ones.e i CM CM Chart ef g su sc to o es The contents of the CD ROM are divided into nine ones 1/ . .O button to show the following window. A various number of charts are included into each area. ./2 . ighlight desired ones in the Not Selected bo then click button to move them into the Selected list bo . To create operator code for selected ones.1/1 /1 ./ and each one has been divided in various numbers of areas 1/1 .7 . The operator code is shown in the Create ser Code field. User / Auth Code Load CD Ser No Create user Code YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY Enter Auth Code 0000000000000000 XXXX 7. Click the Non. 2. Click the ones radio button. do the following: 1. You can specify the charts you want to have in your chart folio either by ones or by areas. 5. . click the Create ser Code button. which is sent to the producer of the C-MA charts. ighlight desired ones in the Not Selected bo then click button to move them into the Selected list bo ./2 . To create operator code for selected ones. 2. . Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. The various number of charts are included by Area./ and each ones has divided various number of areas 1/1 . Select Chart ermits from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Click the Non.8 . You can define a chart you would like to have in your chart folio either by ones or by areas. The ECDIS generates a operator code. . Click the reas radio button. The operator code is shown in the Create ser Code field. click the Create ser Code button. 5.1/1 /1 . To define subscription by areas.O button to show the following window. . . 7. do the following: 1.e i CM CM Chart ef g su sc to a eas The contents of a CD ROM are divided into nine ones 1/ . . you are ready to load and view desired charts into the ECDIS.O button to show the following window. After entering authorisation code. 5. 1. . Enter the string you received from C-MA . - . ased on your operator code you receive an authorisation code from C-MA . Click the Enter uth Code button. Select Chart ermits from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Click the Non.e i CM CM Chart te g aut o sat o co e An authorisation code allows you to define your subscription to C-MA . You have to enter this string into the ECDIS. following the procedure below. 2. . Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. 5. After that the system asks which charts you want to load from the CD ROM. which stores certain information into your hard disk such as cells ID. . ncheck Missing only then click the oad button. Charts are loaded into ECDIS then automatically converted to SENC format and the SENC Convert window appears.e i CM CM Chart 5. 2.5 oa g C- c a ts f o aC to t e s ste hen you load C-MA charts by CD ROM catalogue. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. efore ECDIS starts loading charts then automatically converts them into SENC format you are asked if you are ready to start the loading. . the system first loads a CD ROM catalogue.2. floppy disk or CD ROM. -7 . The ECDIS loads content summary. Select oad and pdate Charts from the menu and from CD ROM from the sub menu see figure below . . Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. publisher notes and roduct ist from the CD ROM then opens the oad or pdate Charts loaded from CD ROM dialog bo . To load by CD ROM catalogue do the following: [Chart Menu] 1. their position and edition number. from your AN ocal Area Network connection. The system automatically copies all te t and pictures files associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue. hen conversion is completed. the following window appears. the following window appears. i CM CM Chart . To find the reason click the Details button. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC.e 7. -7 . . see section .7 kn COG (POSN) 045. x RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display. 6. The oad button is used to start loading. 5.2 Choosing automatic SENC conversion and displaying until date . rouping Note: The system can make conversion into the SENC and set the Display ntil date automatically. x Group: If you have predefined a group of charts. View CD ROM Publisher Notes button is used to view important notices published by chart producer.8 kn SB (POSN) 1. you can select how to pick desired charts from the list: x Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected.0q SPD (CALC) 1. which are canceled on RENC and normally on CD-ROM.0 kn 1.372'E 60q03. . or how to do this. 3. This is the recommended way. 5. istor button check what is loaded and converted from the CD ROM. which are available in the CD ROM. + 024q58. 2. The Edit Group button is used to create and modify group. 2.0q 1. edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the chart. The Remove button is used to remove the CD ROM catalogue permanently from the ECDIS.7 S57 chart cells on page A . . x Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list. -72 . 4.. or more information. which are not already loaded into the ECDIS.400'N 1. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here. see A5. .2.453 NM 352. x Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD ROM and for which you have permits.1q SOG (POSN) 2. View CD ROM content Summar button is used to list charts available on CD-ROM and oad istor and Conv. In the oad Selector field. x Missing onl loads and displays on graphical presentation only charts and their updates.e i CM CM Chart te etat o of oa o ECDIS only ate C a ts f o loa e C o HDG 070. A list of charts stored in the CD ROM. ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group. Select oad and pdate Charts from the menu and from CD ROM from the sub menu. click the in the upper right corner. istor button. click the Print ext button. Select desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROMs. Each row contains: x x x x x Cell ID: Edition: ase: irst pdate: ast pdate: Name of the chart Edition number of the chart Included update number and issue date of ase cell of the chart pdate number and issue date of the first update included pdate number and issue date of the last update included . 5. -7 . e g loa sto of C You can view what is loaded from a CD ROM using the oad istory in oad or pdate Charts from CD ROM. 5. To close this window. You can verify which charts are already loaded from the CD ROM. . 1. Click the oad button. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Select oad and pdate Charts from the menu and from CD ROM from the sub menu. 2. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. Click the View CD ROM content Summar button. If you want to make a hard copy of the ublisher Notes.e i CM CM Chart e gC co te ts su a You can view the Summary of the contents of the CD ROM. . A window that looks something like the one below appears. Click the oad and Conv. . A viewer shows information about the selected CD ROM . It contains information about charts you are going to load. 1. A window which looks something like the one below appears. istor button. Select oad and pdate Charts from the menu and from CD ROM” from the sub menu. Select desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROM. . 5. 2. -7 . You can verify which charts are already converted from the CD ROM. . Open the oad or pdate Charts from CD ROM dialog bo . Click the Conv.e i CM CM Chart e g co e so sto of C 1. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse button. berthing . Group: or further details.0q 1. 4.0 kn  CD  RENC RENC   SENC SENC   C-Map C-Map 60q03. harbour. Source of Chart Catalogue x CD ROM: Display charts available in a named CD ROM .e i CM CM Chart 5.8 kn 1. It is possible to pick any cell to see information for it cell. update s number by going over its limit with the cursor.453 NM 352. Catalogue of S57 cells t C- c a ts A S57 catalogue is used to view your cells stored into your hard disk or named CD ROM catalogues . x Group: Display charts. which are member of selected group. approach. x RENC: Display charts available from an RENC. see section . general. coastal.372'E 1.1q 2. Selected Chart x x x Cell: Name of the chart Cell Status: Opens Cell Status window. 3.2. x SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format. x RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts. 2. Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display. which are cancelled in an RENC. View Filters x Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display. ECDIS only HDG SPD (CALC) SB (POSN) COG (POSN) SOG (POSN) 070. -75 .400'N + 024 q58. rouping S57 chart cells .0q 1. x Navigation purpose: Display charts for selected navigation purpose overview.5. x Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit. You view limits of cells in the S57 catalogue window.7 kn 045. The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been cancelled. The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows: Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. Either the SENC is from a former edition. Orange Red Blue Magenta -7 . the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you loaded a chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format. then all loaded updates are included into the SENC. If the chart is permit free. The chart re uires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the chart currently. The chart is available either in ENC format. you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. in SENC format for another software version or in SENC format for another ECDIS. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC. but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. or e ample. the SENC is missing the latest updates or the chart has been cancelled. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is also up-to-date. You have a permit to use the chart.e i CM CM Chart 5. ress the Edit Group button. .7 ou g S57 c a t cells You can define groups of S57 charts. ress the New button. Enter group name. To do this. Select oad or pdate charts ROM window appears rom CD ROM in Chart menu.453 NM 352.1q SOG (POSN) 2.8 kn SB (POSN) 1. . all cells that cover a route from iverpool to New York or all cells available from a National ydrographic Office. proceed as follows: 1. oad or pdate s g oa o ate C a ts f o loa e C o oad or pdate Charts from hen you load or update S57 charts from CD ROM.0 kn 60q03.7 kn COG (POSN) 045.0q 2. for e ample.372'E 1. you are able to define a group in loaded CD ROM window. -77 . You can make a group and define charts included to group using either Chart Catalogue or Charts from loaded CD ROM window.400'N + 024 q58. A oad or pdate Charts from loaded CD HDG 070.e i CM CM Chart 5.0q SPD (CALC) 1. This means you can collect related charts.2. ress the dd Frame button. Click the Done button.453 NM 352.0q . -78 .e i CM CM Chart 5. se the trackball to define frame then push the left mouse button.400'N + 024 q58. 60q03.0q 7.400'N + 024 q58. 60q03.453 NM 352.372'E 1.372'E 1. SOG i CM CM Chart (POSN) 2.453 NM 352. Select the group to load. ress the Close Edit button to finish.400'N + 024 q58. ress the oad button to load chart.453 NM 352. ( ) 60q03.400'N + 60 024q58.0q 1 .e . -7 .0q .372'E 1.0 Kt q03.372'E 1. ress the Edit Group button then click the New button. kn kn kn  CD  RENC RENC   SENC SENC   C-Map C-Map -8 . .e i CM CM Chart s g C a t catalogue o Chart Catalogue can be used to define a group as follows: 1. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map 2. Enter name for roup. Select Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map -8 . Define frame using left mouse button in Select mode then click the Done button. kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map i CM CM Chart 5. . Select roup to view content of group in Chart Catalogue window. ress the dd Frame button.e . -82 .e i CM CM Chart e o g S57 c a t cells f o a g ou You can remove chart cells from a defined group as follows: kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map . kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map . -8 .e i CM CM Chart elet g a g ou You can delete a defined group as follows: kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map e g act e g ou t catalogue To view active group do the following: kn kn kn  CD  RENC  SENC  C-Map . . or or SENC format snc . Click the Remove button to remove selected CMA charts from your hard disk. e o g C- c a ts f o t e s ste To remove C-MA charts from the system.8 uto at c s la u t l sett g Display data may be set to system data automatically. The window shown right appears. CD ROM E.2. 2. . -8 . You can remove native data A. Select desired chart cells to remove them from the system. . Check Automatic Display ntil. Open the Chart menu and select SENC Convert Settings to show the following window. 2. Select Remove Charts from the menu then push the scrollwheel. 1.2. do the following: Open the Chart menu. 1.e i CM CM Chart 5. 5. . Open the Chart menu.. The Set Chart viewing date window appears. -85 . You can enter desired date by using the Approve ntil input bo number of approved updates/number of updates in SENC format . To set Approve ntil as current date of the system. 2. you must open the Set Chart viewing dates window and set it there. SENC edt upd: The SENC column contains edition/update status from SENC . Recommended settings in this window are: x Sync Manual pdate Dates: ON position x All SENCs: ON position RENC edt upd: The RENC column contains edition/update status from roduct ist.e i CM CM Chart 5. select Set Chart viewing dates from the menu then push the scrollwheel. You can enter desired date by using the Display ntil input bo . until: iew the date until updates is approved. the system sets Display ntil of S57 chart cell s as current date of the system. until: iew the date until updates is displayed. pdates approv. The number after date shows the number of updates done for the displayed cell number of displayed updates/number of updates in SENC format .2. You can view status and date dependency of S57 chart cells and their updates as follows: [Chart Menu] 1. t e u e g status a ates ate e e e c of S57 c a t cells a hen you load S57 chart cell s and/or their updates. pdates displ. loaded and converted in the ECDIS. i.e. e i CM CM Chart This page intentionally left blank. -8 . select desired file from the list bo and desired backup format with ackup ormat. Select backup drive in the ackup Device field and select desired file with the list bo in the same field. select ackup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Select backup drive from Drive in the ackup Device field. -87 . Click the Restore button. Select desired ackup ormat. . The following formats for route backup restore are available: ASCII RO RIETARY ASCII OSITION: ist of atitude/ ongitude values ASCII T NAME OSITION: ist of T names and atitude/ ongitude T names ASCII OSITION ASCII ORION T NAME: ist of atitude/ ongitude and : All route related information EAT . lace the cursor on the triangle in the dialog bo . . lace the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the lan Route dialog bo . 2. ollow steps 1 and 2 above to open the ackup and Restore dialog bo .e . ECDIS can also generate a route from an ASCII te t file. oute ac u oute esto e ac u SC o at Sometimes it is useful to save some information about a route as an ASCII te t file for use with some other application. ECDIS can generate an ASCII te t file from a route. RO TIN : compatible to import-e port route information from/to Orion ro format do the following: o ma e bac up from a route in SC 1. 2. . or use some ASCII format-generated route in the ECDIS. In the ard Disk field. Click the Bac up button to create backup file. . o restore a route do the following: 1. 5. o t g C S oute ata to a cel f le elow is an e ample of how to e port waypoints name and latitude/longitude values to a Microsoft E cel table. T NAME OSITION . Content of MS E cel looks something like the one above. lace the cursor on the triangle in the dialog bo . Copy te t to the clipboard: Edit Select All then Edit Copy. Open the Notepad software then open the route selected at step 2. 2. Content of Notepad looks something like this.e i o te ac . In the ard Disk field. . . 7. Open a new E cel file then copy te t from the clipboard to the MS E cel: Edit aste. 1. select desired route then select desired ackup ormat ASCII . Open the MS E cel software. lace the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the lan Route dialog bo . Select backup drive A: from the ackup Device field then insert floppy disk in the processor unit of the ECDIS. . Click the Bac up button. -88 . select ackup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Move floppy disk to computer where you can run Notepad and MS E cel applications. . T NAME OSITION . . . lace the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the lan Route dialog bo . -8 . Insert floppy disk into disk drive in the processor unit. Content of MS E cel may look something like this. Copy desired columns to the clipboard: ighlight data in MS E cel then select Copy. You can paste te t to Notepad irst activate Notepad then select Edit aste Content of Notepad looks something like this. select ackup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel.2 o t g oute ata f o cel f le to C S elow is an e ample of how to import waypoints name and latitude/longitude values from a Microsoft E cel table into ECDIS. . lace the cursor on the triangle in the dialog bo . In the ackup Device field. Select desired route from the list bo in the ackup Device field then click the Restore button. 1. imit the length of waypoint names to eight alphanumeric characters and route names to alphanumeric characters. 2. Select backup drive A: from the ackup Device field. Open the MS E cel. which has same name as te t file. which contains the route data you want to import to the ECDIS.e i o te ac . ECDIS generates new route. select desired Restore ormat ASCII 5. Minimum speed (default=0 kn) Steering mode (default=Rhumb line) From text file Channel limit (default=185 m) WPT WPT LAT LON Mode RAD/NM CH LIM/m MIN/kn MAX/kn WPT count 31 Adjust after Delete WPT - .e i o te ac elow is an e ample where you can see which fields are from te t file and which fields are using default values generated by the ECDIS. do the following: 1.e i o te ac . oute ac u out g o at o t g oute f o esto e C S to o o o o eat e To make backup from a route in format. select ackup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel. routing format with ackup ormat. which can then be imported to Orion ro weather routing program. Note that following information is transferred with route: x x x T number atitude ongitude x Steering mode Rhumb ine or reat Circle - . In the ard Disk field. lace the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the lan Route dialog bo . . Select backup drive from Drive in the ackup Device field. Click the Bac up button to create backup file.2. select desired file from the list bo and Orion weath.2 . 2. lace the cursor on the triangle in the dialog bo . . EAT . lace the cursor on the triangle in the dialog bo . ECDIS generates new route which has same name as te t file. Note that following information is transferred with route: x x x T number atitude ongitude x Steering mode Rhumb ine or reat Circle . Select backup drive A: from the ackup Device field. . Select desired route from the list bo in the ackup Device field then click the Restore button. do the following: lace the cursor on Route in the status bar then click the Plan button to open the lan Route dialog bo .2. select desired Restore ormat ORION . select ackup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Insert floppy disk into disk drive in the processor unit. RO TIN . In the ackup Device field.2 .e i o te ac . o t g oute f o o o To restore a route in format of Orion ro weather routing program to ECDIS. 2.2 1. Alerts. to Plan (Move Plan to Mon. Mariner.) Close DB: Area. Route [Chart Display] Set IMO Base Set IMO Standard Set IMO All Other Select Save As Backup and Restore Close Monitor Select Unselect Report Close DB: Monit. Parameters. Record. Alarms Go Back Planning parameters Conning parameters Go Back Ship and Route parameters Forwarding distances Go Back Planning parameters Conning parameters Go Back Access Server Log Human Interface Log ECDIS Shutdown Dialog Diagnostic console DB: Dialog Box - . Alerts.) DB: Current Record (Moni) Edit Record (Plan) Go Plan mode (Go Monitor mode) Select Unselect Backup and Restore Point report Line report Go back Area report Go Plan mode Symbols report (Go Monitor mode) Full report Move Mon. Targets. Prepare Go Plan mode (Go Monitor mode) Select Unselect Backup and Restore Report Close Go back Go Plan mode (Go Monitor mode) Move Mon.. Tracking.e e u t ee S57 c a t o e 7 [Record] Go Back Details Log Voyage Log Danger Target Log Alert Log Alert Queue Chart Usage Log Bakcup and Restore Settings Reset e u DB: Voyage. POSN. WPT Plan Select Unselect Create Exchange with Monitor Copy from Monitor Backup and Restore Report Full WP report Passage Plan Report DB: WP.Tidal. Symbol. Count DB: General. Check. Other. Selection. to Plan Report for radar (Move Plan to Mon. Point. Line [Initial Settings] Set time Function keys Operation Parameter Backup Digitizer Backup and Restore Installation parameters Navigation parameters Chart Alert parameters Optimization parameters Print Navigation parameters Print Optimization parameters Selftest Standby Presentation library Access Server and Diagnostic Close Go Back Key Beep Wheel Drive Alarm Level Dialog Position Go Back Ship and Route Parameters Forwarding distances DB: Check Area. Danger Targets Go Back Voyage Log Danger Target Log Distance Counter Trip Counter Log+Counters [Safety Message] Create Message Delete Message Send Message Close ee ARCS mode* [Chart Menu] Go Back Activate S57 Chart Load Charts Update Charts Load and Update History Remove Charts Chart Catalogue Chart Permits License Select Next Chart Open Chart Manual Updates System Close * See next page for S57 mode menu Go back Ignore Scale Sync Scale Go back Permits By Group Manual Go back By Group Manual Go back Manual By Position Go Back Planning Undo Last Clear Set Chart Viewing Dates Backup and Restore Go Back ARCS Update Status S52 Presentation Library Verify System Files Refresh Chart After Backup Log File Colors Restart drawing process [Main Menu] Help Set Std Display MOB Event Record Safety Message NAVTEX Message AIS Own Ship Info Chart Menu Chart Display Symbol Display Set Chart Center Initial Setings Sensors Anchor Watch Route User Chart Notes Radar Close DB: Radar overlay DB: SPD/CRS. e i Me ree C at e u S57 o e Go Back Ignore Scale Sync Scale S57 mode [Chart Menu] Go Back Activate ARCS chart Load and Update Charts SENC Convert Remove Charts C-Map Ed 3 Chart Catalogue Set Chart viewing dates Chart Permits ECDIS Chart 1 Open Chart by Cell name Chart Cell Status Manual Updates System Close [Load and Update Charts] Go Back from CDROM Manual Go Back Load and register for use Update charts Licenses C-Map update status C-Map update history Go Back Planning Undo Last Clear Backup and Restore Go Back Log File User Permit Refresh Chart after Backup Reset Files S52 Presentation Library SENC Convert Settings Restart drawing process - . SD. AI DM. . ut se te ces A. . OSD. 8.2 M. T S. ROT. ut ut se te ces . D T. DTM. M . . DT. . . . AI DO. SSD. 8 g tal te face ata Se te ces 8. . . DA . RTE. MT . RMC.5 . NS.M . .e 8. ata ece t o erial a chro o or i accor a ce ith the ta ar re ere ce i ata i recei e i C . NR . AC . he ollo i ara eter are a rate 8 ata it 8 1 e V M o e 3 4 V a . . TTM. D T. T .2 A M. 8. A R. . ll other e te ce 8 arit 2 to 5 it . DTM. c nowledge alarm Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: s Alarm generated if message not received: 1 s R . . Se te ce st uctu e ut se te ces Data used is shown bold italics C . .Set alarm state Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: s Alarm generated if message not received: 1 s DB Depth below transducer Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2s - .e i Me ree . 8. 7 .e DP Depth Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s i 8 i ital ter ace 2s D M .Datum reference Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 15 s Alarm generated if message not received: s 1 s . Global positioning s stem GPS fix data Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 .5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s .8 .e i Me ree GG . e G .Geographic position .latitude longitude Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 .5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s i 8 i ital ter ace - . 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s D eading rue Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: .e i Me ree GNS .1 s Alarm generated if message not received: 12 s 2 s M .GNSS fix data Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 .ater temperature Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2s - .2 . ind speed and angle Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s i 8 i ital ter ace 2s - .e M V . N V E received data - 2 .e i Me ree NR . Rate of turn Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 s Alarm generated if message not received: 12 s 2s - .Own ship data Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s i 8 i ital ter ace 2s RO .e OSD . e i Me ree RMC .5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s - .recommended minimum specific GNSS data Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 . 1 s Alarm generated if message not received: 12 s 1 s i 8 i ital ter ace M .rue heading and status Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: .2 .e S .rac ed target message - 5 . Dual ground water speed Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2s - .e i Me ree VB . e VDM S V F data lin message E pected nominal interval between sentences: as specified by IMO for AIS transponder i 8 i ital ter ace VDO S V F data-lin Own-vessel report E pected nominal interval between sentences: as specified by IMO for AIS transponder - 7 . 5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 12 s 2 s V G .e i Me ree V ater speed and heading E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 .5 s Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s - 8 .Course over ground and ground speed Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 1 . ime and date Recipient of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s i 8 i ital ter ace ut ut se te ces Data used is shown bold italics C c nowledge alarm ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: s R .Set alarm state ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: s - .e D . e BM - i Me ree S addressed binar and safet related message ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: on demand BBM - S broadcast binar message ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: on demand - . e DP Depth ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s i 8 i ital ter ace D M .Datum reference ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 2 s - . ind speed and angle ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s - 2 .Geographic position .e i Me ree G .latitude longitude ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 2 s M V . e OSD .Own ship data ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s i 8 i ital ter ace R E Routes ransmit of sentences: Expected nominal interval of sentences: on demand - . e SSD - i Me ree S ship static data ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: on demand - . e VSD S vo age static data i 8 i ital ter ace ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: on demand P - a point location ransmit of sentences: E pected nominal interval of sentences: on demand - 5 . .5 og Se al e t a te face ut o ts a gat o se so s 330 ohm RD-A Photo Coupler HCPL061N RD-B St a s o Photo Coupler e ea g 82 ohm RD-A HCPL061N RD-B olute a i u rating Input orward current: 5 mA Reverse voltage: Output Supply voltage: 7 igh level output voltage: 7 ow level output current: 5 mA - .e i Me ree 8. ut o t Se al - te face - ut out ut o ts Isolated RS485 Transceiver RD-A SP487 RD-B GND Logical High: A-B> +0.0V Logical Low: A-B> -4.e i 8 i ital ter ace 8.2V Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V ut ut o t - - Isolated RS485 Transceiver TD-A SP487 TD-B GND Logical High: A-B> +4.0V - 7 . . e i Me ree This page is intentionally left blank. - 8 . 123.No. 123.1 3 131 12 1 2 2 1 2 145 145 31 2 DISPLAY UNIT MU-201CE DISPLAY UNIT MU-231CE 522 .44G PCI-5S-RS-R40 UPF250-AA-BG PCG-820GV 24P0092 03P9343 03P9362 TA4726N CONTROL UNIT RCU-018 PNL Board BUZ Board Trackball Assy. a ts FURUNO ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST SYMBOL Ref. PWR ON Board FN 2080-6/06 GDR-H30N FD-235HF MHW2040AC 77.e a ts st a a ts ocat o st Model Unit FEA-2807/FEA-2107/FEA-2107-BB Processor Unit EC-1000C Control Unit RCU-018 Control Unit RCU-015 Display Unit MU-201CE Display Unit MU-231CE .G1136. TYPE 2009/08 REMARKS PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C EMC Filter DVD-ROM Drive Floppy Disc Drive Hard Disk SDRAM DIMM Board BACKPLANE Board Power Supply CPU Board Assy.Dwg. CONTROL UNIT RCU-015 PNL Board Trackball Assy 03P9344 TA4726N 522 .1 3 131 5 23 13 2 12 4 - . ASSY. Blk. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD/ CODE NO. 2 .2. a ts ocat o ocesso u t CC Power Supply (UPF250-AA-BG) Hard Disk (MHW2040AC) DVD-ROM Drive (GDR-H30N). and Floppy Disc Drive (FD-235HF) PWR ON Board (24P0092) BACKPLANE Board (PCI-5S-RS-R40) SDRAM DIMM Board (77.G1136.e i art i ta art ocatio . (PCG-820GV) .2 .44G) EMC Filter (FN 2080-6/06) CPU Board Assy. 2 Co t ol u t C - 8 BUZ Board (03P9362) Trackball Assy. (TA4726N) PNL Board (03P9344) .2. (TA4726N) PNL Board (03P9343) .2 .e i art i ta art ocatio . Co t ol u t C - 5 Trackball Assy.2. e i art i ta art ocatio .0123.2. s la u t FAN (F62LM-012-K) -2 C Noise Filter (5220.1) Power Supply (HYPERION OBL03131) FAN Drive Board (FAN CONTROLLER) DVI I/F Board (FPI NO SW) isplay unit M CE. rear cover removed .22 . inside rear cover LCD Unit (FLC59UXC8V-04) Inverter Board (AC-1366) isplay unit M CE. 2 .1) Power Supply (HYPERION OBL03131) DVI I/F Board (FPI NO SW) isplay unit M CE.0123.5 s la u t -2 C Noise Filter (5220. inside rear cover LCD Unit (NL128102AC31-02) Connector Board (AC1457) Inverter Board (AC1458) isplay unit M CE. rear cover removed .e i art i ta art ocatio .2. 2 .e i art i ta art ocatio This page intentionally left blank. . FURUNO SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM (ECDIS) FEA-2107/FEA-2107-BB/FEA-2807 1. several alarm Information Own Ship Display: ARPA Target Display: Radar Overlay Picture: Others: SP-1 E4122S02C . 2.2 Kbps 2 x D-sub 9-pin daisy chain. 0. CPA and TCPA of selected ARPA radar target Option. and indicates additional navigation-related information. course. speed and course Range. chart Information in use. 23. It will be connected to the principal Processor with Local Area Network (LAN) of ETHERNET type. 75 ohm Separate sync or sync on green horizontal sync signal: 15-100 Hz (auto) vertical sync signal: 30-100 Hz (up to 1280x1024) 30-60 Hz (up to 1600x1200) 1 channel. option) One single ECDIS processor can be used for both route planning and route monitoring. This ECDIS series is mainly comprised of 1) ECDIS Processor (including Floppy Disk and CD-ROM Drives) 2) Control Unit (type according to system configuration) 3) 21. 21. It displays selected information from SENC* with positional information from navigation sensors to assist the operator in route planning and route monitoring. and 5) ECDIS B Adapter (analog signal interface.2 Kbps DVI-D/I Control I/O RS485 3. Display Items Chart materials: .1-inch LCD FEA-2807: Type MU-231CE. route monitoring Information.1-inch LCD MU-201CE: 1280X1024 pixel (SXGA) MU-231CE: 1600x1200 (USGA) Analog RGB signal.BA ARCS rasterized material .1-inch or 23. 19. 19.IHO/IMO S57 edition-3 ENC vectorized material . bearing. waypoint information. speed.C-MAP CM-93/2 vectorized material Own ship mark and numeral indication or lat/lon. can be separately installed to fulfill backup arrangements for replacing of the paper charts. course. pixel clock 25-162 MHz RS-232C D-sub 9-pin. under development Own ship position in lat/lon.1-inch Monitor (monitor is supplied locally in case of FEA-2107-BB) 4) LAN Adapter (serial signal interface). speed. Display Unit Characteristics Type: Pixel: Video Input FEA-2107: Type MU-201CE. General This equipment is designed with up-date computer technology to comply the IMO/IHO performance standards for Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS).7Vpp. An additional identical ECDIS processor. which is used for route planning. User chart overlayed on electronic map .Creation and display of pilot data .AIS own ship info . Position Calculation 8.Speed log: analog signal (200 p/m) . VTG.Planning by Rhumb line.Latest 12 hours of navigation data may be recorded (time. Display Mode True motion north up.Waypoint arrival alarm .Navigation by results of positioning found with external sensor .User chart may be transferred to radar screen .FURUNO 4. Relative motion north up. at time of man overboard are recorded and MOB mark is displayed on the screen) Standard interface .Speed log: serial data (IEC 61162-1 VBW) . ZDA) GPS. Route Monitoring 11.One touch activation of standard display .Alarm output: Relay contact signal (Short: alarm generated) Optional interface . User Chart 7.EBL. . True motion. Navigation Recording 12. Navigation Planning 9. Relative motion head up Relative motion route up . 2000 lines. position correction value.Wind indicator: serial data (IEC 61162-1 MWV) 5. Other Display Features 6..Gyrocompass: analog signal (synchro or step) .Shallow depth alarm .User chart creation (max. position. Great circle . etc. parallel cursor . Data I/O Interface SP-2 E4122S02C .Electronic chart update .Chart zoom in and zoom out . course up.Route data may be transferred to radar .Dead reckoning with gyro and log .MOB (Man Overboard) (Position.Pilot data may be transferred to radar (radar must be able to display such data) . etc. two units) . two units .Route creation . etc.Off-track display . Pilot Data 13. external Sensor and Kalman filter . Other Features 14. Relative motion course up. DGPS. speed. etc.Automatic navigation with Trackpilot (option) . VRM. max 1000 symbols) .Position sensor: serial data (IEC 61162-1(or 2) GLL.Gyro interface: serial data (IEC 61162-1 HDT) . Lora C. Automatic Navigation 10.Radar: ARPA.) . log. bearing.Highly accurate position with combination of gyro.Selection of symbol.AIS safety message -Navtex message .Navigational echosounder: serial data (IEC 61162-1 DBT) . alarm output selection 15.2Hz-100Hz: max velocity 7 m/s2 Display unit: IXPS Processor unit: IPX0 Other units: IPX0 Display unit: N3. Color SP-3 E4122S02C . control unit LAN adapter B adapter MU201CE: 100-230 VAC.5-0.2 lines of alarm output. 0.FURUNO .13. single phase. 0.6-0. 0. 5 Chassis: 2. 1. 50-60 Hz.6-0.Position sensor: serial data .5A 24 VDC.15 A 24 VDC. Power Supply Display unit Processor unit. single phase. 50-60 Hz.5 Processor unit: 2.2 Hz: ±1 mm ±10% .0 Newton No.4A MU231CE: 100-230 VAC.4A 100-230 VAC.5GY5 17. 50-60 Hz. 0. single phase.20 A 16. Environmental Conditions Useable temperature Relative humidity Vibration Waterproofing Control unit/processor unit/display unit: -15°C to +55°C 93% ±3% (+40°C) .From 2 Hz-5 Hz to up to 13.5GY5/1. ............................ 30-9 GOTO waypoint mode preconditions ............................21-10 CPA and TCPA ............ 30-16 speed used by ................. 30-13 alerts in program track mode ............................................................... 9-15 description ................................................... 30-3 control strategy............33-2 ROT ....................21-12 dangerous targets.................................. 30-5 load conditions ................. 32-7 autopilot dialog box......................18-11 monitoring .............................. 30-2 Autopilot PR-6000 adjustments...................................................................................... creating...................................30-1...........................19-13 steering calculation........21-10 Alert log printing .................. 32-18 auto route steering........ 9-14 description ............................. 15-13 Automatic route steering and Kalman filter....................................................... 30-36 curved EBL ...............................19-13 drift ....... 32-3 ..........19-13 route steering (Autopilot FAP-2000) .... 30-5 route steering alerts .................19-18 navigation calculation ..................................................................................30-6 radar overlay.................19-16 heading ................................................... 30-14 automatic route steering .............9-40 ARCS navigator chart permit loading .................................................................... reading.......................................................33-2 COG............................ 30-12 alerts ............... 30-24 expected steering performance (turns)...........................................................21-14 target name ..............19-13 Kalman filter ............................................................................... 32-20 alerts with ...24-14 Alerts AIS.............................. 30-18 track mode ...21-9 maximum number of targets ............ 32-16 automatic route steering ......................................................................................... 30-21 radius control.................................................................................................... 30-37 alerts for non-acceptance of route steering ... 19-18 Autopilot FAP-2000 accuracy of automatic route steering ..........................................................A Access server human interface log........................................... 30-19 activating route steering ............................. 30-18 control panel..................................... 9-12 Area page ................. 30-11 program heading change ..................................21-20 saving past target track.....................18-12 log......................................................................21-10 alert log......... 30-29 expected steering performance (going ahead)............................21-17 safety message............................................................................21-15 introduction ............. 30-5 program track ............................... 30-36 manual steering ................19-28 SOG .................................................................. filtering ..................................................... 32-21 arrival to a waypoint...............24-14 Autopilot FAP-2000......................21-19 safety message.................24-14 Anchor watch activating .........................................................30-37 chart calculation ......................................21-14 target past positions........................................ 9-12 ARCS skipper chart permit loading ...33-2 non-acceptance of route steering............................................................................................ displaying................................. 30-11 heading control........................................................... 30-10 GOTO track mode preconditions...........33-2 tracked target ................................................................................... 30-6 arriving to a waypoint .................................................................................................................................................................................... 30-27 GOTO track mode.......................... 30-5 manual steering modes.....................................21-4 targets............................. 30-6 programmed turns ..............19-13 gyro..........................................25-1 deactivating .................................................................................................................. collision avoidance in.....................30-13 position discrepancy................................... 30-8 Autopilot FAP-2000 steering ................................................21-2 lost targets...............................19-9 program track mode ....................................21-10 range for detection.....................18-10 AIS alerts ... 30-40 errors..........21-7 interface status.... 32-13 auto route steering .........21-16 safety message.......................................................................................25-2 ARCS details page ................. 32-4 auto route steering.............................................................................30-16 sensor related...................................................................................................................................................................... changing mode ....................................... 30-1 collision avoidance in automatic route steering..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................18-4 troubleshooting...... 30-7 multiple control panels..........................................20-6 Alerts log ................................................. 30-36 steering modes............21-4 vector mode .21-10 safety message........21-14 target data .................................................................... replying ................................ 30-11 GOTO waypoint mode.....................21-11 target dialog box....................... 30-1 stopping or modifying pre-enabled route turn ......................................................................................24-8 target call sign ........21-13 targets....................... 32-22 autopilot steering..................................... 30-20 preconditions for route steering ........................... 30-39 expected steering performance (critical failure)..................... AP-39 license renewal................ 11-5 objects for use in ...... 29-13 color pallette ............................... various conditions .... 9-11 Chart page ............................................................................................................... 18-8 shared alert management .................... saving route as. 11-12 alerts leg by leg ........... 32-2 non-follow up steering ........................... 29-4 ECDIS display as ...... 29-7 depth window..... 11-15 Chart center C-MAP charts ............................................................................. 18-3 usage rights ................... 32-14 route turn modification .......................................... 28-1 Color differentiation for S57 charts .......... 17-6 chart material............................................................................... 32-24 Autopilot PT-500 alerts .. 18-4 controlling .................... 32-3 predictor ............................................................................................................................................ 3-4 Common reference access server........................ 11-14 route planning for................ 24-11 file backup.................................... AP-73 loading charts from a CD ROM. 29-7 drift and radius window ................................. AP-34 system registration ........................................................... 32-22 Goto AW mode ...... 32-5 steering performance.................................................................... 15-4 Chart usage log ........ 11-11 highlighting ............ 32-1 steering method override......... AP-75 CD ROM contents summary........................................ AP-36 subscription service............... AP-52 update loading................................................................... 29-12 Autopilot FAP-2000 order window . AP-70 loading serial no.... 31-12 predictor . 31-2 Autopilot PT-500A control strategy.......................................................... AP-67 deleting cells from a group ................................................................................. 32-17 steering control unit .................................... 17-6 voyage log backup .................................................... 29-8 B Backup operations ASCII file........................................................ 11-2 symbols................................. 31-12 steering control unit ......................... 24-11 details log backup ......................... AP-43 chart ordering ....... 17-2 file restoration ................................................................. critical failure .......................................................................................... AP-63 defining subscription by areas ............... 28-2 Color palette.................. 31-1 steering modes................................................................................. 18-2 mode of workstations..................................................................... 11-6 with ARCS charts ............................................ AP-83 deleting group ......................................... 18-9 sensor source for system .................................... 24-9 C-MAP CM-93/2 catalogue of S57 cells ............................ 17-5 route backup.......... 17-3 file copy........................................... AP-69 licensing system .......................................... AP-85 viewing active group........................................................................ AP-54 Color calibration for ARCS charts .... AP-83 deleting subscription of.................. AP-33 removing .................. 31-12 curved EBL ................................. AP-33 troubleshooting ............................................................ 3-9 C-MAP CM-93/2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 17-3 file reading ......... of CD ROM.............. 29-13 combined wind....... 9-33 Chart legend ..................In e curved EBL ............................. AP-73 chart legend.......................................................... 32-4 route steering alerts ....... 31-13 arrival to waypoint ..................................... AP-64 load history of CD ROM ........................................ 31-17 steering performance........................................................ 32-7 Goto OS mode.............. 31-26 load conditions ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 29-12 Autopilot FAP-2000 window .... 29-5 azimuth propulsion window............. 24-11 C Chart alerts alerts by category .................................................................................................... 29-10 background color .............................. AP-83 C-MAP CM-93/3 catalog of charts ....................... backing up .......... areas.......................63 raster charts (ARCS)...................................................................... 17-3 former vector system format files......................... 17-2 file deletion ............. 18-5 Conning display alert message window................. 17-5 file renaming ................................ AP-51 licensing system .......... 11-3 route monitoring.................................... AP-84 status and date dependency of S57 chart cells ............ inserting . 31-2 steering performance.............................. 32-7 hand steering ......... 29-14 fuel consumption window.................. 32-36 remote hand steering .. AP-65 entering authorization code....................................... 31-15 Autopilot sidebar..................................................................................... AP-66 removing from system ........... 18-5 Common reference system access server................................................... AP-68 defining subscription by zones ............................................................................................... AP-87 route estoration from ASCII file ............................................................................................. 3-9 Chart menu raster chart............................................ 31-27 route steering activation ................. AP-33 choosing ............................... 11-10 safety contour................. 9-1 Chart legend sidebar .... 31-6 automatic route steering ........................................................................................ 17-7 danger targets log backup .......................................................................................................................... 17-5 loading files of former vector system format............................... 9-37 Chart points (user charts)................................................ AP-42 raster charts . depth and destination window........................................................................... lines... AP-33 update creation .... 32-35 errors ............ AP-61 RENC service ....................................................... 31-5 speed used by ............................................................................................................................ 17-3 Forwarding distances Autopilot PT-500A....................................19-13 source............................................................... 4-5 Human interface log.................................... 17-5 reading................19-9 Current record page ...................................................................................................................6-9 Docking sidebar....................................... 30-11 Gray scale test .......26-1 positioning devices and ...29-12 ROT window ...................................................................................31-26 use with TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 .........................................................................................................................4-4 Control unit RCU-018 hot keys.........................24-15 Distance counter reset ................................................................. 3-4 Event recording ......3-9 Double gyro interface.................................................................................. 9-31 raster chart addition...............29-3 interpretation of ............................................................................................19-14 H Heading alert......29-7 Control unit RCU-015 control description.............................................In e heading window ................................... 17-2 deleting ..................................... 30-9 preconditions for route steering with Autopilot FAP-2000...............................................................................................................................................29-3 speedpilot window.................................................... 9-27 Gyro alert................................................................................... 27-5 FAP-2000 ...29-2 introduction ............................ 29-10 propulsion and thruster window.................. loading ...... 9-30 ctive group removal from system...........................32-35 Drift alert........................................................ 17-3 copying ........................3-11 Display mode.................................................................................................................. 34-2 G GOTO track mode Autopilot FAP-2000.................................................................................. choosing...........................4-5 layout ... 17-5 former vector system format files............................................................................................................ 9-28 raster chart removal from .............................29-3 route window..........................................................................................................................................24-8 creating a user chart from....................................................................................................... 30-10 preconditions for route steering with Autopilot FAP-2000.......................................24-12 Danger targets log backup copy.................... 19-16 error correction...................................... 3-2 information area ........... 19-23 indication of source ....26-1 paper charts and............................. 3-5 ......... 24-1 F Files backing up ......... 3-4 sidebar ...................................4-5 layout .......................................................................4-1 Course alert....29-1 main engine start air pressure information.............................................................................................24-13 viewing ................................................................ 12-3 ECDIS display electronic chart area ........................................3-10 additional menus with .....................3-1.........................................................................24-2 Dialog boxes activating ...........................................................................................................................................................................................12-1 Distance counter ...................................29-8 weather and wind window.................. 3-6 user interface .....................................................26-2 electronic sea charts and...................................................................................4-4 hot keys................ 3-5 overview ............. 19-15 on-screen indication ...................... 9-29 raster charts ................ 17-2 restoring............................................................. 18-12 I Information area ........................ 17-5 renaming...........................................................29-4 propellers window ................ 28-3 Group active.........................29-13 position window ................29-6 rudder window...............15-6 verifying .29-11 mode ..........................26-1 user charts....................6-9 Depth sensor ...24-11 viewing ...........................24-7 Datum choosing........................................................................29-12 message window ............................................................................................... saving.......................... 3-1 palette ... 27-5 Fuse replacement.......................................................16-5 Curved EBL use with Autopilot FAP-2000 .........................................................29-11 thruster window............................................................................................................ 17-3 former vector system format files..................................................................... 19-9 Hot keys..................................... 19-15 D Danger target log conditions for..............30-40 use with Autopilot PT-500A ........................ 19-9 E EBL operation .........................................................................29-4 speed window . 19-13 source .....................24-11 creating a user chart from.................................................................................................................... 19-13 source ................................ 30-11 GOTO waypoint mode Autopilot FAP-2000.....................................................24-12 resetting ..19-27 Details log backup copy...........................................27-3 ECDIS and.... 29-8.. ............................. 23-10 clear............... 10-24 manual update editor.................... 9-39 P Palette.......................................... 27-3 menus for setting.... editing position .............. 15-6 Mouse functions area ....................... 19-18 automatic route steering with.. 23-5 bearing error compensation ........................................................................................................................... 19-19 alignment resetting........................... 16-9 other data of..... ship ................... 23-6 echo average..................................... 16-9 modes .... 16-6 record deletion .. editing..................................... 3-4 Paper charts...34-1............... inserting using......................................................................................................................... 19-18 use of ......................................................................................................................................... 19-17 planning mode...................... 27-4 ship ................................................ 10-5 orange symbols.................................................... 16-5 view record page .......................................................................................................... 27-7 Orientation ... 19-4 Power On/Off...... 16-8 creating.............................................................................................................................................. 27-1 navigation....................................................... 16-8 data record modification ........................................................................................ 12-1 Other page........... route ............ 10-15 chart objects... 9-15 new raster charts by chart permit ............... choosing ........................ 9-45 MOB............. 16-10 using......................... 16-10 record importation...... 10-4 manually updated chart objects properties.. 19-7 primary and secondary........................ 19-21 indication of source....... 27-2 Processor unit................................................................................................................................... 10-22 chart objects................................................................................... 10-4 symbols to use...................................................................................................................................... 15-9 Position alignment by ECDIS......................... 27-2 set time ........... inserting as ............................................................................................................................................................... 24-9 navigation parameters ................................... 22-1 Notes adding........ 19-8 recording ............... 23-6 error sources...................................... 9-10 Plan Notes dialog box ............................................... 3-1 Mouse operations alphanumeric data entry ............................................................................................................... 10-7 planning...... 23-7 echo stretch .............................................. 24-1 Monitor Notes dialog box current record page.......................... 10-9 orange symbols............. 10-13 chart objects................................ 24-10 logs......... 15-7 Point page........................................ 32-36 Autopilot PT-500A .... 10-12 Mariner page .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27-4 navigation........................................................................... editing..................... 23-6 echo overload ......................................... changing ................................................................. 15-11 Loading chart permits for ARCS navigator license .......... 12-2 Navigation parameters route ................................. 1-4 M Maintenance ................ 16-2 monitoring mode .......... 19-2 NAVTEX ......................................................................................................................... 1-4 Power switch control unit RCU-018................................................................... 9-19 O Optimization parameters............................ 16-10 R Radar overlay activating................ 10-8 orange symbols..................... 27-7 printing.................. 4-7 menu and function activation........................................... 23-5 ................................ 24-6 Position discrepancy alert ................ changing................................................................................................................. 16-4 Notes record position......................................... control unit RCU-015 ...................................................................... 10-2 true symbols and manual update editor ....... 1-4 Predictor Autopilot FAP-2000 .... raster charts (ARCS)............. 1-4 processor unit ............. modifying...... 9-18 raster charts.................................................................................... 4-6 scrollwheel ................. 27-4 Navigation sensors . inserting new. 16-6 user charts .......... 9-14 chart permits for ARCS skipper license ................................................ 30-43 Autopilot PR-6000............................................. 23-9 gain........................................ 7-1 Parallel index lines..................................... 12-5 Parameters installation............................... 16-5 Monitoring mode Notes ............ 16-3 L Line page...................... 16-7 Planning mode Notes ..... 10-14 chart viewing dates........... manually .......In e K Kalman filter alert.......................................................... replacing with ECDIS charts................................. 19-9 Position page........................................................................................... 34-2 Manual updates chart object position............. 13-9 Permanent messages.............................. deleting ...... 27-4 optimization .......... 16-4 user charts ............................................ deleting ................... 9-17 raster charts by active group ......................................... 10-21 orange symbols.... 4-8 N Navigation marks .................... controlling.......................... 23-6 echo averaging ................................. 31-27 Printing font size for logs........................ 23-2 adjusting.................... 27-2 Parameters page .... 19-6 raster charts ...... 4-10 parts of mouse ........... 10-3 history of manual updates .................................... ...................................................................................... 13-4 geometry check ............................................................23-5 transparency....................23-1 LAN............................ 13-18 waypoint addition at end of existing route............................9-39 T&P notices........................13-9........ 14-4 TO waypoint.........9-14 ARCS skipper............................9-14 chart permits..9-33 chart activation by position ...9-30 loading update loading....................9-22 manual loading ....................................................... 13-22 prepare page ........................................... manual...................9-11 chart page ........9-37 chart permits for ARCS navigator license.................................9-12 ARCS navigator chart permit loading...............................................................23-3 rain clutter.......23-6 position error compensation ............... displaying...........................9-42 SDD ................................................... updating by ..... manual ........23-6 introduction ...................9-35 chart datum..................................................................9-15 browsing charts ................................................................................................10-2 mariner page ................. 13-7 check page ........... choosing ..............................................................23-10 radar overlay card............................................9-27 ARCS chart loading by active group ...............................................................................................................................................9-39 permanent messages...................9-12 ARCS skipper chart permit loading .......9-4 standard page...... 13-15 waypoint import .............................................................AP-87 route restoration from ASCII file.............9-7 details...........................................................................................9-23 chart menu ............................................ specifying amount ................................................................ changing ......................... 17-5 importing from Excel ...............................................9-42 cursor position in local datum ........ 13-19 Route sidebar...... saving route as ...........................................................................9-12 ARCS navigator ........AP-88 former vector system format route................................................9-47 chart features........... 13-6 WPT report........... 13-5 other waypoint data in existing route.............. 19-9 Route monitoring alerts ............................................ 24-4 Reference point .........................................9-21 ARCS catalogue ...................9-37 chart group removal by active group ...........................................................................................................................9-30 controlling navigation features..................................... 9-8 WGS shift... 17-5 former vector system format routes....................................................................... 14-3 route assistant .................. 12-4 ROT alert........................................ 13-14 waypoint position in existing route.............................................. 13-9 passage plan report... 13-8 choosing datum ... loading........................................9-33 chart choice............................................................. 17-6 ........AP-89 restoring................................................................... 9-5 WGS shift value ...9-33 raster chart updating by permit ...........................................................................9-10 range .................. 13-2 new route .9-31 chart legend ........................... 17-6 exporting to Excel ...........................9-30 active group..........................................9-17 notes for...............9-28 ARCS chart group.................................................23-8 Range....................................... 13-14 waypoint deletion ... 24-4 danger targets log ...................... 13-15 waypoint insertion in existing route.. 24-1 MOB....9-1 chart load and update history ......................................................................................................................................................... 24-6 voyage log ...................................................................................................................... displaying .............................................. loading .................... 9-9 Recording chart usage log..9-25 ARCS chart addition to group............................................................................................................................ 24-1 position ........................................... 14-5 route to monitor............ 13-11 waypoint processing......................................................................9-2 targets page................................9-4 other page .............. 14-7 final waypoint...9-19 manual updates.9-18 ARCS chart removal from a group ..In e interference rejector.......................................................9-29 ARCS details page ..... changing .............. 13-17 main menu for ......................... choosing....................................9-43 update status ....................................... 14-1 route............................................................. removing...................................................... 14-2 waypoint information .. 9-24 WGS shift of current chart ...23-3 modes............................. 13-10 route optimization .... 24-8 conditions for voyage logging.....................................................................................................................9-33 Raster charts (ARCS) active group.......... 24-7 details log ........................................................................................... 24-2 event ............................................................9-16 chart removal from system....................................... controlling...... 24-9 conditions for danger target logging ................................................ 14-12 description .........................................23-5 source.................................................................................................................................................................. 3-8 Routes ASCII file............... 19-13 source ..................................................................................................... 9-42 Route planning alerts page.23-4 noise...........................9-32 chart display features....................... saving............................................................9-20 route page ..................................9-45 new ARCS chart loading by chart permit ............ 24-3 voyage log reset......................................9-44 tracking page ...................................................9-36 chart center ........................................ 13-21 WPT table report ..................9-32 group removal ........................9-2 displaying ........ 14-3 Route page.......................................................... choosing ..... creating .....................................9-40 ARCS license information ................................ 13-14 parameters page........................ manual ..........................23-6 sea clutter.................................... ................. 3-6 docking sidebar ............................................................................................................................................................. 16-5 Voyage log backup copy ................................................... 4-9 SENC conversion cell status window initiation .................. saving......................................................... 15-17 modes ............................... 17-5 joining .................................................................................................................. 3-7 description........................................................................................................................ 15-16 creating.......................................................... AP-21 Safety message (AIS) creating... 15-15 object deletion.......................... 15-16 objects used in..................... 18-9 right as master ............ 18-6 usage rights ........................................................................................... 15-14 object addition...................... 34-3 TT CPA...................... loading.......................... 24-12 viewing...................................................................................................... 6-9 Troubleshooting ........................................................... 20-1 displaying target data ................... 3-9 chart legend sidebar ............................................................................................ 15-12 User charts area deletion ............................. 15-6 displaying...... 19-13 source ...... 24-4 creating a user chart from ...................... 15-16 reports ................................................................................................................................................. 19-24 Workstations harmonizing ............... 15-20 user chart dialog box..... 3-9 route sidebar................................... 15-17 object modification ...................................................................................................... 15-10 System configuration multiple workstations.................. 17-5 former vector system format files................... 18-4 mode.......... 18-8 Sensors dialog box other page.......................... 15-13 line page . 21-14 Targets page raster charts ................. 24-3 VRM operation ................................................................................................................ 15-7 position of corner point......................... 9-9 value............... 9-44 Tidal page....................................... 24-11 conditions for .................................................................................. 1-4 Source data diagram (SDD) ....... 15-3 T T&P notices.......................................................... 20-7 saving past target track..................................... 9-8 Wind sensor ................ 7-4 View record page ...... 24-15 Trip counter reset ............................................................................................................. 15-12 Time setting....................... 8-101 ENC coverage indication ... 19-4 Sensors for navigation............................................................ 21-19 replying to ............................................... 8-101 Sensor source for system ..................................................................................... 9-4 Speed alert........................................ 20-5 interface-related alerts................................................................................ 15-18 former vector system format charts....................................... 24-4.. 24-12 datum................................... 18-5 multi or slave ................................................ 15-14 changing objects .................................................................. 9-5 specifying................. 15-2 monitoring mode..................................... 24-12 resetting............................ 1-3 single workstation ..... 19-9 Speed/course page................... 9-43 Trip counter........................................................................................................................................................ 21-20 Scrollwheel wheel incrementing direction.............................................. 19-6 speed/course page .......... 20-6 lost target............... 12-2 W WGS shift raster charts ...................................................... 1-2 U Usage rights master................. 3-8 Software version no............................................................................................................................................... 15-1 planning mode............................. 19-2 Standard page................................. 3-9 content of........................ 15-6 new area....... 18-5 ........................ 5-1 Symbol page................................................ 18-5 right as multi or slave.............................. 15-14 area import .............. 15-15 area modification ............................................................................................... 20-2 displaying on ECDIS .................................................................................................................................... 9-39 Standby mode....................................................................... 15-8 creating from a log ............ 18-7 User chart dialog box...... 15-16 object import ................................................ ......................................In e S S57 chart description......................................... 9-2 Target dialog box .... 24-8 source of tracked target ...................................................................................... 19-23 Sidebar autopilot sidebar................. 15-9 symbol page ..................................................................................................... adding .................. 20-2 dangerous target ................................ 27-2 Tracking page raster charts ........ 21-17 reading.......................... 15-3 area page ............ 15-14 position of object ............. 20-6 V Vector charts (S57) cell status window to initiate SENC conversion............................... 15-11 point page.......................................................................................................... 19-2 Ship and route parameters dialog box..........19-2................................................................................................. 20-3 past positions................................................................................ 15-10 tidal page......................................................... TCPA. 18-6 plan.
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.